Press Alt + R to read the document text or Alt + P to download or print.

No preview available

The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About168787 GOLDEN TRIANGLE CONSTRUCTION - CONTRACT - BID - 5748 GARDENS ON SPRING CREEK (2)SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR GARDENS ON SPRING CREEK EDUCATION WING BID NO.5748 SEPTEMBER 2003 SECTION 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00660 Consent of Surety 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate SECTION 00900 ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT 00950Contract Change Order 00960Application for Payment 9/99 SECTION 00950 CHANGE ORDER NO. PROJECT TITLE: GARDENS ON SPRING CREEK; BID NO. 5748 CONTRACTOR: PROJECT NUMBER: DESCRIPTION: 1. Reason for change: 2. Description of Change: 3. Change in Contract Cost 4. Change in Contract Time: UK1b1NAL UUNTRACT COST TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDER TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDER TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER TOTAL a OF THIS CHANGE ORDER TOTAL C.O.o OF ORIGNINAL CONTRACT ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST (Assuming all change orders approved ACCEPTED BY: Contractor's Representative ACCEPTED BY: Project Manager REVIEWED BY: Title: APPROVED BY: Title: APPROVED BY: Purchasing Agent over $30,000 cc: City Clerk Contractor Project File Architect Engineer Purchasing 9/99 $ .00 0.00 0.00 0.00 $ 0.00 DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE: Section 00950 Page 1 Section 00960 Application for Payment Insert pages 1 - 4 9/99 Section 00950 Page 2 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROJECT: PAY ESTIMATE h DATE: CONTRACTOR:_ ADDRESS: CONTRACT FOR: PARTIAL TO The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of his knowledge, information and belief the work covered by this application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all accounts have been paid by him for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received, in this current payment shown herein is now due. CONTRACTOR: By: Date: Application is made attached. PO# FINAL TO In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on site observations and the data comprising the above application, the Architects Certifies to the Owner that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that the best of his knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. ENGINEER: By: Date: Payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract. Schedule of Values is The present status of the account for this Contract is as follows: ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT APPROVED CHANGE ORDERS TO DATE ADJUSTED CONTRACT AMOUNT TOTAL WORK COMPLETED AND MATERIALS USED RETAINAGE (10% OF TOTAL) TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE LIQUIDATED DAMAGES WITHHELD TOTAL EARNED LESS LIQUIDATED DAMAGES LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS CURRENT PAYMENT DUE APPROVED BY (Title) cc: Accounting City Clerk Contractor Engineer Project File mo WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE No. DATE OF ISSUANCE EFFECTIVE DATE OWNER CONTRACTOR Contract: Project: OWNER's Contract No. ENGINEER's Project No. You are directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Description: Purpose of Work Change Directive: Attachments: (List documents supporting change) If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believe that the above change has affected Contract Price any Claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one or more of the following methods as defined in the Contract Documents. Method of determining change in Contract Price: Unit Prices Lump Sum Cost of the Work Estimated increase (decrease) to Contract Price: Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract $ Times: If the change involves an increase, the estimated Substantial Completion: days; amount is not to be exceeded without further Ready for final payment: days. authorization. RECOMMENDED: AUTHORIZED: ENGINEER OWNER By: By. EJCDC No. 1910-8-F (1996 Edition) Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee and endorsed by The Associated General Contractor. of America and the Construction Specifications Institute. WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE INSTRUCTIONS A. GENERAL INFORMATION This document was developed for use in situations involving changes in the Work Which, if not processed expeditiously, might delay the Project. 'lliese changes are often initiated in the field and may affect the Conti -act Price or the Contract Times. This is not a Change Order, but only a directive to proceed with Work that may be included in a subsequent Change Order. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times a Field Order should be used, B. COMPLETING THE WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE FORM Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the items involved and attachments. Based on conversations between Engineer and Contractor, Engineer completes the following: METHOD Oh DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT PRICE: Mark the method to be used in determining the final cost of Work involved and the estimated net effect or, the Contract Price. If the change involves an increase in the Contract Price and the estimated amount is approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive must be issued to change the estimated price or Contractor may stop the changed Work when the estimated time is reached. If the Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Price, the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked "Not Applicable". Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, ail copies should be sent to Owner for authorization because Engineer alone does not have authority to authorize changes in Price or "Times, Once authorized by Owner, a copy should be sent by Engineer to Contractor. Price and Times may only be changed by Change Order signed by Owner and Contractor with Engineer's recommendation. Paragraph 10.03.A.2 of the General Conditions requires that a Change Order be initiated and processed to cover any undisputed sun) or amount of time for Work actually performed pursuant to this Work Change Directive, Once the Work covered by this directive is completed or final cost and times are determined, Contractor should submit documentation for inclusion in a Change Order, THIS IS A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH A CHANGE THAT MAY AFFECT THE, CONTRACT PRICE OR CONTRACT TIMES. A CHANGE ORDER, IF ANY, SHOULD BE CONSIDERFI) PROMPTLY, Advancement of Construction Technology REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION Project: R.F.I. Number: To: From: Date: A/E Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Section: Paragraph: Drawing Reference: Detail: Request: Signed by: Date: Response: ❑ Attachments Response From: To: Date Rec'd: Date Ret0d: Signed by: Date: Copies: ❑ Owner ❑ Consultants ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ File Copyright 1994, Construction Specifications Institute, Page of July 1994 99 Canal Center- Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA 22314 CSI Form 13.2A IVAdvancement of Construction Technology Project: To: Re: Clarification Notice Number From: Date: A/E Project Number: ContractFor: CLARIFICATION NOTICE This Clarification Notice is issued for the purpose of clarifying the Contract Documents based on an interpretation reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, and therefore has no effect on the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with Work in accordance with this Clarification Notice indicates acceptance with no change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Specification Section: Paragraph: Drawing Reference: Detail: Description: ❑ Attachments Signed by: Copies: ❑ Owner ❑ Consultants ❑ 0 Copyright 1994, Construction Specifications Institute, Page of 99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA 22314 Date: ❑ ❑ ❑ File July 1994 CSI Fonn 13.3A IVAdvancement of Construction Technology Project: To: Re: Field Order Number From: Date: A/E Project Number: Contract For: FIELD ORDER You are hereby directed to execute promptly this Field Order which interprets the Contract Documents or orders minor changes in the Work without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. If you consider that a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time is required, submit a Change Order Request to the A/E immediately and prior to proceeding with this Work. Specification Section: Paragraph: Description of Interpretation or Change: ❑ Attachments Signed by: Drawing Reference: Detail: Date: Copies: ❑ Owner ❑ Consultants ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ File Copyright 1994, Construction Specification Institute, Page of July 1994 99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA 22314 CSI Forrn HAA Table of Contents I)ivieinn --- ----.Section Title_...............................................................................................................................................Page DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100............. SUMMARY.................................................................................., 01140............. WORK RESTRICTIONS..............................................................., 01230............. ALTERNATES.............................................................................., 01250............. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES .......................... 01270............. UNIT PRICES.............................................................................. 01290............. PAYMENT PROCEDURES......................................................... 01310............. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION .................. 01320............. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ................. 01330............. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES...................................................... 01400............. QUALITYREQUIREMENTS............................... ............... ......... 01420............. REFERENCES ............................................................................. 01500............. TEMPORARYFACILITIESAND CONTROLS ............................ 01600............. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS..................................................... 01700............. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS................................................. 01770 CLOSEOUTPROCEDURES .................................................................................................................................... . DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 02080............. PIPED UTILITIES .......................................................................................... ............................................. 13 02230............. SITE CLEARING ......................................................................................................................................... 4 02231............. TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING...................................................................................................... 3 02240............. DEWATERING............................................................................................ ................................................ 4 02260............. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION.......................................................................................... 4 02300............. EARTHWORK. ............................................. ......................... ....................................................................... 13 02510............. WATER DISTRIBUTION............................................................................................................................. 1 02530............. SANITARY SEWERAGE.............................................................................................................................. 1 02582............. LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS ...................................................................................................... 5 02630............. STORMDRAINAGE................. .................................................. .......................... ....................................... I 02741............. HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING.................................................................................................................... I 02751............. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT........................................................................................................... 1 02764............. PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS.................................................................................................................. 4 02780............. UNIT PAVERS............................................................................................................................................. 7 02810............. IRRIGATION...............................................................................................................................................19 02820............. PREFABRICATED BUILDING ............ ....................................................................................................... 8 02840............. PUMP SYSTEM INTAKE............................................................................................................................ 7 02870............. SITE FURNISHINGS ................................................................................................................................... 2 02900............. LANDSCAPE TREESAND SHRUBS .......................................................................................................... 8 02940............. SEEDING ............... ...................................................................................................................................... 6 02970............. PLANTING MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................................2 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300............. CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE ..................................................................................................................... 20 DIVISION 4 -MASONRY 04810............. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES .................................................................................................................. 18 04815............. GLASS UNIT MASONRYASSEMBLIES ..................................................................................................... 7 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120............. STRUCTURAL STEEL ............ ..................................................................................................................... 7 05500............. METAL FABRICATIONS ............................................................................................................................. 6 DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS 06100............. ROUGH CARPENTRY................................................................................................................................. 7 06176............. METAL -PLATE -CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES ......... ............................................................................ 7 06200............. FINISH CARPENTRY .................................................................................................................................. 3 Fort Collins Horticultural Center Table of Contents October, 2002 i un/25/ZUU3 xufv 10:53 FAX 303 776 6525 GTC 1� 002/002 AUG-25-2003 NON 09:23 AM THE LINDEN COMPANY FAX NO. 3037561576 p. 02 HRHe n7FNiwp aw Why August 25,2003 Mr. Steve Seefeld City of Ft. Collins 300 Laporte Ave, rt Collins Colorado 80522 Re: Golden Nangle Construction, Inc. Gardens on Spring Creek Project Dear Mr, Seefeld We will be pleased to provide the: City of Ft Collins a Performance and Payment bond. from Bolden Triangle on the above captioned project in the amount of $95,093.00, Pleas issue them a cwtract and we will execute the necessary bonds immediately. Please don't hesitate to contact me if you have any questions, Sincerely, MDb, Royal and Hamlltan CompanyMA4` (if CUlrnotlo 4-r s S, Rosulek ice President AIN C. M,xaiaxippi Avn, :;,,lip sun rci 303 7Sti$IUo Fax 303-751; 1100 w"_i,ddi.com DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07160............. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING.............................................................................................................. 3 07190............. WATER REPELLENTS................................................................................................................................ 6 07210............. BUILDING INSULATION...........................................................................................................................5 07411............. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS AND TRLU ........................................................................................ 5 07531............. EPDMMEMBRANE ROOFING.................................................................................................................. 10 -" 07620............. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM..................................................................................................... 4 07720............. ROOFACCESSORIES...................................................................... .......................................................... 4 07920............. JOINT SEALANTS.......................................................................................................................................8 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110............. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES................................................................................................................... 5 08211............. FLUSH WOOD DOORS.............................................................................................................................. 4 08361............. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS ............................................................................................................. 08411............. ALUMINUMENTRANCESAND STOREFRONTS..................................................................................... 7 08550............. WOOD WINDOWS ...................................................................................................................................... 8 08711............. DOOR HARDWARE................................................................................................................................... 7 08800............. GLAZING ................................................................................................................................ ..................... 10 -, DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09260............. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ................................................................................................................ 11 - 09310............. CERAMIC TILE ........................................................................................................................................... 6 09512.............ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS .............................................................................................................. 09653............. RESILIENT WALL BASEAND ACCESSORIES.......................................................................................... 4 09681............. CARPET TILE ............................................................................................................................................. 6 09911............. PAINTING ............................................................................................................................. ...................... 8 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10155............. TOILET COMPARTMENTS........................................................................................................................ 4 _ 10505............. METAL LOCKERS ...................................................................................................................................... 6 10520............. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES ..................................................... ...................................................... 4 10801............. TOILET AND BA THACCESSORIES.......................................................................................................... 3 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12345............. PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK ............................................................................................................ 4 12484FLOOR MATSAND FRAMES ..................................................................................................................... 4 _ ............. 12494............. ROLLER SHADES ................................................ ........................... ............................................................ 6 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13134............. GLAZED STRUCTURE BUILDING SYSTEMS ........................................................................................... 8 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS .......................................... .......................................................... 11 ............. 15050MATERLALSAND METHODS...........................................................................................I........................17 ^ ............. 15250MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION..................................................................................... ............... 6 ............. 15300FIRE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................... 4 ............. 15440PLUMBING .................................................................................................................. ........ - ..................... 10 ............. 15850VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING...............................................................................................10 ............. 15950AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ................................................................................................ 12 ............. 15990............. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING...............................................................................................3 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALSAND METHODS ....................................................................... .......... 10 ............. 16060GROUNDING AND BONDING .............................................................................................................. ..... 5 ............. 16070............. FIRESTOPPING.................................................................................................................................. ........ 11 16140WIRING DEVICES .... .................................................................................................................................. 4 ............. 16145LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES ................ ............................................................................................... 6 ............. 16410ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BRE4KERS ................................................................................ 4 ............. 16442............. PANELBOARDS .......................................................................................................................................... 5 .. Fort Collins Horticultural Center Table of Contents October, 2002 h 16478............. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION .................................................................................................... 3 16491............. FUSES .......................................................................... ............................................................................... 3 16511.............INTERIOR LIGHTING ................................................................................................................................ 6 16521............. EXTERIOR LIGHTING ................................................................................................................................ 5 16851............. FIRE ALARM.........:.....................................................................................................................................11 Fort Collins Horticultural Center Table of Contents October, 2002 iif DIVISION 1 01100 — Summary 01140 — Work Restrictions 01230 — Alternates 01250 — Contract Modification Procedures 01270 — Unit Prices 01290 — Payment Procedures 01310 — Project Management and Coordination 01320 — Construction Progress Documentation 01330 — Submittal Procedures 01400 — Quality Requirements 01420 — References 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls 01600 — Product Requirements 01700 — Execution Requirements 01770 — Closeout Procedures SECTION 0110 — summary Part 1-general 1.1 related documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project consists of the construction of an Education Wing Addition, of approximately 865 square feet floor space, to the greenhouse/administration building of the Gardens on Spring Creek. 1. Project Location: On the west side of Centre Avenue just south of Spring Creek. 2. Owner: City of Fort Collins B. A/E Indentification: The Contract Specifications, dated October, 2002, were prepared for the Project by EDAW, Inc. 240 East Mountain Avenue, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524. Drawings for the education wing addition were drawn by: Pouppirts Architects, 425 W. Mulberry Avenue, Fort Collins, Colorado 80521. C. Operations Services Facilities Project Manager: Steve Seefeld, CCCA has been appointed by Owner to serve as City's Project Coordinator. All project communications, regarding the Owner, shall be made through the City's Project Coordinator, unless otherwise noted. Mr. Seefeld can be contacted at (970)221- 6227. D. A/E: Stands for Architect/Engineer. All communications with the A/E shall be made through Rande Pouppirt, AIA, Pouppirt Architects at (307)778-8236. 1.3 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract with a single prime contractor for a lump sum price. 1.4 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. The Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Separate Contract: Owner reserves the right to award a separate contract for performance of certain construction operations at Project site. 01100-1 B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this -- Contract. 1.6 WORK PERFORMED BY OWNER (during the contract period) A. The owner will perform some irrigation work. B. The owner will plant trees, shrubs, ground covers, perennials and annuals. 1.7 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE A. This Article is an example of a requirement best described in this Section. Delete if Owner does not order products or equipment in advance. See evaluations for discussion on materials purchased or ordered in advance. B. General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner has assigned these Purchase Orders to Contractor. Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are included in the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's responsibilities are the same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase Orders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase Order agreements. 2. The Schedule of Products Ordered in Advance is included at the end of this Section. - 1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS r A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project �. Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 01100- 2 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "Shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (O is used within a sentence or phase. 01100-3 SECTION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary _ Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to the limits of work delineated on the plans. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site for limited uses. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. -, b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install -- equipment in completed areas of site, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. A/E will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01140 01140-1 SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 01230-1 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. - B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. A/E will issue through Owner supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on an approved form ~ ~ provide by the owner. 11 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests owner will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Owner are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time - necessary to execute the change. _ a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 01250-1 B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Owner. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: An approved form provided by the owner. D. Proposal Request Form: For Change Order proposals, use forms provided by Owner. Sample copies are included at end of this Section. 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work -in -place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit -cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work -in -place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower - priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 01250-2 SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that 34BCSBY7608 (Firm)GOLDEN TRIANGLE CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Address) 700 Weaver Park Road, Longmont, Colorado 80501 (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and (Firm)HARTFORD ACCIDENT AND INDEMNITY COMPANY (Address) Hartford, Connecticut. hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER", in the penal sum' of ONE MILLION FIVE HUNDRED* in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the loth day of January 2003, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins project, ON SPRING CREEK; BID NO. 5748. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. * FORTY THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED SIXTY EIGHT AND NO/100 ($1,540,968.00) 7/96 Section 00610 Page 1 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Owner will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on an approved form 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive on an approved form provided by the owner. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 01250-3 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 0�3805i18jr.1% 1 A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Owner through the A1E the at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. 01290-1 B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of A/E. c. A/E's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. — e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line -item value of unit -cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 01290-2 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by A/E, Owner and paid for by Owner. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the 15th day of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends 15 days before the date for each progress payment. D. Payment Application Forms: Use an approved form provided by the owner for Applications for Payment. E. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included at end of this Section. F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Owner will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. G. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to A/E by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 01290-3 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. _ 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of fast Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. _ 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. _ 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. L. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 01290-4 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. an approved form provided by the owner for "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. An approved form provided by the owner for "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. An approved form provided by the owner for "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 01290-5 SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Ju u A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on -` Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination Drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 01310-1 B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1.Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre -installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1.Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL 01310-2 A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise -- indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and A/E of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and A/E, within 3 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and A/E, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner and A/E, and their consultants; _ Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. _ 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. —z b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. _ h. Submittal procedures. i. Preparation of Record Documents. j. Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 1. Parking availability. In. Office, work, and storage areas. n. Equipment deliveries and priorities. o. First aid. p. Security. q. Progress cleaning. r. Working hours. 01310-3 '— C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise A/E and Owner of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. 1. Manufacturer's written recommendations. M. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. S. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Required performance results. U. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and A/E, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, 01310-4 PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this 17th day of January 20�. IN PRESENCE OF: ATTEST:_` B Lynn J.\Clark/Assistant Secretary (Corporate Seal) IN PRESENCE OF: Not Applicable Principal GOLDEN TRIANGLE CONSTRUCTION, INC. BY: Jeff Nading resident { (Title) 700 Weaver Park Road, Longmont, Colorado 80501 (Address) Other Partners By: Not Applicable By: IN PRWPhilips OF: Surety HARTFORD ACCIDENT AND INDEMNITY COMPANY WITNE BY:By. Salli i9 Su san. J. Latt4rulo, Attorney -in -Fact Denver, Colorado 5= P. 0. Box 469025, Denver, Colorado 80246 (Address) (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. � r HRH Insuring the Way Hilb, Rogal and Hamilton Company of Denver P.O. Box 469025 Denver, CO 80246-9025 Tel 303-722-7776 • Fax 303-722-8862 Surety bonds and insurance 7/96 Section 00610 Page 2 in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to _ do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off -site fabrication. 6) Access. _ 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue - revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 01310-5 SECTION 01320 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. 8. Construction photographs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule that consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started. 01320 -1 B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the _ early start of the following activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. 1.4 SUBMrfTALS — A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of A/Es and owners, and other information specified. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit Three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for A/E's and Owner's final release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible media, and one a print. 01320 -2 "" D. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible media, and one a print; large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible print and one a blue- or black -line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on 3 1/2 inch floppy disc with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. F. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three printed copies of each of the following computer -generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the Work until most recent Application for Payment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner -furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 01320 -3 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary network diagram. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time — for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. — 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. 01320 -4 C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by A/E. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for A/E's and Owner's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Owner -Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. 01320 -5 h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. — k. Curing. 1. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 8. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. C. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, interim milestones indicated below, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. 1. Relocation of the Sherwood Ditch 2. Setting of the Concrete Box Culvert 3. Completion of Concrete Headwall Pour 4. Closing of Spring Creek Trail/Opening of Spring Creek Trail Detour 5. Opening of Spring Creek Trail F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its ^ submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to — manage construction schedules. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar -chart -type construction schedule within _ seven days of date established for Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 01320 -6 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart -type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 7 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity -on -node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis diagram. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 7 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Purchase of materials. C. Delivery. d. Fabrication. 01320 -7 E. F e. Installation. 2. Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer -drawn, time -scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 3. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start -total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values). Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and 'cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 01320 -8 2.6 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Log: Prepare a daily construction log recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 5. Accidents. 6. Meetings and significant decisions. 7. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 9. Meter readings and similar recordings. 10. Emergency procedures. 11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 12. Change Orders received and implemented. 13. Construction Change Directives received. 14. Services connected and disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial Completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.7 SPECIAL REPORTS, A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 01320 -9 SECTION 00615 PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Firm) GOLDEN TRIANGLE CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Address) 700 Weaver Park Road, Longmont, Colorado (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), "Principal" and (Firm) HARTFORD ACCIDENT AND INDEMNITY COMPANY (Address) Hartford, Connecticut Bond No. 34BCSBY8608 80501 hereinafter referred to as the hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of ONE MILLION FIVE HUNDRED FORTY* in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the loth day of January 20-0, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins project, GARDENS ON SPRING CREEK; BID NO. 5748. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. * THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED SIXTY EIGHT AND NO/100 ($1,540,968.00) 7/96 Section 00615 Page 1 1. In -House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to A/E, Owner, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 01320 -10 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and construction photographs 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and Delegated -Design Submittals. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties, Project Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires A/E's and Owner's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require A/E's and Owner's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by A/E for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 01330-1 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. A/E and Owner reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as _ follows. Time for review shall commence on receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Owner will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by A/E's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. 3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to A/E's consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal to -- A/E and Owner. Submittal will be returned to Owner, through A/E, before being returned to Contractor. 4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Allow 4 days for processing each re -submittal 6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by A/E and Owner. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of A/E and Owner. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. 01330-2 _ G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless A/E or Owner observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to A/E and Owner. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. A/E and Owner will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by A/E and Owner on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. 4. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by A/E and Owner in connection with construction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 01330-3 C. 1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. A/E through Owner will return two copies. Mark up and retain two returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated: a. Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. A/E, through the Owner will return submittal with options selected. b. Final Submittal: Submit four copies, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. A/E and Construction Manaer will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. 1. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. in. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. C. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. wiring, including power, signal, and 01330-4 h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. 1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 4. Number of Copies: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and five copies of each submittal. A/E, through Owner, will return the reproducible print and two copies to the Contractor. a. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one copy. A/E, through Owner, will return the reproducible print. b. Initial Submittal: Submit three copies. A/E, through Owner will return one print. C. Final Submittal: Submit four copies, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. AT and Owner will retain two prints; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing. D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match A/E's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. 5. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, provide the following: a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. 01330-5 C. Availability. d. Delivery time. 6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from -. manufacturer's product line. A/E, through the Owner will return submittal with options selected. 8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. A/E and Owner will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time 1-7 of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: _ l . Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. G. Delegated -Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." I H. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply. with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Owner's action. I. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." 01330-6 J. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." K. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." L. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. A/E and Owner will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of A/Es and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of finis and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. 01330-7 H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements. K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. ^ L. fField Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements. M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. N. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures". P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, 'including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version, of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a 01330-8 product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: I . Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. S. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. T. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "[Construction Progress Documentation". U. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to A/E, A/E will not review this information but will return it with no action taken. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to A/E and Owner. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents, 3.2 A/E'S AND OWNER'S ACTION 01330-9 PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates. and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms' Of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this 17th day of January 20 03. , IN PRESENCE OF: Principal ATTEST:, GOLDEN TRIANGLE CONSTRUCTION, INC. By: --- Lynn J. c4ark/Assistant Secretary Jeff ad President 1 (Title) 700 Weaver Park Road, Longmont, Colorado 80501 (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners Not Applicable Not AQQlecab1 IN PRESEN9f OFF Surety HARTFORD ACCIDENT AND INDEMNITY COMPANY WITNESS• BY : — By:__ _ Ol /ll Salle PhillipsSusan J. Lat rulo, Attorney -in -Fact Denver Colorado NYX P. 0. Box 469025 Denver2 Colorado 80246 (Surety Seal) (Address) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. HRH of Bogal and Hamilton Company of Denver P.O. Box 469025 Insuring the Way Denver, CO 80246-9025 Tel 303-722-7776 • Fax 303-722-8862 Surety bonds and insurance 7/96 Section 00615 Page 2 A. General: A/E and Owner will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: A/E and Owner will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. A/E and Owner will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: C. Informational Submittals: A/E and Owner will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. A/E and Owner will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 01330-10 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by A/E, City's Project Coordinator, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by A/E or Owner. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects 01400-1 D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to A/E. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need: 1. City of Fort Collins, Storm Drainage Construction Standards 2. City of Fort Collins, Design and Construction Criteria, Standards and Specifications for Streets, Sidewalks, Alleys and other Public Ways 3. City of Fort Collins, Street Repair and Reconstruction Standards and Guidelines 4. City of Fort Collins, Work Area Traffic Control Handbook 5. Standard Construction Specifications for the Fort Collins -Loveland Water District 6. Standard Construction Specifications for the South Fort Collins Sanitation District 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. ^' 01400-2 "' 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality -control service. D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Proj ect. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed 01400-3 for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities that are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade -union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. H. Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate capability of product to comply with performance requirements. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. C. Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same tasks for Project. - d. When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -assurance service to A/E, through the Owner, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by A/E or Owner. 2. Notify A/E and Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain A/E's and Owner's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 1.8 QUALITY CONTROL 01400-4 A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. 1. Testing agency will notify A/E, Owner, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service to A/E, through Owner, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. 01400-5 F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with A/E, Owner, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify A/E, Owner, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. —' 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field -curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and quality -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, A/E, Owner, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES 01400-6 A. Testing agencies to be approved by Owner. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 01400 01400-7 No Text SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey A/E's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to A/E's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by A/E. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," noted, scheduled, and specified have the same meaning as indicated. E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. 01420-1 POWER OF ATTORNEY THE HARTFORD HARTFORD PLAZA U Hartford Fire Insurance Company Twin City Fire Insurance Company 0 Hartford Casualty Insurance Company Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois 0 Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest 0 Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT the Hartford Fire Insurance Company, Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company and Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company, corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut; Hartford Insurance Company of Illinois, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois; Hartford Casualty Insurance Company, Twin City Fire Insurance Company and Hartford Insurance Company of the Midwest, corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana; and Hartford Insurance Company of the Southeast, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Florida; having their home office in Hartford, Connecticut, (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "Companies') do hereby make, constitute and appoint, up to the amount of UNLIMITED: COURTNEY T. PETERSON, LEON B. DARTOIS, JAMES S. ROSULEK, J. R. RICHARDS, DOUGLAS J. ROTHEY, SUSAN J. LATTARULO, CYNTHIA M. BURNETT OF DENVER, COLORADO their true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety(ies) only as delineated above by ®, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof, on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof, and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on September 12th, 2000, the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by its Assistant Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Assistant Secretary. Further, pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies, the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney. r�� : � tiatwr"WiiV n s 4,i � }' �Jy«�""O �r•,"r � a,�,y � i ,RQr�w i fir•. =•� r`r Y•, .ra+P�`,. �ryM' � �: 107=l � 1070 �� '� 19T9 ,f ,k," `mil . (/ Paul A. Bergenholtz, Assistant Secretary STATE OFCO'NHECTICI T Hartford COUNTY OF HARTFORD John P. Hyland, Assistant Vice President On this 191h day of September, 2000, before me personally came John P. Hyland, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the County of Hartford, State of Connecticut; that he is the Assistant Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto by like authority. Jean H. Wozniak CE-IT1IFICATE NolaryPublic My Commission Expires June 30, 2004 I, the undersigned, Assistant Vice President of the Companies, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is still in full force effective as of January 17, 2003 Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford. s/�' •r✓ f r arwr,,.an gWyiyF_ I 7Y } is .t F. ..9 �.: » 0�r 1070:: � ��m 14J .ro �, -`r ri's � �. `-....•%ti F �s�•..._./�Cr ''? 2979 ,l,rVlf MV,JV• Colleen Mastroianni, Assistant Vice President 1.3 J. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. K. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to A/E for a decision before proceeding. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to A/E for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request. E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (800)872-2253 (202) 272-5434 01420-2 Available from Government Printing Office (888) 293-6498 www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr (202) 512-1530 FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Defense Automated Printing Service (215) 697-6257 //astimage.daps. dla.mil/online Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fed-specs.cftn Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board (800) 872-2253 www.access-board.gov (202) 272-5434 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 www.aluminum.org AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American A/Eural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aanianet.org AAN American Association of Nurserymen (See ANLA) AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.aashto.org 01420-3 ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org ADC Air Diffusion Council (312) 201-0101 www.flexibleduct.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (847) 934-8800 www.ahardbd.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 2884960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of A/Es (The) (202) 626-7300 www.e-A/E.com AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALA American Laminators Association (See LMA) ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 www.alca.org (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee (301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org 01420-4 ANLA American Nursery & Landscape Association (202) 789-2900 (Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen) www.anla.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (402) 476-3852 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA A/Eural Precast Association (941) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air -Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ASCA A/Eural Spray Coaters Association (609) 848-6120 www.ascassoc.com ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air -Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (212) 591-7722 International) www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (610) 832-9585 www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCMA) AWI A/Eural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 01420-5 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association (817) 326-6300 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.biftna.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CUSS Center for Cold -Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471 www.umr.edu/—ccfss CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 412-0900 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 (Formerly: National Particleboard Association) www.pbmdf com CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 01420-6 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.ersi.org CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-intemational.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA/TIA Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry (703) 907-7500 Association www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eifsfacts.com (770) 968-7945 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA) FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.finglobal.com GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com/gana GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute (215) 895-2343 www.drexel.edu/gri 01420-7 GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwWte.com IAS International Approval Services (See CSA International) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (508) 394-4424 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute (The) (703) 450-0116 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 4122 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IRI Industrial Risk Insurers (800) 243?8308 www.industriahisk.com (860) 520?7300 US Intertek Testing Services (800) 345-3851 www.itsglobal.com (607) 753-6711 IWS Insect Screening Weavers Association (Now defunct) LGSI Light Gage Structural Institute (972) 370-0967 01420-8 www.loseke.com LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 (Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association) www.Ima.org LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200 LSGA Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA) MCA Metal Construction Association (312) 201-0193 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of A/Eural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NAAMM North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers (See GANA) NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 (The) www.naima.org NAMI National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. (304) 258-5100 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 www.netaworld.org 01420-9 NFPA National Fire Protection Association (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-6372 www.nfra.org NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890 www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933?0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NPA National Particleboard Association (See CPA) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrea.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSA National Stone Association (800) 342-1415 www.aggregates.org (703) 525-8788 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf org PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (508) 230-3516 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 //pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (843) 689-6878 01420-10 www.sefalabftim.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association www.sigmaonline.org/sigma SJI Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org (315)646-2234 (312)644-6610 (843)626-1995 (561)533-0991 (703)803-2980 SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPUSPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry (202) 974-5200 www.plasticsindustry.org SPUSPFD The Society of the Plastics Industry Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (See SPFA) SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (312) 456-5590 (Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) www.ssnia.com SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (800) 837-8303 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swriontine.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tilcusa.com 01420-11 SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that 34BCSCM1853 (Firm)GOLDEN TRIANGLE CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Address) 700 Weaver Park Road, Longmont, Colorado 80501 (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and (Firm)HARTFORD ACCIDENT AND INDEMNITY COMPANY (Address) Hartford, Connecticut hereinafter, referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER", in the penal sum" of Ninety Five Thousand Ninety Three*in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the 10th day of January 2003, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins 2003 Gardens on Spring Creek/Educational Wing Addition - Bid No. 5748 Project, NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. * and 00/100 Dollars--($95,093.00) 7/96 Section 00610 Page 1 TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaoriline.org TPI Truss Plate Institute (608) 833-5900 TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 UFAC Upholstered Furniture Action Council (336) 885-5065 -, www.ufac.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 7044050 , www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 2444700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (800) 5064653 (Formerly: AWCMA - American Window Covering (212) 661-4261 Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org -� WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200 Door Association) www.wdma.com WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmtnpa.com (530) 661-9591 `- WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, .� telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. - BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (708) 799-2300 www.bocai.org - CABO Council of American Building Officials 01420-12 (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical (909) 595-8449 Officials (The) www.iapmo.org D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology www.Mst.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 (800)638-2772 (301)504-0990 (202)260-2090 (301)975-6478 (202)693-1999 01420-13 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facilities. 4. Heating and cooling facilities. 5. Ventilation. 6. Electric power service. 7. Lighting. 8. Telephone service. 9. Irrigation water conveyance for Sherwood Ditch. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: " 1. Temporary roads and paving. 2. Dewatering facilities and drains. 3. Project identification and temporary signs. .. 4. Waste disposal facilities. 5. Field offices. 6. Storage and fabrication sheds. 7. Lifts and hoists. 8. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. -� 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Pest control. 5. Site enclosure fence. 6. Security enclosure and lockup. 7. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 8. Temporary enclosures. _ 01500-1 '" 9. Fire protection. E. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 3. Division 2 Section "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site. 4. Division 2 Section "Termite Control" for pest control. 5. Division 2 Section "Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 6. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. 7. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.3 DEFMfflONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by A/E, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or A/E and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. A/E. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties engaged in construction, at Project site. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. 01500-2 B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and _ termination of each temporary utility. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. — 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by A/E. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Pavement: Comply with Division 2 Section "Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving." Section "Cement Concrete Pavement." pavement Sections. C. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch OD top and bottom rails. - Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts with two 40 lb. sand bag per post. 01500-3 D. Water: Potable. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Field Offices: Mobile units lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading. Field office shall provide a separate lockable room of no less that 64 Square Feet for Owner. 2. Field office shall provide an adequate meeting space for up to 10 people. C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. D. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. E. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap -dispenser, bottled -water drinking -water units, including paper cup supply. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 degrees Fahrenheit. F. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. G. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher -voltage outlets; equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. H. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 01500-4 A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked -in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. 1. Drinking -Water Facilities: Provide bottled -water, drinking -water units. a. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 degrees Fahrenheit. C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 degrees Fahrenheit for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. _ D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. E. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload -protected disconnecting means, automatic ground -fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. 01500-5 F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per 500 sq. ft. uniformly distributed, for general lighting, or equivalent illumination. 3. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet in traffic areas. 4. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per story in stairways and ladder runs, located to illuminate each landing and flight. 5. Install lighting for Project identification sign. G. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office and first -aid station. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office. C. Provide a separate telephone line for Owner's use. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. A/E's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide voice -mail service on superintendent's telephone. 4. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. 01500-6 B. Temporary Entry Road: Construct and maintain a temporary entry roads adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate temporary entry road as indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide a reasonably level, graded, well -drained subgrade of satisfactory soil material, compacted to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density in the top 6 inches 2. Provide gravel paving course of subbase material not less than 6 inches thick; roller compacted to a level, smooth, dense surface. 3. Provide dust -control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and — paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. D. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public — roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Traffic controls measure may be required by Owner for the crossing of the temporary road and the Spring Creek Trail. — E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed. — 3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with' Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. 2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on -site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. 01500-7 Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials. G. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a weekly basis for temporary offices, first -aid stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas. H. Common -Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 10 persons at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: a. Desk and four chairs, four -drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and bookcase. b. Water cooler. C. Coffee machine and supplies, including regular and decaffeinated coffee, filters, cups, stirring sticks, creamer, sugar, and sugar substitute. d. Provide a room of not less than 240 sq. ft. for Project meetings. Furnish room with conference table, 12 folding chairs, and 4-foot-square tack board. 2. Provide an electric heater with thermostat capable of maintaining a uniform indoor temperature of 68 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide an air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining an indoor temperature of 72 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. Provide I10- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced at not more than 12-foot intervals, 1 per wall in each room. I. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on -site. 1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire -retardant -treated lumber and plywood. 2. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior -grade acrylic -latex emulsion over exterior primer. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. 01500-8 PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this 14th day of,,. October 20M. , IN PRESENCE OF: 1_ Principal GOLDEN TRIANGLE CONSTRUCTION, INC. ATTEST: 1� \ BY: BY: Lynn-J. Clark, Asst. Secretary Jeff Nadin g, r sident (Title) (Corporate Seal) IN PRESENCE OF: Not Applicable 700 Weaver Park Road, Longmont, Colorado 80501 (Address) Other Partners By: Not Applicable By: IN PRESENCE OF: Surety HARTFORD ACCIDENT AND INDEMNITY COMPANY WITN�S BY : ( ' _ 9 QQV� By:. Elke E. Eriksen Cyn hia M. Burnett, Attorney -In -Fact Denver, Colorado 5= P. 0. Box 469025, Denver, Colorado 80246 (Address) (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. u� ■ . Hilb, Rogal and Hamilton Company y.7i(h of Colorado P.O. Box 469025 Insuring the Way Denver, CO 80246-9025 Tel 303-722-7776 • Fax 303-722-8862 Surety bonds and insurance 7/96 Section 00610 Page 2 C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming." E. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest -control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest -control service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with -' load -bearing, wood -framed construction. 4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire -retardant -treated wood framing and other materials. I. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch fire -retardant plywood on construction side. 2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 4. Protect air -handling equipment. 5. Weatherstrip openings. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types needed to protect against -" reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 01500-9 Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above. a. Field Offices: Class A stored -pressure water -type extinguishers. b. Other Locations: Class ABC dry -chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. C. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire - protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -exposure areas. 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire -protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 6. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and first -aid fire -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 7. Provide hoses for fire protection of sufficient length to reach construction areas. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire -protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Operate Project -identification -sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may 01500-10 have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. — 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division I Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 01500-11 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled -content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service 01600-1 performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.. D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. 1.4 SUBMITTALS -_ A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. -' b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. C. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. — e. Supplier's name and address. f Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 ^ copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. _ 5. A/E's Action: A/E will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. A/E's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. A/E's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 01600-2 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided by Owner. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of A/Es and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. A/E's Action: If necessary, A/E will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. A/E will notify Contractor through Owner of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if A/E cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 01600-3 A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, _ ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 9. Protect stored products from damage. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. — C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 01600-4 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 5. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product and manufacturer, provide the product named. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 01600-5 7. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, A/E will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, A/E will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to _ other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of A/Es and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) - END OF SECTION 01600 01600-6 SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner -accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMrITALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor and/or professional engineer to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of A/Es and owners, and other information specified. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor and/or professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit 2 copies signed by a land surveyor or professional engineer. 01700-1 SECTION 00615 PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Firm) GOLDEN TRIANGLE CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Address) 700 Weaver Park Road, Longmont, Colorado (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), "Principal" and (Firm) HARTFORD ACCIDENT AND INDEMNITY COMPANY (Address) Hartford, Connecticut Bond No. 34BCSCM1853 80501 hereinafter referred to as the hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of Ninety Five Thousand Ninety Three* in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the loth day of January 20o3, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins project, 2003 Gardens on Spring Creek/ Educational Wing Addition - Bid No. 5748 NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in.such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials,• lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. * and 00/100 Dollars--($95,093.00) 7/96 Section 00615 Page 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land -surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting _ the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location. data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: J a. Description of the Work. _ b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 01700-2 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to A/E. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify A/E and Owner promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify A/E and Owner when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. 01700-3 C. Site hnprovements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements; grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by A/E and Owner. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of the Owner. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to the Owner before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. - 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field -engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor or professional engineer that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. — 01700-4 Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by A/E. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 01700-5 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and ^ debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. _ 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. r 01700-6 J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory -authorized service representative is required to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence, of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 01700-7 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs and negatives. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final ^ certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar — releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 01770-1 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. A/E will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by A/E, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of A/E's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by A/E. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 01770-2 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of A/E and Owner d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for A/E's and Owner reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of xerox copies of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. -- 01770-3 C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings and Product Data where applicable. D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings and Record Specifications, where applicable. E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. 01770-4 00330 BID SCHEDULE City of Fort Collins 2003 Gardens on Spring Creek Bid No. 5748 - Golden Triangle Construction Inc. Lump Sum Ninetv-five Thousand Ninety-three dollars ($95,093.00) Signe Address r/► , C�� Company ��i3lv Phone/Fax Check One: Individual Doing Business in Company Name ,-: Corporation Partnership PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms' of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is .executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this 14th day of October 20 03. IN PRESENCE OF: Principal / ATTEST.�� B GOLDEN TRIANGLE CONSTRUCTION, INC. BY: Lynn J.�,Clark, Asst. Secretary Jeff Nading, esident (Title) 700 Weaver Park Road, Longmont, Colorado 80501 (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners Not Applicable Not Applicable IN PRESENCE OF: Surety HARTFORD ACCIDENT WITNF�S(j � �(_ AND INDEMNITY COMPANY BX: (�`�fL 1 By: Elke E. Eriksen Cy hia M. Burnet Attorne Denver Colorado y- n- act RXX P. 0. Box 469025 Denver Colorado 80246 (Surety Seal) (Address) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. /r/ Hilb, Rogal and Hamilton Company of Colorado P.O. Box 469025 !n,u!rT,ngte Way Denver, CO 80246-9025 Tel 303-722-7776 • Fax 303-722-8862 Surety bonds and insurance 7/96 Section 00615 Page 2 h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. Provide three copies. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of A/E for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, binders containing the Operations and Maintenance data. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. _ 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. -, PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially , hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal ^, operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 01770-5 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Owner, with at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 01770-6 j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. - Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. in. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. S. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. - D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 01770-7 DIVISION 2 02080 — Piped Utilities 02230 — Site Clearing 02231 — Tree Protection and Trimming 02240 — Dewatering 02260 — Excavation Support and Protection 02300 — Earthwork 02510 — Water Distribution 02530 — Sanitary Sewerage 02582 — Lighting Poles and Standards 02630 — Storm Drainage 02741 — Hot -Mix Asphalt Pavement 02751 — Cement Concrete Pavement 02764 — Pavement Joint Sealants 02780 — Unit Pavers 02810 — Irrigation 02820 — Prefabricated Building 02840 — Pump System Intake 02870 — Site Furnishings 02900 — Landscape Trees and Shrubs 02940 — Seeding 02970 — Planting Maintenance SECTION 02080 - PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Sleeves. 5. Identification devices. 6. Grout. 7. Piped utility demolition. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Metal supports and anchorages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Dielectric fittings. 02080 - 1 2. Identification devices. B. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification material and device. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Characteristics for Piped Utility Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. B. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 02080 - 2 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 2 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 2 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 02080 - 3 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. C. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith -Blair, hic. f. Viking Johnson. 2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve -type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. B. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent - cement -joint end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Eslon Thermoplastics. C. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent -cement -joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut. Available Manufacturers: a. NIBCO INC. b. NIBCO, hic.; Chemtrol Div. D. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion -resistant metal band on each end. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. C. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder - joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. 02080 - 4 B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 degrees Fahrenheit. 1. Available Manufacturers: ^- a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zum Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. C. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. E. Dielectric -Flange Kits: Companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full- face- or ring -type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. C. Central Plastics Company. r d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 degrees Fahrenheit. a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 degrees Fahrenheit. 1. Available Manufacturers: 02080 - 5 a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.6 SLEEVES A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. D. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered -cup shaped, and smooth -outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.7 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 2 Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option. B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped. 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data. 2. Location: Accessible and visible. C. Snap -on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap -on type. Include color -coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. D. Pressure -Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color -coded, pressure - sensitive vinyl type with permanent adhesive. E. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full -band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. F. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full -band or strip -type pipe markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label. G. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Architect. 02080 - 6 Insured's Name Golden Triangle Construction, Inc. Address 700 Weaver Park Road Longmont, CO 80501 Number 34BCSCM1853 IMPORTANT NOTICE TO OBLIGEES/POLICYHOLDERS - TERRORISM RISK INSURANCE ACT OF 2002 You are hereby notified that, under the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002, effective November 26, 2002, we must make terrorism coverage available in your bond/policy. However, the actual coverage provided by your bond/policy for acts of terrorism, as is true for all coverages, is limited by the terms, conditions, exclusions, limits, other provisions of your bond/policy, any endorsements to the bond/policy and generally applicable rules of law. Any terrorism coverage provided by this bond/policy is partially reinsured by the United States of America under a formula established by Federal Law. Under this formula, the United States will pay 90% of covered terrorism losses exceeding a statutorily -established deductible paid by sureties/insurers until such time as insured losses under the program reach $100 billion. If that occurs, Congress will determine the procedures for, and the source of, any payments for losses in excess of $100 billion. The premium charge that has been established for terrorism coverage under this bond/policy is either shown on this form or elsewhere in the bond/policy. If there is no premium shown for terrorism on this form or elsewhere in the bond/policy, there is no premium for the coverage. Terrorism premium: $0 Form B-3333-0 Page 1 of 1 © 2002, The Hartford H. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. I. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes: 1. Green: Cold -air supply. 2. Yellow: Hot-air supply. 3. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air. 4. Hazardous Material Exhausts: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 5. Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply, return, and exhaust; duct origin; duct destination; and design flow. J. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color -coded, pressure -sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3 mils thick. 1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2 inches for larger pipes. 2. Color: Comply with ASME Al3.1, unless otherwise indicated. K. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2- inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. Material: 0.032-inch thick, polished brass or aluminum. 2. Material: 0.0375-inch thick stainless steel. 3. Material: 3/32-inch thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white inner layer. 4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic. 5. Size: 1-1/2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. _ 6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system. L. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire -link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks. M. Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic -resin - laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. _ 2. Thickness: 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for larger units. 3. Fasteners: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or contact -type permanent adhesive. N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes: 1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 02080 - 7 4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above. 5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. C. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. 7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment. O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident -prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inches. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large -size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE. P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in piped utility identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of piped utility systems and equipment. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of same name are indicated. 2.8 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 02080 - 8 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. - C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS J A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying piping _ systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping to permit valve servicing. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. I. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. -, . i 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. I 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. 02080 - 9 b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board partitions. J. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. K. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 2 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/1) 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 02080 - 10 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. L. PE Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at fmal connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS a A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated. ,y B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope. . 3.6 PAINTING - A. Painting of piped utility systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting (Professional Line Products)." ' B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 02080 - 11 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1. 2. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following: a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible enclosures. d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic -laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment. 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three -fourths of size of principal lettering. 2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions. 3.8 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy -coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3500-psi, 28-day compressive -strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 02080 - 12 3.9 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.10 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 02080 02080 -13 SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2. Removing trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Topsoil stripping. 5. Removing above -grade site improvements. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Field Engineering" for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures during site operations. 3. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures undergoing alterations. 4. Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming" for protecting trees remaining on -site that are affected by site operations. 5. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 6. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and planting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 02230 - 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B. Record drawings according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site -clearing operations. I. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal and alteration work on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. D. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION _ A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during - construction. B. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 02230 - 2 ^' C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain. D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within drip line of remaining trees. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees. B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated. C. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by City Forester. 1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by the City Forester. 3.3 UTILITIES A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Construction Manager's written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 02230 - 3 Direct InqufriesiClaims to: POWEROF ATTORNEY THE BOND, -4 H BOND, D 690 ASYLUM AVENUE HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT 06115 ca4:888.266.3488 orfax:860-757-5835 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS THAT: Agency Code: 34 343.300 t X�t Hartford Fire Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut t j Hartford Casualtylnsurance Company , a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana 0 Hartford Accident and Indemnity Company , a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Hartford Underwriters Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut Twin CityFire Insurance Company , a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford insurance Companyof Illinois , a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Illinois Hartford insurance Companyof the Midwest , a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Indiana Hartford insurance Companyof the Southeast, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Florida having their home office in Hartford, Connecticut (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "Companies") do hereby make, constitute and appoint, up to the amount of UNLIMITED COURTNEY T. PETERSON, LEON B. DARTOIS, JAMES S. ROSULEK, J. R. RICHARDS, DOUGLAS J. ROTHEY, SUSAN J. LATTARULO, CYNTHIA M. BURNETT OF DENVER, COLORADO their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety(ies) only as delineated above by ®, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof, on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof, and as authorized by a Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies on September 12th, 2000, the Companies have caused these presents to be signed by its Assistant Vice President and its corporate seals to be hereto affixed, duly attested by its Assistant Secretary. Further, pursuant to Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Companies, the Companies hereby unambiguously affirm that they are and will be bound by any mechanically applied signatures applied to this Power of Attorney. �yr•y, .:tlax.e,Ni�. LYAT .�� Yij td 70�• Lr •.r. Paul A. Bergenholtz, Assistant Secretary Colleen Mastroianni, Assistant Vice President STATE OF CONNECTICUT Ss. Hartford COUNTY OF HARTFORD ) On 25" day of October, 2002, before me personally came Colleen Mastroianni, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that she resides in the County of Hartford, State of Connecticut; that she is the Assistant Vice President of the Companies, the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that she knows the seals of the said corporations; that the seals affixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by authority of the Boards of Directors of said corporations and that she signed her name thereto by like authority. Scott E. Pascua NotaryPublic C�iFIGITE My Commission Expiry Oember 31, 2007 I, the undersigned, Assistant Vice President of the Companies, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is still in full force effective as of October 14, 2003 Signed and sealed at the City of Hartford �'� � �j l•!T .� ► •7i'T • � r.e��l�t is ptiw► - ��+m enl�, halatM ro7 P70 �- st Y=° • ♦ .� � y�A .� list+ • t, •;e is� Yves Cantin, Assistant Vice President POA 2003 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. — C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. _ 3. Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 4. Location of topsoil storage to be established by contractor and Construction Manager. 3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and,aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut length - of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut faces vertically. 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02230 02230 - 4 SECTION 02231 - TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the protection and trimming of trees that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work, whether temporary or new construction. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Work" for limits placed on Contractor's use of the site. 2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for removal limits of trees, shrubs, and other plantings affected by new construction. 3. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for building and utility trench excavation, backfilling, compacting and grading requirements, and soil materials. 4. Division 2 Section "Exterior Plantings" for tree and shrub planting and transplanting, tree support systems, and soil materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. C. Certification: From a qualified arborist that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. D. Maintenance Recommendations: From a qualified arborist for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture or licensed in the jurisdiction where Project is located. 02231 - 1 B. Tree Pruning Standards: Comply with ANSI A300, "Trees, Shrubs, and Other Woody Plant . Maintenance --Standard Practices," unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1. Before starting tree protection and trimming, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Architect, consultants, and other concerned entities. Review tree protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities. Notify participants at least — three working days before convening conference. Record discussions and agreements and furnish a copy to each participant. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Drainage Fill: Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed, ASTM D 448, — Size 24, with 90 to 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a 3/4-inch sieve. B. Topsoil: Fertile, friable, surface soil, containing natural loam and complying with — ASTM D 5268. Provide topsoil that is free of stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and free of other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. Obtain topsoil only from well- _ drained sites where soil occurs in depth of 4 inches or more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes. C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard, nonwoven, pervious, geotextile fabric of polypropylene, nylon, or polyester fibers. D. Chain Link Fence: Metallic -coated steel chain link fence fabric, 0.120-inch diameter wire size; ; 48 inches high, minimum; line posts, 1.9 inches in diameter, terminal and comer posts, 2-3/8 inches in diameter; top rail, 1-5/8 inches in diameter; bottom tension wire, 0.177 inch in diameter; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system. _ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect remaining vegetation from construction damage. 1. Install chain link fence according to ASTM F 567 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protect tree root systems from damage due to noxious materials caused by runoff or spillage while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from flooding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations. — 02231 - 2 C. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within the drip line of remaining trees. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within the drip line; prevent soil compaction over root systems. D. Do not allow fires under or adjacent to remaining trees or other plants. 3.2 - REGRADING 3.3 A. B. C. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond drip line of trees. Maintain existing grades within drip line of trees. TREE PRUNING Prune remaining trees affected by temporary and new construction. Prune remaining trees to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by qualified arborist. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 as follows: 1. Type of Pruning: Crown raising. 2. Type of Pruning: Crown restoration. D. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. E. 3.4 A. B. 3.5 A. Chip branches removed from trees. Spread chips where indicated or as directed by Construction Manager. TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to written instructions of the City Forester. Remove and replace dead and damaged trees that the City Forester determines to be incapable of restoring to a normal growth pattern. 1. Provide new trees of the per city requirements for those being replaced; plant and maintain as specified in Division 2 Section "Trees and Shrubs." DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS Burning is not permitted. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, and excess chips from Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02231 02231 - 3 SECTION 02240 - DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes construction dewatering. B. Related Sections include the fallowing: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities and support facilities. 2. Division 2 Section 'Excavation Support and Protection." _ 3. Division 2 Section 'Earthwork" for excavating, backfilling, site grading and for site utilities. 4. Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for permanent foundation wall, underfloor, and footing _ drainage. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground -water flow into excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation. 4. Remove dewatering system if no longer needed. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings for Information: For dewatering system. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of headers and discharge lines; and means of discharge and disposal of water. 1. Include layouts of piezometers and flow -measuring devices for monitoring performance of dewatering system. 2. Include a written report outlining control procedures to be adopted if dewatering problems arise. 02240 - 1 3. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Qualification Data: For installer and profession engineer. C. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations. D. Record drawings at Project closeout identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions performed during dewatering. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points. E. Field Test Reports: Before starting excavation, submit test results and computations demonstrating that dewatering system is capable of meeting performance requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project -Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering. 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. B. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or land surveyor, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks , maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 02240 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION — A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. 2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface -water controls. B. Before excavating below ground -water level, place system into operation to lower. water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required. C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water -bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Do not permit open -sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability. D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water -bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below surface of excavation. E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow - control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 02240 - 3 F. Provide standby equipment on -site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction. G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations. 3.3 OBSERVATION WELLS A. Provide, take measurements, and maintain at least the minimum number of observation wells or piezometers indicated and additional observation wells as may be required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observation wells. C. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed. Suspend construction activities in areas where observation wells are not functioning properly until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation -well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed. END OF SECTION 02240 02240 - 4 SECTION 02260 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities and support facilities. 2. Division 2 Section "Dewatering" for dewatering excavations. 3. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating and backfilling and for existing utilities. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS — A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads. 1. Provide professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility, — including preparation of Shop Drawings and a comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, pavements, and other improvements adjacent to excavation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings for Information: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer for excavation support and protection systems. 1. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Qualification Data: For Installer and professional engineer. — C. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the — installation of, or the performance of excavation support and protection systems. 02260 -1 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. B. Project -Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection. 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or land surveyor; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition. B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous interlocks. D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of 4 inches. E. Cast -in -Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application. F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. 02260 - 2 SECTION 00630 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACTOR shall insert his own standard form for Certificate of Insurance. 7/96 Section 00630 Page 1 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. _ 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces is not impeded. D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems. 3.2 SOLDIER BEAMS AND LAGGING A. Install steel soldier beams before starting excavation. Space soldier beams at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier beams as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact. C. Install wales horizontally at centers indicated and secure to soldier beams. 3.3 BRACING A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent _ work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace. 1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 02260 - 3 2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. 3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 3.4 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. l . Remove excavation support and protection systems. 2. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems. END OF SECTION 02260 02260 - 4 SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY [NOTE: The cost for the excavation and backfill for the greenhouse building foundation as well as the provision of the drainage fill under the greenhouse building slab -on -grade shall be separated from the remainder of the Site Earthwork Bid and shall be included within the Bid for the Greenhouse Building.] A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs -on -grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 5. Base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for a schedule of unit prices. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." 3. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing' for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and protecting trees to remain. 4. Division 2 Section "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction. 5. Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming' for protecting and trimming trees to remain. 6. Division 2 Section "Excavation Support and Protection." 7. Division 2 Section "Exterior Plantings" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and plantings. 8. Division 2 Section "Lawns and Grasses" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and plantings. 9. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for granular course over vapor retarder. 10. Division 15 and 16 Sections for excavating and backfilling buried mechanical and electrical utilities and buried utility structures. 02300 - 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab -on -grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material exceeding 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late -model, track -mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch wide, short -tip -radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 120-hp flywheel power with bucket -curling force of not less than 25,000 lbf and stick -crowd force of not less than 18,7001bf; measured according to SAE J-1179. 2. Bulk Excavation: Late -model, track -mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 45,000-lbf breakout force; measured according to SAE J-732. I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches. 02300 - 2 J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. K. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk. L. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. -� M. Utilities include on -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Drainage fabric. 2. Separation fabric. B. Samples: For the following: -_ 1. 30-1b samples, sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed soil material from on -site or borrow sources. _ 2. 12-by-12-inch sample of drainage fabric. 3. 12-by-12-inch sample of separation fabric. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 3. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on -site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock -definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 02300 - 3 A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Construction Manager's written permission. 3. Contact utility -locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other. deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. H. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 02300 - 4 I. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-112- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. J. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a f- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.2 ACCESSORIES — A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: — 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. C. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods: 1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 401bf; ASTM D 4533. — 3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf, ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50; ASTM D 4751. _ D. Separation Fabric: Woven geotextile, specifically manufactured for use as a separation geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods: 1. Grab Tensile Strength: 200 lbf, ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 75 lbf, ASTM D 4533. 3. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 4 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30; ASTM D 4751. PART 3 - EXECUTION _ 02300 - 5 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 02300 - 6 2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations from 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. ^ Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. 3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. Clearance: As indicated in the utility details. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple - duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. _ 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Construction Manager when excavations have reached required subgrade. ^ 02300 - 7 B. If Construction Manager determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. 02300 - 8 Sent By: OTC; 3037766525; Sep-29-03 10:41AM; Page 2 Cllerd#: 8635 UVLU I KI ACOR0. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 0618/0s 1 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION HRH of Colorado J' ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 720 S. Colorado Blvd Ste PH N �M 0 j V N 17 2.Q OLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR P.O. Box 469025 LTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Denver, CO 80246-9025 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED INsuRERA CNA Insurance Companies 31194 Golden Triangle Construction, Inc. INSURER B'. Pinnacol Assurance 700 Weaver Park Rd. Longmont, CO 80501 INSURER C:INSURER C'. err. INSURER COVERAGES a' is TI IE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HXIMEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION Of ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAYBE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. N TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POUCY EFFECTIVE POLICY EMPIoo TI N LIMITS A GENERAL UABIUTY TCP2022866738 12131102 12131/03 EACHOCCURRENCE S7 00p 000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE O OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED MF.D EXP (Airy arw pa sa $500pOD S5 DOO PERSONAL E ADV INJURY $1 000 000 GENERAL AGGREGATE s2 000 000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY X PRO- r.7 LOC PRWUCIS-UVMPIOPAW $2000000 I A ' AUTOMOBILE X UABIUTY ANY AUTO RUA2022868741 12/31/02 12131/03 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Eaatdderd) $1,000,000 DOrp INJURY (Per De1Ton) $ AI 1. OWNEDAUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS I HIRED AUTOS NON,pVNNED AUTOS X BODILYINJ RY (P!Y errydgM) X PROPERTY DAMAGE (Par au:blrad) S GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY -EAACCIDENT S pn+ER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGG i ANY AUTO S A EXCESBMM13RCUA UAEILITY X OCCUR ❑ CLAIMS MADE CUP2022866786 12/31102 12131103 EACHOCCURRENCF t2,000,000 AGGREGATC S2 ppp ppp S S DEDUCTIBLE HX RETENTION $ 10000 S B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROI'NIpTORMARTNERIEXECUTNE 4013024 07101/03 10/01/04 x WC STATU- DTH- '- E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1 00p 000 E.L. DISEASE -EA EMPLOYE $1,000.000 OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? NA9Ed1"1rR1 sunder SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.l. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $1,D00,pD0 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT IS PECIAL PROVISIONS Gardens on Spring Creek City of Fort Collins, Colorado, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and any other persons or entitles Identified in contract supplementary conditions are Additional Insureds as respects to General Liability, Auto (See Attached Descriptions) City of Fort Collins, Colorado 216 North Mason Street Fort Collins, CO 80524 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENOFAVGR TD MAIL —30-- DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TC THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO $HALL IMM66 NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR za 12901100)1 of 3 #M165057 MGP 0 ACORD CORPORATION 11988 B. Provide 4-inch thick, concrete -base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a ^ minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. C. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. D. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. E. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.13 FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill _ material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. _ 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. 3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified ^ dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS 02300 - 9 A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: D. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent. 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE A. Drainage Piping: Drainage pipe is specified in Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems." B. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of drainage fabric around perimeter of drainage trench as indicated. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on drainage fabric to support drainage pipe. Encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material and wrap in drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 02300 - 10 1. Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698. 2. Place and compact impervious fill material over drainage backfill to final subgrade. 3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Install separation fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. B. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Place base course material over subbase. 2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. 3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Under slabs -on -grade, place drainage course as follows: B. Under slabs -on -grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality -control testing. 02300 - 11 B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved` degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.21 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Construction Manager. 02300 - 12 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02300 02300 - 13 SECTION 02510 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. All work performed under this section shall comply .with the requirements set forth in the "Standard Construction Specifications", Fort Collins - Loveland Water District, April 1995. END OF SECTION 02510 02510 - 1 SECTION 02530 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. All work performed under this section shall comply with the requirements set forth in the "Standard Construction Specifications", South Fort Collins Sanitation District, April 1995. END OF SECTION 02530 02530-1 SECTION 02582 - LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following poles for support of luminaires: 1. Steel poles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Exterior Lighting" for lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. B. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including foundation, standard, pole top and high pole. C. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-3. B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf (2224 N), distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-3. C. Ice Load: Load of 3 Ibf/sq. ft. (143.6 Pa), applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-3. D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on standard and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-3. 1. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet (15 m) in height or less is 110 mph (177 km/h). LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 02582 - 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pole indicated, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Materials and dimensions of poles. 2. Means of attaching luminaires and indication that attachment is suitable for it. 3. Bases. B. Shop Drawings: Include anchor -bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 1. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of screw foundation. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of poles, certifying that products are designed for load requirements in AASHTO LTS-3 and that load imposed by luminaire has been included in design. 1. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of screw foundation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store poles on decay -resistant -treated skids at least 12 inches (300 mm) above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. B. Retain factory -applied pole wrappings on metal poles until just before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish, materials, and workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Protection of Metal from Corrosion: Warranty against perforation or erosion of finish due to weathering. 2. Color Retention: Warranty against fading, staining, and chalking due to effects of weather and solar radiation. 3. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 02582 - 2 Valmont Industries, Inc. 2.2 POLES, GENERAL A. Description: Comply with AASHTO LTS-3 in structural design of poles. B. Wind -Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis. C. Luminaire Attachment: Structural supports to comply with luminaire mounting requirements. D. Finish: Match finish of pole and support structure on arm, bracket, and tenon mount materials. E. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion -resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Mountings: Correctly position luminaire attachment to provide indicated light distribution. 3. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication unless stainless -steel items are indicated. 4. Anchor -Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. 5. Concrete Bases: Cast -in -place concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3. 2.3 STEEL POLES A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig (317 MPa); 1-piece construction up to 40 feet (12 m) in length with access handhole in pole wall. 1. Shape: Round, tapered. B. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole. C. Cable Support Grip: Wire -mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor. D. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless -steel bolts. LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 02582 - 3 Sent By: OTC; 3037766525; Sep-29-03 10:41AM; Page 3/6 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in Ileu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER I The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate balder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. 2 of 3 NMI65067 E. Factory -Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Interior Surfaces: Apply one coat of bituminous paint on interior of pole, or otherwise treat to prevent corrosion. 3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high -gloss, high -build polyurethane enamel. a. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Cast base cover, of same material and color as pole. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 ERECTION, GENERAL A. Set reinforcement for anchor bolts, nuts, and washers according to anchor -bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. 1. Concrete Finish: Trowel and rub smooth. For exposed finish, comply with Division 3. B. Install poles as follows: , 1. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles. 2. Mount pole to foundation with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer. 3. Secure poles level, plumb, and square. 4. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space. 5. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. 3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment. B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe -wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap. LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 02582 - 4 3.3 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles/support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. END OF SECTION 02582 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS 02582 - 5 SECTION 02630 - STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. All work performed under this section shall comply with the requirements set forth in the "Storm Drainage Design Criteria and Construction Standard", City of Fort Collins Stormwater Utility, 1997. END OF SECTION 02630 02630-1 SECTION 02741 - HOT -MIX ASPHALT PAVING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. All work performed under this section shall comply with "Larimer County Urban Area Street Standards", adopted January 2, 2001. END OF SECTION 02741 02741-1 SECTION 02751 - CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. All work performed under this section shall comply with the requirements set forth in the "Design and Construction Criteria, Standards and Specifications for Streets, Sidewalks, Alleys and other Public Ways", City of Fort Collins Engineering Office, July 1996. END OF SECTION 02751 02751-1 SECTION 02764 - PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Expansion and contraction joints within portland cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between portland cement concrete and asphalt pavement. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving" for constructing joints between concrete and asphalt pavement. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete paving. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for selection: Submit colors samples for selection by the City's Project Coordinator for each type of joint sealant required. Install joint -sealant samples in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. 02764 - 1 B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not, proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths - are less than that allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint -Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.2 COLD -APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS I A. Multicomponent Jet -Fuel -Resistant Sealant for Concrete: Pourable, chemically curing s elastomeric formulation complying with the following requirements for formulation and with ASTM C 920 for type, grade, class, and uses indicated: 1. Urethane Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 12-1/2; Uses T, M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. B. Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single -component, low -modulus, neutral- —` curing, self -leveling silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type SL. C. Multicomponent Low -Modulus Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Proprietary formulation -- consisting of reactive petropolymer and activator components producing a pourable, self - leveling sealant. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cold -applied joint sealants that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 02764 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime all joints. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 02764 - 3 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. _ F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 02764 02764 - 4 SECTION 02780 - UNIT PAVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete pavers set in aggregate setting bed. 2. Edge restraints for unit pavers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for compacted subgrade and subbase course, if any, under unit pavers. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for cast -in -place concrete curbs and gutters serving as edge restraint for unit pavers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Concrete pavers. 2. Edge restraints. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit paver indicated. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. Provide Samples with joints grouted and cured, showing the full range of colors to be expected in the completed Work. 2. Include Samples of exposed edge restraints. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project 02780 - 1 Sent By: OTC; 3037766525; Sep-29-03 10:42AM; Page 4/6 1 DESCRIPTIONS (Continued from Page 1) Liability and Umbrella Liability only If required by written contract and Icoverage applies only as respects ongoing operations performed by Insured for the Certificate Holder. All coverage terms, conditions and exclusions of the policy apply. Cancellation Clause & Materialy Altered amended: will mail 30 days written Inotice to the Certificate Holder. 10 days notice will be given for non-payment of premium. AMS 25.3 (2001/08) 3 of names and addresses, names and addresses of A/Es and owners, and other information specified. E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From latex -additive manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Mortar and grout containing latex additives have been tested with pavers for compatibility and adhesion. 2. Interpretation of test results relative to mortar and grout performance and written —• recommendations for installation practices needed for adhesion. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed unit paver installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to latex -additive manufacturer, for testing indicated below, samples of paving materials that will contact or affect mortar and grout that contain latex additives. 1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether mortar and grout materials are required to obtain optimum adhesion with, and will be nonstaining to, installed pavers and other materials constituting paver installation. 2. Submit a sufficient number of pavers and other materials involved in installation to allow comprehensive testing. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain mortar and grout manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of alternative materials to obtain optimum bond and prevent staining. D. Mockups: Before installing unit pavers, build mockups for each form and pattern of unit pavers required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work, including same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and contiguous work as indicated: 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by A/E. 2. Notify A/E seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain A/E's approval of mockups before starting unit paver installation. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. 02780 - 2 7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soiling or contamination from earth and other materials. Cover pavers with plastic or use other packaging materials that will prevent rust marks from steel strapping. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing. D. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Concrete Pavers: a. Licensee of Symrah Licensing Inc. that markets unit pavers in Project location. b. Licensee of Uni-Group U.S.A. that markets unit pavers in Project location. C. Capitol Ornamental Concrete Specialties, Inc. d. Hanover A/Eural Products, Inc. e. Hastings Pavement Co., Inc. f. Nicolock. g. Oldcastle A/Eural Products. h. Sunny Brook Pressed Concrete Co. i. Wassau Tile, Inc.; Terra -Paving Div. 2. Aluminum Edge Restraints: 02780 - 3 a. BrickStop Corporation. b. Permaloc Corporation. C. Sure-loc Aluminum Edging. 2.2 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Colors and Textures: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 UNIT PAVERS A. Concrete Pavers: Solid, interlocking paving units, ASTM C 936, made from normal -weight aggregates in sizes and shapes indicated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard triangular PVC extrusions designed to serve as edge restraints for unit pavers; rigid type for straight edges and flexible type for curved edges, with pipe connectors and 3/8-inch diameter by 12-inch long steel spikes. Size of edging is as follows: 1. 1-3/4 inches high by 3-1/2 inches wide. B. Aluminum Edge Restraints: Extruded -aluminum edging with loops pressed from face to receive stakes at 12 inches o.c., and aluminum stakes 12 inches long for each loop. Type and size of edging is as follows: 1. L-shaped, 3/16 inch thick by 2-1/4 inches high. C. Job -Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in - Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mixed concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2.5 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED MATERIALS A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 57. B. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: ASTM D 2940, subbase material. C. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8. D. Graded Aggregate for Base: ASTM D 2940, base material. E. Geotextile: Woven or nonwoven geotextile manufactured from polyester or polypropylene fibers, with a permeability rating 10 times greater than that of soil on which paving is founded and an apparent opening size small enough to prevent passage of fines from leveling course into graded aggregate of base course below. 02780 - 4 F. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. G. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 10. H. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations. Examine areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces and horizontal waterproofing. Proceed with installation only after protection is in place. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Proof -roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discoloration, and other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work. B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Cut unit pavers with motor -driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used. D. Joint Pattern: As indicated in the construction drawings. E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch unit -to -unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. 02780 - 5 F. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit -to -unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches and 1 /4 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. G. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant -filled joints at locations and of widths indicated. Provide joint filler as backing for sealant -filled joints where indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers. I. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers. 1. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation. 2. For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 1 inch below top edge. 3. Install job -built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." ". 4. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not -� interfere with aggregate setting bed. 5. Where pavers embedded in concrete are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers embedded in concrete and allow concrete to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Hold top of concrete below aggregate setting bed. J. Provide steps made of pavers as indicated. Install paver steps before installing adjacent pavers. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed. 3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED PAVER APPLICATIONS A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 laboratory density. B. Place geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches. C. Place aggregate subbase and base in thickness indicated in the construction drawings. Compact by tamping with plate vibrator and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers. D. Place aggregate subbase and base over compacted subgrade. Provide compacted thickness indicated. Compact subbase and base to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density and screed to depth required to allow setting of pavers. E. Place geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches. 02780 - 6 F. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. G. Treat leveling base with soil sterilizer to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. H. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit. I. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low -amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to rain. 2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches of the laying face. Cover open layers with nonstaining plastic sheets overlapped 48 inches on each side of the laying face to protect it from rain. J. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. K. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. L. Repeat joint -filling process 30 days later. 3.5 REPAIR, POINTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with mortar or grout. Point up joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant application. C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean. Remove protective coating as recommended by protective coating manufacturer and acceptable to unit paver and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. END OF SECTION 02780 02780 - 7 DIVISION 2-SITE WORK SECTION 02810-IRRIGATION PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: _ _ _ _ - - - CbjaMerttt AEI Note: Anyitems Included In Paragraph 1.61 must Furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform correapondingly be deleted from Paragraph 1.02. all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the irrigation system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: ________________________________________________ Ci0.006IN A8l Note: Check.. ^' A. Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees contrast between Owner and Cantfacttir.todetermine : B. Coordination of Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"). responsibility for team associated with plant mvestmen4 or devtlopmant feet. C. Connection to municipal potable water service downstream of water meter within Horticulture Center building. D. Connection to non -potable irrigation pump station. E. Connection of electrical power supply to the irrigation control system. F. Maintenance period. G. Sleeving for irrigation pipe and wire] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ COMWIlt AN Noce; Any Item Included In ParagraAh'1.02 must 1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED: correspondingly be deleted from Paragraph }.01 Items of work specifically excluded or covered under other sections are: A. Excavation, installation, and backfill of tap into municipal water line. B. Excavation, installation, and backfill of water meter and vault. C. Installation of pumping plant for irrigation system _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Comntt All Note', If there is no pdmtalsp;Atint in the system, tha ,+- 1.03 RELATED WORK: pumping° plantltemalfoaidbe removed from both Paragraphs_ f,D1 grid 1:OY. A. Division O-Bidding and Contract Requirements: B. Division 1-General Requirements: Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 1 Irrigation -. Division 2-Site Work: 1. Section 02920 - Fine Grading and Soil Preparation. 2. Section 02931 - Seeding. 3. Section 02932 - Sodding. 4. Section 02950 - Trees, Plants and Ground Cover. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Ll)eliv_er fourl4lcopies_of all submittals _to the Owners Representative within 10 _ _ _ - Comment Note: Add verbiage if working days from the date of Notice to Proceed. Provide information in a 3-ring 01300 Is not Included. binder with table of contents and index sheet. Provide sections that are indexed comments -OR- for different components and labeled with the specification section number and the name of the component. Submittals must be made for all the components on the material list. Indicate which items are being supplied on the catalog cut sheets when multiple items are shown on one sheet. Submittal package must be complete prior to being reviewed by the Owner's Representative. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review. B. Materials List: Include sleeving, pipe, fittings, mainline components, sprinkler and bubbler components, drip irrigation components, control system components, shop drawings and all other components shown on -the drawings and installation details or described herein. Components such as pipe sealant, wire, wire connectors, ID tags, etc. must be included. Quantities of materials need not be included. C. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, specifications, and operating instructions for equipment shown on the materials list. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in the installation details. Show products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note modifications to the installation detail. 1.05 RULES AND REGULATIONS: A. Work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code, the Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the Western Plumbing Officials Association, and applicable laws and regulations of the governing authorities. B. When the contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above -mentioned rules and regulations, provide the quality and size required by the contract documents. C. If quantities are provided either in these specifications or on the drawings, these quantities are provided for information only. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the actual quantities of all material, equipment, and supplies required Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 2 Irrigation by the project and to complete an independent estimate of quantities and wastage. 1.06 TESTING: A. Notify the Owner's Representative three days in advance of testing. B. Pipelines jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be subjected —? to a pressure test at any time after partial completion of backfill. Pipelines jointed with solvent -welded PVC joints shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before testing. C. Subsections of mainline pipe may be tested independently, subject to the review of the Owner's Representative. D. Furnish clean, clear water, pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to -, conduct tests or retests. E. Hydrostatic Pressure Test Pipg: 1. Close fightly isolation gate valves on mainline for tests. Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. 2. Test each section of pipe between isolation gates valves on the mainline pipe separately. 3. Purge all air from the pipeline before test. Attach pressure gauge to pipeline in test section. -4 4. Subject mainline pipe to the anticipated operating pressure of 100 PSI for two hours. Observe pressure loss on pressure gauge. If pressure loss is greater than 2 PSI, identify reason for pressure loss. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pressure loss is equal to or less than 2 PSI. 5. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. 6. If Hydrostatic Pressure Test can not be passed for sections of mainline pipe with gasketed pipe, test pipe using Volumetric Leakage Test as prescribed by gasketed pipe manufacturer. F. Operational Test: 1. Activate each remote control valve in sequence from controller. The -- Owner's Representative will visually observe operation, water application patterns, and leakage. 2. Replace defective remote control valve, solenoid, wiring, or appurtenance to correct operational deficiencies. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 3 Irrigation Replace, adjust, or move water emission devices to correct operational or coverage deficiencies. 4. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to correct leakage problems. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. 5. Repeat test(s) until each lateral passes all tests. Repeat tests, replace components, and correct deficiencies at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Control System Grounding: Test for proper grounding of control system per manufacturer's recommendations. Test results must meet or exceed manufacturer's guidelines for acceptance. Replace defective wire, grounding rod, or appurtenances. Repeat the test until the manufacturer's guidelines are met. 1.07 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW: The purpose of on -site reviews by the Owner's Representative is to periodically observe the work in progress, the Contractor's interpretation of the construction documents, and to address questions with regard to the installation. A. Scheduled reviews such as those for irrigation system layout or testing must be scheduled with the Owner's Representative as required by these specifications. B. Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during the project. C. A review will occur at the completion of the irrigation system installation and Project Record (As -Built) Drawing submittal. 1.08 GUARANTEENVARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT: The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Owner receives irrigation materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner. A. For a period of one year from commencement of the formal maintenance period, guarantee/warranty irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape or structural features damaged by the settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within seven days of notification from the Owner's Representative. B. Contract documents govem replacements identically as with new work. Make replacements at no additional cost to the contract price. C. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 4 Irrigation Sent By: OTC; 3037766525; Sep-29-03 10:42AM; Page 5/6 G01tten Triangie L.;onscructian, inc. Policy #TCP2022866738 G-140331-A CNA (Ed. 01/01) IMPORTANT: THIS ENDORSEMENT CONTAINS DUTIES THAT APPLY TO THE ADDITIONAL INSURED IN THE EVENT OF OCCURRENCE, OFFENSE, CLAIM OR SUIT, SEE PARAGRAPH C.1. OF THIS ENDORSEMENT FOR THESE DUTIES. THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. CONTRACTOR'S SCHEDULED AND BLANKET ADDITIONAL INSURED ENDORSEMENT WITH PRODUCTS -COMPLETED OPERATIONS COVERAGE This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name of Person or organization. Designated Project: (Coverage under this endorsement Is not affected by an entry or lack of entry In the Schedule above.) A. WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II) is amended to include as an insured any person or organization, Including any person or organization shown in the schedule above, (called additional insured) whom you are required to add as an additional insured on this policy under a written contract or written agreement, but the written contract or written agreement must be: 1. Currently in effect or becoming effective during the term of this policy; and 2. Executed prior to the "bodily injury," "property damage," or `personal and advertising injury'. B. The insurance provided to the additional insured is limited as follows: 1. That person or organization is an additional insured solely for liability due to your negligence specifically resulting from "your work' for the additional insured which is the subject of the written contract or written agreement. No coverage applies to liability resulting from the sole negligence of the additional insured. 2. The Limits of Insurance applicable to the additional insured are those specified in the written contract or written agreement or in the Declarations of this policy, whichever is less. These Limits of Insurance are inclusive of, and not in additlon to, the Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations, 3. The coverage provided to the additional insured by this endorsement and paragraph f. of the definition of "insured contract" under DEFINITIONS (Section V) do not apply to "bodiiy injury" or "property damage" arising out of the "products -completed operations hazard° unless required by the written contract or written agreement. 4. The insurance provided to the additional insured does not apply to `bodily injury,' "property damage," or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of an architects, engineer's, or surveyor's rendering of or failure to render any professional services including: a. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; and b. Supervisory, or inspection activities performed as part of any related architectural or engineering activities. C. As respects the coverage provided under this endorsement, SECTION IV — COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS are amended as follows: G-140331-A (Ed. 01101) Page 1 of 2 PART 2: MATERIALS 2.01 QUALITY Use materials which are new and without flaws or defects of any type, and which are the best of their class and kind. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Alternative equipment must be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. The Contractor is responsible for making any changes to the design to accommodate alternative equipment. B. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be increased at the option of the Contractor. 2.03 SLEEVING: A. Install separate sleeve beneath paved areas to route each run of irrigation pipe or wiring bundle. B. Sleeving material beneath pedestrian pavements shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent welded joints. C. Sleeving beneath drives and streets shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent welded joints. D. Sleeving diameter: equal to twice that of the pipe or wiring bundle. 2.04 PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. Mainline Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120,1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-13, ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral belled end. 2. Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use PVC pipe rated at higher pressures than Class 200 in the case of small nominal diameters which are not manufactured in Class 200. 3. Use rubber-gasketed pipe equipped with factory installed reinforced gaskets for mainline pipe with a nominal diameter greater than or equal to 3-inches. Gasketed pipe joints must conform to the "Laboratory Qualifying Tests" section of ASTM D3139. Gasket material must conform to ASTM F477. Use rubber-gasketed deep bell ductile iron fittings conforming to ASTM A-536 and ASTM F477. Use lubricant approved by the pipe manufacturer. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 5 Irrigation 4. Use solvent weld pipe for mainline pipe with a nominal diameter less than 3-inches or where a pipe connection occurs in a sleeve. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564. B. Lateral Pioe and Fittings: Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120,1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-13, ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral belled end suitable for solvent welding. 2. Use Class 160, SDR-26, rated at 160 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use solvent weld pipe for lateral pipe. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784 for PVC pipe. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564, of a type approved by the pipe manufacturer. 3. For drip irrigation laterals downstream of zone control valves, use UV radiation resistant polyethylene pipe manufactured from Prime Union Carbide G-resin 7510 Natural 7 manufactured by Union Carbide or a Union Carbide Licensee with a minimum of 2% carbon black. Use PVC/compression line fittings compatible with the drip lateral pipe. Use tubing stakes or landscape fabric staples to hold above -ground pipe in place. C. Specialized Pipe and Fittina : Copper pipe: Use Type "K" rigid conforming to ASTM Standard B88. Use wrought copper or cast bronze fittings, soldered or threaded per the installation details. Use a 95% tin and 5% antimony solder. 2. Use a dielectric union wherever a copper -based metal (copper, brass, bronze) is joined to an iron -based metal (iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel). 3. Ductile iron pipe: Use Class 50 conforming to ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C151). Use a minimum of Class 53 thickness pipe for flanged piping. Use mechanical joints conforming to ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110) and ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111) or flanged fittings conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110 and ANSI B16.1 (125#). Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 6 Irrigation 4. Low Density Polyethylene Hose: a. Use pipe specifically intended for use as a flexible swing joint. Inside diameter. 0.490±0.010 inch. Wall thickness: 0.100±0.010 inch. Color: Black. b. Use spiral barb fittings supplied by the same manufacturer as the hose. 5. Assemblies calling for flanged connections shall utilize stainless steel studs and nuts and rubber gaskets. -- 6. Assemblies calling for threaded pipe connections shall utilize PVC Schedule 80 nipples and PVC Schedule 40 threaded fittings. 7. Joint sealant: Use nonhardening, nontoxic pipe thread sealant formulated for use on threaded connections and approved by the pipe fitting manufacturer. 8. Pipe marking tape: Marking tape shall be model TA-DT-3"-G-1 as manufactured by T. Christy Enterprises. D. Thrust Blocks: —� 1. Use thrust blocks for fittings on pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter or any diameter rubber gasketed pipe. 2. Use 3,000 PSI concrete. 3. Use 2 mil plastic. 4. Use No. 4 Rebar wrapped or painted with asphalt tar based mastic coating. E. Joint Restraint Harness: —, 1. Use a joint restraint harness wherever joints are not positively restrained by flanged fittings, threaded fittings, and/or thrust blocks. 2. Use a joint restraint harness with transition fittings between metal and PVC pipe, where weak trench banks do not allow the use of thrust blocks, or where extra support is required to retain a fitting or joint. 3. Use bolts, nuts, retaining clamps, all -thread, or other joint restraint harness materials which are zinc plated or galvanized. 4. Use on pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter or any diameter rubber gasketed pipe. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 7 Irrigation 2.05 MAINLINE COMPONENTS: A. Main System Shutoff Valve: as per local practice and in compliance with local code. B. Backflow Prevention Assembly: as presented in the installation details. C. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: as presented in the installation details. Install a separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly. D. Quick CouNing Valve Assemb]: double swing joint arrangement as presented in the installation details. Air -Vacuum Relief Valve Assembly: as presented in the details. Provide a continuous acting combination air vacuum relief valve with an operating pressure rating of 150 PSI. Acceptable manufacturers are Bermad or Crispin. Manual Drain Valve Assembly: as presented in the installation details. Install a separate sump consisting of three cubic feet of 3/4-inch gravel for each drain valve. 2.06 SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals: as presented in the installation details. Use wire connectors and waterproofing sealant to join control wires to solenoid valves. Use standard Christy I.D. tags with hot -stamped black letters on a yellow background. Install a separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly. B. Sprinkler Assembly: as presented in the drawings and installation details. 2.07 DRIP IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Drip Laterals: as presented in the installation details. Use wire connectors and waterproofing sealant to join control wires to solenoid valves. Use standard Christy I.D. tags with hot -stamped black letters on a yellow background. Install a separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly. Zone Control Valve Assembly: as presented in the installation details. Install a separate box over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly. C. Drip Emitter Assembly: Barb -mounted, vortex and/or pressure compensating emitter device as presented in the installation details. 2. Install emitter types and quantities on the following schedule: Tree: 4 single outlet emitters each or 1 multi -outlet emitter each (with 4 outlets open) Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 8 Irrigation 3. Use flexible plastic distribution tubing to direct water from emitter outlet to emission point. Use distribution tubing compatible with the emitters. Length of distribution tubing shall not exceed five feet. Secure distribution tubing outlet with tubing stakes. 4. Install an access sleeve for each multiple -outlet emitter located in a turf area. D. Flush Cap Assembly: as presented in the installation details. Locate at the end of each drip irrigation lateral pipe. Install a separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly. 2.08 CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. Irriaation Controller Unit: 1. As presented in the drawings and installation details. 2. Lightning protection: Provide one 12" x 36" x 0.0625" ground plate, one 5/8"x10 foot copper clad UL listed grounding rod, 30 feet of #6 AWG bare copper grounding wire, and one CADWELD connector, and two 6-inch round valve boxes at each satellite controller group. 3. Wire markers: Prenumbered or labeled with indelible nonfading ink, made of permanent, nonfading material. 4. Switch/Outlet: Use 120 VAC, 15 amp combination switch/GFCI outlet. B. Control Wire: 1. Use American Wire Gauge (AWG) No. 14 solid copper, Type OF or PE cable, UL approved for direct underground burial from the controller unit to each remote control valve. 2. Color. Use white for common ground wire. Use easily distinguished colors for other control wires. Spare control wires shall be of a color different from that of the active control wire. Wire color shall be continuous over its entire length. 3. Splices: Use wire connector with waterproof sealant. Wire connector to be of plastic construction consisting of two (2) pieces, one piece which snap locks into the other. A copper crimp sleeve to be provided with connector. 4. Warning tape: Inert plastic film highly resistant to alkalis, acids, or other destructive chemical components likely to be encountered in soils. Three inches wide, colored yellow, and imprinted with "CAUTION: BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW." Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 9 Irrigation C. Instrumentation: As presented in the drawings and installation details. Provide, install and test an rain sensor to prevent irrigation during or immediately after rainfall events. 2.09 OTHER COMPONENTS: A. Tools and Spare Parts: Provide operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, spare parts and other items indicated in the General Notes of the drawings. B. Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details which are part of the irrigation system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS: A. Site Inspections: Verify construction site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities to the Owner's Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions. Utility Locates ("Call Before You Dig"): Arrange for and coordinate with local authorities the location of all underground utilities. Repair any underground utilities damaged during construction. Make repairs at no additional cost to the contract price. Irrigation System Layout Review: Irrigation system layout review will occur after the staking has been completed. Notify the Owner's Representative one week in advance of review. Modifications will be identified by the Owner's Representative at this review. 3.02 LAYOUT OF WORK: A. Stake out the irrigation system. Items staked include: sprinklers, pipe, control valves, manual drains, pumping plant, controller, and isolation valves. B. Install all mainline pipe and mainline components inside of project property lines. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 -10 Irrigation 3.03 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING. AND BACKFILLING: A. Excavate to permit the pipes to be laid at the intended elevations and to permit work space for installing connections and fittings. B. Minimum cover (distance from top of pipe or control wire to finish grade): 1. 24-inch over non -potable mainline pipe and over electrical conduit. — 2. 26-inch over control wire. 3. 36-inch over potable mainline. 4. 12-inch over lateral pipe to sprinklers and over manifold pipe to drip system zone control valves. 5. 12-inch over drip lateral pipe in turf or paved areas downstream of drip system zone control valves. 6. 3-inch minimum mulch cover over drip lateral pipe in planting beds downstream of drip system zone control valves. 7. PVC UV radiation resistant lateral pipe shall be installed directly on the soil surface. — C. Maintain at least 15-feet clearance from the centerline of any tree. D. Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested. E. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill shall be free from rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 2-inches in maximum dimension. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed — next to pipe shall be free of sharp objects which may damage the pipe. F. Backfill unsleeyed pipe and sleeves ineither of the followinmannes:________- commpeAEHots: Section F _tlonrsdiets $*Won 0; do not use 1. Backfill and puddle the lower half of the trench. Allow to dry d 24 hours. troth. s tssnng it spsctned - o and P - Backfill the remainder of the trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density H state frsqusney oftest of surrounding soil. 2. Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil G. Enclose pipe and wiring beneath roadways, walks, curbs, etc., in sleeves. — Minimum compaction of backfill for sleeves shall be 95% Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698-78. Conduct one compaction test for each sleeved crossing less than 50 feet long. Conduct two compaction tests for each sleeved — crossing greater than 50 feet long. Costs for such testing and any necessary retesting shall be bome by the Contractor. Use of water for compaction around sleeves, "puddling", will not be permitted. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. . 02810 - 11 Irrigation H. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Incorporate excess backfill into existing site grades. Where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipe work, contact the Owner's Representative for trench depth adjustments. 3.04 SLEEVING AND BORING: A. Install sleeving at a depth which permits the encased pipe or wiring to remain at the specified burial depth. B. Extend sleeve ends six inches beyond the edge of the paved surface. Cover pipe ends and mark with stakes. Mark concrete with a chiseled "x" at sleeve end locations. C. Bore for sleeves under obstructions which cannot be removed. Employ equipment and methods designed for horizontal boring. 3.05 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. General: Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur. Clean pipe ends. 2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly. 3. Trenches may be curved to change direction or avoid obstructions within the limits of the curvature of the pipe. Minimum radius of curvature and offset per 20 foot length of pipe by pipe size are shown in the following table. All curvature results from the bending of the pipe lengths. No deflection will be allowed at a pipe joint. SIZE RADIUS OFFSET PER 20'LENGTH 1 '/2" 25' T-8" 2" 25' 7'8" 2'/:" 100, 1'-11" 3" 100, 1'-11" 4" 100, 1'-11" Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 -12 Irrigation B. Mainline Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use only strap -type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. 2. PVC Rubber-Gasketed Pipe: a. Use pipe lubricant. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Ductile iron fittings shall not be struck with a metallic tool. Cushion blows with a wood block or similar shock absorber. 3. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in a manner recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in pipe. C. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench. 4. Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted. C. Lateral Pine and Fittinos: 1. Use only strap -type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. 2. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in the manner recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in the pipe. C. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench. 3. UV Radiation Resistant Polyethylene Pipe: a. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench. Pipe is not to be compressed or crimped by construction activity. 4. Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 13 Irrigation D. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Copper Pipe: a. Buff surfaces to be joined to a bright finish. Coat with solder flux. 2. Solder so that a continuous bead shows around the joint circumference. 3. Ductile Iron Pipe: a. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. 4. Insert a dielectric union wherever a copper -based metal (copper, brass, bronze) and an iron -based metal (iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel) are joined. 5. Low Density Polyethylene Hose: Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Flanged connections: Install stainless steel studs and nuts and rubber gaskets per manufacturer's recommendations. 7. PVC Threaded Connections: a. Use only factory -formed threads. Field -cut threads are not permitted. b. Use only nonhardening, nontoxic thread sealant. C. When connection is plastic -to -metal, the plastic component shall have male threads and the metal component shall have female threads. 8. Make metal -to -metal, threaded connections with nonhardening, nontoxic pipe sealant applied to the male threads only. 9. Pipe marking tape: Install tape per installation details. E. Thrust Blocks: 1. Use cast -in -place concrete bearing against undisturbed soil. 2. Size, orientation and placement shall be as shown on the installation details. 3. Wrap fitting with plastic to protect bolts, joint, and fitting from concrete. 4. Install rebar with mastic coating as shown on the installation details. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 -14 Irrigation Sent By: GTC; 3037766525; Sep-29-03 10:42AM; Page 6/6 CNA 1. The following is added to the Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit Condition: e. An additional insured under this endorsement will as soon as practicable: (1) Give written notice of an occurrence or an offense to us which may result in a claim or "suit° under this insurance; (2) Tender the defense and indemnity of any claim or 'suit' to any other insurer which also has insurance for a loss we cover under this Coverage Part; and (3) Agree to make available any other insurance which the additional insured has for a loss we cover under this Coverage Part G-140331-A (Ed. 01/01) f. We have no duty to defend or indemnify an additional insured under this endorsement until we receive written notice of a claim or "suit' from the additional insured, 2. Paragraph 4.b. of the Other Insurance Condition is deleted and replaced with the following: 4. other Insurance b. Excess Insurance This insurance is excess over any other insurance naming the additional insured as an insured whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis unless a written contract or written agreement specifically requires that this insurance be either primary or primary and noncontributing. G-140331-A (Ed. 01101) Page 2 of 2 F. Joint Restraint Harness: 1. Install harness in the manner recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF MAINLINE COMPONENTS: A. Main System Shut Off Valve: Install where indicated on the drawings. B. Winterization Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings. C. Backflow Prevention Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings. Install assembly so that its elevation, orientation, access, and drainage conform to the manufacturers recommendations and applicable health codes. D. Isolation Gate Valve Assembly: 1. Install where indicated on the drawings. 2. Locate at least 12-inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas. E. Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings. F. Air -Vacuum Relief Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on drawings or nearest high point, not closer than 2.25-feet from nearest fitting. G. Manual Drain Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings and at other low points in the mainline piping. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals: 1. Flush mainline before installation of RCV assembly. 2. Install where indicated on the drawings. Wire connectors and waterproof sealant shall be used to connect control wires to remote control valve wires. Install connectors and sealant per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Install only one RCV to a valve box. Locate valve box at least 12-inches from and align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group RCV assemblies together where practical. Arrange grouped valve boxes In rectangular patterns. Allow at least 124nches between valve boxes. 4. Adjust RCV to regulate the downstream operating pressure. 5. Attach ID tag with controller station number to control wiring. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 15 Irrigation B. Sprinkler Assembly: Flush lateral pipe before installing sprinkler assembly. 2. Install per the installation details at locations shown on the drawings. 3. Locate rotary sprinklers 6-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of paved areas. 4. Locate spray sprinklers 3-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of paved areas. 5. Install sprinklers perpendicular to the finish grade. 6. Supply appropriate nozzle or adjust arc of coverage of each sprinkler for best performance. 7. Adjust the radius of throw of each sprinkler for best performance. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF DRIP IRRIGATION COMPONENTS: A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Drip Laterals: Flush mainline pipe before installing RCV assembly. 2. Locate as shown on the drawings. Wire connectors and waterproof sealant shall be used to connect control wires to remote control valve wires. Connectors and sealant shall be installed as per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Install only one RCV to valve box. Locate at least 12-inches from and align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group RCV assemblies together where practical. 4. Arrange grouped valve boxes in rectangular patterns. Set RCV assembly discharge pressure to 30 PSI. B. Zone Control Valve Assembly: Install at locations shown on the drawings. C. Drio Emitter Assembly: 1. Locate as shown on the drawings and installation details. 2. Flush lateral pipe before installing emitter assembly. 3. Cut emitter outlet distribution tubing square. 4. Install an access sleeve as part of each multiple -outlet emitter assembly for emitters located in turf areas. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 -16 Irrigation 5. Use tools and techniques recommended by the manufacturer. Make openings for barb -mounted emitters with the emitter manufacturer's hole - punching tool. D. Flush Cap Assembly: Install at the end of each drip irrigation lateral pipe as shown on the installation details. E. Pressure Adjustment Procedure: 1. Fully open all zone control valves and energize the RCV assembly. 2. Determine which emitter has the least outlet pressure; this is the critical emitter. 3. Identify zone control valve associated with the critical emitter; this is the critical zone control valve. 4. Set discharge pressure of RCV such that the critical pressure compensating emitter has a pressure of 25 PSI ± 5 PSI. Measure with pressure gauge attached to critical emitter. 5. Identify the critical emitter for remaining zone control valves. 6. Set each zone control valve such that its critical pressure compensating emitter has a pressure of 25 PSI ± 5 PSI. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. Irrigation Controller Unit: 1. The location of the controller unit as depicted on the drawings is approximate; the Owner's Representative will determine the exact site location upon commencement of contract. 2. Lightning protection: Drive 8-foot copper -clad grounding rod into the soil. If rock prevents driving, bury at least four feet deep. Use one rod for each controller. Connect controller to grounding rod with AWG No. 10 solid conductor copper wire. Secure wire to grounding rod with brass or bronze clamp. Locate the connection in a separate valve box. Lightning protection: Provide on all remote control valve wiring as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide other components such as ground rod, grounding wire, etc., to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Attach wire markers to the ends of control wires inside the controller unit housing. Label wires with the identification number (see drawings) of the remote control valve to which the control wire is connected. 4. Install combination switch/GFCI outlet inside the controller pedestal. 5. Connect control wires to the corresponding controller terminal. Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 17 Irrigation B. Control Wire: 1. Bundle control wires where two or more are in the same trench. Bundle with pipe wrapping tape spaced at 10-foot intervals. 2. Control wiring may be chiseled into the soil utilizing a vibratory plow device specifically manufactured for pipe pulling and wire installation. Appropriate chisel must be used so that wire is fed into a chute on the chisel, and wire is not subject to pulling tension. Minimum burial depth must equal minimum cover previously listed. 3. Provide a 24-inch excess length of wire in an 8-inch diameter loop at each 90 degree change of direction, at both ends of sleeves, and at 100-foot intervals along continuous runs of wiring. Do not tie wiring loop. Coil 24- inch length of wire within each remote control valve box. 4. Install common ground wire and one control wire for each remote control valve. Multiple valves on a single control wire are not permitted. 5. If a control wire must be spliced, make splice with wire connectors and waterproof sealant, installed per the manufacturer's instructions. Locate splice in a valve box which contains an irrigation valve assembly, or in a separate 12-inch standard valve box. Use same procedure for connection to valves as for in -line splices. 6. Unless noted on plans, install wire parallel with and below PVC mainline pipe. Protect wire not installed with PVC mainline pipe with a continuous run of warning tape placed in the backfill six inches above the wiring. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS: A. Tools and Spare Parts: Prior to the Review at completion of construction, supply to the Owner operating keys, servicing tools, spare parts, test equipment, and any other items indicated in the General Notes on the drawings. B. Other Materials: Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details which are part of the irrigation system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. 3.11 PROJECT RECORD (AS -BUILT) DRAWINGS: A. Submit Record Drawings under provisions of Section 01700 - Contractor Closeout, Record Documents. The Contractor is responsible for documenting changes to the design. Maintain on -site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 18 Irrigation contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until as -built information is recorded. B. Record pipe and wiring network alterations. Record work which is installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each irrigation system valve, each backfiow prevention device, each controller or control unit, each sleeve end, each stub -out for future pipe or wiring connections, and other irrigation components enclosed within a valve box. C. Prior to construction completion, obtain from the Owner's Representative a reproducible mylar copy of the drawings. Mylars or CAD data files compatible with AutoCAD software, can be purchased from the Owner's Representative. Cost of mylar reproducible drawings is $25 per sheet and the cost of AutoCAD data files on diskette is $100 per project set. Using technical drafting pen or CAD, duplicate information contained on the project drawings maintained on site. Label each sheet "Record Drawing". D. Turn over the "Record Drawings" to the Owner's Representative. Completion of the Record Drawings will be a prerequisite for the Review at the completion of the irrigation system installation. 3.12 WINTERIZATION AND SPRING START-UP: A. Winterize the irrigation system in the fall following final acceptance of irrigation system and start-up the irrigation system the following spring. Repair any damage caused in improper winterization at no additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate the winterization and start-up with the landscape maintenance personnel. 3.13 MAINTENANCE: A. Upon completion of construction and Review by the Owner's Representative, maintain irrigation system for a duration of 30 calendar days. Make periodic examinations and adjustments to irrigation system components so as to achieve the most desirable application of water. B. Following completion of the Contractor's maintenance period, the Owner will be responsible for maintaining the system in working order during the remainder of the guarantee/warranty period, for performing necessary minor maintenance, for trimming around sprinklers, for protecting against vandalism, and for preventing damage after the landscape maintenance operation. 3.14 CLEANUP: A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish. END OF SECTION Fort Collins Community Horticulture Center Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02810 - 19 Irrigation DIVISION 2-SITE WORK SECTION 02820-PREFABRICATED BUILDING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: Furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the pump building, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: A. Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees. B. Provision and installation of prefabricated pump building. C. Provision and installation of electrical and mechanical components in pump building. D. Restoration of finish grade to area disturbed by construction. E. Maintenance period. 1.02 DISCREPANCIES: It is the intent of these plans and specification that the all equipment installed in the pump building be complete and workable. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make sure that the equipment furnished is compatible and adheres to all regulations. Any discrepancies should be noted immediately and should be reported to the Owner's Representative for clarification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Deliver four (4) copies of all submittals to the Owner's Representative within 15 days from the date of Notice to Proceed. B. Materials List: Include pipe, fittings, mechanical, and electrical components. Quantities of materials need not be included. C. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, specifications, and operating instructions for all equipment supplied. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of building and other drawings called for in the installation details or specifications. Show products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note modifications to the installation detail. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02820 - 1 Prefabricated Building 1.04 RULES AND REGULATIONS: A. Work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code, the Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the Western Plumbing Officials Association, and applicable laws and regulations of the governing authorities. B. When the contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above -mentioned rules and regulations, provide the quality and size required by the contract documents. C. If quantities are provided either in specifications or on these drawings, these quantities are provided for information only. It is the contractor's responsibility to determine the actual quantities of all material, equipment, and supplies required by the project and to complete an independent estimate of quantities and wastage. 1.05 TESTING: A. Notify the Owner's Representative three days in advance of testing. B. Operate pumps, control circuits, ventilators, outlets, and building lights. C. Adjust or move system components to correct deficiencies. Repeat the test until the Owner's Representative approves the test results. D. Cement or caulking to seal piping leaks is prohibited. 1.06 GUARANTEEMARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT: The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Owner receives materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner. A. For a period of one year from commencement of the formal maintenance period, guarantee/warranty materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape or distribution system components damaged by the settlement of trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within seven days of notification from the Owner's Representative. B. Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work. Make replacements at no additional cost to the contract price. C. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02820 - 2 Prefabricated Building "' PART 2: MATERIALS 2.01 QUALITY: Materials used in the system shall be new and without flaws or defects of any type, and shall be the best of their class and kind. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Make complete submittals of all manufacturer's data showing compliance with the Contract Documents. B. In making a request for a substitution, the Contractor represents that he: Has investigated the proposed substitution and found that it is the same or better quality, level, capacity, function, or appearance than the specified product, and can demonstrate that to the Owner's Representative. 2. Will coordinate the installation and make all modifications to the work which may be required for complete installation and operation of the system. C. The Owner's Representative will determine acceptability of the proposed substitution and will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection. D. Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be increased at the option of the Contractor. 2.03 PREFABRICATED BUILDING AND COMPONENTS: A. Provide materials required by local codes for installation of the pump building and associated piping. B. Prefabricated frame oumo buildina: 1. Minimum inside dimensions as shown on the drawings and T-6" high. 2. Precast concrete roof and walls with cast out openings for vents and piping as shown in details. Thicken roof slab at seam and slope roof slab away from the seam. 3. Provide roof and walls with openings for vents and piping as shown in details. 4. Furnish building manufactured by Tuff Shed, Fort Collins, CO. or approved equal. 5. Furnish shop drawings for approval. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02820 - 3 Prefabricated Building 2.04 PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. PVC Pipe and Fittings: Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784, with an integral belled end suitable for solvent welding. 2. Use Class 200, SDR-21, rated at 200 PSI, conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241 for all pump system discharge pipe outside of pump building. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to _ conform to ASTM Standard D2564. B. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: Steel pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe, ASTM Standard A120. Fittings shall be flanged or grooved, standard weight, malleable iron fittings. Use ITT Gruvloc or Victaulic grooved fittings. 2. Use 125/150 lb. cast iron flanged fittings with stainless steel studs and nuts and non asbestos gaskets. 3. Use a dielectric union wherever a copper -based metal (copper, brass, bronze) is joined to an iron -based metal (iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel). 4. Assemblies calling for threaded pipe connections shall utilize PVC Schedule 80 nipples and PVC Schedule 80 threaded fittings. 5. Joint sealant: Use only Teflon -type tape pipe joint sealant on plastic threads. Use nonhardening, nontoxic pipe joint sealant formulated for use on water -carrying pipes on metal threaded connections. 2.05 PIPING COMPONENTS: A. PPi a Support Stand: Furnish manufactured or fabricated steel pipe support stand. Support must be capable of supporting 500 lbs. dead load and be adjustable within the range shown on the pump piping detail. 2.06 OTHER COMPONENTS: A. Tools: Provide operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, and other items indicated in the General Notes of the drawings and other incidental hardware and fixtures as required. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02820 - 4 Prefabricated Building PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS: A. Site Inspections: Verify locations of underground utilities. Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities to the Owner's Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING: A. Excavate to permit the concrete pump building and pipes to be laid at the intended elevations and to permit work space for installing connections and fittings. B. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill shall be free from rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 2-inches in maximum dimension. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next to pipe shall be free of sharp objects which may damage the pipe. C. Backfill excavated areas in either of the following manners: 1. Backfill and puddle the lower half of the trench. Allow to dry 24 hours. Backfill the remainder of the trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding soil. 2. Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil. D. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. 3.03 PREFABRICATED BUILDING AND COMPONENTS: A. Prefabricated Building: Install prefabricated building as shown in detail. Submit shop drawings of proposed building prior to construction. 1. Install 4-inch gravel base over compacted subgrade. Install conduit prior to building floor installation. Coordinate pump mounting pedestal with cast -in -place floor. 2. Install building per manufacturer's instructions. Caulk and seal all joints and penetrations. 3. Install galvanized vandal proof screens for all louvers. Paint screens to match building exterior. 4. Install threshold and weather stripping at entry door. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02820 - 5 Prefabricated Building Clinntli- ALIAS GOLDTRI ACORDn. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE 10/15/03Dnrrr) PRODUCER HRH of Colorado 720 S. Colorado Blvd Ste PH N P.O. Box 469025 Denver, CO 80246-9025 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED Golden Triangle Construction, Inc. 700 Weaver Park Rd. Longmont, CO 80501 INSURERA: CNA Insurance Companies 31194 INSURERS: Pinnacol Assurance NsuRER c: NSURER D: INSURER E: COVFRAGFS THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR INSRC TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POALICY EFFECTIVE TE IMM/DD1YYI POLICY XPIIR TION OLITE EXPIRATION LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY TCP2022866738 12/31/02 12/31/03 EACH OCCURRENCE $1 OOO OOO X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RENTEDPREMI PS fE. occurrence) $SOO OOO CLAIMS MADE FX] OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $5 000 PERSONAL B ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $2000000 POLICY X PRO- JECT X LOC A AUTOMOBILE X LIABILITY ANY AUTO BUA2022866741 12/31/02 12/31/03 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS X BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ HIRED AUTOS NON-OWNEDAUTOS X PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ ANY AUTO $ AUTO ONLY: AGG A EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY CUP2022866786 12/31/02 12/31/03 EACH OCCURRENCE s2,000,000 X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE s2,000,000 $ DEDUCTIBLE $ X RETENTION $ 10000 B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND 4013024 07/01/03 10/01/04 OTH- X WC STATII- IER EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETORIPARTNEFJEXECUTIVE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 OFFICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? If yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS 1 LOCATIONS 1 VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS 2003 Gardens on Spring Creek/ Educational Wing Addition Bid No. 5748 City of Fort Collins, Colorado, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in contract supplementary (See Attached Descriptions) LnacuvL�a�a City of Fort Collins, Colorado 300 LaPorte Avenue Fort Collins, CO 80522 LD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL In DAYS WRITTEN ;E TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL iE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR ACORD 25 (2001/08) 1 of 3 #S782015/M165058 CSJ O ACORD CORPORATION 1988 B. Concrete Building Floor: Construct cast -in -place concrete building floor. 1. Use 3000 PSI concrete for concrete floor. Install No. 4 rebar on 12-inch centers both directions to form a grid in concrete floor. 2. Coordinate location and installation of bolts to secure building to floor with building manufacturer prior to construction. 3.04 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. General: 1. Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur. Clean pipe ends. 2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly. B. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Use only strap -type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe. —� 2. PVC Rubber-Gasketed Pipe: a. Use pipe lubricant. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Epoxy -coated steel fittings shall not be struck with a metallic tool. Cushion blows with a wood block or similar shock absorber. 3. PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: a. Use primer and solvent cement. Join pipe in a manner recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in pipe. C. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench. _ C. Specialized Pipe and Fittings: 1. Steel Pipe: a. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02820 - 6 Prefabricated Building b. Use factory -made threads whenever possible. Field -cut threads will be permitted only where absolutely necessary. Cut threads on axis using clean, sharp dies. C. Apply Teflon -type tape or pipe joint compound to the male threads only. d. Install grooved pipe and flanged connections per manufacturer's recommendations. e. Paint all above grade pipe with epoxy paint. Color to match color supplied by irrigation pump station manufacturer. 2. Insert a dielectric union wherever a copper -based metal (copper, brass, bronze) and an iron -based metal (iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel) are joined. 3. PVC Threaded Connections: a. Use only factory -formed threads. Field -cut threads are not permitted. b. Use only Teflon -type tape. G. When connection is plastic -to -metal, the plastic component shall have male threads and the metal component shall have female threads. 4. Make metal -to -metal, threaded connections with Teflon -type tape or pipe joint compound applied to the male threads only. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING COMPONENTS: A. Pipe Support Stand: Install where indicated on drawings. 2. Secure to concrete floor with galvanized or cadmium plated steel expansion bolts. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS: A. Tools: Prior to the Pre -Maintenance Review, supply to the Owner operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, and any other items indicated on the drawings. B. Paint all unfinished steel surfaces with at least two (2) coats of Sherwin-Williams Polane textured epoxy. Prepare metal surfaces and prime per manufacturer's instructions. Color will be determined by the Owner's Representative FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02820 - 7 Prefabricated Building C. Other Materials: Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details to be part of the pump building and mechanical system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. —' 3.07 PROJECT RECORD (AS -BUILT) DRAWINGS: A. Maintain on -site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until as -built information is recorded. B. Record pipe and wiring network alterations. Record work which is installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points. C. Prior to Final Review, obtain from the Owner's Representative a reproducible mylar copy of the drawings. Using technical drafting pen, duplicate information contained on the project drawings maintained on site. Label each sheet "Record Drawing". Completion of the Record Drawings will be a prerequisite for the Final Review. 3.08 MAINTENANCE: A. Upon completion of Final Review, maintain the pump building mechanical system for a duration of 30 calendar days. Make periodic examinations and adjustments to the system components so as to achieve the most desirable operating conditions. 3.09 CLEANUP: A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish. B. Remove all debris and foreign material from the construction area and pump building prior to operating the system. END OF SECTION FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02820 - 8 Prefabricated Building DIVISION 2-SITE WORK SECTION 02840-PUMP SYSTEM INTAKE PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: Furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the PUMP SYSTEM INTAKE, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: A. Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees. B. Provision, excavation, installation, and backfill of 72" round pre -cast wet well sections. C. Provision, excavation, installation, and backfill of 48" pre -cast junction/cleanout manholes. D. Provision, excavation, installation, and backfill of wet well intake pipe, head gate, line gate valves, and filter backwash pipe. E. Coordination with site work, grading, pump system installation, pump house construction, and installation of potable water supply for winter watering needs. 1.02 DISCREPANCIES: It is the intent of these plans and specification that the pump system intake be complete and workable. It is the Contractor's responsibility to make sure that the equipment furnished is compatible and adheres to all regulations. Any discrepancies should be noted immediately and should be reported to the Owner's Representative for clarification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Materials List: Include pipe, fittings, and valves. Quantities of materials need not be included. B. Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' catalog cuts, specifications, and operating instructions for all equipment supplied. C. Shoo Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in the installation details or specifications. Show products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note modifications to the installation detail. 1.04 RULES AND REGULATIONS: A. Work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the Western Plumbing Officials Association, and applicable laws and regulations of the governing authorities. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02840 - 1 Pump System Intake B. When the contract documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above -mentioned rules and regulations, provide the quality and size required by the contract documents. C. If quantities are provided either in specifications or on these drawings, these quantities are provided for information only. It is the contractor's responsibility to determine the actual quantities of all material, equipment, and supplies required by the project and to complete an independent estimate of quantities and wastage. — 1.05 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT: The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Owner receives concrete and plumbing materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner. A. For a period of one year from commencement of the formal maintenance period, guarantee/warranty pump system intake materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape or structural — features damaged by the settlement of trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within seven days of notification from the Owner's Representative. B. Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work. Make replacements at no additional cost to the contract price. C. Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period. PART 2: MATERIALS 2.01 UQ ALITY: -� Materials used in the system shall be new and without flaws or defects of any type, and shall be the best of their class and kind. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and may be increased at the option of the Contractor. 2.03 PRECAST CONCRETE WET WELL: A. Provide shop drawings showing complete information for the fabrication and installation of the precast concrete sections. Include special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection. B. Provide layout dimensions, and identification of each precast unit. Detail inserts, connections, blockouts, joints, accessories and openings. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02840 - 2 Pump System Intake C. Manufacturer of precast concrete units is responsible for design of reinforcement and its placement. Fabricate units with concrete having minimum compressive strength of 4000 PSI at 28 days using Type 1-11 cement. Furnish test reports of concrete indicating compressive strength. 2. Certify that the concrete units fabricated and installed will support the required design loads. D. Fabricate precast sections in conformance with to ASTM C-478 designation for manufacturing, testing, and quality control. E. Furnish precast units with concrete finish equal to smooth steel formed as -cast concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal form joint marks, minor cracking, chips and spalls, and normal color variations will be permitted. F. Furnish wet well and junction /cleanout manhole as shown on drawings. 1. Insert type plastic coated steel access steps installed on 12-inch centers. 2. Cast out gasketed openings for intake pipe as shown in details. G. Furnish precast concrete sections manufactured with tongue and groove joints installed with a joint sealant. 2.04 PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. PVC Pipe and Fittinos: Use rigid, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe, extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification 12454-A or 12454-B,, ASTM Standard 01784, with an integral belled end suitable for solvent welding. Use Sewer and Drain Pipe, SDR-26, conforming to the dimensions and tolerances established by ASTM Standard D2241. Use PVC pipe rated at higher pressures than Class 200 in the case of small nominal diameters which are not manufactured in Class 200. 2. Use rubber-gasketed pipe equipped with factory installed reinforced gaskets for pipe with a nominal diameter greater than or equal to 3- inches. Gasketed pipe joints must conform to the "Laboratory Qualifying Tests" section of ASTM D3139. Gasket material must conform to ASTM F477. Use rubber-gasketed deep bell ductile iron fittings conforming to ASTM A-536 and ASTM F-477. Use lubricant approved by the pipe manufacturer. Use solvent weld pipe for pipe with a nominal diameter less than 3-inches or where a pipe connection occurs in a sleeve. Use Schedule 40, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 and D1784. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02840 - 3 Pump System Intake 2.05 ISOLATION GATE VALVE: _ A. As presented in the installation details. Install a separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly. Acceptable manufacturers are Clow, Kennedy, Matco, Nibco, Mueller, or Waterous. B. Furnish valve with optional 2-inch square operating nut. C. Furnish valve key for valve operating nut. D. Furnish with valve box, cover, 4-inch PVC pipe section as shown in detail. E. Furnish valve key for valve operating nut. 2.06 HEAD GATE: Provide head gate and associated components as noted in the installation details. 2.07 OTHER COMPONENTS: Provide any special tools, operating keys for isolation valves, servicing tools for screen as required. PART 3: EXECUTION _ 3.01 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS: A. Site Inspections: r 1. Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this section. Report irregularities to the Owner's Representative prior to beginning work. 2. Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify locations of underground utilities. 3.02 EXCAVATION. TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING: A. Excavate to permit the pipes and the precast wet well to be set at the intended elevations and to permit work space for installing connections and fittings. B. Minimum cover (distance from top of pipe to finish grade) is 24-inch over filter system backwash pipe. C. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill shall be free from rubbish, vegetable matter, frozen materials, and stones larger than 2-inches in —, maximum dimension. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next to pipe shall be free of sharp objects which may damage the pipe. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02840 - 4 Pump System Intake D. Backfill pipe in either of the following manners: Backfill and puddle the lower half of the trench. Allow to dry 24 hours. Backfill the remainder of the trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding soil. 2. Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil. E. Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Incorporate excess backfill into existing site grades. F. Where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipe work, contact the Owner's Representative for trench depth adjustments. 3.03 PRECAST CONCRETE: A. Coordinate exact location of fixtures with Architect prior to installation. B. Install units on a 6-inch gravel subbase over compacted subgrade in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Lift, place, and secure units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final shop drawings. Do not install units until supporting members are in place and secured. 1. Lift only at lifting points provided and install temporary shoring and bracing as necessary. 2. Level units accurately and in acceptable condition to allow installation of subsequent work. 3. Grout all joints and repair damaged exposed surfaces as required. 3.04 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS: A. General: Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur. Clean pipe ends. 2. Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly. 3. Join pipe according to industry standards and manufacturer's recommendation. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02840 - 5 Pump System Intake B. Pipe and Fittings: 1. PVC Rubber-Gasketed Pipe: a. Use pipe lubricant. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Epoxy -coated steel fittings shall not be struck with a metallic tool. Cushion blows with a wood block or similar shock absorber. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF ISOLATION VALVE: A. Install where indicated on drawings. B. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install operating extension, valve box and cover as shown in installation details and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.06 INSTALLATION HEAD GATE: A. Install where indicated on drawings. B. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS: A. Tools: Prior to the Final Review, supply to the Owner, operating keys, servicing ^" tools, and any other items indicated on the drawings. B. Other Materials: Install other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details to be part of the pump intake system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications. 3.08 PROJECT RECORD (AS -BUILT) DRAWINGS: A. Maintain on -site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until as -built information is recorded. B. Record pipe alterations. Record work which is installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points. C. Prior to Final Review, obtain from the Owner's Representative a reproducible mylar copy of the drawings. Using technical drafting pen, duplicate information contained on the project drawings maintained on site. Label each sheet "Record Drawing". Completion of the Record Drawings will be a prerequisite for the Final Review. FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02840 - 6 Pump System Intake 3.09 CLEANUP: A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish. B. Remove all debris and foreign material from the construction area and wet well. END OF SECTION FORT COLLINS HORTICULTURE CENTER Aqua Engineering, Inc. 02840 - 7 Pump System Intake SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the loth day of January in the year of 2003 and shall be effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City. The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and Golden Triangle Construction Inc. (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR) OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of an Education Wing Addition, of approximately 865 square feet floor space, to the greenhouse/administration building of the Gardens on Spring Creek, and is generally described in Section 01100. ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER The Project has been designed by EDAW, INC., who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all duties and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES 3.1 The Work shall be Substantially Complete within 60 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the General Conditions. 3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1. above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in proving in a legal proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 1 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25-S (2001/08) 2 of 3 #S182015/M765058 No Text SECTION 02870 - SITE FURNISHINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following site and street furnishings: 1. Benches. 2. Bicycle racks. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. NA C. Products fiunished, but not installed under this Section, include anchor bolts to be cast in concrete footings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, field -assembly requirements, and installation details. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes. C. Product Schedule: For site and street furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Maintenance Data: For site and street furnishings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site and street furnishings through one source from a single manufacturer. 02870 - 1 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Benches: a. BRP Enterprises, Inc. Model MC110-72-MF Black 2. Bicycle Racks: a. Madrax Winder Plus Model WP158-9-SF-P Black PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site and street furnishings, where required. B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site and street furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed. C. Install site and street furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored using manufacturer's vandal resistant hardware at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.3 CLEANING A. After completing site and street furnishing installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component. END OF SECTION 02870 02870 - 2 SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPE TREES AND SHRUBS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to complete installation of the plantings and guarantee as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are: 1. Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees. 2. Installation of trees and shrubs. 3. Mulch. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Tree Protection: Section 02122. B. Irrigation: Section 02810, C. Seed Construction: Section 02940. D. Planting Maintenance: Section 02970. 1.3 SUBMITTALS & QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submittals and test results shall be directed to the City Representative and shall be approved in writing before affected work commences. ALL COSTS TO ENSURE QUALITY SHALL BE PAID BY THE CONTRACTOR. 1. Submit three copies of manufacturer's specifications and literature on all products. 2. Submit three copies of complete materials list including quantities and descriptions of materials. B. Summary of submittals from this section: l . Compost analysis. 2. Mulch. 3. Plant material. C. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation and who shall direct all work performed under this section. 02900 -1 1.4 INSPECTIONS A. Site Inspection: 1. Contractor will inspect existing site conditions and note irregularities affecting the work of this section. Verify that grading operations have been satisfactorily completed and that topsoil of adequate quantity and quality has been placed in all disturbed areas as specified. Verify that the areas to be revegetated are protected from concentrated runoff and sediment from adjacent areas. Note any previous treatments to the areas such as temporary seeding or mulching and discuss with the City Representative how these treatments will affect permanent revegetation. Report all irregularities affecting work of this section to the City Representative before initiating work. When the Contractor begins work under this section, it implies acceptance of r existing conditions. 2. Contractor shall notify City Representative prior to start of work. City Representative will be responsible to monitor the work. B. Pre -planting Inspections: 1. All plant material shall be inspected by a City Forestry Representative before planting. Inspection of materials may be sequenced by major planting areas to accommodate efficient planting operations. Plants for inspection must be in a single location, preferably on the project site. All rejected materials must be removed from the site, replaced and reinspected before planting. If the supplier is a local nursery, tagged plants may be inspected at the nursery. Photographs of the plant materials to be obtained from non -local sources may be submitted to the City Forestry Representative for preliminary inspection. This preliminary inspection is subject to final approval of plants at the job site. The Owner reserves the right to reject any plant material at any stage of construction or guarantee period. _ 2. All soil amendments, backfill mixes and mulches will be inspected at the site by the City Representative before they are used in planting operations. 3. City and Forestry Representatives will inspect staked locations of all trees before digging for those plants occurs. City Representatives will inspect the location of all shrubs in their containers at the proposed locations before digging commences. Contact City Representatives at least two days in advance. C. Final Inspection: 1. As soon as all planting is completed, a review and preliminary inspection to determine the _ condition of the vegetation will be held by the City Representatives upon request by the Contractor. 2. The inspection will occur only after the following conditions have been met: ^ a. All areas will be free of weeds and neatly cultivated; b. All plant basins shall be in good repair; C. Irrigation systems shall be fully operational with all heads properly adjusted; d. All debris and litter shall be cleaned up and all walkways and curbs shall be cleaned of soil and debris left from planting operations. 3. If, after the inspection, the City Representative is of the opinion that all work has been performed as per the Contract Documents, and that all vegetation is in satisfactory growing [OW1h11M condition, he will give the Contractor Written Notice of Acceptance and the Guarantee Period shall begin. Work requiring corrective action in the judgment of the City Representative shall be performed within the first ten (10) days of the guarantee period. Any work not performed within this time will necessitate an equivalent extension of the guarantee period. Corrective work and materials replacement shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, and shall be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 5. Final approval and Substantial Completion notice will be given when all deficiencies are corrected. D. End of Guarantee Period Inspection: 2. At the end of the second full growing season a City Representative will inspect all trees for satisfactory condition. The inspection shall take place in September and the City shall contact the Contractor concerning replacements. Replacements may take place the following spring if deemed proper or necessary. 3. The Contractor is responsible for removal of all tree stakes, wire and webbing at the end of the guarantee period. 1.5 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee landscape construction materials against defects due to any cause for a period of two years. B. Guarantee plant material used in this section against defects due to any cause for a period of two full growing seasons from the date of acceptance of all work. This guarantee includes insect infestation or infection by disease organisms. C. This guarantee will not be enforced should woody vegetation die due to vandalism; improper maintenance procedures carried out by the Owner involving over or under watering, lawn mower damage, over -fertilization, fire, flood, or hail or other similar circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor. D. Replace woody vegetation when it is no longer in a satisfactory condition as determined by the City Representative for the duration of the Guarantee Period. Make replacements within fourteen days of notification from the City Representative. Replacement planting for trees shall be done in the spring planting season, except as approved otherwise. Remove dead plants within seven days of notification. If a tree is in marginal condition at the end of the guarantee period it may be agreeable to both parties to wait until the end of the growing season before deciding whether to replace that tree. E. All replacements shall be of the same kind and size as originally specified and shall be installed as described in the contract documents unless changes are approved by the City Representative. Repairs and replacements shall be made at no expense to the Owner. Guarantee shall apply to originally specified and installed plants and other landscape materials, and any replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period. 02900 - 3 PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. A complete list of plants, including a schedule of quantities, sizes and other requirements is shown on the Landscape Plan. If discrepancies occur between quantities of plants indicated in the plant list and on the plan, the plan quantities shall govern. B. No substitutions shall be accepted without approval from the City Representative. C. Plant material shall meet the following conditions for quality: 1. Plant materials shall be a fast -class representative of its species; healthy, vigorous, well - branched and well proportioned with respect to height and width relationships. All plants shall be free from disease, injury, insects and weed roots. 2. The relationship of caliper, height and root ball size shall meet the ANSI Z60.1 standard. 3. There shall be no roots greater than one -tenth the diameter of the trunk circling more than one- third the way around in the top half of the root ball. Roots larger than this may be cut provided they are smaller than one-third the trunk's diameter. There shall be no kinked roots greater than one -fifth the trunk's diameter. Roots larger than this can be cut provided they are less than one-third the hunk's diameter. 4. Trees should be rooted into the root ball so that soil or media ruins intact and the trunk and root ball move as one when lifted. The trunk should bend when gently pushed, not pivot at or below the soil/media line. 5. The point where the topmost root in the root ball emerges from the trunk shall be visible at the soil/media surface. 6. There should be one dominant leader more or less straight to the top of the tree, with the largest branches spaced at least 6 inches apart. There can be a double leader in the top 10 percent of the tree. " 7. The tree canopy should be symmetrical, free of large voids and typical of the species or _ cultivar. Live crown ratio (distance from bottom of canopy to treetop:tree height) should be at least 60:100. 8. Branches should be less than two-thirds the trunk's diameter, free of bark inclusions and more _ or less distributed radially around the trunk. 9. Trees greater than 1-1/2 inches in caliper should be able to stand erect without a supporting stake. 10. The trunk and main branches shall be free of wounds (except for properly made pruning wounds), damaged areas, conks, bleeding, and signs of insects or disease. 11. The root ball shall be firm, and soil or media shall remain intact when plant material is handled appropriately. —' 12. No root larger than one -fifth the trunk diameter shall have grown out of the container's drainage holes. 13. There shall be live buds or foliage to the ends of all twigs. 14. Pruning wounds do not have to be closed over, but they shall have been made just outside the collar. 15. Open wounds or visible damage on the trunk shall not exceed one (1) inch in length or be more than 5 percent of the circumference of the trunk. Trunks shall not be wrapped before inspection. 16. All plants are subject to inspection. See 1.04 B. 02900 - 4 17. If any of the above conditions are not met, trees maybe rejected. D. Plant material that is grown in a zone more mild than USDA zone 5 shall be acclimated to Colorado conditions prior to planting. E. Digging, Wrapping, and Handling: Plants shall be dug and prepared for shipment in a manner that will not cause damage to branches, shape, and future development after planting: 1. Balled and burlapped plants shall be nursery grown stock adequately balled with fret, natural balls of soil in sizes and ratios conforming to the Colorado Nursery Act as cited above. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with non -treated burlap, secured with wire or jute, Broken balls will not be accepted. 2. Container grown plants shall have been nursery grown in containers and shall have sufficient roots to hold the entire soil mass together after container removal without being root -bound. 3. Options as to method: If all other requirements are met, a container grown plant may be substituted for a balled and burlapped or field collected plant. Trees transplanted by mechanical tree spade may be substituted for balled and burlapped trees as long as minimum ball sizes are equal to or larger than AAN Standards. Plant Protection: Plants shall be handled so roots are adequately protected at all times from drying out and from other injury. Protect balls of balled plants which cannot be planted within twelve hours of delivery with mulch or other suitable material. Where possible, store plants in the shade. Keep all plant roots moist before, during, and after planting. 2.2 SOIL AMENDMENT A. Compost: 1. Compost shall be dry, friable, free from lumps, stones, weed seeds, and other foreign matter, and free from mineral matter or chemical composition harmful to plant life. It shallbe a totally organic product that has been aerobically and naturally processed without the addition of coarse wood chips, in such a manner as to maintain a consistent temperature of 140 degrees Fahrenheit or greater for a period of time sufficient to eradicate weed seeds, offensive odors and harmful pathogens. 2. The compost must be produced at a site permitted in accordance with Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) and regulations pertaining to Solid Waste Sites and Facilities, 6CCR1007-2, Section 14, entitled: "Solid Waste Composting", effective September 1, 2000. A statement shall be supplied that certifies that the compost supplier is in compliance with these regulations, including the facility classification and applicable permit numbers. 3. The compost must be registered with the Colorado Department of Agriculture and approved for use on Colorado Certified Organic Farms by the Division of Plant Industry of the State of Colorado. 4. The compost shall meet the following characteristics: a. Allowable organic matter: 40 - 60% of dry weight. b. pH: 6.5 to 8.0 pH. c. Salts: <7 mmhos/cm. d. Carbon/Nitrogen Ratio: <16:1 e. Particle size: 100% passing through'/ -inch sieve 02900 - 5 f. Raw materials: agricultural organic byproducts, manure, yard trimmings, food, and/or sphagnum peat moss. Colorado mountain peat is not acceptable. 5.. Submit sample and documentation of analysis for City approval prior to use in planting. The analysis shall have been taken no more than 3 months prior to delivery. 2.3 STAKING MATERIALS A. Tree Stakes: 6-foot long metal "T" posts. B. Guying and Staking Wire: Galvanized iron or steel 12-gauge wire. C. Webbing: 2-inch nylon webbing. 2.4 MULCH A. Shredded wood: Mulch shall be free from noxious weed seed and all foreign material harmful to plant life. Submit samples. 2.5 HERBICIDE A. Round -Up. 2.6 WATERING A. No water will be available on site until installation of the irrigation system is complete. It is the intent that all plant material be watered using the irrigation system after installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLANTING WOODY VEGETATION A. Location: stake tree locations and place container shrubs as shown on the plans. Coordinate review of locations with City Representative. B. The following table identifies the minimum distances from trees to utilities etc. Item Minimum Distance (feet Curbs 5 Sidewalks 5 Electric buried cable 4 Water lines 15 Sewer lines 15 Gas lines 4 Street lights — Shade trees 40 02900 - 6 Street lights — Ornamental trees 15 Street signs 7 Intersections 30 Vaults and pits 5-10 Irrigation rotor heads 10 hi turf areas: Tree to tree — Shade trees 25 Tree to tree — Evergreen trees 15 Tree to tree — Ornamental trees 15 C. Planting Pits: 1. Dig planting pits two times the width of the root ball. See planting detail. 2. Roughen sides of the pit to remove any compacting or glazing. Mix loosened soil with specified backfill. D. Backfill Material: Tree and shrub planting pits shall be backfilled with the following mix: E. 3.2 1. 2/3 existing pit soil by volume. 2. 1 /3 soil amendment by volume. Thoroughly mix backfill material in accordance with industry accepted technique in order to obtain a uniform, evenly blended consistency, free from pockets of unblended material and clods or stones greater than two inches in diameter. Coordinate review of backfill mix with City Representative. Planting: 1. Place each tree and shrub in the planting pit so that it will be two inches above finish grade for trees and one inch above finish grade for shrubs. 2. Untie and remove burlap from top third of root ball on balled and burlapped material. Complete removal of wire baskets is required. 3. Backfill planting pit with backfill material and tamp to compact. Water in thoroughly. Be sure no soil is placed on top of the root ball. 4. Stake all trees in a true vertical position per the appropriate construction detail. 5. Coordinate woody vegetation operations with other construction activities so that the irrigation system can be used to water the vegetation immediately after planting. PLACING MULCH A. Place a layer of wood mulch in all tree rings to the depth of 3-4 inches as shown on the construction detail. Do not install weed barrier in tree rings. Deciduous tree rings shall be 4 feet in diameter, coniferous tree rings shall extend 1 foot beyond the drip line. B. Place mulch in all planting beds, if shrub or perennial beds are planned. Place mulch to a 3-4 inch depth. Do not use weed barrier in perennial or groundcover beds (if present). Gently brush mulch off of perennials once installed. Take care in placement not to damage newly planted vegetation. 02900 - 7 DESCRIPTIONS (Continued from Page 1) 1 conditions are Additional Insureds as respects to General Liability, Auto Liability and Umbrella Liability only if required by written contract and coverage applies only as respects ongoing operations performed by Insured for the Certificate Holder. All coverage terms, conditions and exclusions of the policy apply. Cancellation Clause & Materialy Altered amended: will mail 30 days written notice to the Certificate Holder. 10 days notice will be given for non-payment of premium. AMS 25.3 (2001/08) 3 of 3 #518201SIM165058 3.3 MAINTENANCE A. Continuously maintain all plantings included in the Contract from the beginning of Contract work and during the progress of work. See Section 02970 Planting Maintenance. B. The Owner will assume the responsibility of maintenance including watering, fertilizing, weeding, etc. upon written acceptance of Substantial Completion from the Owner. The Contractor shall _ periodically inspect the project during the two year guarantee period and immediately notify the Owner's Representative of any irregularities or deficiencies which will affect the guarantee. C. Round -Up herbicide may be used within mulched tree rings if necessary to eradicate weeds and grass. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for resetting of any plants to an upright position or to proper grade and for the removal and replacement of any dead plant material. 3.4 PROJECT RECORD (AS -BUILT DRAWING) A. Maintain one complete set of contract documents on site. Keep documents current. Record any changes in location, quantity and species of plant material. Submit corrected drawings to the Owner's Representative prior to final inspection. 3.5 TREE STAKES —. A. Remove all metal T-posts, wire and webbing at the end of the two season guarantee period. END OF SECTION 02900 02900 - 8 SECTION 02940 - SEEDING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall famish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and perform all work and services necessary for the establishment of irrigated turf seed, native seed, riparian seed, and garden cover crop seed in the quantities required. Furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a healthy, sound, and complete, craftsman - like installation. Work to include: 1. Application of herbicides. 2. Soil preparation. 3. Fine grading of all planting areas. 4. Seeding and mulch. 5. Maintenance during establishment. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Irrigation: Section 02810 B. Planting Maintenance: Section 02970 1.3 SUBMITTALS & QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit three copies of: 1. Manufacturer's specifications and literature on all products; 2. Manufacturer's tests (within 6 months of application) on supplied products; 3. Complete materials list including quantities and description of materials. B. Summary of submittals from this section: 1. Seed mix content. 2. Compost analysis. 3. Mulch. 4. Seed tags from bags. C. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the best methods for their installation and who shall direct all work performed under this section. 1.4 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: Contractor will inspect existing site conditions and note irregularities affecting the work of this section. Verify that grading operations have been satisfactorily completed and that 02940 - 1 top soil of adequate quantity and quality has been placed in all disturbed areas as specified. Verify that the areas to be re -vegetated are protected from concentrated runoff and sediment from adjacent _ areas. Note any previous treatments to the areas such as temporary seeding or mulching and discuss with the City Representative how these treatments will affect permanent re -vegetation. Report all irregularities affecting work of this section to the City Representative before initiating work. When the Contractor begins work under this section, it implies acceptance of existing conditions. B. Substantial and Final Acceptance: 1. Contractor shall notify City Representative prior to start of work. City Representative will monitor the work. 2. Upon completion of the seeding operations, the contractor shall notify the City Representative to review the work. If the areas seeded to riparian seed mix, native seed mix, and garden cover crop mix meet all criteria specified herein, that portion of the work shall receive a "Final Compliance". If the areas seeded to irrigated turf seed are acceptable, the City Representative shall record the date and issue a "Conditional Acceptance" certificate stating that the Contractor shall begin maintenance of these irrigated turf seeded areas as specified. 3. Irrigated turf seeded areas shall receive "Final Acceptance" provided a healthy, even colored, viable turf is established, free of weeds and undesirable grass species, disease and insects. Irrigated turf seeded areas shall meet the required density for seed establishment, as stipulated in 3.05 Maintenance. 1.5 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee seeded areas against defects for a period of one growing season from the date of final acceptance. B. This guarantee will not be enforced should seeded area die due to vandalism, improper maintenance by Owner, lawn mower damage, or other circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor. C. Replace seeded turf when it is no longer in a satisfactory condition as determined by the City Representative for the duration of the guarantee period. D. Irrigated turf seeded areas seeded in the spring shall be inspected for required coverage the following fall no later than October. Areas seeded in the fall will be inspected October of the following year. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 HERBICIDE A. Round -Up. 02940 - 2 2.2 SOIL AMENDMENT A. Compost: 1. Compost shall be dry, friable, free from lumps, stones, weed seeds, and other foreign matter, and free from mineral matter or chemical composition harmful to plant life. It shall be a totally organic product that has been aerobically and naturally processed without the addition of coarse wood chips, in such a manner as to maintain a consistent temperature of 140 degrees Fahrenheit or greater for a period of time sufficient to eradicate weed seeds, offensive odors and harmful pathogens. 2. The compost must be produced at a site permitted in accordance with Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) and regulations pertaining to Solid Waste Sites and Facilities, 6CCR1007-2, Section 14, entitled: "Solid Waste Composting", effective September 1, 2000. A statement shall be supplied that certifies that the compost supplier is in compliance with these regulations, including the facility classification and applicable permit numbers. 3. The compost must be registered with the Colorado Department of Agriculture and approved for use on Colorado Certified Organic Farms by the Division of Plant Industry of the State of Colorado. 4. The compost shall meet the following characteristics: a. Allowable organic matter: 40 - 60% of dry weight. b. pH: 6.5 to 8.0 pH. C. Salts: <7 mmhos/cm. d. Carbon/Nitrogen Ratio: <16:1 C. Particle size: 100% passing through '/a -inch sieve f. Raw materials: agricultural organic byproducts, manure, yard trimmings, food, and/or sphagnum peat moss. Colorado mountain peat is not acceptable. Submit sample and documentation of analysis for City approval prior to use in planting. The analysis shall have been taken no more than 3 months prior to delivery. a. Apply at a rate of six cubic yards per 1,000 square feet for all landscaped areas, including those where planting will be done by others. The exception to this is the parkway strip between Centre Avenue and the detached sidewalk. 2.3 SEED A. Seed shall be of the latest crop available and shall be certified seed with a PLS (pure live seed) rate no lower than 92%. Seed shall meet the requirements of Colorado Department of Agriculture Seed Laws, Chapter 35, Article 27. Seed that has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage shall not be used. All seed shall be delivered in sealed bags showing weight, analysis, and vendor's name. B. For the irrigated turf area, the seed mixture shall be a blend of four to five dwarf type tall fescue cultivars to be approved by the City Representative. The seeding rate shall be 91bs. Per 1,000 square feet. The area of seeding is indicated on the Landscape Plan. C. For seed mixes, rates and areas of planting for riparian seed, native seed, and garden cover crop seed, see Landscape Plan. 02940 - 3 2.4 FERTILIZER A. COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER CONTENT & APPLICATION RATE Commercial fertilizer Percent available by weight (18-46-0) Nitrogen 18 Phosphorus 46 Potassium 0 B. Application rate shall be 2421bs. per acre. P"WIEW818104H A. Clean Graminae (grass family) straw supplied from local area. Mulch shall be free of weed seeds and other matter not required in this section. 2.6 TACKIFIER A. Non toxic organic tackifier. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SITE PREPARATION A. Prepare areas as follows: 1. Remove any existing vegetation not scheduled to remain. Apply Roundup herbicide to all weeds and undisturbed areas that shall be re -seeded. Allow herbicide to sit for 10 to 14 days before tilling or preparing soil for seed. Apply Roundup at manufacturer's recommended rate for vegetation type specified. 2. Rip existing topsoil to a minimum depth of ten inches in one direction using an agricultural ripper with tines spaced at no greater than 18 inches in all areas. Areas adjacent to walks, structures, curbs, etc., where the use of large mechanical equipment is difficult, shall be worked with smaller equipment or by hand. This item applies to all landscaped areas, including those where planting will be done by others. The exception to this is the parkway strip between Centre Avenue and the detached sidewalk. 3. Place soil amendment at a rate of 6 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet in all landscaped areas, including those where planting will be done by others. The exception to this is the parkway strip between Centre Avenue and the detached sidewalk. 4. Till all areas to be planted to a minimum depth of 8". 5. In tree protection areas, the topsoil shall be worked by hand to a depth of 3 inches. 6. Remove all rubble, stones, plant material and extraneous material over 1'/2 inches in diameter from the site. 7. Apply pre -planting fertilizer specified in Part 2 of this Section. 8. Restore fine grade with float drag to remove irregularities resulting from tilling operations. Float drag in two directions. Coordinate restoration of fine grade to establish the vegetation 02940 - 4 subgrade at one inch below adjacent paved surfaces. Match grade at property lines and work - limit lines. B. Remove any additional stones over 1 %2 inches that have come to the surface. Perform drainage test by applying water with the irrigation system. All grades shall provide for run-off of water without low spots or pockets. Do not plant until the finished grade is reviewed and accepted by the City Representative. This review does not reduce Contractor's responsibility to provide a finished product that drains properly. 3.2 SEED APPLICATION A. Seed areas indicated on Landscape Plan and areas disturbed by construction. B. Selection of the time of seeding shall be Contractor's responsibility, consistent with germination and erosion control requirements. C. Re -work previously prepared areas that have become compacted or damaged by rains or traffic. D. Apply by drilling, drill in a minimum of two directions at right angles to one another. Broadcast or hydro seed in areas that are inaccessible or too steep to drill or as indicated on plans. E. Do not drill or sow during windy weather or when ground is frozen or non -tillable. F. Cover seed to depth of 1/4 inch by raking or dragging. G. Firm seeded areas with a roller weighing maximum of 100 lbs. per foot of width. 3.3 HYDRAULIC SEEDING AND MULCHING OPTION ere indicated on plans or in specifications, the Contractor shall seed, fertilize and mulch by hydraulic spray application. Seed is required at double the rate specified and wood cellulose fiber mulch is required to be applied at a rate of one ton per acre. If hydraulic seeding is used with drill seeding then use the specified application rate. B. Tackifier application shall be per manufacturer's specifications. C. Combine seed with water to provide a slurry. Perform hydraulic application in such a manner that the liquid carrier will uniformly distribute the material over the entire area to be seeded at rates nol less than specified. Do not compact hydraulically seeded areas following application. If seed and mulch are applied in a single application the rate of seed application shall be doubled. 3.4 MULCHING A. Apply mulch on all seeded areas. B. Spread uniformly at a rate of one ton per acre. 02940 - 5 C. Immediately following the spreading of hay or straw mulch, anchor the material into the soil a minimum of 3 inches by means of a mulch anchoring machine equipped with large goulder-type disc spaced at approximate 8 inch centers. 3.5 MAINTENANCE A. Irrigated Turf Seed Establishment Period: 1. Water seeded areas as needed, minimum of two times per day, until grass is established. Water so that no erosion or movement of seed or mulch occurs. Hand water as necessary to prevent movement of seed. 2. Seed establishment period shall begin upon the notice of "Conditional Acceptance" given by the City Representative in writing and continue through the first mowing or until the turf is established. " 3. Post "keep off the grass" signs until turf is established. _ 4. Maintain seeded areas until the grass is established and has been mowed at least once. Maintenance shall include watering, fertilizing and herbicide weed control as necessary. Do not apply herbicide before the first mowing, do not mow before the majority of seedlings have three leaf blades. 5. Required density for grass seed areas shall be twenty five (25) viable live seedlings of the species specified per square foot as measured from five (5) feet directly overhead. Determination of required density will be based on a random sampling of the entire project area, and shall consist of a minimum of five samples, each two square feet in area. Bare spots are defined as those areas larger than one square foot which do not meet the required coverage. After the inspection it is the Contractor's responsibility to perform the required maintenance within one week to insure a healthy established seeding condition. 6. The total area occupied by bare spots larger than 0.5 square feet must not exceed ten percent (10%) of the total seeded area. Maximum single bare spot size is one square foot. All seeded grass areas that do not meet the satisfactory stand of growth qualification shall be re -seeded and hydro -mulched. 7. Once the maintenance periods are completed and seed establishment is accepted, the City _ Representative shall issue a written notice of Final Acceptance. The guarantee period extends for one full growing season after Final Acceptance. 3.6 RESEEDING AND REPAIR A. Re -seed areas where there is an unsatisfactory stand of grass at the end of establishment period. Scratch the surface to prepare the seed bed and over -seed with drill seeder or hydro -mulch. _ B. Re -seed areas that have been damaged or disturbed by the Contractor's operation according to these -- specifications. C. After one growing season, there shall be no visual difference between seed and healthy sod in irrigated areas. END OF SECTION 02940 I 02940 - 6 SECTION 02970 - PLANTING MAINTENANCE PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Furnish all supervision, labor, material equipment, and transportation, and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to maintaining all planting called for under this contract. Maintain landscape materials in an attractive, healthy, operable condition until irrigated turf seeded areas are established, landscape punch list items are complete, and all landscape work is accepted by Owner. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work Force: Contractor's representative shall be experienced in planting and irrigation maintenance. B. Maintenance Record: Submit to the Owner's Representative a monthly record of all maintenance operations performed, including a record of all herbicides, insecticides, and disease control chemicals used. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDMONS A. The requirements for winter treatment of plants will be applicable when the maintenance period extends past October 15. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Replacement materials shall conform to the specifications for original installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TREE CARE A. Watering: When hand watering, use a water wand to break the water force. All trees and shrubs shall be winter watered using a need type root feeder at least once per month between irrigation system winterization and spring start-up. Irrigation system may be used for winter watering, providing the system is re -winterized after each use. B. Staking: Inspect stakes monthly to prevent girdling of trunks or branches, and to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds. Remove stakes and guys after one year, or as determined by the City Representative. Stakes will remain the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 02970 -1 C. Weed Control: Keep planting areas free of weeds. Use recommended legally approved herbicides. Avoid frequent soil cultivation that destroys shallow roots. Weed at least once per week. D. Insect and Disease Control: Maintain reasonable control with approved materials to prevent visual and structural damage to the plants. E. Wounds: All wounds or injuries should be traced out and disinfected with alcohol or equal. No tree wound compounds or paints shall be applied. F. Tree rings: Mulched tree rings shall be kept tidy and weed free. G. Replacement of Plants: Remove dead and dying plants and replace with plants of an equal size, condition, and variety or original planting plan. Replacements shall be made at no expense to Owner. H. Trash Removal: Remove trash, clipped grass, and blown dirt weekly from shrub beds, lawns, walks, and tree basins. Keep the entire area within the limits of planting free from trash and dirt (water or wind carried) at all times. Repair erosion damage for duration of maintenance period. _ 3.2 IRRIGATED TURF GRASS CARE A. Mowing: Mow only the turf areas as needed to maintain a height between a minimum of 2 inches and a maximum of 3'/s inches. Do not mow wildflowers or low maintenance grasses, except as specified below. B. Edging: Trim edges at least twice monthly or as needed for a neat appearance. Catch clippings and removed from lawn areas. Vacuum or blow off walks. C. Watering: Water turf areas at the frequency required to obtain proper turf establishment and to maintain a lush, green lawn. Apply water in such a way to ,encourage deep root growth. _ END OF SECTION 02970 02970 - 2 DIVISION 3 03300 — Cast in Place Concrete SECTION 00635 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER) DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROJECT TITLE: GARDENS ON SPRING CREEK; BID NO. 5748 PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado INCLUDE: OWNER: City of Fort Collins CONTRACTOR: CONTRACT DATE: The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project (or specified part of the project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. A tentative list of items to ,be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. By: CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substan- tially complete and will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under "Remarks" below. CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By: OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE REMARKS: 7/96 Section 00635 Page 1 01/02 SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes as shown on drawings. B. Concrete paving and walks are specified in Division 2. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, curing compounds, and others as requested by Architect. C. Shop drawings for reinforcement for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. E. Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. F. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 03300 - 1 01/02 1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Provide a design mix, prepared by; a Testing Laboratory, for each type of concrete to be utilized on the Project. C. Concrete Testing Service: The Owner will engage a testing laboratory to perform material evaluation tests. The Contractor shall be responsible for all retests of failed tests. A concrete test shall be taken for every day of operation or 50 cubic yards of concrete, whichever is less. D. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood," Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edge -sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. D. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds with a maximum V OC of 350 mg/I that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. E. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface. F. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1-inch diameter in concrete surface. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed as indicated on the Drawings. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel. 03300 - 2 01/02 C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire -bar- type supports complying with CRSI specifications. E. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS — A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F. — C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. — D. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances. — E. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. F. Water: Drinkable. PH shall not be less than 4.5 nor greater than 8.5. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with — other required admixtures. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may — be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Air-Tite," Cormix. — b. "Air -Mix" or 'Derma -Air," Euclid Chemical Co. C. "Darex AEA" or "Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co. d. "MB-VR" or "Micro -Air," Master Builders, Inc. e. "Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. "Sika AER," Sika Corp. C. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 03300 - 3 01i02 Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Chemtard," ChemMasters Corp. b. "PSI N," Connix. C. "Eucon WR-75," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "WRDA," W.R. Grace & Co. C. "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed," Master Builders, Inc. f. "Prokrete-N," Prokrete Industries. g. "Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp. D. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G and contain not more than 0.1% chloride ions. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "WRDA 19", W.R. Grace. b. "PSP", Protex Industries, Inc. C. "Super P", Anti -Hydro. d. "Sikament", Sika Chemical Corp. e. "Mighty 150", ICI Americas Corp. f. "Eucon Super 37", Euclid Chemical Corp. g. "PSI Super", Gifford -Hill. h. "Pozzolith 400", Master Builders. E. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D, and contain not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. Available. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Edoco 20006", Edoco Technical Products. b. "Pozzolith 300-R", Master Builders. C. "Eucon Retarder 75", Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Daratard", W.R. Grace. e. "Plastiment", Sika Chemical Co. F. Certifications: Provide admixture manufacturer's written certification that chloride ion content complies with specified requirements. G. Calcium chloride or admixture containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted. 2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Fibrous Reinforcement: Engineered polypropylene fibers designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs. 03300 - 4 01 i02 I . Available Products: Subjectto compliance with requirements, products that maybe _ incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Fiberstrand 100," Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Fibermesh," Fibermesh, Inc. C. "Forta CR," Forta Corp. d. "Grace Fibers," W.R. Grace & Co. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Concrete Color: Pure, concentrated pigments of high quality mineral oxides meeting ASTM C979, David Colors or equal. B. Chemical Stain: The Chemical Stain System shall provide a combination of several specialized processes blended to create unique coloring, patterning, texturing and finishing methods to achieve customized results. — 1. Products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Paten Artectura", Bomanite Products b. "Lithochrome Chemstain", L.M. Scofield Company — C. Non -Shrink Grout: CRD-C 621, factory pre -mixed grout. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Non -Metallic: "Masterflow 713 ", Master Builders. _ "Sonogrout", Sonneborn-Contech. "Euco-NS", Euclid Chemical Co. "Crystex", L&M Cons. Chemical Co. _ "Sure -Grip Grout", Dayton Superior Corp. "Horngrout", A.C. Horn. D. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171: 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. E. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. 03300 - 5 01 /02 F. Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: Liquid -type membrane- forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type 1-D, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: A. "A-H 3 Way Sealer," Anti -Hydro Co., Inc. B. "Spartan -Cote," The Burke Co. C. "Conspec #1," Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. D. "Hardtop," Cormix. E. "Day -Chem Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp. F. " Bucocure," Euclid Chemical Co. G. "Horn Clear Seal," A.C. Horn, Inc. H. "L&M Cure," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. I. "Masterkure," Master Builders, Inc. J. "CS-309," W.R. Meadows, Inc. K. "LR-151," Prokrete Industries. L. "Kure-N-Seal," Sonneborn-Rexnord. M. "Stontop CS2," Stonhard, Inc. G. Water -Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: A. "Highseal," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. B. "Safe Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp. C. "Aqua -Cure," Euclid Chemical Co. D. "Dress & Seal #18WB," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. E. "Masterseal W," Master Builders, Inc. F. "Intex," W.R. Meadows, Inc. G. "Sika Membrane," Sika Corp. H. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film -forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: A. "Aquafilm," Ardex, Inc. B. "Eucobar," Euclid Chemical Co. C. "E-Con," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. D. "Confilm," Master Builders, Inc. I. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 03300 - 6 01/02 a. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only): "Superior Concrete Bonder," Dayton Superior Corp. "Euco Weld," Euclid Chemical Co. "Weld -Crete," Larsen Products Corp. _ "Everweld," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene: "Acrylic Bondcrete," The Burke Co. "Strongbond," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. -' "Day -Chem Ad Bond," Dayton Superior Corp. "SBR Latex," Euclid Chemical Co. "Daraweld C," W.R. Grace & Co. "Hornweld," A.C. Horn, Inc. "Everbond," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "Acryl-Set," Master Builders Inc. — "Intralok," W.R. Meadows, Inc.' "Sonocrete," Sonneborn-Rexnord. "Stonlock LB2," Stonhard, Inc. J. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type," "Grade," and "Class" to suit project requirements. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 'Burke Epoxy M.V.," The Burke Co. b. "Spec -Bond 100," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. _ C. "Euco Epoxy System #452 or 9620," Euclid Chemical Co d. "Epoxtite Binder 2390," A.C. Horn, Inc. e. "Epabond," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Concresive 1001," Master Builders, Inc. g. "Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod," Sika Corp. 2.7 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing. B. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect. 03300 - 7 01/02 Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules: E. Interior Concrete Slabs: a. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength with fibermesh reinforcing. F. All Other Concrete: a. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. G. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials,j ob conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work. 2.8 ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture(Superplasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and work ability. B. Use air -entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. C. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within following limits: D. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure: 5.5% - 1-1/2" max. aggregate. 6.0%- 1" max. aggregate. 6.0% - 3/4" max. aggregate. 7.0% - ''/z" max. aggregate. E. Other concrete (not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure) or to receive a surface hardener: 2 percent to 4 percent air. F. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. G. Water -Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water -cement (W/C) ratios as follows: 1. Subjected to freezing and thawing; W/C 0.45. 2. Subjected to deicers/watertight; W/C 0.40. 03300 - 8 01/02 H. S lump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. I. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (Superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after addition of HRWR to site -verified 2-inch to 3-inch slump concrete. J. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. B. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. C. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly buttjoints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. 03300 - 9 01 /02 D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for clean out, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. F. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is I" inside concrete and will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. I. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. J. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. K. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details andmethods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 03300 - 10 SECTION 00640 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE TO Gentlemen: You are hereby notified that on the day of Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted for the City of Fort Collins project, CREEK; BID NO. 5748. the 20 20 the City of Work completed by GARDENS ON SPRING A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are dated In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees will continue for the specified time from the following date: Sincerely, OWNER: City of Fort Collins By: Title: ATTEST: Title: 7/96 Section 00640 Page 1 01 /02 E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.4 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings and as indicated on Drawings. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. E. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs -on -ground at points of contact between slabs -on -ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated. F. Joint fillers shall be'/2" thick asphalt impregnated fiberboard. G. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct contraction joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by 1 /4 slab depth or inserts 1 /4 inch wide by 1/4 of slab depth, at locations indicated on the Drawings. H. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. After concrete has cured, _ remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. I. Contraction joints may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate. J. Joint sealant material is specified in Division 7 Sections of these specifications. K. Extra reinforcement: Provide 5 sticks of#5 x 20'-0" long, Grade 60 reinforcing to be installed at Architects discretion. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. 03300 - 11 01 /02 B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. 3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean re -used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition. B. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. C. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form -coating compound manufacturer's direction. Do not allow excess form - coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Coat steel forms with a non -staining, rust -preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust -stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. B. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. C. Coordinate the installation of joint materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. D. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as herein specified. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. F. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete informs in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. G. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. 03300 - 12 01/02 H. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. I. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. J. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. K. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. L. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. M. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement. N. Cold -Weather Placing: Comply with provisions ofACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. O. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less _ than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. P. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Q. Do notuse calcium chloride, salt, and othermaterials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. R. Hot -Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. S. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control _ temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. T. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. U. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 03300 - 13 01 /02 V. Use water -reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect. 3.8 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form -facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or other similar system. This is an as -cast concrete surface obtained with selected form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo; and as otherwise indicated. B. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand- floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of Ff 18 - FI 15. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of 1/4" in ten feet. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 03300 - 14 01/02 E. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.10 STAMPED CONCRETE A. Utilize a recognized stamped concrete eystem with a stone floor appearance. A mixture of a colored concrete with (2) additional applied colors should be utilized. 3.11 CHEMICAL STAIN A. The concrete should be placed and finished in accordance with accepted industry standards. B. The concrete should be allowed to cure for a period of at least 28 days prior to the application of the stain(s). _ C. Liquid membrane cures should not be used. D. The new concrete should be cured using either curing paper or wet cutting methods. E. The Contractor shall patch and repair all defects in the surface. F. The substrate shall be free of all debris, oils, grease, curing compounds, sealers, etc., prior to the application of the chemical stain(s) and/or sealer(s). G. The Chemical Stain shall be applied to the clean substrate in a minimum of two coats at a rate of 200 to 400 square feet per U.S. gallon, per coat. The stain shall be applied in accordance ^ with the manufacturer's recommendations. H. The surface shall be sealed using the accompanying sealer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to complete the coloring process. 3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation -control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. —" B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. 03300 - 15 01/02 C. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. D. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by moisture -retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. E. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. F. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. G. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete. H. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. Ifforms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.13 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form -removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 03300 - 16 01 /02 B. Form -facing material maybe removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form -facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.14 REUSE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect. 3.15 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to exterior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. C. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using specified non -shrink grout. Use non- _ metallic grout for exposed conditions, unless otherwise indicated. 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect. B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie _ rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried. C. For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 03300 - 17 01 /02 D. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry -pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. E. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. F. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having required slope. G. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. H. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. I. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching compound. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment com-pounds may be used when acceptable to Architect. J. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same mariner as adjacent concrete. K. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding com-pound. Mix dry -pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry -pack before bonding compound has dried. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. L. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. M. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. 03300 - 18 01i02 3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports. Tests shall be taken from each day's concrete pour or 50 cubic yards, whichever is less. The Contractor shall be responsible for all retesting expenses. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by Architect. C. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. D. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. E. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air -entrained concrete. F. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is made. G. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens. ^ H. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds. - plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. I. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. J. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. K. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready -Mix Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive -- breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. L. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device maybe permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 03300 - 19 01 /02 M. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 03300 03300 - 20 SECTION 00650 LIEN WAIVER RELEASE (CONTRACTOR) TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER) FROM: PROJECT: GARDENS ON SPRING CREEK; BID NO. 5748 (CONTRACTOR) 1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project. 2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project. 3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project. 4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns against the project or against the 7/96 Section 00650 Page 1 No Text DIVISION 4 04810 — Unit Masonry Assemblies 04815 — Glass Unit Masonry Assemblies 01/02 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units. — 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. —' 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. — 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 9. Cavity -wall insulation. 10. Installation of Owner -supplied sandstone. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry assemblies. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. —. C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed — under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 2. Hollow -metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames." 1.3 DEFINITIONS .mow A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 04810 - 1 01/02 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net -area compressive strengths (f m) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry from net -area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types according to Table 21-D of the Uniform Building Code. B. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net -area compressive strengths (f m) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to UBC Standard 21-17. For Concrete Unit Masonry: [fin = 1900 psi (13.1 MPa)] 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, 'Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures available for each different exposed masonry unit required. 2. Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available. D. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction. 2. Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. 1 Weep holes/vents in color to match mortar color. E. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents, unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of the Architect and approved in writing. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 04810 - 2 01/02 _ G. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of the _ following for compliance with requirements indicated: Each type of masonry unit required. a. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net -area compressive strength of masonry units. 2. Mortar complying with property requirements of UBC Standard 21-15. 3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of UBC Standard 21-19. _ Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. H. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. a. Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net -area compressive strength of masonry units. 2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 3. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type. Include statement of net -area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and net -area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Table 21-D of the Uniform Building Code. 4. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. -- 5. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 6. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory. I. Cold -Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold -weather requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. -, B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source _ from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including _ color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire -resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting 04810 - 3 01/02 agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Mockups: Before installing unit masonry, build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Locate mockups in the locations indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 3. Build mockups for the following types of masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. Include a sealant -filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in each mockup. a. Typical exterior wall. 4. Clean exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 5. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 6. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather -resistant membrane. 7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 8. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 9. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. 10. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery. 04810 - 4 01 /02 B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, — secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. _ 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in Section 2104.3 of the Uniform Building Code. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. 04810 - 5 01/02 E. Hot -Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or 90 deg F (32 deg C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches (1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square -edged units for outside corners, unless indicated as bullnose. B. Concrete Masonry Units: UBC Standard 21-4 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa) . 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight. 3. Provide Type I, moisture -controlled units. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 4 inches (102 mm) nominal; 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) actual. b. 8 inches (203 mm) nominal; 7-5/8 inches (194 mm) actual. 5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. a. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. C. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: UBC Standard 21-4 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa) 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight. 3. Provide Type I, moisture -controlled units. 4. Size: Manufactured to dimensions indicated for nondecorative units. S. Finish: Exposed faces of the following general description matching color, pattern, and texture of Architect's samples. a. Lightweight aggregate, split -face finish. 04810 - 6 01/02 6. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent _ admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 — hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be _ incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Block Plus W-10; Addiment Inc. 2) Dry -Block; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division. 3) Rheopel; Master Builders. 2.2 SANDSTONE Supply and install 2" thick sandstone caps at the column piers as indicated on the Plans. Sandstone to be buff color. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS D. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. E. Hydrated Lime: UBC Standard 21-13, Type S. F. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. — G. Mortar Cement: UBC Standard 21-14. 1. For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce the color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. a. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 2 percent for carbon black. b. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 1 percent for carbon black. H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) thick, use , aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. J. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 04810 - 7 01/02 K. Cold -Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. L. Water -Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. M. Water: Potable. N. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Mortar Cement: a. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement. b. Lafarge Mortar Cement; Lafarge Corporation. 2. Mortar Pigments: a. True Tone Mortar Colors; Davis Colors. b. Centurion Pigments; Lafarge Corporation. C. SGS Mortar Colors; Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc. 3. Cold -Weather Admixture: a. Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co. b. Morseled; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division. C. Trimix-NCA; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. 4. Water -Repellent Admixture: a. Mortar Tite; Addiment Inc. b. Dry -Block Mortar Admixture; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division. C. Rheopel; Master Builders. 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60 (Grade 400). 2.3 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: UBC Standard 21-10 and as follows: 1. Hot -dip galvanized, carbon -steel wire for both interior and exterior walls. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W 1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) 04810 - 8 OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the ^ project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims. 5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and material bonds for the project. Signed this ATTEST: Secretary STATE OF COLORADO day of CONTRACTOR By: Title: )ss. COUNTY OF LARIMER ) Subscribed and sworn to before me this 20 , by Witness my hand and official seal. My Commission Expires: 7/96 , 20 day of Notary Public Section 00650 Page 2 01/02 4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units where indicated. B. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross _ rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. C. For multiwythe masonry, provide types as follows: Ladder type with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. and 1 side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) in width, plus 1 side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) or less in width. 2.4 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hot -Dip Galvanized Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z 180), commercial -quality, steel sheet zinc coated by hot -dip process on continuous lines before fabrication. D. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold -rolled, carbon -steel sheet hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153. 2.5 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STEEL FRAME A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire anchor section for welding to steel. 2. Tie Section: Triangular -shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.1875-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. 2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. EPDM Flashing: Manufacturer's standard flashing product formed from a terpolymer of ethylene -propylene diene, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick. B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or _ products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 04810 - 9 01/02 EPDM Flashing: a. FlashGuard; Firestone Building Products. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from PVC. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. PVC: ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406. C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.8 CAVITY -WALL INSULATION A. Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular, polystyrene thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high -density skin; formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578. B. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board manufacturer for application indicated. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 'h-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Add cold -weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with UBC Standard 21-15, Proportion Specification. 04810 - 10 01 /02 1. Extended -Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 3. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type S. 4. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S. D. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight: 1. For mineral -oxide pigments and portland cement -lime mortar, not more than 10 percent. 2. For mineral -oxide pigments and mortar cement mortar, not more than 5 percent. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with UBC Standard 21-19. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with UBC Table 21-C for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Before installation, examine rough -in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. _ B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the Specifications. 04810 - 11 01 /02 C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placin g, un less wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce auniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 min in 3 m), nor %Z inch (12 mm) maximum. D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 min in 6 m), nor'/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to''/z inch (12 mm). Do not vary from bed -joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed -joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. 04810 - 12 01/02 C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than _ 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at confers. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one -half -unit length for one-half running bond or one -third -unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between hollow -metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. I. Build non -load -bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Wedge non -load -bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead -load deflection of structure above approaches final — position. 3. At fire -rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Firestopping." — 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Lay solid brick -size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with — sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. -. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the — brick. 04810 - 13 01/02 C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY A. Use masonry joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints to bond wythes together. B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless otherwise indicated. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated "L" units as well as masonry bonding. C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units. 3.7 CAVITIES A. Keep cavities clean ofmortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strikejoints facing cavities flush. B. Installing Cavity -Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry. 3.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side ofwalls, '/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. 04810 - 14 01/02 _ B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonryto structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in width between masonry and structural _ member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or otherrigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonryjoints and attached to structure. _ 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3.10 CONTROL JOINTS A. General: Install control joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build -in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in -plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond -breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of -- control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces. 2. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond -breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint. 4. Install temporary foam -plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete. 3.11 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick -size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block -size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide built -in -place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Temporarily support built -in -place _ lintels until cured. 04810 - 15 01 i02 C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.12 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. C. Install flashing as follows: 1. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches (200 turn), and through inner wythe to within %2 inch (13 mm) of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form a pan. 3. Cut flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use open head joints to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3. In cavities, place pea gravel to a height equal to height of first course, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), immediately above top of flashing embedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses, to splatter mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. 4. Place cavity drainage material immediately above flashing in cavities. E. Install vents in vertical head joints at the top of each continuous cavity at spacing indicated. Use open head joints to form vents. 3.13 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. 04810 - 16 01 /02 B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of Section 2104.5 of the Uniform Building Code. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. Comply with requirements of Section 2104.E ofthe Uniform Building Code for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 3.14 SANDSTONE WALL A. The Masonry Contractor shall pick up and deliver to the building site the sandstone rubble pieces owned and stored by the City of Fort collins at a downtown location. The Owner is responsible for cleaning the sandstone of all mortar and stacking on pallets for east of handling by the Masonry Contractor. B. The sandstone shall be installed at the location indicated on the Drawings. Install galvanized corrugated metal ties imbedded in the mortar joints at approximately 16" o.c. each way to the substrate behind the sandstone wall veneer. Grey mortar shall be utilized and shall be finished with a joint flush with the adjacent stonework. The sandstone shall be installed in a completely random pattern. The sandstone wall shall be cleaned as indicated elsewhere in the specification Section. — 3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING — A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling ofJoints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: E. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. F. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleared for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. G. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. H. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 04810 - 17 01 /02 Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.16 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. END OF SECTION 04810 04810 - 18 SECTION 00660 CONSENT OF SURETY TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER") CONTRACTOR: PROJECT: GARDENS ON SPRING CREEK; BID NO. 5748 CONTRACT DATE: In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for on bond of (Surety) hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day of , (Surety Company) M ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in- Fact. 7/96 Section 00660 Page 1 01/02 SECTION 04815 - GLASS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior glass unit masonry assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: — 1. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for dovetail slots in concrete for anchoring glass unit masonry assemblies. — 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in joints of glass unit masonry assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include glass block, cementitious materials, waterproofing admixtures for mortar, and accessories. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's actual glass -block units for each form, pattern, and color indicated and mortar samples showing the full range of colors available. C. Samples for Verification: Panels consisting of four full-size glass -block units for each form, pattern, and color specified with mortar joints of color indicated or selected by Architect. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Glass Block: Obtain each type and pattern of glass block through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Source Limitations for Accessory Materials: Obtain each cementitious material, admixture, and accessory component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate size, designs, colors, and other characteristics by _ referencing indicated manufacturer's trade designations. Other manufacturers' products of equal characteristics complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 04815 - 1 01 i02 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store glass block in unopened cartons on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of glass unit masonry assemblies only when ambient and material temperatures are 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising. Maintain temperature in installation areas at 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) or above for 48 hours after installing. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence and coordinate completion of glass unit masonry assemblies so sealants can be installed immediately after mortar has attained final set. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Hollow Glass Block: a. Fidenza Vetraria SpA. b. Mulia, Inc. C. Oberland Glas AG, Bauglas Div.; Solaris Glasstein. d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. e. Vegla Vereinigte Glaswerke GmbH (Saint-Gobain). f. Weck: J. Week GmbH u. Co. 2. Portland Cement, Masonry Cement, and Portland Cement -Lime Mix: a. Blue Circle Cement. b. Essroc Materials, Inc. c. Glen-Gery Corporation. d. Holnam, Inc. 04815 - 2 01 /02 e. Lafarge Corporation. f. Lehigh Portland Cement Co. g. National Cement Company, Inc. h. Riverton Corporation (The). i. Southdown, Inc. 3. Mortar Pigments: a. Davis Colors. b. Lafarge Corporation. C. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc 4. Water -Repellent Admixtures: a. Hydrocide Powder; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. b. Mortar Tite; Addiment Inc. C. Dry -Block Mortar Admixture; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division. d. Rheopel; Master Builders. 2.2 GLASS BLOCK A. Hollow Glass Block: Non -load -bearing blocks made by fusing together two halves of pressed glass to produce partially evacuated hollow units complying with the following requirements for color, pattern, size, and other characteristics: 1. Glass Colors: Colorless. 2. Patterns: Manufacturer's standard pattern with light -diffusive wavy design on inner faces, and smooth outer faces. 3. Edge Coating: Manufacturer's standard edge coating. 4. Edge -Coating Color: White. a. Provide one color throughout for each pattern indicated. 5. Square Unit Sizes: Actual sizes as indicated below: a. 7-3/4 inches (197 mm) square by 3-7/8 inches (98 mm) thick 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, natural color, white, or a blend to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Where joints are indicated to be raked out and pointed, gray cement may be used for setting mortar. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 04815 - 3 01 /02 C. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. For pigmented mortar, use colored Portland cement -lime mix of formulation required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight for mineral oxides or 2 percent for carbon black. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. For pigmented mortar, use colored masonry cements of formulation required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight for mineral oxides or 1 percent for carbon black. E. Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as indicated below: For pointing mortar and joints narrower than 1/4 inch (6 mm), use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. F. Water -Repellent Admixture: Manufacturer's standard dry mixture of stearates, water -reducing agents, and fine aggregates intended to reduce capillarity in mortar. G. Water -Repellent Admixture: Liquid polymeric water-repellent mortar admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength of mortar. H. Water: Potable. 2.4 GLASS UNIT MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Panel Reinforcement: Ladder -type units, butt welded, not lapped and welded, complying with ASTM A 951 UBC Standard 21-10 in straight lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), and as follows: I. Hot -dip galvanized, carbon -steel wire for exterior walls. 2. Wire Size: W 1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm) diameter. 3. Spacing of Side Rods: 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) apart. B. Panel Anchors: Glass -block manufacturer's standard perforated steel strips, 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm) by 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 mm) long, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. C. Asphalt Emulsion: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187 or ASTM D 1227. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Karnak 100" by Karnak Corp. 04815 - 4 01 /02 D. Sealants and related materials, including primers, cylindrical sealant backing, and bond -breaker tape, are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Dovetail Wire Ties: Trapezoidal -shaped ties of size indicated, fabricated from 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter steel wire, complying with ASTM A 82; with zinc coating complying with ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class 3; attached to 0.108-inch- (2.8-mm-) thick, galvanized strap shaped to engage dovetail slot. 2.5 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, or antifreeze compounds, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride. Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated. Mix mortar to produce a stiff but workable consistency that is drier than mortar for brick or concrete masonry. Discard mortar when it has reached initial set. B. Mortar for Glass Unit Masonry Assemblies: Provide mortar, mixed according to glass -block manufacturer's listing with testing and inspecting agency, for fire -resistance rating indicated. C. Mortar for Glass Unit Masonry Assemblies: Comply with ASTM C 270 BIA M1 UBC Standard 21-15, Proportion Specification for Type S mortar. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 1. For mortar in exterior panels, use water-repellent admixture according to admixture manufacturer's written instructions. 2. For pointing mortar in exterior panels, use water-repellent admixture according to admixture manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine sills, jambs, and heads surrounding glass unit masonry assemblies for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other construction about specific requirements for placement of dovetail slots and other inserts required to anchor and support glass unit masonry assemblies. Furnish installers of other construction with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items. 04815 - 5 01 /02 3.3 GLASS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLY CONSTRUCTION A. Apply a heavy coat of asphalt emulsion to sill and adhere expansion strips to jambs and heads with asphalt emulsion. Allow asphalt emulsion to dry before placing mortar. Trim expansion strips to width required to fit glass block and to full lengths of heads and jambs. B. Set glass block with completely filled bed and head joints, with no furrowing, accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. Maintain 1/4-inch(6-mm) 3/8-inch(10-mm) exposedjoint widths, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install panel reinforcement in horizontal joints at spacing indicated and continuously from end to end of panels; comply with the following requirements: 1. Vertical Spacing of Panel Reinforcement for Exterior Panels: Every other course but not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c., starting with first course above sill. 2. Embed panel reinforcement in mortar bed by placing lower half of mortar bed first, pressing panel reinforcement into place and covering with upper half of mortar bed, and then troweling it smooth. D. Install panel anchors at locations indicated and in same horizontal joints where panel reinforcement occurs. Extend panel anchors at least 12 inches (300 mm) into joints, and bend within expansion joints at edges of panels and across the head. Attach panel anchors as follows: For new unit masonry assemblies, embed other ends of panel anchors, after bending portions crossing expansion joint, in horizontal mortar joints closest in elevation to joints in glass unit masonry assemblies containing panel anchors. E. Use rubber mallet to tap units into position. Do not use steel tools, and do not allow units to come into contact with metal accessories and frames. F. Use plastic spacers or temporary wedges in mortar joints to produce uniform joint widths and to prevent mortar from being squeezed out of joints. G. Keep expansion joints free of mortar. H. Rake out joints indicated to be pointed to a uniform depth sufficient to accommodate pointing material, but not less than joint width. Point joints at exterior face both faces of exterior panels with mortar. I. Fill raked joints and voids with pointing mortar. Place and compact pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. J. Pointing of joints with sealant, including installation of primer and bond -breaker tape or cylindrical sealant backing, is specified in Division 7 Section 'Joint Sealants." K. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard. Use a smooth plastic jointer larger than joint width. 04815 - 6 01/02 L. Remove temporary wedges, if used, and fill voids with mortar. — M. Clean glass unit masonry assemblies as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears immediately, using a clean, wet sponge or a scrub brush with stiff fiber bristles. Do not use harsh _ cleaners, acids, abrasives, steel wool, or wire brushes when removing mortar or cleaning glass unit masonry assemblies. N. Installation of sealant at jambs, heads, mullions, and other locations indicated, including installation of primer and bond -breaker tape or cylindrical sealant backing, is specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." O. Construction Tolerances: Set glass block to comply with the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb: For lines and surfaces of vertical elements and arris, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 in). 2. Variation from Level: For bed joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m). — 3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions shown in plan and related portions of walls and partitions, do not exceed 4/2 inch in 20 feet (12 mm in 6 m). 4. Variation in Mortar -Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 3.4 CLEANING — A. On surfaces adjacent to glass unit masonry assemblies, remove mortar and other residue resulting from glass -block installation, in a manner approved by manufacturers of materials involved. B. Remove excess sealants with commercial solvents of type recommended by sealant manufacturer. Exercise care not to damage sealant in joints. — C. Perform final cleaning of glass unit masonry assemblies when surface is not exposed to direct sunlight. Start at top of panel using generous amounts of clean water. Remove water with clean, dry, soft cloths; change cloths frequently to eliminate dried mortar particles and aggregate. END OF SECTION 04815 04815 - 7 DIVISION 5 05120 — Structural Steel 05500 — Metal Fabrications 01i02 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on drawings including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings. C. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5. D. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt installation in concrete, Division 4 for anchor bolt installation in masonry. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Shop drawings prepared under supervision of a licensed Structural Engineer, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures, and diagrams. C. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld. D. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections. E. Test reports conducted on shop- and field -bolted and welded connections. Include data on type(s) of tests conducted and test results. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated: 05120 - 1 01 i02 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings." 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary." 4. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections. 5. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 6. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use." B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements. C. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests. D. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility. L5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in -place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and re -lubricate before use. D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 05120 - 2 SECTION 00670 APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE Insert State certificate here. 01 /02 A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale — seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface finishes. B. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Cold -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A 501. ` E. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35, medium -strength carbon rod. G. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, nonheaded type or threaded ASTM A 36 rod. — H. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: — I. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying with ASTM A 325. J. Where indicated as galvanized, provide units that are zinc coated, either mechanically deposited complying with ASTM B 695, Class 50, or hot -dip galvanized complying with ASTM A 153. K. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, type as required. L. Use at Contractor's option. M. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. N. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 13. O. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 _ parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. P. Nonmetallic Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, non -staining product containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water -reducing agents, complying with CE-CRD-C621. Q. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be — incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 100 Non -Shrink Grout (Non -Metallic); Conspec, Inc. 2. Supreme Grout; Cormix, Inc. 05120 - 3 01i02 3. Sure Grip Grout; Dayton Superior. 4. Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co. 5. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 6. Masterflow 713; Master Builders. 7. Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows. 8. Propak; Protex Industries, Inc. 9. Set Non -Shrink; Set Products, Inc. 10. Five Star Grout; U.S. Grout Corp. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. B. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. C. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. D. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. E. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. F. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all bolted connections. G. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high -strength threaded fasteners in accor-dance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." H. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. I. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will produce true alignment of axes without warp. J. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. K. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. L. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame -cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. M. Drill holes in bearing plates. 05120 - 4 01/02 N. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints in steel shelf angles when part of structural steel frame; locate at vertical brick expansion joints as indicated on drawings. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. General: Shop -paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed -- portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only. B. Do not paint surfaces to be welded. C. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be paint-ed. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning." 2. SP-2 "Hand -Tool Cleaning." 3. SP-3 "Power -Tool Cleaning." 4. SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning." E. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. B. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply. C. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. D. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of structure are not clearly indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 05120 - 5 01/02 3.1 ERECTION A. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. B. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. C. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. D. Set attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. E. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. F. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. G. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. H. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. I. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. J. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. K. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings L. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. M. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. N. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 05120 - 6 01/02 O. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. P. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. Q. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 3.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show compliance of corrected work. END OF SECTION 05120 05120 - 7 01 /02 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following metal fabrications: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Miscellaneous framing and supports. 3. Ladder to Roof Hatch. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural steel framing system components. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES A. Structural Performance: Provide assemblies which, when installed, comply with the following minimum requirements for structural performance, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and grout. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show 05500 - 1 01/02 anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections. D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as maybe requested by Architect. E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article. F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of Architects and the Owner, and other information specified. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. B. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Ferrous Metals: 1. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher -leveled sheet. 2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 3. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed, ASTM A 500; or hot rolled, ASTM A 501. 4. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot -rolled, ASTM A 570; or cold -rolled ASTM A 611, Class 1; of grade required for design loading. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; type and grade (if applicable) as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; black finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard 05500 - 2 01/02 weight (schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 6. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized, ASTM A 153. B. Grout: Non -Shrink Non -Metallic Grout: Pre -mixed, factory -packaged, non -staining, non- corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide grout specially recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. C. Fasteners: General: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required. 2. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. 3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 4. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 5. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. 6. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. D. Paint: Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "universal" primer; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for compatibility to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645. 2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of work. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless 05500 - 3 01/02 otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. -" 2. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 4. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. 5. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hard -ware, screws, and similar items. — 6. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. B. Shop Painting: 1. Apply shop primer to surfaces of metal fabrications except those which are galvanized or as indicated to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated, and in compliance with requirements of SSPC-PA1 "paint Application _ Specification No. 1" for shop painting. 2. Surface Preparation: Prepare ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum _ requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications. 3. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 113): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". 4. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". 2.3 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. Provide not less than S" bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated. B. For lintels, refer to Drawings for sizes and configurations as indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 05500 - 4 01/02 A. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work, B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. C. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. D. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 8 inches (200 mm) long. E. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. 05500 - 5 DR 0172 (12/98) COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE DENVER CO 80261 (303)232-2416 CONTRACTOR APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE Pursuant to Statute Section 39-26.114(1)(a)(M) 0 vv rvv. vvni i t uv r nib bYAGt The exemption certificate for which you are applying must be used only for the purpose of purchasing construction and building materials for the exempt project described below. This exemption does not include or apply to the purchase or rental of equipment, supplies, and materials which are purchased, rented, or consumed by the contractor and which do not become a part of the structure, highway, road, street, or other public works owned and used by the exempt organization. Any unauthorized use of the exemption certificate will result in revocation of your exemption certificate and other penalties provided by law. A separate certificate is required for each contract. Subcontractors will not be issued Certificates of Exemption by the Department of Revenue. It is the responsibility of the prime contractor to issue certificates to each of the subcontractors. (See reverse side.) FAILURE TO ACCURATELY COMPLETE ALL BOXES WILL CAUSE THE APPLICATION TO BE DENIED. Reglstratien/Account No. (to be assigned by DOR) Period 89 - 0.170-750 (999) $0700 "KSS 'c+s vat' i 2x .. �i�.n: "' •',� vo'Ni G �fi,G,eiF yik�yh H C . ke%i ... F..'( z1 r0 1.:": Trade name/DBA: Owner, partner, or co porate name: Mailing address (City, State, Zip): Contact Person E-Mail address: Federal Employer's Identification Number: Bid amount for your contract: Colorado Fax number: ( Business telephone number: withholding tax account number. .,,.. �tf + ' 8 a es' i f'WNameofxempt re1,a�� :. . e , organization (as shown on contract): Exempt organization's number: 98 - Address of exempt organization (City, State, zip): Principal contact at exempt organization: Principal contacts telephone number: Physical location of project site (give actual address when applicable and cities and/or County (ies) where project is located) Scheduled Month Day Year Estimated Month Day Year construction start date: completion date: 11#TW"N'Fig, 1:�i�u4 �s1"`'.li'{. A,�, :.}, y�. I declare under penalty of perjury in the second degree that the statements made in this application are true and complete to the best of my knowledge. Signature of owner, partner or corporate officer. AA .-. Title of corporate officer. -, _... 71 Date: . W KIWI IT nr 1 1Z. ocwrr I MCI LING 01/02 D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and — corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. — 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. — B. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. C. For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. - END OF SECTION 05500 05500 - 6 DIVISION 6 06100 — Rough Carpentry 06176 — Metal -Plate -Connected Wood Trusses 06200 — Finish Carpentry 01i02 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Sheathing. 5. Plywood backing panels. 6. Laminated beams. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Metal-Plate-Cormected Wood Trusses." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS _ A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 06100 - 1 01 /02 B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Engineered wood products. 2. Power -driven fasteners. 3. Powder -actuated fasteners. 4. Expansion anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subjectto compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Laminated Beams: a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. d. Pacific Woodtech Corp. C. Trus Joist MacMillan. f. Union Camp Corp.; Building Products Division. g. Willamette Industries, Inc. 2. Prefabricated Wood I -Joists: 06100 - 2 2.2 01/02 a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. C. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. d. Pacific Woodtech Corp. e. Poutrelles International Inc. f. Standard Structures Inc. g. Stark Truss Company, Inc. h. Superior Wood Systems, Inc. i. Trus Joist MacMillan. j. Union Camp Corp.; Building Products Division. k. Willamette Industries, Inc. 3. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. C. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. d. KC Metals Products, Inc. e. Silver Metal Products, Inc. f. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. United Steel Products Company, Inc. WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-min actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. 06100 - 3 01 i02 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. 3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. 4. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Framing Other Than Non -Load -Bearing Partitions: Construction Stud or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 2. Douglas fir -south; WWPA. 3. Douglas fir -larch (north); NLGA. 4. Hem -fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 6. Southern pine; SPIB. 7. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 8. Spruce -pine -fir (south); NELMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 9. Spruce -pine -fir; NLGA. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Cants. 3. Nailers. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem -fir or Hem -fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or Spruce -pine -fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 5. Northern species; NLGA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Wood I -Joists: Prefabricated units complying with APA PRI-400; depths and performance ratings not less than those indicated. 06100 - 4 01/02 1. Web Material: Plywood, Exposure 1 or Plywood, Exterior grade. 2. Structural Capacities: Establish and monitor structural capacities according to ASTM D 5055. 3. Trademark: Factory mark I -joists with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and I joist compliance with APA standard. 2.6 SHEATHING A. OSB Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: As required for spans indicated. 2. Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm). 2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than ''/z inch (12.7 mm) thick. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1. (ASME B 18.2.3.8M). G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 06100 - 5 01/02 2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows: Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. C. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. D. Rafter Tie -Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in the Uniform Building Code. 4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in the BOCA National Building Code. 5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code. Table 602.3 (1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the International One- and Two -Family Dwelling Code. 06100 - 6 01 /02 D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. E. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood proddcts to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. 3.4 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above -referenced guide. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. 2. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports. END OF SECTION 06100 06100 - 7 01/02 SECTION 06176 - METAL -PLATE -CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wood roof, and girder trusses and truss accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing and subflooring and dimension lumber for supplementary framing and permanent bracing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Metal -Plate -Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal -plate - connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and out and assembled before delivery to Project site. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal -plate -connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 06176 - 1 SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 01/02 B. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: 1. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of span. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal -plate connectors, metal framing anchors, bolts, and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber; splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details. C. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Product Certificates: For metal -plate -connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss fabricating firm. E. Qualification Data: For metal -plate manufacturer, professional engineer, fabricator, and Installer. F. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Connector -Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with TPI quality -control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI 1. B. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. _ C. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. _ D. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in arecognized quality -assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB, Timber Products Inspection, TPI, or other independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. E. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates through one source from a single manufacturer. F. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 06176 - 2 01/02 1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." G. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration,corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Time delivery and erection oftrusses to avoid extended on -site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Metal Connector Plates: A. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. B. CompuTrus, Inc. C. Eagle Metal Products. D. Jager Industries, Inc. E. Mitek Industries, Inc. F. Robbins Engineering, Inc. G. TEE-LOK Corporation. H. Truswal Systems Corporation. B. Metal Framing Anchors: A. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. B. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 06176 - 3 01 i02 C. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. D. KC Metals Products, Inc E. Silver Metal Products, Inc. F. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc. G. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. H. United Steel Products Company, Inc. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. B. For exposed lumber indicated to receive natural or stained finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. C. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. D. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable designvalues according to AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1 from metal complying with requirements indicated below: 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed 06176 - 4 01 /02 in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows: 1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. C. Truss Tie -Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Tie fits over top of truss and fastens to both sides of truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. D. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non -load -bearing walls, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close -fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. 06176 - 5 01/02 C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in _ TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. — D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, _ exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out -of -plane bending or other causes. D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. F. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. -- G. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. H. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated. 1. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are _ applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. J. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel -chord floor ^ trusses at centers indicated. K. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. L. Do not cut or remove truss members. M. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. _ N. Do not alter trusses in field. 06176 - 6 01/02 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating. C. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system manufacturer. END OF SECTION 06176 06176 - 7 01/02 SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim for field -painted finish. 2. Slat wall. 3. Tack board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 5. SCMA - Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association. 6. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 7. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 8. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, and colors. 06200 - 1 01 /02 B. Samples for Verification: For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with nonfactory-app lied finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (203 by 250 mm) for panels. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry onlywhen environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in otherthan installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL 06200 - 2 01 /02 A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 2.3 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln -dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4. 1. Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): N-grade plain sliced red oak. a. Provide material selected for compatible grain and color. 2. Casing pattern: WM 433. 2.4 SLAT WALL A. Supply and install slat wall where indicated on the drawings. Slat wall to have plastic laminate face with unreinforced grooves at 4" o.c. 2.5 TACK BOARD A. Supply and install tack board where indicated on the drawings. Tack board to be frameless 1/4" _ mounted cork (Burlap or Hardboad Backing) by Claridge or equal. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, _ material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot -dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of fmish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. 06200 - 3 01 /02 B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work: Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds. C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. l . Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1 /32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. 06200 - 4 and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set forth hereafter. 1) Substantial Completion: Eight Hundred Dollars ($800.00) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the sixty (60) calendar day period for Substantial Completion of the Work until the Work is Substantially ^ Complete. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows: ($95,093.00) Ninety-five Thousand Ninety-three Dollars, in accordance with Section 00300, attached and incorporated herein by this reference. ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as - recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.6 of the General .. Conditions and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed, and in accordance with the General Requirements concerning Unit Price Work. 5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be in the amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. 90% of the value of Work completed until the Work has been 50% completed as determined by ENGINEER, when the retainage equals 5% of —' the Contract Price, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER on recommendation of ENGINEER, may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 90% of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the application for payment. 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT These GENERAL CONDITIONS have been developed by using the STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, EJCDC No. 1910-8 (1990 Edition), as a base. Changes to that document are shown by underlining text that has been added and striking through text that has been deleted. EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) WITH CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01 /02 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight -fitting joints with full -surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. Plane backs ofcasings to provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to -- weather. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06200 06200 - 5 DIVISION 7 07160 — Bituminous Dampproofing 07190 — Water Repellents 07210 — Building Insulation 07411 — Manufactured Roof Panels and Trim 07531 — EPDM Membrane Roofing 07620 — Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07720 — Roof Accessories 07920 — Joint Sealants 01 /02 SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each type of dampproofing work is indicated on drawings, and indicated by provisions of this section. B. Following types and applications of work are specified in this section: 1. Cold -applied asphalt cut -back dampproofing. C. Si nilar work used as exposed finish is excluded by definition and, if required, is specified as roofing, flooring, or other appropriate category. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: For each type of work, obtain primary materials from single manufacturer, to greatest extent possible. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm which has specialized for not less than three years in installation of types of dampproofing required for project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each dampproofing material required. Include data sub- stantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. 07160 - 1 01/02 B. Weather: Proceed with dampproofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Provide bituminous dampproofing materials which comply with the following requirements, or provide other similar products which are certified in writing by manufacturer of primary dampproofing materials to be superior in performance for application indicated. B. Cold -Applied Asphalt Cut -Back Dampproofrng: Asphalt Compound: Manufacturer's standard asphalt and solvent compound, recommended for dry below -grade exterior and for above -grade interior applications, compounded to penetrate substrate and build to moisture -resistant, vapor -resistant, firm, elastic coating. C. Provide heavy fibrated type mastic non -asbestos compound, complying with FS SS-C- 153, Type 1, except containing non -asbestos inorganic fibrous reinforcement and filler materials. D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering asphalt cut -back products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Celotex Corporation. 2. Certainteed Corporation. 3. Genstar Roofing Products Company. 4. J. & P. Petroleum Products, Inc. 5. Karnak Chemical Corporation. 6. Koppers Company, Inc. 7. Lunday Thagard Company, Inc. 8. Manville Building Products Corp. 9. Sonneborne Bldg. Products/Rexnord Chemical Products Inc. 10. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc. 11. Tremco Company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. 07160 - 2 01 /02 B. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials manufacturer even though not shown. C. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers (if any) as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, with particular attention at construction joints. D. Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. F. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work, by masking or otherwise protecting adjoining work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of work. B. Bituminous Dampproofing Installation: 1. Basement Walls: a. General: Except as otherwise indicated, and whether or not shown on drawings, apply dampproofing to all exterior below grade surfaces of basement walls. b. Extend vertical dampproofing down walls from finished grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing and turn down minimum of 6" over outside face of footing. Extend 12" onto intersecting walls, and footings but do not extend onto surfaces which will be exposed to view when project is completed. 2. Steel Columns, Baseplates, Etc.: Apply dampproofing to all steel columns, baseplates, etc. below grade or below finished floor level. 3. Cold Bitumen on Exterior and Interior Surfaces: a. Apply coat of cold, fibrated, mastic asphalt dampproofing material, by troweling onto substrate at minimum rate of 7.0 gal. per 100 sq. ft. to produce average dry film of 70 mils, but not less than 30 mils at any point. END OF SECTION 07160 ^ 07160 - 3 01/02 SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes clear water-repellent coatings for the following vertical and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: Concrete unit masonry (unpainted and unglazed). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Sections for concrete unit masonry. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for paints and coatings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide water repellents with the following properties based on testing manufacturer's standard products, according to test methods indicated, applied to substrates simulating Project conditions using same materials and application methods to be used for Project. Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens. a. Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C 140. 2. Water -Vapor Transmission: Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 96. 3. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Maximum 90 percent reduction in leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 514. 4. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water repellency after 2500 hours of weathering in comparison to specimens before weathering, per ASTM G 53. 5. Permeability: Minimum 80 percent breathable in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM D 1653. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 07190 - 1 01/02 A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application _ instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface to be treated, and protection and cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements. B. Samples: Of each substrate indicated to receive water repellent, 12 inches (300 mm) square, with specified repellent treatment applied to half of each sample. C. Applicator Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that the applicator complies with requirements. D. Certification by water repellent manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of VOCs. E. Material Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance of water repellents with requirements indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who employs only persons trained and approved by water repellent manufacturer for application of manufacturer's products. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of pollution -control regulatory agency having jurisdiction in Project locale regarding VOCs and use of hydrocarbon solvents. C. Field Samples:. Architect will select one representative surface for each substrate to receive water repellents. Apply water repellent to each substrate, with either partial or full coverage as directed. Comply with application requirements of this Section. 1. Obtain Architect's approval of field samples before applying water repellents. 2. Maintain field samples during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the following conditions, except with written instruction of manufacturer: 1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 2. Mortar has cured for less than 28 days. -. 3. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) are predicted within 24 hours. 4. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet. 5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 6. Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be coated. 07190 - 2 01 /02 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the applicator and water repellent manufacturer, covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail to provide water repellency within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new joints and cracks in excess of 1/16 inch (1.5 min) wide, fire, vandalism, or abuse by maintenance equipment. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Silanes: With 3.3 lb/gal. (400 g/L) VOCs or less. a. Sil-Act ATS Multigard; Advanced Chemical Technologies, Inc. b. A-H Aridox 20 VOC; Anti Hydro International, Inc. C. A-H Aridox 40; Anti Hydro International, Inc. d. A-H Aridox 40 M; Anti Hydro International, Inc. e. A-H Aridox 40 VOC; Anti Hydro International, Inc. f. Dur A Pell 40; Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. g. Dur A Pell 100 "S"; Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. h. Diedrich 300Si 20; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. i. Diedrich 300Si 40; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. j. Enviroseal 20; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. k. Enviroseal 40; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. I. Wabosil 100; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. in. Pentane 40 WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. n. Pentane WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. o. Stifel VC; Nox-Crete Chemicals, Inc. p. Weather Seal SL100; ProSoCo, Inc. q. Rainstopper 1750W - Clear; Textured Coatings of America, Inc. C. Siloxanes: With 3.3 lb/gal. (400 g/L) VOCs or less. a. A-H Aridsil VOC; Anti Hydro International, Inc. b. Prime A Pell H2O; Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. C. Diedrich 300-5 Water -Base Siloxane; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 07190 - 3 01 /02 d. Diedrich 300-10 Water -Base Siloxane; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. e. Diedrich 303S-15 Silox Seal; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. f. Hydrozo Clear 16; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. g. Shed OX WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. h. Weather Seal Siloxane WB; ProSoCo, Inc. i. Masonry Saver WB; SaverSystems Div. of Meredith, Inc. j. Baracade ME; Tamms Industries Co. D. Silane/Siloxane Blends: With 3.3 lb/gal. (400 g/L) VOCs or less. a. Prime A Pell Plus; Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. b. Diedrich 303HD; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. C. Enviroseal 7; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. d. Enviroseal Double 7 for Brick; Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. e. Hydropel 16 WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. £ Hydropel WB; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. g. Klere-Seal 920-W; Pecora Corporation. -, h. Masonry Saver 20B; SaverSystems Div. of Meredith, Inc. i. Pro -Deck SMC; Stellar -Mark. 2.2 WATER REPELLENTS A. Silanes, 20 Percent Solids: Penetrating water repellent. A monomeric compound containing approximately 20 percent alkyltrialkoxysilanes with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier. B. Silanes, 40 Percent Solids: Penetrating water repellent. A monomeric compound containing approximately 40 percent alkyltrialkoxysilanes with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier. e C. Siloxanes: Penetrating water repellent. Alkylalkoxysiloxanes that are oligomerous with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier. D. Silane/Siloxane Blends: Consisting of silanes and siloxanes blended to achieve a particular penetration and protection on a specific substrate. E. VOC-Complying Water Repellents: Products complying with local regulations controlling use of VOCs, as certified by manufacturer. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manu-facturer's written instructions, to ensure surface is sufficiently dry. 07190 - 4 01 /02 B. Test for pH level, according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical bond to silicate minerals. C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. E. Test Application: Before performing water-repellent work, including bulk purchase and delivery of products, prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner approved by Architect to demonstrate the final effect,(visual, physical, and chemical) of planned application. Proceed with work only after Architect approves test application or as otherwise directed. Revisions of planned application, if any, as requested by Architect, will be by Change Order if they constitute a departure from requirements of Contract Documents at the time of contracting. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply a heavy -saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory -authorized technical service representative to inspect and approve the substrate before application and to instruct the applicator on the product and application method to be used. 3.4 CLEANING A. Protective Coverings: Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas. 07190 - 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph Number & Title Number Number & Title 1. DEFINITIONS......................................................1 1.1 Addenda.............................................1 1.2 Agreement..........................................1 1.3 Application for Payment ....................... 1.4 Asbestos.............................................1 1.5 Bid.....................................................1 1.6 Bidding Documents ................ *.......... .1, 1.7 Bidding Requirements ...... I ....... I........... 1 1.8 Bonds.................................................1 1.9 Change Order......................................1 1.10 Contract Documents .............................. 1 1.11 Contract Price,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,1 1.12 Contract Times .................................... 1 1.13 CONTRACTOR .................................. 1 1.14 defective.................................I...........1 1.15 Drawings............................................1 1.16 Effective Date of the Agreement ,,,,,....„1 1.17 ENGINEER......................................1 1.18 ENGINEER's Consultant ....................... 1 1.19 Field Order.........................................1 1.20 General Requirements .........................2 1.21 Hazardous Waste ................................. 2 1.22.a Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations ...................................... 2 1.22.b Legal Holidays .................................... 2 1.23 Liens ..................................................? 1.24 Milestone ................................. 2 1.25 Notice of Award.......................2 1.26 Notice to Proceed ................................. 2 1.27 OWNER.............................................2 1.28 Partial Utilization ................................ 2 1.29 PCBs.................................................2 1.30 Petroleum...........................................2 1.31 Project................................................2 1.32.a Radioactive Material 1.32.b Regular Working Hours .................. 2 1.33 Resident Project Representative ............. 2 1.34 Samples..............................................2 1.35 Shop Drawings....................................2 1.36 Specifications.....................................2 1.37 Subcontractor 2 1.38 Substantial Completion ........................2 1.39 Supplementary Conditions...................2 1.40 Supplier..............................................2 1.41 Underground Facilities,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 2-3 1,42 Unit Price Work.... ............................ .3 1.43 Work ............... 3 1.44 Work Change Directive .......................3 1.45 Written Amendment. 3 Page Number 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 3 2.1 Delivery of Bonds ............................. 2.2 Copies of Documents ........................3 2.3 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 3 2.4 Starting the Work .............................. 3 2.5-2.7 Before Starting Construction; CONTRACTOR's Responsibility to Report; Preliminary Schediles; Delivery of Certificates of Insurance ................................... 3-4 2.8 Preconstruction Conference ............... 4 2.9 Initially Acceptable Schedules ........... 4 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE ....................... I..................4 3.1-3.2 Intent ............................... 4 3.3 Reference to Standards and Speci- fications of Technical Societies; Reporting and Resolving Dis- crepancies... .............................. 4-5 3.4 Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives ..................................... 5 3.5 Amending Contract Docunents......... 5 3.6 Supplementing Contract Documents ................................... 5 3.7 Reuse of Documents 5 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS.........................................5 4.1 Availability of Lands.....................5-6 4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions .................................... 6 4.2.1 Reports and Drawings.....................6 4.2.2 Limited Reliance by CONTRAC- TOR Authorized; Technical Data.............................................6 4.2.3 Notice of Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6 4.2.4 ENGINEER's Review.......................6 4.2.5 Possible Contract Documents Change.........................................6 4.2.6 Possible Price and Times Adjustments .............................. 6-7 4.3 Physical Conditions --Underground Facilities ....................................... 7 4.3.1 Shown or Indicated 7 4.3.2 Not Shown or Indicated,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 7 4.4 Reference Points,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 7 E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01 /02 B. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION 07190 07190 - 6 01/02 SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Board -type foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill). 2. Blanket -type building insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for insulation to be installed to interior face of exterior masonry walls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by "r-values," they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (k-values). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. B. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84. C. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. D. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 07210 - 1 01i02 E. Single -Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified. C. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units of each type of exposed insulation indicated for each color specified. D. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation products with requirements including — r-values (aged values for plastic foam insulations), fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. E. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of plastic foam insulations with building code in effect for Project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation. B. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time. C. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 07210 - 2 01 /02 B. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. 3. Manville: Building Insulations Div., Manville Sales Corp. 4. Owens/Coming Fiberglass Corp. C. Manufacturers of Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. 3. Manville: Building Insulations Div., Manville Sales Corp. 4. Owens/Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. C. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed -cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for Type indicated; with 5-year aged r- values of 10.8 and 10.0 at 40 and 75 deg. F (4.4 and 23.9 deg. C), respectively; and as follows: 1. Type IV, 1.6 Ib./cu.ft. min. density, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 5 and 165, respectively. D. Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flarne spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively. 23 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, and complying with requirements for fire performance characteristics. B. Vapor Barrier: 4 mil polyethylene vapor barrier material. 07210 - 3 01/02 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION ,4 A. Require Installer to examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed. A satisfactory substrate is one that complies with requirements of the section in which substrate and related work is specified. Obtain installer's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this Section. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections which might puncture vapor retarders. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. - 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION A. Type: Install the following type of perimeter foundation wall insulation: 1. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation. B. Set units in Adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Type: Install the following types of general building insulation: 1. Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Roofs and elsewhere as shown. B. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 07210 - 4 01 /02 C. Seal joints between closed -cell (non -breathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. D. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR BARRIER A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those which have been stuffed with loose fiber -type insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at lap joints; space fasteners 16" o.c. C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives per vapor retarder manufacturer's printed directions. Seal buttjoints and fastener penetrations with tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with cloth or aluminized tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer to create an air -tight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.6 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide tempgrary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 07210 - 5 O1/02 SECTION 07411 - MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS & TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each type of preformed metal roof and soffit panel is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this Section. B. The types of panels required include the following: 1. Formed sheet panels, flush appearance, intended for male -female interlocking side , joint. 2. Accessories to be constructed of the same prefinished metal as the roof panels includes gutters, downspouts, hip edges, fascia and soffits and metal trim as work of this Section. C. Prefinished galvanized metal trim used in conjunction with the preformed metal roof panels and elsewhere (flashing, miscellaneous trim, etc.) is specified in this Section. D. Sealant for trim is specified in Division 7 Section - "Joint Sealants". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Where possible, prior to fabrication of pre -fabricated panels, take field measurements of structure or substrates to receive panel system. Allow for trimming panel units where final dimensions cannot be established prior to fabrication. 1.4 SUBMITTALS C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified product test results, installation instructions, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each component and for total panel system. _ D. Samples: Submit 2 samples 12" square, of each exposed finish material. E. Shop Drawings: Submit small-scale layouts of panels on roofs and large-scale details of edge conditions, joints, comers, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory and field assembly work. 07411 - 1 01 /02 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering preformed roof products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Preformed Metal Roof Panels: "Snap -Seam Structural Batten System", 18" wide, 24 ga.", AEP-Span. C. Preformed Metal Soffit Panels: "Flush Panel, 12" wide, 12 ga.", (No grooves), AEP-Span. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Steel for Painting/Coating: Hot -dip zinc coated steel sheet, ASTM A 446, Grade A except where higher strength required for performance, G90 zinc coating, surface treated for maximum coating performance. 2.3 METAL FINISHES A. General: Apply coatings either before or after forming and fabricating panels, as required by coating process and as required for maximum coating performance capability. Protect coating promptly after application and cure, by application of strippable film or removable adhesive cover, and retain until installation has been completed. Provide colors or color matches as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Roof Panels, Soffit Panels, Trim: Flouropolymer Coating: Full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked -on for 15 minutes at 4650 deg. F (232 deg. C), in a dry film thickness of 1.0 mils, 30% reflective gloss (ASTM D 523), over 0.3 mil. baked -on epoxy primer. C. Durability: Provide coating which has been field tested under normal range of weathering conditions for minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or check in finish, and without chalking in excess of 8 (ASTM D 659), and without fading in excess of 5 NBS units. 2.4 PREFINISHED GALVANIZED METAL TRIM: 07411 - 2 01/02 A. General: Shop fabricate and finish trim and accessories at the too greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional requirements, and with structural requirements, and the applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal" Manual and other recognized industry standards. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance; with expansion provisions for -- running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations. Form exposed sheet metalwork without excessive oil -canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Metal Gages: Thickness required for structural performances, but not less than manufacturer's recommended minimums for profiles and applications indicated, and not less than 24 gage (0.0299"). C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non -expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with industry standards. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Concealed, unless not possible, then utilize manufacturer's standard non- corrosive types, with exterior heads gasketed. B. Accessories: Except as indicated as work of another specification section, provide 6 components required for a complete roof panel system, including gutters, hip roof edges, trim, copings, fascias, gravel stops, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of panels. C. Prefinished Galvanized Metal Trim, Walls, and Soffits: Provide prefinished trim, same material as roof panels, profiles as indicated or as required, at termination of roof panels, ^' or at junction with other materials. Thickness shall be 24 gauge. D. Felt Underlayment: Asphalt saturated and coated organic felt base sheet meeting the requirements of ASTM D 2626-81 "Specifications for Asphalt Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing", without perforations. Weight as specified below: A. Weight: 301bs. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC paint 12, compound for 15-mil dry -� film thickness per coat. 2.6 PANEL FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent - possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as required to fulfill 07411 - 3 01/02 indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional requirements and with structural requirements. B. Metal Gages: Thicknesses required for structural performances, but not less than manufacturer's recommended minimums for profiles and applications indicated, and not less than 24 gage (0.0299"). C. Apply bituminous coating or other permanent separation materials on concealed panel surfaces where panels would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are noncompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finishes. D. Condensation: Fabricate panels for control of condensation, including proper inclusion of seals and provisions for breathing, venting, weeping, and draining. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with panel fabricator's and material manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. B. Install panels with concealed fasteners. C. Install 36" wide sheets of felt underlayment over substrate with each sheet overlapping the preceding sheet 6" minimum. D. Nail underlayment to plywood sheathing with roofing nails 1" from edge, at 18" o.c. E. Spot mop in field and continuously seal at lower edge and end laps with asphalt emulsion prior to nailing. F. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align panel units within installed tolerance of 1 /4" in 20'- 0" on level/plumb/slope and location/line as indicated, and within 1/8" offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of panel systems. Provide types of gaskets, sealants, and fillers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer. H. Refer to other sections of these specifications for product and installation requirements applicable to indicated joint sealers. 07411 - 4 Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph Page Number & Title Number Number & Title Number 4.5 Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, 6.25 Submittal Proceedures; CON - Hazardous Waste or TRACTOR's Review Prior Radioactive Material....................7-8 to Shop Drawing or Sample Submittal....................................16 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE ................................. 8 6.26 Shop Drawing & Sample Submit- -- 5.1-5.2 Performance, Payment and Other tals Review by ENGINEER ...... 16-17 Bonds ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,I............. 8 6.27 Responsibility for Variations 5.3 Licensed Sureties and Insurers; From Contract Documents ,,,,,,,,,,,,17 Certificates of Insurance,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 8 6.28 Related Work Performed Prior 5.4 CONTRACTOR's Liability to ENGINEER's Review and Insurance..........................................9 Approval of Required 5.5 OWNER's Liability Insurance,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9 Submittals.,.,,, ,,.,,.,,,.... ,,,,,,........17 -' 5.6 Property Insurance ..........................9-10 6.29 Continuing the Work 5.7 Boiler and Machinery or Addi- 6.30 CONTRACTOR's General tional Property Insurance.................10 Warranty and Guarantee „............. 17 5.8 Notice of Cancellation Prmision......... 10 6.31-6.33 Indemnification .........................17-18 5.9 CONTRACTOR's Responsibility 6.34 Survival of Obligations ...................18 -' for Deductible Amounts .................... 10 5.10 Other Special Insurance ......................10 7. OTHER WORK ............................................ 18 5.11 Waiver of Rights ........ ..................11 7.1-7.3 Related Work at Site„ ................18 5.12-5.13 Receipt and Application of 7.4 Coordination,,,,,,., ....................18 Insurance Proceeds 10-11 -• 5.14 Acceptance of Bonds and Insu- 8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES .........................18 ance; Option to Replace,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 11 8.1 Communications to CON- 5.15 Partial Utilization --Property TRACTOR ...............................„ 18 Insurance,,,,,,,,................................ 11 8.2 Replacement of ENGINEER ............ 18 8.3 Furnish Data andPay Promptly 6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 11 When Due 18 6.1-6.2 Supervision and Superintendencp....... 11 8.4 Lands and Easements; Reports ^ 6.3-6.5 Labor, Materials and Equipment,,, 11-12 and Tests .............................. 18-19 6.6 Progress Schedule..............................12 8.5 Insurance ,,,,................................... 19 6.7 Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items; 8.6 Change Orders ......... ................19 CONTRACTOR's Expense; 8.7 Inspections, Tests and Substitute Construction Approvals...................................19 - Methods or Procedures; 8.8 Stop or Suspend Work; ENGINEER's Evaluation 12-13 Terminate CONTRACTOR's 6.8-6.11 Concerning Subcontractors, Services......................................19 Suppliers and Others; 8.9 Limitations on OWNER'S Waiver of Rights .........................13-14 Responsibilities, ........................... 19 6.12 Patent Fees and Royalties ..................14 8.10 Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, 6.13 Permits14 Hazardous Waste or 6.14 Laws and Regulations ........................14 Radioactive Material ..................... 19 _ 6.15 Taxes ........................................... 14-15 8.11 Evidence of Financial 6.16 Use of Premises.,.,,. 15 Arrangements ............................. 19 6.17 Site Cleanliness ................................. 15 6.18 Safe Structural Loading ..................... 15 9. ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING 6.19 Record Documents .............................J5 CONSTRUCTION,,.,.,..,,.,,,,_, ...........19 6.20 Safety and Protection,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 15-16 9.1 OWNER's Representative,,,,,,,,,,,,,,. 19 6.21 Safety Representative ......................... J6 9.2 Visits to Site .................................. 19 -- 6.22 Hazard Communication Program$ ...... 16 9.3 Project Representative ........... J 9-21 6.23 Emergencies.....................................16 9.4 Clarifications and Interpre- 6.24 Shop Drawings and Samples..............16 tations,....................................... 21 _ 9.5 Authorized Variations in Wrk 21 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01/02 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PREFINISHED GALVANIZED METAL TRIM A. General: Comply with trim fabricator's and material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor trim and other components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal/structural movement. B. Install trim with concealed fasteners except where indicated otherwise. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by means of finish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures. B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films (if any) as soon as each panel is installed. Upon completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer, and maintain in aclean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07411 07411 - 5 01 i02 SECTION 07531 - EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Adhered membrane roofing system. 2. Tapered Roof Insulation Crickets B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking and for wood -based, structural -use roof deck panels. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. B. Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," before multiplication by a safety factor. Factored Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure, calculated according to procedures in SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems," after multiplication by a safety factor. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. 07531 - 1 01 i02 B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE 7. D. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. E. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist the factored design uplift pressures calculated according to SPRI's "Wind Load Design Guide for Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened Roofing Systems." _ 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns. r C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 2. 12-by-12 inch (300-by-300-mm) square of tapered roof insulation cricket material. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is ^ approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. F. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. G. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system. 07531 -2 01/02 I. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system. J. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. K. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. L. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing, FMG approval for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as roofing membrane. E. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. F. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. G. Fire -Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire -resistance -rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. H. Preliminary Roofing Conference:. Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: A. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. B. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 07531 - 3 01/02 C. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to snake progress and avoid —" delays. _ D. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. E. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. F. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. G. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. H. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. I. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting - agency representative; roofing Installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. — 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected _ location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 07531 - 4 01/02 C. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. D. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. E. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. B. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing accessories, substrate board, and other components of membrane roofing system. C. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: B. Available Manufacturers: Subjecttocompliancewith requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2.2 EPDM ROOFING MEMBRANE A. EPDM Roofing Membrane: ASTM D 4637, Type II, scrim or fabric internally reinforced uniform, flexible sheet made from EPDM, and as follows: B. Available Manufacturers: 07531 - 5 01/02 1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Celotex Corporation. 3. ERSystems. 4. Firestone Building Products Company. 5. GenFlex Roofing Systems. 6. International Diamond Systems. 7. Johns Manville International, Inc. 8. Mule -Hide Products Co., Inc. 9. Protective Coatings, Inc. 10. Roofing Products International, Inc. 11. Stafast Roofing Products. 12. Versico Inc. C. Thickness: 45 mils (I.l mm)], nominal. D. Exposed Face Color: WHITE 2.3 TAPERED ROOF INSULATION CRICKETS A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass -fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. AlliedSignal Inc.; Commercial Roofing Systems. b. Apache Products Company. C. Atlas Roofing Corporation. d. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. e. Celotex Corporation. f. Firestone Building Products Company. g. GAF Materials Corp. h. GenFlex Roofing Systems. i. Hunter Panels, LLC. j. Johns Manville International, Inc. k. Koppers Industries. 1. RMAX. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 07531 - 6 01/02 B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. C. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 2, cellulosic -fiber insulation board, %2 inch (13 min) thick. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. B. Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive. E. Cold Fluid -Applied Membrane Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid -applied bonding adhesive formulated to adhere fleece -backed roofing membrane to substrate. F. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard synthetic -rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film]. G. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard single -component sealant color to match roofing membrane. H. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. I. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, in -seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: A. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 07531 - 7 01/02 B. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 TAPERED ROOF INSULATION CRICKET INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. -' C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. E. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.4 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. - 07531 - 8 01/02 C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. E. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible F. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. G. Apply a continuous bead of in -seam sealant before closing splice if required by membrane roofing system manufacturer. H. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations. I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements. J. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. K. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing. 3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field -formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 07531 - 9 Article or Paragraph Page Article or Paragraph Page Number & Title Number Number & Title Number 9.6 Rejecting Defective Work...................21 9.7-9.9 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments....................................21 9.10 Determinations for Unit Prices 21-22 9.11-9.12 Decisions on Disputes; ENGI- NEER as Initial Interpreter..............22 9.13 Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Responsibilities.... 22-23 CHANGES IN THE WORK ....................................... 23 10.1 OWNER's Ordered Change................23 10.2 Claim for Adjustment ........................ 23 10.3 Work Not Required by Contract Documents ..................................... 23 10.4 Change Orders..................................23 10.5 Notification of Surety,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 23 CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE........*....*...............23 11.1-11.3 Contract Price; Claim for Adjustment; Value of the Work ................................... 23-24 11.4 Cost of the Work ..........................24-25 11.5 Exclusions to Cost of the World,,,,,,.,.. 25 11.6 CONTRACTOR's Fee,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 25 11.7 Cost Records ..._.,25-26 11.8 Cash Allowances ..... ......... ..........26 11.9 Unit Price Work26 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ............................26 12.1 Claim for Adjustment ........................26 12.2 Time of the Essence........... I..............26 12.3 Delays Beyond CONTRACTOR's Control ...................................... 26-27 12.4 Delays Beyond OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's Control................27 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK..................................................27 13.1 Notice of Defects.........................I.....27 13.2 Access to the Work....... I....................27 13.3 Tests and Inspections; CONTRACTOR's Cooperation,,,,,,,,. 27 13.4 OWNER's Responsibilities; Independent Testing Laboratory,,,.... 27 13.5 CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities.............I.................27 13.6-13.7 Covering Work Prior to Inspec- tion, Testing or Approval.................27 13.8-13.9 Uncovering Work at ENGI- NEER's Request .....................27-28 13.10 OWNER May Stop the Work ........... 28 13.11 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ...........................28 13.12 Correction Period 28 13.13 Acceptance ofDefective Work ......... 28 13.14 OWNER May Correct Defective Work ..................................... 28-29 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ................................................. 29 14.1 Schedule of Values 29 14.2 Application for Progress Payment ..................................... 29 14.3 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title...........................................29 14.4-14.7 Review of Applications for Progress Payments. ................. 29-30 14.8-14.9 Substantial Completion,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 30 14.10 Partial Utilization 30-31 14.11 Final Inspection.,..,,, ......I..........31 14.12 Final Application for Payment ........ 31 14.13-14.14 Final Payment and Acceptance ....... 31 14.15 Waiver of Claims 31-32 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ............................................... 32 15.1 OWNER May Suspend Work .......... 32 15.2-15.4 OWNER May Terminate ................ 32 15.5 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate;, 32-33 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION , 33 17. MISCELLANEOUS...........................................33 17.1 Giving Notice................................33 17.2 Computation of Times,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 33 17.3 Notice of Claim..............................33 17.4 Cumulative Remedies 33 17.5 Professional Fees and Court Costs Included .............................33 17.6 Applicable State Laws„ ............. 33-34 Intentionally left blank............................I..........35 EXHIBIT GC -A: (Optional) Dispute Resolution Agreement,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, GC -Al 16.1-16.6 Arbitration ...... ........................ QC -Al 16.7 Mediation ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,GC-A1 iv EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01/02 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. B. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction _ period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a _ condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 3.8 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. Supply Manufacturer's Standard 10 Year Warranty. -- END OF SECTION 07531 07531 - 10 01/02 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Prefinished Metal Gutters and Downspouts. 2. Metal flashing. 3. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. C. Samples of the following flashing, sheet metal, and accessory items: 8-inch-square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS A. Pre -Painted Gutters and Downspouts (24 ga.): 07620 - 1 01/02 1. 5" Gutter - Ogee Style 2. 4" Downspout - Corrugated Style B. Pre -painted Steel Flashing: Flashing shall be 24 ga. pre -painted steel. 2.2 METAL FINISHES A. General: Apply coatings either before or after forming and fabricating panels, as required by coating process and as required for maximum coating performance capability. Protect coating promptly after application and cure, by application of strippable film or removable -- adhesive cover, and retain until installation has been completed. Provide colors or color matches as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Gutters, Downspouts and Flashing Trim at Sheet Metal Flashing: C. Flouropolymer Coating: Full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked -on for 15 minutes at 4650 deg. F (232 deg. C), in a dry film thickness of 1.0 mils, 30% reflective gloss (ASTM D 523), over 0.3 mil. baked -on epoxy primer. D. Durability: Provide coating which has been field tested under normal range of weathering conditions for minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or check in finish, and without chalking in excess of S (ASTM D 659), and without fading in excess of 5. NBS units. 2.3 PREFINISHED GALVANIZED METAL TRIM: A. General: Shop fabricate and finish trim and accessories at the too greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and dimensional requirements, and with structural requirements, and the applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal" Manual and other recognized industry standards. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Metal Gages: Thickness required for structural performances, but not less than manufacturer's recommended minimums for profiles and applications indicated, and not less than 24 gage (0.0299"). C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non -expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with industry standards. 07620 - 2 01/02 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder: For use with steel or copper, provide 50 - 50 tin/lead solder (ASTM B 32), with rosin flux. B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non -corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior nonmoving joints including riveted joints. G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/ weather - resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. H. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, snatching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance. I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 2.5 FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop -fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather - resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit sub- strates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed 07620 - 3 01 /02 within joints). D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for ^' waterproof performance. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION _ A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07620 07620 - 4 01i02 SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Roof hatches with skylight. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field -fabricated metal flashing and counterflashing, scuppers, gutters and downspouts, fascia, roof expansion joint covers, valleys, and miscellaneous sheetmetal trim and accessories. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for shop primers and field painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, materials, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and roof -mounted items. Show the following: 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof -mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for roof accessories with factory -applied color finishes. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples in manufacturer's standard sizes, and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 07720 - 1 01/02 If finishes involve normal color or shade variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following: I. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Roof Hatches: 1. Babcock -Davis Hatchways, Inc. 2. Bilco Company. 3. Bristolite Skylights. 4. Custom Curb, Inc. 5. Dur-Red Products, Inc. 6. Goeller Enterprises. 7. Hi Pro International, Inc. 8. J. L. Industries, Inc. 9. Metallic Products Corporation. 10. Milcor, Inc. 11. Nystrom Products Co. 12. O'Keeffe's Inc. 13. Precision Stair Corporation. 14. Roof Products & Systems Corp. 15. ThyCurb, Inc, 16. Trimco, Inc. 17. Wasco Products, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Aluminum Sheet: 11 gauge, mill finished aluminum. B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass -fiber board of thickness indicated. 07720 - 2 01 /02 C. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. D. Where removing exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads. E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coating. G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. H. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.3 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatch quality is based upon the Bilco GS-50 or an approved equal. B. Roof Hatch includes clear polycarbonate dome. C. General: Fabricate units to withstand 40-Ibf/sq. ft. (1.9- kPa) external and 20-Ibf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa) internal loading pressure. Frame with minimum 9-inch- (225-mm-) high, integral -curb, double -wall construction with 1-1/2-inch(38- mm) insulation, formed cants and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double -wall cover (lid) construction with 1- inch- (25-mm-) thick insulation core. Provide gasketing and equip with corrosion -resistant or hot -dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold -open devices, interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles. D. Type: Single -leaf personnel access. A. For Ladder Access: 30 by 36 inches (750 by 900 mm). B. Material: Aluminum sheets. 2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 07720 - 3 01/02 B. Protect mechanical finishes on. exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof — accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations, equipment, and other construction involving roof accessories to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures. _ B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated, C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other permanent separation. D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal. E. Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic sealant. — F. Operational Units: Test -operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touchup damaged metal coatings. END OF SECTION 07720 07720 - 4 01/02 SECTION 07920 -JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealer is indicated on drawings, and noted in "JOINT SEALER SCHEDULE" at the end of this section. B. Refer to Division-8 Sections for glazing requirements; not work of this section. C. Refer to Division-15 and 16 sections for joint sealers in mechanical and electrical work; not work of this section. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3 years at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this project and who will assign mechanics from these earlier applications to this project, of which one will serve as lead mechanic. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. B. Samples for Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. 07920 - 1 INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS City of Fort Collins modifications to the General Conditions of the Construction Contract are not shown in this index Article or Paragraph Number Acceptance of -- Bonds and Insurance........................................5.14 defective Work............................10.4.1, 13.5, 13.13 final payment ... ......... ..................9.12, 14.15 insurance5.14 other Work, by CONTRACTOR .........................7.3 Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Item* ... ..............6.7.1 Work by OWNER .............................. 2.5, 6.30, 6.34 Access to the -- Lands, OWNER and CONTRACTOR responsibilities ... ....... ............................I ..... 4.1 site, related Work .............................................. 7.2 Work...........................................13.2, 13.14, 14.9 Acts or Omissions--, Acts and Omissions-- CONTRACTOR6.9.1, 9.13.3 ENGINEER .......................................... 6.20, 9.13.3 OWNER....................................................6.20, 8.9 Addenda --definition of (also see definition of Specifications) ....... (1.6, 1.10, 6.19), 1.1 Additional Property Insurances ................................. 5.7 Adjustments -- Contract Price or Contract Times ...........................1.5, 3.5, 4.1, 4.3.2, 4.5.2, .............................4.5.3, 9.4, 9.5, 10.2-10.4, .........................................11, 12, 14.8, 15.1 progress schedule..............................................6.6 Agreement -- definition of......................................................1.2 "All -Risk" Insurance, policy form............................5.6.2 Allowances, Cash....................................................11.8 Amending Contract Documents ................................ 3.5 Amendment, Written -- in general................1.10, 1.45, 3.5, 5.10, 5.12, 6.6.2 ..........................6.8.2, 6.19, 10.1, 10:4, 11.2 ....................................12.1, 13.12.2, 14.7.2 Appeal, OWNER or CONTRACTOR intent to ..........................9.10, 9.11, 10.4, 16.2, 16.5 Application for Payment -- definition of......................................................1.3 ENGINEER's Responsibility ............... I .... ............ .9 final payment ................. 9.13.4, 9.13.5, 14.12-14.15 in general ..........................2.8, 2.9, 5.6.4, 9.10, 15.5 progress payment,,...,, .. 14.1-14.7 ............................. review of..................................................14.4-14.7 Arbitration.....................................................16.1-16.6 Asbestos -- claims pursuant thereto..........................4.5.2, 4.5.3 CONTRACTOR authorized to stop Work ... I ....... 4.5.2 definition of ......................................................... IA Article or Paragraph Number OWNER responsibility for,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 4.5.1, 8.10 possible price and times change,.,.,,, ......... 4.5.2 Authorized Variations in Work...,...., 3 6, 6.25, 6.27, 9.5 Availability of Lands..........................................4.1, 8.4 Award, Notice of--defined,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,1.25 Before Starting Construction .... ......... .........2.5-2.8 Bid --definition of........................1.5 (1.1, 1.10, 2.3, 3.3, ........................4.2.6.4, 6.13, 11.4.3, 11.9.1) Bidding Documents --definition of...................................................1.6 (6.8.2) Bidding Requirements --definition of..........................................1.7 (1.1, 4.2.6.2) Bonds -- acceptance of ....................................................5.14 additional bonds..................................10.5, 11.4.5.9 Cost of the Work.............................................11.5.4 definition of.......................................................1.8 delivery of....................................................2.1, 5.1 final Application for Payment .................14.12-14.14 general......................................1.10, 5.1-5.3, 5.13, ..............I.........................9.13, 10.5, 14.7.6 Performance, Payment and Other...................5.1-5.2 Bonds and Insurance --in general.................................5 Builder's risk "all-risk" policy form ........................5.6.2 Cancellation Provisions, Insurancc,.,..... 5.4.11, 5.8, 5.15 Cash Allowances....................................................11.8 Certificate of Substantial Completion,,,,,,, 1.38, 6.30.2.3, ..................................................14.8, 14.10 Certificates of Inspection ...................9.13.4, 13.5, 14.12 Certificates of Insurance,,,,,,,,,,,,, 2.7, 5.3, 5.4.11, 5.4.13, .......................5.6.5, 5.8, 5.14, 9.13.4, 14.12 Change in Contract Price -- Cash Allowances, ............................................. 11.8 claim for price adjustment,.,,,,,,,,,, 4.1, 4.2.6, 4.5, 5.15, 6.8.2, 9.4 ...................9.5, 9.11, 10.2, 10.5, 11.2, 13.9, ................*....13.13, 13.14, 14.7, 15.1, 15.5 CONTRACTOR's fee 11.6 Cost of the Work general ..........:............... I ....................11.4-11.7 Exclusions to>..............................................11.5 Cost Records.....................................................11.7 in general.............1.19, 1.44, 9.11, 10.4.2, 10.4.3, 11 Lump Sum Pricing..........................................11.3.2 Notification of Surety........................................10.5 Scope of> .............................. ......... .......10.3-10.4 Testing and Inspection, Uncovering the Work..................................13.9 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01/02 C. Test Reports: Submit the following test reports: 1. Certified test reports for elastomeric sealants evidencing compliance with requirements specified based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations within a 24-month period preceding date of submission of test reports to Architect. Include test results for aged performance including hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, low -temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100% strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering. 2. Provide test reports from an independent testing laboratory acceptable to Architect and experienced in the testing of elastomeric sealants. D. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature change, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: ^ 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturer or below 40°F (4.40C). 2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and _ application, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealer indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. _ 07920 - 2 01 i02 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. B. One -Part Non -Acid -Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and complying with the following requirements for Uses, modulus and additional joint movement capability: C. Uses NT, M, G, A and O, as applicable to joint substrates indicated. D. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more than 75 psi or less at 100% elongation when tested after 14 days at 77°F (22°C) and 50% relative humidity per ASTM D 412. E. Additional capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following, percentage increase and decrease of joint width as measured at time of application and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920. 50% F. One -Part Acid -Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. G. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with furgicide for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates around ceramic tile, showers, sinks and plumbing fixtures. H. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: A. One -Part Non -Acid -Curing Low -Modulus Silicone Sealant: A. "Chemcalk 1000'; Bostik Construction Products Div. B. "Dow Corning 790' ; Dow Corning Corp. C. "864"; Pecora Corp. D. "Omniseal"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chem Prod. Inc. E. "Spectrum 1 "; Tremco, Inc. B. One -Part Non -Acid -Curing Medium -Modulus Silicone Sealant: A. "Dow Corning 795"; Dow Corning Corp. B. "Silpruf'; General Electric Co. C. "Gesil N'; General Electric Co. D. "Spectrum 2'; Tremco, Inc. 07920 - 3 01 /02 C. One -Part Acid -Curing Silicone Sealant: A. "Chem -Calk 1200"; Bostik Construction Products Div. B. "Dow Corning 999'; Dow Corning Corp. C. "SCS 1200'; General Electric Co D. "863"; Pecora Corp. E. "Rhodorsil 313'; Rhone-Poulenc Inc. F. "Omniglaze"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chem. Prod. — Inc. G. "Proglaze"; Tremco, Inc. D. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: a. "Dow -Corning 786'; Dow Corning Corp. b. "SCS 1702'; General Electric Co. C. 11863 #345 White'; Pecora Corp. d. "Proglaze White"; Tremco Corp. — 2.3 SOLVENT -RELEASE -CURING JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one -part, non -sag, solvent -release -curing, acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Uses NT, M, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O; except for selected test properties which —' are revised as follows: 1. Heat -aged hardness: 40-50 -- 2. Weight loss: a. Max. cyclic movement capability (Class): +12-1/2% B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acrylic Sealant: a. "Chem -Calk 800'; Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "60+Unicrylic'; Pecora Corp. _ C. "PTI 738'; Protective Treatments Inc. d. "Mono"; Tremco Inc. 2.4 FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT SEALERS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sealant and accessory materials with fire -resistance rating indicated which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Foamed -In -Place Fire -Stopping Sealant: Two-part, foamed -in -place, silicone sealant formulated for use as part of a through -penetration fire -stop system for filling openings '- around cables, conduit, pipes and similar penetrations through walls and floors. „ 07920 - 4 01/02 C. One -Part Fire -Stopping Sealant: One part elastomeric sealant formulated for use as part of a through -penetration fire -stop system for sealing openings around cables, conduit, pipes and similar penetrations through walls and floors. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Foamed -In -Place Fire -Stopping Sealant: a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "Pensil 851"; General Electric Co. 2. One -Part Fire -Stopping Sealant: a. 'Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP25"; Electrical Products Div./3M. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non -staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non -waxing, non -extruding strips of plastic foam of material indicated below, and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Either flexible, open cell polyurethane foam or non -gassing, closed -cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back (3rd) surface of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer substrate and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non -staining, chemical cleaner of type acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing materials which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials. C. Masking Tape: Provide non -staining, non -absorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. 07920 - 5 01/02 D. Accessory Materials for Fire -Stopping Sealants: Provide forming, joint -fillers, packing and other accessory materials required for installation of fire -stopping sealants as applicable to installation conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Require installer to inspect joints indicated to receive joint sealers for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Obtain Installer's written report listing any conditions detrimental to performance of joint sealer work. Do not allow joint sealer to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent; protective _ coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint „ substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile and other non- porous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply withjoint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confineprimers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 07920 - 6 01i02 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. C. Solvent -Release -Curing Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 804 for use of solvent -release -curing sealants. D. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install Joint -fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. 2. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint -fillers. 3. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint fillers. 4. Remove absorbent joint -fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 5. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint -fillers, compression seals or back of joints where required to prevent third -side adhesion of sealant to back of joint. E. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to j oint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Non -sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. G. Concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C 962, unless otherwise indicated. H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrappings, taking care not to pull or stretch material, and complying with sealant manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials and tools which produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Installation of Fire -Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing and other accessory materials to fill openings around mechanical and electrical services penetrating floors and walls to provide fire -stops with fire resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. 07920 - 7 01i02 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. B. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of -- products in which joints occur. JOINT SEALER SCHEDULE JOINT SEALERS DESCRIPTION OF JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND LOCATION WHERE SEALANT SHALL BE APPLIED (SEE NOTE BELOW) A. One -Part Non -Acid Curing Silicone Sealant exterior and interior joints not to receive paint; between metal and concrete or masonry; perimeters of metal frames in exterior walls; and overhead or ceiling joints. B. One -Part Acid -Curing Silicone Sealant exposed Joints at windows. C. One -Part Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant interior joints in surfaces in bath rooms, and kitchens. D. Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant interior joints in field -painted vertical and overhead surfaces, hollow metal door frames, gypsum drywall, and all other interior locations not indicated otherwise. E. Foamed -In -Place Fire -Stopping Sealant through penetrations in fire -resistance -rated floor and wall assemblies involving multiple pipes, conduits, etc. F. One -Part Fire -Stopping Sealant through penetrations in fire -resistance -rated floor and wall assemblies involving single pipes, conduits where joint widths are narrow and of _ uniform width. *Note: Install sealant indicated in joints fitting descriptions and locations listed as well as in locations identified by drawings. END OF SECTION 07920 07920 - 8 DIVISION 8 08110 — Steel Doors and Frames 08211 — Flush Wood Doors 08361 — Sectional Overhead Doors 08411 — Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08550 — Wood Windows 08711 — Door Hardware 08800 — Glazing 01i02 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL l .l RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of standard steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings, and includes: 1. Standard steel doors and frames. 2. Standard Steel window frames. B. Finish hardware is specified elsewhere in Division 8. C. Glass and glazing is specified elsewhere in Division 8. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100) and as herein specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforce- ments, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. D. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 08110 - 1 01/02 A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following: B. Steel Doors and Frames, Window Frames (General): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. MATERIALS Allied Steel Product, Inc. Amweld/Div. American Welding & Mfg. Co. Ceco Corp. Copco Door Co. Curries Mfg., Inc. Dittco Products, Inc. Fenestra Corp. Kewanee Corp. Mesker Industries, Inc. Pioneer Bldrs. Products Corp./Div. CORE Industries, Inc. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co. Trussbilt, Inc. Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel. A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 08110 - 2 Unit Price Work 11.9 ........................................... Article or Paragraph Number Value of Work..................................................11.3 Change in Contract Times -- Claim for times adjustment.,...,,, 4.1, 4.2.6, 4.5, 5.15, ...........1 6.8.2, 9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2, 10.5, 12.1, .............13.9, 13.13, 13.14, 14.7, 15.1, 15.5 Contractual time limits ...................................... 12.2 Delays beyond CONTRACTOR's control............. I ................. .........................12.3 Delays beyond OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's control............................12.4 Notification of surety .... ........ ......... .........10.5 Scope of change....,.... ........................................ 10.3-10.4 Change Orders -- Acceptance ofDefective Work....... .............. I .... 13.13 Amending Contract Documents ..........................3.5 Cash Allowances 1.8 Change of Contract Price.....................................11 Change of Contract Times..................................12 Changes in the Work ... ......... ......... ........ 10 CONTRACTOR's fee ........................................ 11.6 Cost of the Work11.4-11.7 Cost Records....................................................11.7 definition of.....................................I................1.9 emergencies.................................................... 0.23 ENGlNEER's responsibility,,,,.... 9.8, 10.4, 11.2, 12.1 executionof.....................................................10.4 Indemnifiction .........................6.12, 6.16, 6.31-6.33 Insurance, Bonds and ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,„.......5.10, 5.13, 10.5 OWNER may terminate ........ ..... ......... 15.2-15.4 OWNER's Responsibility ............................ 8.6, 10.4 Physical Conditions -- Subsurface and .............................................. 4.2 Underground Facilities--............................4.3.2 Record Documents ....... ......* „ „ 6.19 Scope of Change,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, I ............... 10.3-10.4 Substitutes ............................................. 6.7.3, 6.8.2 Unit Price Work...............................................11.9 value of Work, covered by.................................11.3 Changes in the Work .......... ......... ......... ........jo Notification of surety .... ......... ......... ........10.5 OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's responsibilities ............................................. 10.4 Right to an adjustment......................................10.2 Scope of change ....... ................................. 10.3-10.4 Claims -- against CONTRACTOR...................................6.16 against ENGINEER ..... .............................. 6 32 against OWNER Change of Contract Price ...................... *.... 9.4, 11.2 Change of Contract Times,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9.4, 12.1 CONTRACTOR's.............4, 7.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2, ...........I ..............11.2, 11.9, 12.1, 13.9, 14.8, ............................................15.1, 15.5, 17.3 CONTRACTOR's Fee,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,„....,.,,,,..,,,,,,,11.6 Article or Paragraph Number CONTRACTOR's liability ........... 5.4, 6.12, 6.16, 6.31 Cost of the Work11.4, 11.5 Decisions on Disputes...............................9.11, 9.12 Dispute Resolution ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,16.1 Dispute Resolution Agreement ....... .........16.1-16.6 ENGINEER as initial interpretor .......................9.11 Lump Sum Pricing ......................................... 11.3.2 Notice of..........................................................17.3 OWNER'S,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2, 11.2, 11.9 ........................12.1, 13.9, 13.13, 13.14, 17.3 OWNER's liability ............................................ 5.5 OWNER may refuse to make payment.................14.7 Professional Fees and Court Costs Included.....................................................17.5 request for formal decision on............................9.11 Substitute Items.............................................6.7.1.2 Time Extension ... ... ...........................................12.1 Time requirements....................................9.11, 12.1 Unit Price Work ......... ........ .............11.9.3 Valueof...........................................................1,1.3 Waiver of --on Final Payment.................14.14, 14.15 Work Change Directive......................................10.2 written notice requirecl,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,*...... 9.11, 11.2, 12.1 Clarifications and Interpretations,,,.,..,,,., 3.6.3, 9.4, 9.11 Clean Site.................................................I..........6.17 Codes of Technical Society, Organization or Association ................................................. 3.3.3 Commencement of Contract Times ..........................2.3 Communications-- general..............................................6.2, 6.9.2, 8.1 Hazard Communication Programs ......................6.22 Completion -- Final Application for Payment .........................14.12 Final Inspection,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 14.11 Final Payment and Acceptance ...............14.13-14.14 Partial Utilization............................................14.10 Substantial Completion .....................1.38, 14.8-14.9 Waiver of Claims ............ ..............................14.15 Computation of Times ......... ... ...........17.2.1-17.2.2 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others .................................................. 6.8-6.11 Conferences -- initially acceptable schedules... I .......................... 2.9 preconstruction................................................... 2.8 Conflict, Error, Ambiguity, Discrepancy -- CONTRACTOR to Report ..........................2.5, 3.3.2 Construction, before starting by CONTRACTOR............................................2.5-2.7 Construction Machinery, Equipment, etc;,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6.4 Continuing the Work......................................6.29, 10.4 Contract Documents-- Amending........................................................... 3.5 Bonds............................................................. 5.1 V1 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01/02 D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18- gage galvanized sheet steel. E. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Paint: G. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for -- specified finish paints. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows: 1. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold -rolled steel. 2. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel (at fabricator's option). 3. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels. 4. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. B. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and template provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware may be done at project site. 2. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware," published by Door and Hardware Institute. C. Shop Painting: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 08110 - 3 01 /02 2.4 STANDARD STEEL DOORS A. Provide metal doors (exterior and interior - 16 gauge metal; exterior and interior frames -16 gauge metal) of types and styles indicated on drawings or schedules. Exterior and interior greenhouse doors to be insulated to a minimum R value of 2.4. All interior doors within the greenhouse space shall be constructed of hot dip galvanized steel. 2.5 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, windows, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 16-gage cold -rolled furniture steel. B. Fabricate frames with mitered corners, welded construction for exterior applications. C. Form interior greenhouse space door frames of hot dip galvanized steel. 2.6 GLAZING STOPS A. Provide minimum 0.0359-inch- (0.9-mm) thick steel. B. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. C. Provide screw -applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. 08110 - 4 01 i02 B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08110 08110 - 5 01 /02 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Solid -core doors with wood -veneer, faces and factory machined for hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.I-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors", and AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 08211 - 1 01 /02 A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials _ or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. _ 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following. 1. Flush Wood Doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b. Ampco Products, Inc. C. Buell Door Company. d. Chappell Door Co. e. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc. f. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. g. GRAHAM Manufacturing Corp. h. Haley Brothers, Inc. - i. Ideal Wood Products, Inc. j. IPIK Door Company. k. Lambton Doors. 08211 - 2 01 /02 1. Marlite. in. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. n. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co. o. Poncraft Door Co. p. Southwood Door Co. q. Vancouver Door Company, Inc. r. VT Industries Inc. S. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species and Cut: Red oak, plain sliced. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Pleasing match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 5. Stiles: Same species as faces. 2.3 SOLID -CORE DOORS A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as needed to eliminate through -bolting hardware. B. Interior Veneer -Faced Doors: 1. Core: Particleboard. 2. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 3. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project -site fitting. B. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A 115-W series standards, and hardware templates. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 08211 - 3 01/02 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written ^ instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. D. Field -Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08211 08211 - 4 01/02 SECTION 08361 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of sectional overhead doors is shown on drawings. Doors to be constructed of a single layer of hot -dipped galvanized, factory -painted white 24 ga. Steel of a full 2" thick section. Steel face to be smooth texture. Polystyrene insulation (R7.70) shall be included. Provide reversing safety edge and photoelectric sensors. (Raynor Steel Form Basic S-24C or approved equal). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer, including frames, sections, brackets, guides, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms, hardware, operators, and installation accessories, to suit openings and head room allowable. B. Each sectional overhead door shall be warranted effective for one year from the date of substantial completion, against defects in material and workmanship. C. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce sectional overhead doors to withstand a 20 lb. per sq. ft. wind -loading pressure. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, rough -in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead door. Include manufacturer's operating instructions and maintenance data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 08361 - 1 01 /02 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Raynor Overhead Door 2. Wayne -Dalton Corp 2.2 STEEL SECTIONS A. All door sections shall be of a single layer of 24 ga. Steel of a full 2" thick section. Steel face to have a smooth texture. B. The exterior skin shall be hot -dipped galvanized steel, pre -painted with an epoxy primer and a white acrylic finish coat. C. Polystyrene insulation (R7.70) shall be installed within the steel pan sections 2.3 SEALS A. Doors shall be equipped with joint seals between sections, perimeter seals on the ends of the exterior surface, a top seal on the top section to seal against the header, and an astragali on the bottom section. B. Air infiltration shall be independently tested at less than or equal to .06 CFM per square foot of door area, in accordance with ASTM E283-73 at a pressure difference of .112" H2O (15 MPH). C. All seals shall be factory installed. 2.4 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: 1. Track shall be 2" heavy gauge galvanized steel designed for clearances shown. Doors shall be reverse angle mounted with a track setting to allow slight compression of top and end seals. 2. All hinges and brackets shall be made from galvanized steel. 3. Track rollers shall be made from hardened steel with a minimum of (10) 1/4" balls per roller. All factory authorized attachments shall be made at locations indicated and reinforced with additional back-up plates. B. Torsion Shaft: 1. All doors shall be supplied with 1-3/8" solid steel shaft keyed the entire shaft length, in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. 2. Torsion springs shall be heavy duty, wound from oil -tempered wire. 08361 -2 01 /02 2.5 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. Furnish electric door -operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer; complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, gear -reduction unit, solenoid -operated brake, clutch, remote -control stations and control devices. B. Provide hand -operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging sprocket- chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency sprocket is engaged. C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing limit -switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. D. Door Operator Type: Provide jackshaft type: a. Power hoist standard door operator, belt drive, as manufactured by Raynor Manufacturing Company. ('/z HP, 120 V, 1 Phase) E. Electric Motors: Provide high -starting torque, reversible, constant -duty, Class A -insulated electric motors with overload protection, sized to move door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3 foot or more than I foot per second. Provide units with factory wired receivers for radio controls. F. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of motors with building electrical system. G. Provide open -drip -proof type motor, and controller with NEMA Type 1 enclosure. H. , Remote Control Station: Provide momentary -contact, three -button control station with push button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." Provide interior units, full -geared, surface -mounted, heavy-duty, with general purpose NEMA Type 1 enclosure, unless otherwise specified. J. Radio Controls: Provide solid state digital radio controls for all operators. K. Provide 2 radio control transmitters for each Sectional Overhead Door. L. Automatic Reversing Control and Photoelectric Sensors: Furnish manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self -coiling cable. Furnish each door with photoelectric sensor. M. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar. PART 3-EXECUTION 08361 - 3 Cash Allowances..............................................11.8 Article or Paragraph Number Change of Contract Price ,,,,,,,,,,11 Change of Contract Times ...................... ............ 12 Changes in the Work................................10.4-10.5 check and verify ......... ................. 2.5 Clarifications and Interpretations ......................... 3.2, 3.6, 9.4, 9.11 definition of .............................................. 1.10 ......... ENGINEER as initial interpreter of,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9.11 ENGINEER as OWNER's representative..............9.1 genera13 Insurance...........................................................5.3 Intent........................................................3.1-3.4 minor variations in the Work ............................. 3.6 OWNER's responsibility to furnish dat4...............8.3 OWNER's responsibility to make prompt payment ..........................$.3, 14.4, 14.13 precedence,,,,,,,, ....................3.1, 3.3.3 Record Documents ................................... .......... 6.19 Reference to Standards and Specifications . of Technical Societies ................................... 3.3 Related Work .................. ......... ................7.2 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies,,,,,,,, 2.5, 3.3 Reuseof ........................................................... 3.7 Supplementing.................................................. 3.6 Termination of ENGINEER's Employment .......... 8.2 Unit Price Work ................................................. 11.9 variations,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 3.6, 6.23, 6.27 Visits to Site, ENGINEER's ............................... 9.2 Contract Price -- adjustment of ............... 3.5, 4.1, 9.4, 10.3, 11.2-11.3 Changeof..........................................................11 Decision on Disputes........................................9.11 definition of ..... ......... ......... ................1.11 Contract Times -- adjustment of ,3.5, 4.1, 9.4, 10.3, 12 Change of................................................12.1-12.4 Commencement of 2.3 definition of.....................................................1.12 CONTRACTOR -- Acceptance of Insurance ................................... 5.14 Communications ............. ......... ........6.2, 6.9.2 Continue Work........................................6.29, 10.4 coordination and scheduling ......... ...............6.9.2 definition of ................... ......... ................1.13 Limited Reliance on Technical Data Authorized.........................................4.2.2 May Stop Work or Terminate............................15.5 provide site access to others,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 7.2, 13.2 Safety and Protection ...................4.3.1.2, 6.16, 6.18, ................... ...................6.21-6.23, 7.2, 13.2 Shop Drawing and Sample Review Prior to Submittal ......................................... 6.25 Stop Work requirements..................................4.5.2 CONTRACTOR's- Article or Paragraph Number Compensation ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,11.1-11.2 Continuing Obligation,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,14.15 -- Defective Work .... ......... ......... 9.6, 13.10-13.14 " Duty to correct defective Work ..........................13.11 Duty to Report -- Changes in the Work caused by Emergency ........................................... 6.23 Defects in Work of Others ............................. 7.3 Differing conditions...................................4.2.3 Discrepancy in Documents,,,,,,,, 2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2 Underground Facilities not indicated.......... 4.3.2 Emergencies.....................................................6.23 Equipment and Machinery Rental, Cost of the Work...........................................11.4.5.3 Fee --Cost Plus11.5.1, 11.6 ...........................11.4.5.6, General Warranty and Guarantee .......................0.30 Hazard Communication Programs ......................6.22 Indemnification .......................6.12, 6.16, 6.31-6.33 Inspection of the Work .............................„ 7.3, 13.4 Labor, Materials and Equipment,,,,,, ......0.3-6.5 Laws and Regulations, Compliance by,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6.14.1 Liability Insurance..............................................5.4 Notice of Intent to Appeal .........................9.10, 10.4 �! obligation to perform and complete theWork....................................................6.30 Patent Fees and Royalties, paid for by,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6.12 Performance and Other Bonds ............................5.1 Permits, obtained and paid for bx.......................0.13 - Progress Schedule ...........................2.6, 2.8, 2.9, 6.6, ........................................ 6.29, 10.4, 15.2.1 Request for formal decisionon disputes,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9.11 Responsibilities -- Changes in the Work..................................10.1 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others......................................6.8-6.11 Continuing the Work ..........................0.29, 10.4 CONTRACTOR's expense...........................0.7.1 CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,•,,,,,,,,6.30 , CONTRACTOR's review prior to Shop Drawing or Sample submittal................6.25 Coordination of Work 6.9.2 Emergencies ................ ......... .............6.23 ENGINEER's evaluation, Substitutes or "Or -Equal" Items..............................0.7.3 For Acts and Omissions -. of Others6.9.1-6.9.2, 9.13 for deductible amounts, insurance...................5.9 general........................................6, 7.2, 7.3, 8.9 Hazardous Communication Programs,,,,,,,,,, 6.22 Indemnification 6.31-6.33 vii EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) y 01/02 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified. B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches o.c. Hang horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers, welded and — bolt -fastened in place. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcing as required for rigid installation of track and door -operating equipment. C. After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. END OF SECTION 08361 08361 - 4 01/02 SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of aluminum entrances and storefronts is shown on drawings and schedules. B. Types of aluminum entrances and storefronts required include the following: 1. Exterior entrance doors. 2. Frames for exterior entrances. 3. Frames for vestibule doors. 4. Storefront type framing system. C. Glazing: Refer to "Glass and Glazing" section of Division 8 for glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefronts. D. Aluminum trim is specified in this section. E. Lock cylinders are specified in Division 8 Finish Hardware Section. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply with requirements for system performance characteristics listed below as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding stock systems according to test methods designated. B. Thermal Movement: Allow for expansion and contraction resulting from ambient temperature range of 140°F (49°C). C. Wind Loading: Provide capacity to withstand loading indicated below, tested per ASTM E 330. D. Uniform pressure of 30 psf inward and 30 psf outward. E. Transmission Characteristics of Fixed Framing: Comply with requirements indicated below for transmission characteristics and test methods. 08411 - 1 01/02 F. Air and Water Leakages: Air infiltration of not more than 0.04 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area per ASTM E 283 and no uncontrolled water penetration per ASTM E 331 at pressure differential of 9.00 psf (excluding operable door edges). G. Condensation Resistance: Not less than 54 CRT per AAMA 1502.7. H. Thermal Transmittance: U-value of not more than 0.59 Btu/(hr x sq. ft. x °F) per AAMA 1503. I. Transmission Characteristics of Entrances: Provide entrance doors with jamb and head frames which comply with requirements indicated below for transmission characteristics and test methods. J. Air Leakages: Air infiltration per linear foot of perimeter crack of not more than 0.50 CFM _ per ASTM E 283 at pressure differential of 1.567 psf. K. Condensation Resistance: Not less than 51 CRT per AAMA 1502.7. L. Thermal Transmittance: U-value of not more than 0.93 Btu/(hr x sq. ft. x °F) per AAMA 1503.1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drawings are based on one manufacturer's standard aluminum entrance and storefront system. Another standard system of a similar and equivalent nature will be acceptable when differences do not materially detract from design concept or intended performances, as N judged solely by Architect. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation _. recommendations for components of aluminum entrances and storefronts required for project, including test reports certifying that products have been tested and comply with performance requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite members, hardware mounting heights, anchorages, reinforcement, expansion provisions, and glazing. 1.6 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY C. Provide written warranty signed by Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to replace aluminum entrances and storefront which fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failure of materials or workmanship include, but are not necessarily limited to: 08411 - 2 01 /02 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration. 2. Faulty operation. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. D. Warranty Period: 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Doors and Frames: 1. "Standard Entrance with Medium Stile Door", Tubelite Architectural Products. C. Exterior Sidelight and Window Framing: 1. "Versa -Therm Framing", (1-3/4" x 4-1/2"), Tubelite Architectural Products. D. Interior Vestibule Framing: 1. "E-4500" (1-3/4 x 4-1/2"), Tubelite Architectural Products 2.2 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components. C. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. D. Provide Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners. E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high -strength aluminum units where feasible; otherwise, nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386. F. Glass and Glazing Materials: Provide glass and glazing materials which comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. 08411 - 3 01/02 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Refer to hardware section of Division 8 for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated herein to be provided by manufacturer of aluminum entrances. B. Provide door manufacturer's heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required, finished to match door. C. Provide and install the following hardware at Doors 111A and I I IB only (Tubelite Model Nos.) for the exterior and interior vestibule doors: 1 pair Offset Pivots P-694, 1438 Series Door Closer, P-005 Pull Handle, P-050 Push Bar, Tremko 270A Threshold, and manufacturer's standard weatherseal system. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: B. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for doors and frame units, including profile requirements, are indicated on drawings. Any variable dimensions are indicated, together with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. C. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. D. Do not drill and tap for surface -mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. I E. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. F. Sequence: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning, finishing, surface treatment, and application of finishes. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to radius of approximately 1/64". G. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations to avoid discoloration; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish. H. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for performance requirements; separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator which will prevent corrosion. I. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. — J. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 08411 - 4 01 /02 K. Weatherstripping: For exterior and vestibule doors, provide weatherstripped aluminum moldings, fitted to each door and frame, forming a continuous interlock between hinge and lock jambs and the closed door. 2.5 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM A. General: Provide inside -outside matched resilient flush -glazed system, system with provisions for glass replacement. Shop -fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. B. Thermal -Break Construction: Fabricate aluminum storefront framing system with integrally concealed, low conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and exposed interior members, in manner which eliminates direct metal -to -metal contact. Provide manufacturer's standard construction which has been in use for similar projects for period of not less than 3 years. 2.6 STILE AND RAIL TYPE ALUMINUM DOORS A. Frame: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j-bolts, or fabricate with structurally welded joints, at manufacturer's option. B. Style: Medium stile door. C. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of door stiles and rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for non -removal. 2.7 ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES A. Frame: Provide tubular and channel frame assemblies, as indicated, with either welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards, reinforced as necessary to support required loads. B. Design: Provide frames 1-3/4" thick, 4-1/2" deep, with minimum wall thickness of 1/8", with hinge jambs reinforced with an internal 3/16" steel channel. 2.8 FINISHES A. High Performance Pigmented Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (cleaned with inhibited chemicals, conversion coated with acid -chromate -fluoride -phosphate treatment, and painted with organic coating specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instruction. 08411 - 5 01/02 B. Fluoropolymer Coating: Full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked -on for 15 minutes at 450 deg. F (232 deg. C), in a dry film thickness of 1.0 mils, 30% reflective gloss (ASTM D 523), over 0.3 mil baked -on epoxy primer. C. Durability: Provide coating which has been field tested wider normal range of weathering ^ conditions for minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or check in finish, and without chalking in excess of 8 (ASTM D 659), and without fading in excess of 5 NBS units. D. Color and Sheen: Provide color and sheen selected by Architect from standard choices available from coating manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Field Measurement: Wherever possible, take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, proceed with _ fabrication and coordination installation tolerances as necessary when field measurements might delay work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of aluminum — entrances and storefronts. B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or — panels. Install components in prop alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. C. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface -mounted hardware items, complying with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. _ D. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as shown to provide weather -tight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. E. Provide aluminum trim, thickness and profile as indicated at locations shown. F. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels shown to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN 08411 - 6 01 i02 A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, without binding, and to provide tight fit at contact points and weatherstripping. B. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after erection and installation of glass and sealants. Remove excess glazing and joint sealant, dirt, and other substances from aluminum surfaces. C. Institute protective measures and other precautions required to assure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 08411 08411 - 7 01 /02 SECTION 08550 - WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following aluminum -clad wood -framed window product types: 1. PELLA DESIGNER SERIES OR APPROVED EQUAL: _ a. Awning windows. b. Casement windows. C. Fixed windows. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance grade number, included as part of the AAMA/NWWDA product designation code, is actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot (pascals) used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. B. Structural test pressure, for uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of design pressure. C. Minimum test size is smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of wood window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and the following: _ 1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 08550 - 1 01/02 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Thermal -break details. 7. Glazing details. 8. Window cleaning provisions. C. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation and used to determine the following: 1. Structural test pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds indicated. 2. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency, for each type, grade, and size of wood window. Test results based on use of down -sized test units will not be accepted. F. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping, and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA101/LS.2,"Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS D. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating 08550 - 2 Labor, Materials and Equipment..............6.3-6.5 Laws and Regulations..................................6.14 Liability Insurance„ ......... ......... ....... 5.4 Article or Paragraph Number Notice of variation from Contract Documents ........................................... 6.27 Patent Fees and Royalties„ ...........................6.12 Permits .................. 6.13 Progress Schedule.........................................6.6 Record Documents,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6.19 related Work performed prior to ENGINEER's approval of required submittals.............. 6.28 safe structural loading.................................6.18 Safety and Protection ................ 6.20, 7.2, 13.2 Safety Representative ........... I ...... I................6.21 Scheduling the Work ...6.9.2 Shop Drawings and Samples........................6.24 Shop Drawings and Samples Review by ENGINEER....,,,,, ........................ .....6.26 Site Cleanliness .......................................... 6.17 Submittal Procedures ,,,,,,,,,,,6.25 Substitute Construction Methods and Procedures.., .................................. 6.7.2 Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items ........ I—— .... 6.7.1 Superintendence ................... ...................6 2 Supervision...................................................6.1 Survival of Obligations................................6.34 Taxes ..................... ......... 6.15 Tests and Inspections...................................13.5 ToReport ................ ......... ......... ...... 2.5 Use of Premises ... .. ........ I ........ 6.16-6.18, 6.30.2.4 Review Prior to Shop Drawing or Sample Submittal ........................................ 6.25 Right to adjustment for changes in the Work ..... 10.2 right to claim,.,_,,,,,,, 4, 7.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.11, 10.2,11.2, ........... 11.9,12.1,13.9,14.8,15.1,15.5,17.3 Safety and Protection,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6.20-6.22, 7.2, 13.2 Safety Representative ..... . ............................. 6.21 Shop Drawings and Samples Submittals ..... 6.24-6.28 Special Consultants........................................11.4.4 Substitute Construction Methods and Procedures 6.7 Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items, Expense...........................................6.7.1, 6.7.2 Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others,,,,,,,,,, 6.8-6.11 Supervision and Superintendence ......... 6.1, 6.2, 6.21 Taxes, Payment by............................................6.15 Use of Premises .................................. . 6.16-6.18 Warranties and guarantees ......................... 6.5, 6.30 Warranty of Title ........... ......... „................i4.3 Written Notice Required -- CONTRACTOR stop Work or terminate ........ 15.5 Reports of Differing Subsurface and Physical Conditions ....................... 4.2.3 Substantial Completion................................14.8 CONTRACTORS --other ........................ ......... ... 7 Contractual Liability Insurance..............................5,.4.10 Contractual Time Limits.,..,.,, ,12.2 Article or Paragraph Number Coordination— CONTRACTOR's responsibility .......................h.9.2 Copies of Documents ............. ........................*... 2.2 Correction Period... ............................................... 13.12 Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work-- in general..................................10.4.1, 13.10-13.14 Acceptance ofDefective Work ..........................13.13 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ............... ...............6.30, 13.11 Correction Period,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,13.12 OWNER May Correct Defective Work ..............13.14 OWNER May Stop Work.................................13.10 Cost -- of Tests and Inspections.....................................13.4 Records11.7 Cost of the Work -- Bonds and insurance, additional ...................11.4.5.9 Cash Discounts ........... , *...................... . 11.4.2 CONTRACTOR's Fee ................................. 11.6 Employee Expenses,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,11.4.5.1 Exclusions to....., 11.5 General11.4-11.5 Home office and overhead expenses ....................11.5 Losses and damages.....................................11.4.5.6 Materials and equipment... I ........, ..........11.4.2 Minor expenses,,,,,,,,,,,,, .............,11.4.5.8 Payroll costs on changes,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,„ ......I.._„11.4.1 performed by Subcontractors...........................1.1.4.3 Recordsll.7 Rentals of construction equipment and machinery.......................................11.4.5.3 Royalty payments, permits and license fees,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 11.4.5.5 Site office and temporary facilities ................11.4.5.2 Special Consultants, CONTRACTOR's............. 11.4.4 Supplemental ............................. 11.4.5 Taxes related to the Work.............................11.4.5.4 Tests and Inspection...................................I......13.4 Trade Discounts.............................................11.4.2 Utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities.. ........ J 1.4.5.7 Work after regular hours.................................11.4.1 Covering Work...............................................13.6-13.7 Cumulative Remedies ............................... 17.4-17.5 Cutting, fitting and patching ................................. 7.2 Data, to be furnished by OWNER,,,....., „..............$ 3 Day --definition of,,,......* ............... *...... ................. 17.2.2 Decisions on Disputes.....................................9.11, 9.12 defective --definition of...............................I.........1.14 defective Work-- Acceptance of......................................10.4.1, 13.13 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01 /02 wood windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: I . Failure to meet performance requirements. 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. 4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. 5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 6. Insulting glass failure. B. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranty Period for Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Aluminum -Clad Wood Windows: 1. BiltBest Windows and Patio Doors. 2. Caradco Window Corp.; Jeld-Wen, Inc. 3. Crestline; a division of SNE Enterprises, Inc.; a Nortek Company. 4. Eagle Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation Company. 5. Hurd Millwork Co. 6. Kolbe & Kolbe Millwork Co., Inc. 7. Marvin Windows and Doors. 8. Norco Windows and Patio Doors; Jeld-Wen, Inc. 9. Peachtree Doors and Windows; Nortek, Inc. 10. Pella Corporation. 11. Pozzi Wood Windows; Jeld-Wen, Inc. 12. Vetter; a division of SNE Enterprises, Inc.; a Nortek Company. 13. Weather Shield Mfg., Inc. 08550 - 3 01 /02 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln -dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1 /32 inch (0.8 trim.) deep by 2 inches (51 mm) wide; water-repellent preservative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard formed sheet or extruded -aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by wood window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi (150-MPa) ultimate tensile strength, and not less than 16.000-psi (I 10-MPa) minimum yield strength. C. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. D. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. E. High -Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid -chromate -fluoride -phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. F. Fluoropolymer Two -Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two -coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. G. Wood Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. H. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. J. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc -coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. K. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc -coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. 08550 - 4 01/02 L: Compression -Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when wood window is closed. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glass: 5/8" Insulshield I.G., Solar Bronze, insulating -glass argon filled with low-e coating. B. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory -glazing system that produces weathertight seal. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion -resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902. C. Sill Cap/Track: Rigid PVC or other weather -resistant plastic with manufacturer's standard r integral color track of thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with _ performance requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior. D. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. E. Roller Assemblies: Low -friction design. F. Push -Bar Operators: Provide telescoping -type, push -bar operator designed to open and — close ventilators with fixed screens. 2.5 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight -fitting, _ removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. 1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Architectural C-24 class. B. Glass -Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 (i .4-by-1.8-mm) or l 8-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm), 20-by-20 (0.85-by-0.85-mm) or 207by-30 (0.85-by-0.42-mm)] mesh of PVC -coated, glass -fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 08550 - 5 01/02 Mesh Color: Charcoal gray. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wood windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and performance grade indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full -perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory machine windows for openings and hardware that is not surface applied. E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. F. Factory -Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches (2500 rnm width plus length), glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. G. Groove Glazing: Factory -glazed units without removable stops or other provision permitting convenient field disassembly to facilitate replacement of broken glass will not be accepted. H. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap -on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 2.7 WOOD FINISHES A. Non -Primed Windows: Provide manufacturer's standard non -primed finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 08550 - 6 01/02 A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall flashings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. C. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components; Drawings; and Shop Drawings. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. _ 3.3 ADJUSTING _. A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from _ construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 08550 - 7 01/02 C. Clean factory -glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION 08550 08550 - 8 No Text 01/02 SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known commercially as builders hardware which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non -matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. B. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from only one manufacturer, although several maybe indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware inthe project's vicinity for aperiod ofnot less than 2 years, and who is, or who employs an experienced architectural consultant who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. D. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire -rated doors (with supplementary marking on doors' UL or FM labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL or FM label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance with Division-1 section "Submittals". Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish. 08711 - 1 01/02 B. Hardware Schedule: Submitfinal hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function and finish of hardware. C. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: 1. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. 2. Name and manufacturer of each item. 3. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc. contained in schedule. 6. Mounting locations for hardware. — 7. Door and frame sizes and materials. D. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule. E. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. F. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory -prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Packaging of hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two _ or more identical sets may be packed in same container. B. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct. C. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. D. Provide secure lock -up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. 08711 - 2 01 i02 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware is indicated in the Finish Hardware Data Sheet and Hardware Schedule at the end of this section. 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. General: B. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. C. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products which have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. D. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for the applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI A 156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A 156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. E. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. F. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. G. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on the opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. H. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware. 2.3 KEYING 08711 - 3 Correction or Removal of......................10.4.1, 13.11 Correction Period 13.12 ............................................. in general.........................................13, 14.7, 14.11 Article or Paragraph Number Observation by ENGINEER ................................ 9.2 OWNER May Stop Work.................................13.10 Prompt Notice of Defects. .....I ... ................13.1 Rejecting ..................................... ..................... .9.6 Uncovering the Work.......................................13.8 Definitions ................................................................ 1 Delays...................................4.1, 6.29, 12.3-12.4 Delivery of Bonds.....................................................2.1 Delivery of certificates of insurance ............................2.7 Determinations for Unit Prices .................................. 9.10 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions -- Notice of ........................................................... 4.2.3 ENGINEER's Review4.2.4 Possible Contract Documents Change,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 4.2.5 Possible Price and Times Adjustments..............4.2.6 Discrepancies -Reporting and Resolving................................2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2 Dispute Resolution-- Agreement................................................16.1-16.6 Arbitration . ............ ................................... 16.1-16.5 general16 Mediation .......................................................... 16.6 Dispute Resolution Agreement.........................16.1-16.6 Disputes, Decisions by ENGINEER,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ................... Documents -- Copiesof .......................................................... 7.2 Record 6.19 Reuseof.............................................................3.7 Drawings --definition of...........................................j.15 Easements ............. 4.1 Effective date of Agreement -- definition o1..............J.16 Emergencies...........................................................6.23 ENGINEER -- as initial interpreter on disputes,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ................. definition of ................... ......... ................1.17 Limitations on authority and responsibilities,,,,, 9.13 Replacement of> ................................................. 8.2 Resident Project Representative ...........................9.3 ENGINEER's Consultant -- definition of ................1.18 ENGINEER's-- authority and responsibility, limitations on ........ 9.13 Authorized Variations in the Work ....................... 9.5 Change Orders, responsibility for ........ 9.7, 10, 11, 12 Clarifications and Interpretations ...............3.6.3, 9.4 Decisions on Disputes ............................. 9.11-9.12 defective Work, notice of...................................13.1 Evaluation of Substitute Items ..........................6.7.3 Liability...................................................6.32, 9.12 Notice Work is Acceptable...............................14.13 Observations...........................................6.30.2, 9.2 OWNER's Representative. ................................... 9.1 _ Payments to the CONTRACTOR, Responsibility for,,,, ...........................9.9, 14 Recommendation of Payment....................14.4 14.13 Article or Paragraph Number Responsibilities --Limitations oq ................9.11-9.13 Review of Reports on Differing Subsurface and Physical Conditions.............................4.2.4 Shop Drawings and Samples, review responsibility .............................................. 26.26 Status During Cmstruction-- authorized variations in the Work ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,9.5 Clarifications and Interpretations ...................9.4 Decisions on Disputes ......................... 9.11-9.12 Determinations on Unit Price ........................ 9.10 ENGINEER as Initial Interpreter .......... 9.11-9.12 ENGINEER's Responsibilities ................9.1-9.12 Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Responsibilities..............................9.13 OWNER's Representative..............................9.1 Project Representative...................................9.3 Rejecting Defective Work ......... ..............9.6 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments....................................9.7-9.9 Visits to Site.................................................9.2 Unit Price determinations .................................. 9.10 Visits to Site ...................................................... 9.2 Written consent required .............................. 7.2, 9.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and ........................6.3-6.5 Equipment rental, Cost of the Work..................11.4.5.3 Equivalent Materials and Equipment ............. ...........6.7 error or omissiong..................................................0.33 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .......................$.11 Explorations of physical conditions,,,.,,, .......... 4.2.1 Fee, CONTRACTOR's--Costs Plus ...........................11.6 Field Order -- definition of..............................................."""1.19 issued by ENGINEER ................................ 3.6.1, 9.5 Final Application for Payment . ......... ............14.12 Final Inspection...................................................14.11 Final Payment -- and Acceptance.....................................14.13-14.14 Prior to, for cash allovances ......... .............11.8 General Provisions .......................................... 17.3-17.4 General Requirements -- definition of.....................................................1.20 principal references tQ..............2.6, 6.4, 6.6-6.7, 6.24 Giving Notice.........................................................17.1 Guarantee of Work --by CONTRACTOR.,...,,, 5.30, 14.12 Hazard Communication Programs ...........................6.22 Hazardous Waste -- definition of.....................................................1.21 general............................................................. 4.5 OWNER'S responsibility for ............................... 8.10 ix EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01/02 A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in writing. B. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great -grandmaster), either new or integrated with Owner's existing system. C. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. D. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, "DO NOT DUPLICATE." — E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. G. Deliver keys to Owner's Representative. 2.4 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and exceptas otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set (or push-pull units if no latch -lock sets) for color and texture. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified for the applicable units of hardware by referenced standards. C. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry -recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be — otherwise directed by Architect. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into 08711 - 4 01/02 surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. 08711 - 5 01/02 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE DOOR NO. FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE 100A Ll, X1, S1 100B Sl 101 L2, L5, H2, S3, W2, W3, W4, K2, T2 103A L2, H1, S2 103B L2, H3, S4, Cl, W2, W4, Kl, Tl 104A L2, HI, S2 104B L2, H3, S4, C1, W2, W4, Kl, T1 105A L2, HI, S2, Cl, Kl 105B L2, L5, H2, S3, W2, W3, W4, K2, T2 105C L2, H3, S4, Cl, W2, W4, Kl, TI 105D ALL FINISH HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER 106 L2, HI, S4 107 L2, H1, S2 108 L2, H1, S2 109 L2, H1, S4 110 L2, H1, S4 111A L1, X1, S1 111B L1, X1, S1 112 L3, L4, Hl, S2, Cl, K1 113 L6, H3, S2, Cl, P1, W2, W4, K1, Tl 114 L6, H3, S2, Cl, W2, W4, K1, Tl LOCKSETS L1 (2) Schlage Primus 1-1/4" Mortise Cylinders, 626 L2 Schlage D53PD Sparta, 626, Strike L3 Schlage D105 Sparta, 626, Strike L4 Weiser ND9770, US26D, Strike L5 (2) Quality Flush Bolts 1262 with (2) Quality Dust Proof Strikes 1226, US26D L6 Schlage Single Keyed Deadbolt with 1" Throw, US26D EXIT DEVICES X1 (2) Von Duprin Fire Exit Surface Mounted Vertical Rod Devices 2227L-F, #17 Lever Design, Strike, US26D 08711 - 6 01/02 HINGES H1 1-1/2 Pair Hager BB 1279, 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D H2 3 Pair Hager BB 1279, 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D H3 1-1/2 Pair Hager 13131279, 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, NRP STOPS S1 (2) Quality Floor Stops with Holder, 419ES, US26D S2 Quality Wall Stop, 302-TB, US26D S3 (2) Quality Floor Stops, 33/ES, US26D S4 Quality Floor Stop, 33/ES, US26D CLOSERS Cl Norton 8501 Closer, US26D PUSH/PULLS P1 Quality 2300-P Push and Quality 641 Pull, US26D WEATHERSTRIPPING W 1 Not Used W2 Pemko Weatherstrip 303Av x L.A.R. W3 Pemko Astraga1305CN x L.A.R. W4 Pemko Sweep 315CN x L.A.R. KICKPLATES K1 Quality Kickplate, 10" x 34", US26D K2 (2) Quality Kickplates, 10" x 34", US26D THRESHOLD T1 Pemko Threshold 273 x AFG x 36" T2 Pemko Threshold 273 x AFG x 72" END OF SECTION 08711 08711 - 7 01/02 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Aluminum storefront exterior vestibule windows - 1" solar bronze insulating glass (tempered). 2. Interior window sidelite and in -door units - 1/4" clear tempered glass. 3. Entrance doors (at Doors 100A) - 1/4" solar bronze tempered glass. 4. Entrance doors (at Doors 10013) - 1/4" clear tempered glass. 5. Entrance doors (at Doors 103B, 10413, 111A and 11113) - 1" solar bronze insulating glass (tempered). 6. Window in exterior storage room door (Door 105C) - 1/4" wire glass. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. A. Wood Windows are specified in another Division 8 Section, "Wood Windows". B. Greenhouse Glazing is specified in Division 13. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. B. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure ofthe hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS B. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without 08800 - 1 01/02 1.5 [lC failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. C. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass liter for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat -treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria: Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is 6.0 min (0.23 inch). C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass -framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. C. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. D. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual." 2. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines." B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z971 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 08800 - 2 01/02 C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: l . Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). G. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in-service performance. H. Single -Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: 1. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. I. Single -Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. J. Pre -Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent _ damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition 08800 - 3 01i02 to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. C. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 HEAT -TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong -held) or horizontal (roller -hearth) process, at manufacturer's option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks. 2.2 HEAT -TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Uncoated, Clear, Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering heat -treated glass products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following companies. 1. AFG Industries, Inc. 2. Artistic Glass Products Co. 3. Cardinal IG. 4. Saint-Gobain. 5. Falconer Glass Industries. 6. Glasstemp, Inc. 7. Guardian Industries Corp. 8. HGP Industries. 9. PPG Industries, Inc. 10. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. 11. Tempglass. 12. Viracon, Inc. 08800 - 4 01 /02 2.3 MONOLITHIC FLOAT -GLASS SCHEDULE A. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide Class 2 (tinted, heat -absorbing, and light -reducing) glass lites complying with the following: 1. Tint Color: Bronze. 2. Glass Thickness: 1/4". 3. Tempered glass where indicated. 2.4 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other -- requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. B. Install integral metal muntins within the air space of the insulating units. Match pattern of drawings. C. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units. D. Provide heat -treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is designated or required. E. U-values are expressed as Btu/hour x sq. ft. x deg F. 2.5 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE A. Insulating Glass: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide uncoated insulating- _ glass units complying with the following: 1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1" and 1/4". 2. Innerspace Content: Air 3. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) float glass. a. Tempered where indicated. 4. Outdoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass. a. Class 2 (tinted). 1) Tint Color: Bronze. 2) Tempered where indicated. 2.6 WIRED GLASS 08800 - 5 01i02 A. Wired Glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 11(wired flat glass), Class I (clear), Quality Q6, squre mesh pattern. 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.1. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed -cell, polyvinyl chloride foam tape, factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces, packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive, and complying with AAMA 800 for product 810.5. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, glazing tape that may be incorporated in the Work include, but is not limited to, the following: Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod: a. PTI, 303 Glazing Tape (shimless), Protective Treatments, Inc. b. S-M 5700 Poly -Glaze Tape Sealant, Schnee -Morehead, Inc. C. Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco Inc. 2. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod: a. PTI 303 Glazing Tape (with shim), Protective Treatments, Inc. b. Pre -shimmed Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco, Inc. C. PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc. 3. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: a. Norseal V-980 Closed -Cell Glazing Tape, Norton Company. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. 08800 - 6 Indemnification..............................6.12, 6.16, 6.31-6.33 Initially Acceptable Schedules...................................2.9 Inspection -- Certificates of..............................9.13.4, 13.5, 14.12 Final 1..4.11 ........................................................... Article or Paragraph Number Special, required by ENGINEER ......................... 9.6 Tests and Approval ............................ 8.7, 13.3-13.4 Insurance -- Acceptance of, by OWNER...............................5.14 Additional, required by changes in the Work............................................11.4.5.9 Before starting the Work ....... I ...... .................... 2.7 Bonds and --in general......* ..... ..... .......... *..... ,........5 Cancellation Provisions ..................................... 5.8 Certificates of...................2.7, 5, 5.3, 5.4.11, 5.4.13, "......., ... *...*"**5.6.5, 5.8, 5.14, 9.13.4, 14.12 completed operations .................* ..... ***........... 5.4.13 CONTRACTOR's Liability ........ ......... ........5.4 CONTRACTOR's objection to coverage..., ......, 5.14 Contractual Liability......................................5.4.10 deductible amounts, CONTRACTOR's responsibility................................................5.9 Final Applicafion for Payment ..........................14.12 Licensed Insurers5.3 Notice requirements, material changes ........ 5.8, 10.5 Option to Replace..................„........... 5.14 other special insurances ................................. 5.10 OWNER as fiduciary for insureds ........... 5.12-5.13 OWNER's Liability ............. ....................... ........5.5 OWNER's Responsibility.....................................8.5 Partial Utilization, Property Insurance ...... .......5.15 Property.................................................... 5.6-5.10 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds .............................................. 5.12-5.13 Special Insurance ............................................. 5.10 Waiver of Rights ......... ......... ......... .......5.11 Intent of Contract Documents ................................ 3.1-3.4 Interpretations and Clarifications...... I..............3.6.3, 9.4 Investigations of physical conditions ..................... . 4.2 Labor, Materials and Equipment..........................h.3-6.5 Lands -- and Easements...................................................8A Availability of.............................................4.1, 8.4 Reports and Tests...............................................8.4 Laws and Regulations --Laws or Regulations-- Bonds................. ........... .............. ....... .......5.1-5.2 Changes in the Work .............................. ..10.4 Contract Documents .......................................... 3.1 CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities ..................... 0.14 Correction Period, defective Work .............. ....13.12 Cost of the Work, taxes ............................... 11.4.5.4 definition of.................................................I...1.22 general6.14 Indemnification.. ...................................... 6.31-6.33 Insurance.. ... ......................................................5.3 Precedence................................................3.1, 3.3.3 Reference to .. ............................... 3.3.1 Safety and Protection*..............................6.20, 13.2 Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others ............ 6.8-6.11 Article or Paragraph Number Tests and Inspections...................................13.5 Use of Premises ............... Visits to Site.......................................................9.2 Liability Insurance-- CONTRACTOR's............................................... 5.4 OWNER's.......................................................... 5.5 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .................................. 5.3 Liens -- Application for Progress Payment ...................... 14.2 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title .................... 14.3 Final Application for Payment............ .......... 14.12 definition of ................... ..........1.23 Waiver of Claims..........................................14.15 Limitations on ENGINEER's authority and responsibilities ................................................. 9.13 Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR Authorized .......... ............................................ 4.2.2 Maintenance and Operating Manuals -- Final Application for Payment .........................14.12 Manuals (of others) -- Precedence....................................................3.3.3.1 Reference to in Contract Documents ................. 3.3.1 Materials and equipment -- furnished by CONTRACTOR* ........................... 6.3 not incorporated in Work,,,,,,,14.2 Materials or equipment --equivalent ...........................6 7 Mediation (Optional) .................... 16.7 Milestones --definition of ...................................... .1.24 Miscellaneous -- Computation of Times........................................17.2 Cumulative Remedies Giving Notice. * otice..... ...............................................17.1 Notice of Claim.................................................17.3 Professional Fees and Court Costs Included......., 17.5 Multi -prime contracts, ...... _.... *.... *........... , .................. 7 Not Shown or Indicated.........................................4.3.2 Notice of -- Acceptability of Project.... *.................. *....... 14.13 Award, definition of........................................i.25 Claim............. ... ............................................17.3 Defects, 13.1 Differing Subsurface or Physical Condition$ ...... 4.2.3 Giving............................................................17.1 Tests and Inspections........................................i3.3 Variation, Shop Drawing and Samplg ...............6.27 Notice to Proceed -- definition of.....................................................1.26 givingof ................... ............................... I ......... 2.3 x EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01/02 D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side -walking). F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding, nonoutgassing, strips of closed -cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance. 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. 5. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 08800 - 7 01/02 B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: D. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. E. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. F. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant -substrate testing. G. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. H. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. I. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: 1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8- inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. J. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements ofreferenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. K. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. L. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. M. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and buttjoints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 08800 - 8 01 /02 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. ^ 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fitopenings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. J B. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets - producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. 08800 - 9 01 i02 D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 08800 - 10 DIVISION 9 09260 — Gypsum Board Assemblies 09310 — Ceramic Tile 09512 — Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09653 — Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09681 — Carpet Tile 09911 —Painting 01/02 SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Non -load -bearing steel framing. 4. Sound attenuation insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in gypsum board assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch-(300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Textured Finishes: 24" x 24" for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 09260 - 1 01/02 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory", and GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual". B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. C. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. 09260 - 2 01/02 f. National Gypsum Company. g. Scafco Corporation. h. Unimast, Inc. i. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corp. C. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL PARTITION FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: I. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 20 gauge. 2. Depth: As indicated. C. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare metal thickness of 20 gauge, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: As indicated. 09260 - 3 01/02 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, "Dens -Shield Tile Backer" manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. Core: Regular type, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated]. b. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. C. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where required. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 09260 - 4 01 /02 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro -Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. C. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 min) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 3" thick min. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. E. Rigid Foam Insulation at Furred (Z Channel) Masonry Walls. 2" Dow Type SM Board or approved equal. 09260 - 5 5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount sufficient to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 950 of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions or as provided by law. 5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13. ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions. 6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 3 Notification to Surety ..............................................10.5 Observations, by ENGINEER ......... .........6.30, 9.2 Occupancy of the Work,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 5.15, 6.30.2.4, 14.10 Omissions or acts by CONTRACTOR...............0.9, 9.13 Open Peril policy form, Insurance ..........................5.6.2 Option to Replace ................................................... 5.14 Article or Paragraph Number "Or Equal" Items......................................................6.7 Other work 7 Overtime Work --prohibition of„ ............................... 6.3 OWNER -- Acceptance of defective Work... ........................ 1.3.13 appoint an ENGINEER......................................8.2 as fiduciary ...............................................5.12-5.13 Availability of Lands, responsibility ...... I.............4.1 definition of .................................................... 1.27 data, furnish......................................................8.3 May Correct Defective Work...........................13.14 May refuse to make payment.............................14.7 May Stop the Work.........................................13.10 May Suspend Work, Terminate . ........................... $.8, 13.10, 15.1-15.4 Payment, make prompt.....................8.3, 14.4, 14.13 performance of other work .................................. 7.1 permits and licenses, requirements ....................0.13 purchased insurance requirements ...............5.6-5.10 OWNER's-- Acceptance of the Work,,,,,,,.... I..................6.30.2.5 Change Orders, obligation to execute ,,,,,,,,,,5.6, 10.4 Communications ................................................. 8.1 Coordination of the Work ................................... 7.4 Disputes, request for decision............................9.11 Inspections, tests and approvals..................8.7, 13.4 Liability Insurance..............................................5.5 Notice of Defects..............................................�3.1 Representative --During Construction, ENGINEER's Status ...................................... 9.1 Responsibilities -- Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material................F.10 Change Orders ............................................. 8.6 Changes in the Work...................................10.1 communications ............................................ 8.1 CONTRACTOR's responsibilities .................. 8.9 evidence of financial arrangement$ .............. $.) l inspections, tests and approvals,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 8.7 insurance....................................................... 8.5 lands and easements.....................................8.4 prompt payment by........................................8.3 replacement of ENGINEER ...........................$.2 reports and tests,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,8.4 stop or suspend Work..................8.8, 13.10, 15.1 terminate CONTRACTOR's services..........................................8.8, 15.2 separate representative at site..............................9.3 testing, independent.........................................13.4 _ use or occupancy of the Work ..........................5.15, 6.30.2.4, 14.10 written consent or approval required.........................................9.1, 6.3, 11.4 xi EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01/02 2.9 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Aggregate Finish: a. G-P Gypsum Corp.; GyProc Vermiculite Ceiling Texture. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated). B. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. C. Aggregate Finish: Water -based, job -mixed, aggregated, drying -type texture finish for spray application. 1. Texture: Light Orange Peel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip -type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. 09260 - 6 01/02 D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt -felt isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs ''/z inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. Do not fasten studs to top track to allow independent movement of studs and track. 2. For fire -resistance -rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid -structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install training around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings: Single -Layer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to j am studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum '/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 09260 - 7 01/02 H. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) O.C. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. 4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch (250-mm) staples fabricated from 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter, tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member. 3.4 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framingto minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid ' abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports a or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open. (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control - joints to counteract wood shrinkage. I. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 09260 - 8 01 /02 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. K. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing gypsurn board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to Yz-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. L. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over framing, with floating internal corner construction. M. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. N. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. O. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c. 3.5 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 09260 - 9 01/02 C. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 2. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install standard gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. 3. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. . E. Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. -19 09260 - 10 01/02 C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Above -Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above -ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above -ceiling observation. END OF SECTION 09260 09260 - 11 01/02 SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Definition: Tile includes ceramic surfacing units made from clay or other ceramic materials. B. Extent of tile work is indicated on drawings and schedules. C. Types of tile work in this section include the following: 1. Glazed wall tile. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source of Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout and setting materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for materials required, except bulk materials. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of control, contraction and expansion joints in tile surfaces. C. Samples for Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of tile indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. D. Certified Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance oftile and tile setting products with requirements specified based on comprehensive testing of current products. Include in reports testing laboratory's interpretation of test results relative to specified requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 09310 - 1 01/02 A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. C. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50°F (10°C) in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS A. Tile: B. Glazed Wall Tile: 6" x 6" square, Bright Glaze -High Gloss by American Olean. Glazed Wall Tile Bullnose Trim, 2" x 6", A-4200, Bright Glaze -High Gloss by American Olean. C. Acceptable Products: Products other than those listed shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. Evaluation criteria will include color selection, texture etc. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: E. Glazed Ceramic Tile: 1. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. 2. Dal -Tile Corp. 3. Mid -State Tile Co. 4. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 6. United States Ceramic Tile Co. 7. Villeroy & Boch (U.S.A.) Inc. 8. Wenzel Tile Co. 9. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Co. F. Organic Adhesives, Type I: 09310 - 2 01 /02 1. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. 2. Boiardi Products Corp. 3. Bostik Construction Products Div. 4. Custom Building Products 5. C-Cure Chemical Co. 6. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. 7. L & M Mfg. Inc. 8. Laticrete International Inc. 9. Mapei Corp. 10. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 11. Syracuse Adhesives Co. G. Manufacturers of Latex -Portland Cement Grouts: 1. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. 2. Boiardi Products Corp. 3. Bostik Construction Products Div. 4. Custom Building Products 5. C-Cure Chemical Co. 6. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. 7. L & M Mfg. Inc. 8. Laticrete International Inc. _ 9. Mapei Corp. 10. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 11. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 12. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A 137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types and grades of tile indicated. B. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. C. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. D. Colors, Textures and Patterns: For tile, grout and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures or other appearance characteristics, provide products to match characteristics of tile or product specified. E. Provide tile trim and accessories which match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. F. Mounting: Where factory -mounted tile is required provide back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated. 09310 - 3 01 /02 G. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies that this type of mounting is suitable for these kinds of use and has been successfully used on other projects. 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: Provide product complying with ANSI Al18.4 and the following requirement for composition: Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as a replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at job site to prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex manufacturer. a. Latex Type: Acrylic resin. B. Organic Adhesive: Provide product complying with ANSI A136.1 for Type I. 2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: Provide product complying with ANSI Al18.6 for the following composition and of color indicated: Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as a replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at job site to prepackaged dry grout mix, with type of latex and dry grout mix complying with requirements indicated below: a. Latex Type: Acrylic resin. b. Grout Type: Commercial portland cement grout supplied by latex manufacturer. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation, 112 North Alfred St., Alexandria, VA 22134 or Ceramic Tile Institute, 700 N. Virgil Ave., Los Angeles, CA 90029. 2.6 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers for accurately proportioning of materials, water or additive content, mixing equipment and mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts ofunifonn quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. 09310 - 4 Article or Paragraph Number written notice required .........................7.1, 9.4, 9.11, ....................................11.2, 11.9, 14.7, 15.4 PCBs -- definition of......................................................1.29 general..............................................................4.5 OWNER's responsibility for...............................8.10 Partial Utilization -- definition of .......................1.28 .............................. general6.30.2.4, 14.10 Property Insurance ...................................... *.....5.15 Patent Fees and Royalties .... ......... .................6.12 Payment Bonds., .............. I .................................. 5,1-5.2 Payments, Recommendation of..............14.4-14.7, 14.13 Payments to CONTRACTOR and Completion -- Application for ProgressPayments ......................14.2 CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title...................14.3 Final Application for Payment ..........................14.12 Final Inspection,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, I............................ 14.11 Final Payment and Acceptance,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 14.13-14.14 general.........................................................$.3, 14 Partial Utilization............................................14.10 Retainage........ ......... ......... ......... ...... 14.2 Review of Applications for Progress Payments...............................14.4-14.7 prompt payment..................................................8.3 Schedule of Values,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 14.1 ... Substantial Completion ........................ *... 14.8-14.9 Waiver of Claims........................„.,..,_.„.„.,,,,,,14.15 when payments due ................................ 14A, 14.13 withholding payment ..... ......... ..................14.7 Performance Bonds„,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,„5.1-5.2 Permits Petroleum -- definition of.....................................................1.30 general...................................... :....................... 4.5 OWNER's responsibility for...............................8.10 Physical Conditions -- Drawings of, in or relating to,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 4.2.1.2 ENGINEER's review,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, existing structures.,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, .........42.2 general 4.2.1.2 ............ 6.. ......... ......... ............ Notice of Differing Subsurface or......................4.2.3 Possible Contract Documents Change...............4.2.5 Possible Price and Times Adjustments ................ 46266 Reports and Drawings,,,.,.,,,,,, 6......................... 4.2.1 Subsurface and ,, 4.2 Subsurface Conditions4.2.1.1 Technical Data, Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR Authorized... ......... .....4.2.2 Underground Facilities-- general........................................................ 4.3 Not Shown or Indicaed... ,_„.,.„,,,,,,,,,,,,,4.3.2 Protection of................................I........4.3, 6.20 Article or Paragraph Number Shown or Indicated 4.3.1 Technical Data ............................................... 4.2.2 Preconstruction Conference.......................................2.8 Preliminary Matters.....................................................2 Preliminary Schedules .............................................. 2.6 Premises, Use of ............................................. 6.16-6.18 Price, Change of Contract .......................................... l l Price, Contract --definition of .................................. 1.11 Progress Payment, Applications for ..........................14.2 Progress Payment--retainage................................... 14.2 Progress schedule, CONTRACTOR'S.,, ........2 6, 2.8, 2.9, ................................. 6.6, 6.29, 10.4, 15.2.1 Project --definition of......................I........................1.31 Project Representative— ENGINEER's Status During Construction .............9.3 Project Representative, Resident --definition of ......... 1.33 prompt payment by OWNER ..................................... , 8.3 Property Insurance-- Additional.........................................................5.7 general5.6-5.19 Partial Utilization................................5.15, 14.10.2 receipt and application of proceeds,,,,,..,..5.12-5.13 „ Protection, Safety and..............................6.20-6.21, 13.2 Punch list ............................................... j,4.11 Radioactive Material-- defintion of.....................................................1.32 general4.5 OWNER's responsibility for...............................8.10 Recommendation of Payment,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 14.4, 14.5, 14,13 Record Documents ........................................ 6.19, 14.12 Records, procedures for maintaining,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 2.8 ............ Reference Points ............. ..........................................4.4 Reference to Standards and Specifications of Technical Societies,,,,,,3.3 Regulations, Laws and (or),,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, „ , , ..........6.14 Rejecting Defective Work..........................................9.6 Related Work -- atSite........................................................7.1-7.3 Performed prior to Shop Drawings and Samples submittals review,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6.28 Remedies, cumulative......*...*......*...*... .........17.4, 17.5 Removal or Correction ofDefective Work................13.11 rental agreements, OWNER approval required ..... 11.4.5.3 replacement of ENGINEER, by OWNER,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 8.2 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies.................................2.5, 3.3.2, 6.14.2 Reports -- andDrawings.................................................4.2.1 and Tests, OWNER's responsibility .....................8A Resident and Project Representative -- definition of....................................................1.33 provision for ........., 9.3 .................................................. xii EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01 /02 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive tile work and conditions under which tile will be installed. Do not proceed with tile work until surfaces and conditions comply with requirements indicated in referenced tile installation standard. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with applicable parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile". B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown. C. Extend the work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling oftile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center the fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. F. For tile mounted in sheets make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: For ceramic tile grouts latex-portland cement grouts comply with ANSI A108.10. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion ofplacement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work. 09310 - 5 01/02 C. Protection: When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage and wear. 1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. 2. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from the surfaces. END OF SECTION 09310 09310 - 6 No Text 01 i02 SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of each type of acoustical ceiling is shown and scheduled on drawings. B. Types of acoustical ceilings specified in this section include the following: 1. Acoustical panel ceilings, exposed suspension. 2. Vinyl covered gypsum board ceilings, exposed suspension. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required. B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturers' standard size samples of acoustical units, but not less than 6" square. Provide samples showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of component required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceiling components that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, according to ASTM test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable testing and inspecting agency. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition system (if any). 09512 - 1 01i02 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND 14ANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination or other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. B. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full size units equal to 2.0% of amount installed. - PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturer's standard units of con- figuration indicated which are prepared for mounting method designated and which comply with FS SS-S-118 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, form, pattern, grade (NRC or NIC' as applicable), light reflectance coefficient (LR), edge detail, and joint detail (if any). B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors, surface textures, and patterns available for acoustical ceiling units and exposed metal suspension system members of quality designated. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS 09512 - 2 01/02 A. Mineral Composition Panels - Nodulated, Castor Molded; with Standard Washable Paint-ed Finish: Provide Type III, Form 1 units per FS SS-S-118 and complying with the following requirements: 1. USG "2120". 2. Color/Light Reflectance: White/LR 1 (75% and over). 3. Color: Provide color to match that indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard color designation. 4. Edge Detail: Regular. 5. Size: 24" x 24" x 5/8". 2.3 VINYL COVERED GYPSUM BOARD PANELS A. Where indicated, install vinyl covered gypsum board panels, 5/8" thick, 2'x4', white, in the metal suspension system. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide metal suspension systems of type, structural classification and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated, white in color. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung. D. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper, prestretched, Class 1 coating, sized so that stress at 3-times hanger design loan (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gage. E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded plastic of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling which fits with type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. 2.5 EXPOSED METAL DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Non -Fire -Resistance -Rated Single Web Steel Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard system roll -formed from prefinished cold -rolled steel sheet with 15/16" wide exposed faces on flanges of structural members; other characteristics as follows: 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System, 2. Finish: Painted, white. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which maybe incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 09512 - 3 01/02 C. Manufacturers of Non -Fire -Resistance -Rated Single Web Steel Suspension Systems: 1. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 2. Donn Corporation. 3. Eastern Products Div., Armstrong World Industries, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports required to be installed by other trades for support of acoustical ceilings. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans wherever possible. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, and to comply with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements as indicated, and CISCA standards applicable to work. B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally -patterned units (if any) in manner shown by reflected ceiling plans. C. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers not less than 6" from each end and spaced 4'-0" along each carrying channel or direct -hung runner, unless otherwise indicated, leveling to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". D. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye -screws, or other devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. E. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum which are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying or other equally effective means. F. Install edge moldings oftype indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and at locations where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. _ G. Screw -attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 09512 - 4 01 /02 H. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of in inor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09512 09512 - 5 01/02 SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rubber Wall Base. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual wall base samples showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient wall base floor tile indicated. D. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Wall Base: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of wall base from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall base with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Flame Spread: Not more than 75 per ASTM E 84. D. Smoke Developed: Not more than 450 per ASTM E 84. E. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. 09653 - 1 01 /02 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver wall base and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store wall base materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Move installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive wall base for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B. Do not install wall base until it is at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install wall base and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, wall base that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Data Sheets at the end of part 3. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Wall Base: Provide rubber wall base complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I, with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, as specified in the Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. B. Concrete Slab: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 09653 - 2 Article or Paragraph Number Resident Superintendent, CONTRACTOR'$,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6.2 Responsibilities— CONTRACTOR's-in general .................................. 6 ENGINEER's-in general........................................9 Limitations on ............... ............................... 9.13 OWNER's-in general.............................................8 Retainage............................................................1.4.2 Reuse of Documents ................................................. 3.7 Review by CONTRACTOR: Shop Drawings and Samples Prior to Submittal .........................6.25 Review of Applications for Progress Payments.....................................14.4-14.7 Right to an adjustment............................................10.2 Rightsof Way..........................................................4.1 Royalties, Patent Fees and......................................6.12 Safe Structural Loading..........................................0.18 Safety -- and Protection................................4.3.2, 6.16, 6.18, ............. ......... ........6.20-6.21, 7.2, 13.2 general.....................................................0.20-6.23 Representative, CONTRACTORs.......................6.21 Samples -- definition of.....................................................1.34 general...................................... ...............0.24-6.28 Review by CONTRACTOR ............................... 6.25 Review by ENGINEER..............................6.26, 6.27 related Work.....................................................0.28 submittal of ..................................................... 6.24.2 submittal procedures.........................................0.25 Schedule of progress.............................2.6, 2.8-2.9, 6.6, ............. ......... ........16.29, 10.4, 15.2.1 Schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample Submittals..............................2.6, 2.8-2.9, 6.24-6.28 Schedule of Values...............................2.6, 2.8-2.9, 14.1 Schedules -- Adherence to..................................................15.2.1 Adjusting...........................................................6.6 Change of Contract Times.................................10.4 Initially Acceptable .......... ......... .........2.8, 2.9 Preliminary .................................... ................. ...2.6 Scope of Changes.......................................10.3-10.4 Subsurface Conditions ......................................... 4.2.1.1 Shop Drawings -- and Samples, general.................................6.24-6.28 Change Orders & Applications for Payments, and.........................................9.7-9.9 definition of ............. ...................................I.....1.35 ENGINEER's approval of.................................3.6.2 ENGINEER's responsibility for review ..................................... 9.7, 6.24-6.28 related Work.....................................................6.28 review procedures................................2.8, 6.24-6.28 Article or Paragraph Number submittal required:..............................................6.24.1 Submittal Procedures 6.25 use to approve substitutions..............................6.7.3 Shown or Indicated ................................................ 4.3.1 Site Access......................................................7.2, 13.2 Site Cleanliness .... ...................... ................. ........6.17 Site, Visits to -- by ENGINEER .......................................... 9.2, 13.2 byothers..........................................................13.2 "special causes of loss" policy form, insurance........................................................5.6.2 definition of.....................................................1.36 Specifications— defination of....................................................1.36 of Technical Societies, reference to...................3.3.1 precedence......................................................3.3.3 Standards and Specifications of Technical Societies,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 3.3 Starting Construction, Before,,,,,,..* ... ................... 2.5-2.8 Starting the Work..................................................2.4 Stop or Suspend Work -- by CONTRACTOR...........................................15.5 by OWNER ..................................... 8.8, 13.10, 15.1 Storage of materials and equipment .....................4.1, 7.2 Structural Loading, Safety........................................6.18 Subcontractor -- Concerning ................................................ 6.8-6.11 definition of.....................................................1.37 delays.............................................................12.3 waiver of rights ................................................ 6.11 Subcontractors --in general.................................6.8-6.11 Subcontracts --required provisions ........ 5.11, 6.11, 11.4.3 Submittals -- Applications for Payment..................................14.2 Maintenance and Operation Manual$ ........... 14.12 Procedures.......................................................0.25 Progress Schedules.......................................2.6, 2.9 Samples...................................................6.24-6.28 Schedule of Values.....................................2.6, 14.1 Schedule of Shop Drawings and Samples Submissions......................................2.6, 2.8-2.9 ShopDrawings ......................................... ......................................... Substantial Completion -- certification of............................6.30.2.3, 14.8-14.9 definition of ...................................................... 1.38 Substitute Construction Methods or Procedureg ........ 6.7.2 Substitutes and "Or Equal" Item$...............................6.7 CONTRACTOR's Expense............................0.7.1.3 ENGINEER's Evaluation „ „ 6.7.3 "Or -Equal...................................................... .7.1.1 Substitute Construction Methods EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) ,,,,� 01/02 2.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in Wall Base and Accessory Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.6 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by wall base manufacturer to suit products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of wall base will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for wall base installation and comply with tile manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive wall base. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where wall base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed confer units, or fabricated from wall base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed, at concrete floor and carpet intersections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing tile installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by wall base manufacturers. 09653 - 3 01/02 Protect wall base against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. WALL BASE & ACCESSORY DATA SHEET Wall Base: 4" Standard Rubber Topset Cove Wall Base. Carpet Edge: 1-3/4" Rubber Transition Reducer END OF SECTION 09653 09653 - 4 01 /02 SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet tile and installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 2. Type of subfloor. 3. Type of installation. 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Pattern type, location, and direction. 6. Pile direction. 7. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 8. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. E. Maintenance Data: For carpet tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 09681 - 1 01 /02 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain -removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements maybe considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 09681 - 2 01/02 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE - See Attached Carpet Tile Data Sheet 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: I . Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 09681 - 3 01/02 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet the manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)." B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face -beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." 09681 - 4 01/02 C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. 09681 - 5 01/02 CARPET TILE DATA SHEET The following Carpet Tile is established as a standard for this project. Carpet Tile which meet these material specifications and aesthetic appearance with Approval by the Architect. Lees Faculty Classics L2742 Modular: SPECIFICATIONS Construction: Tufted Surface Texture: Textured Loop Gauge: 1/8" (31.5/10 cm) Stitches: 8.3 per inch (32.68/10 cm) Finished Pile Thickness: .136" avg (3.5 mm) Face Yarn: Antron Legacy Nylon with DuraTech Soil Protection by DuPont Dye System: Yarn Dyed Face yarn Weight: 26 oz/yd (881.66 gm/m) Backing Materials: Thermobond Tile Primary: Reinforced Synthetic Bonding Agent: PVC Secondary: Fiberglass Reinforced Thermoplastic Composite Total Weight: 146.45 oz/yd (4966.12 gm/m) Size :18" x 18" (45.7 cm x 45.7 cm) Square Yards Per Carton: 6.00 (5.02 m) PERFORMANCE Static: 3.0 KV when tested under the Standard Shuffle Test 70 Degrees F Flammability: Passes DOC-FF-1-70 Pill Test Flooring Radiant Panel Test: Meets NFPA Class 1 When Tested Under ASTM E-648 Glue Down Smoke Density: NBS Smoke Chamber NFPA-258 -Less than 450 Flaming Mode Construction Materials: 100% Man -Made Materials for Superior Stability. WARRANTIES Wear: Lifetime of Carpet. No more than 10% face yarn loss by weight in normal use. Static: Lifetime of Carpet. Edge Ravel: Lifetime of Carpet. Guaranteed no edge ravel in normal use (no seam sealers required). Delamination: Lifetime of Carpet. Guaranteed no delamination in normal use (no chair pads required). Tuft Bind: Lifetime of Carpet. END OF SECTION 09681 09681 - 6 01/02 SECTION 09911 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of painting work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. B. Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout Project, except as otherwise indicated. C. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work. D. Work includes field painting of exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated. E. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. " F. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules". Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar -� adjacent materials or areas. Ifcolor or finish is not designated, Architect will select these from standard colors or finishes available. G. Following categories of work are not included as part of field -applied finish work: 1. Pre -Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory -finishing or installer -finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) metal toilet enclosures, prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, and finished mechanical and electrical equipment, including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, pipe spaces and duct shafts. 3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting. 09911 - 1 01/02 H. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting. I. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications: 1. Shop Primers: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hol low metal work and similar items. 2. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural woodwork, wood casework and shop -fabricated or factory -built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications. J. Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. C. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information and application instructions for each material proposed for use. Submit manufacturer's standard color samples for selection by the Architect. 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: A. Name or title of material. B. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. C. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. D. Manufacturer's name. E. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. F. Thinning instructions. 09911 - 2 Article or Paragraph Number or Procedures.............................................6.7.2 Substitute Items ............................................. 6.7.1.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions -- Drawings of, in or relathg to,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 4.2.1.2 ENGINEER's Review ....................................... 4.2.4 general..............................................................4.2 Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR Authorized .................................................. 4.2.2 Notice of Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions.........................................4.2.3 Physical Conditions.......................................4.2.1.2 Possible Contract Documents Change,,,,,,,, ,,,,, 4.2.5 Possible Price andTimes Adjustments...............4.2.6 Reports and Drawings ................. ............... 4.2.1 Subsurface and, ......... ...... 4.2 Subsurface Conditions at the Site...................4.2.1.1 Technical Data .................................................. 4.2.2 Supervision— CONTRACTOR's responsibility ..........................6.1 OWNER shall not supervise................................8.9 ENGINEER shall not supervise,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9.2, 9.13.2 Superintendence.......................................................6.2 Superintendent, CONTRACTOR's resident ..,..„........6.2 .. Supplemental costs ............................................ 11.4.5 Supplementary Conditions-- definition of.....................................................1.39 principal references to.................1,10, 1.18, 2.2, 2.7, .........I.............4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4, 5.6-5.9, .1............... 5.11,6.8,6.13,7.4,8.11,9.3,9.10 Supplementing Contract Documents ......................... 3.6 Supplier -- definition of.....................................................1.40 principal references to ............ 3.7, 6.5, 6.8-6.11, 6.20, ..........................................6.24, 9.13, 14.12 Waiver of Rights...............................................6.11 Surety -- consent to final payment ........................14,12, 14.14 ENGINEER has no duty to.................................9.13 Notification of.................................10.1, 10.5, 15.2 qualification of ........, .............5.1-5.3 Survival of Obligations...........................................6.34 Suspend Work, OWNER May ......... ........13.10, 15.1 Suspension of Work and Termination-- ......................15 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work orTerminate...............................................15.5 OWNER May Suspend Work... ..........................1.5.1 OWNER May Terminate ... .. ..... ...................15.2-15.4 Taxes --Payment by CONTRACTOR ........................ 6.15 Technical Data -- Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR ..... ..........4.2.2 Possible Price and Times Adjustments ,,,,,..,....4.2.6 „ Reports of Differing Subsurface and Physical Conditions...................................4.2.3 Temporary construction facilities 4.1 Article or Paragraph Number Termination -- by CONTRACTOR...........................................15.5 by OWNER........................................8.8, 15.1-15.4 of ENGINEER's employment...............................$.2 Suspension of Work-in general,.. ........................... 15 Terms and Adjectives..............................................3.4 Tests and Inspections-- Access to the Work, by others............................13.2 CONTRACTOR's responsibilities ......................13.5 cost of 13.4 covering Work prior to ..... ......................... 13.6-13.7 Laws and Regulations (or) ................................ 13.5 Notice of Defects13.1 OWNER May Stop Work ......... ..............13.10 OWNER's independent testing ..... ................13.4 special, required by ENGINEER,,. ....................... 9.6 timely notice required.......................................13.4 Uncovering the Work, at ENGINEER's request.................................................13.8-13.9 Times-- Adjusting...........................................................6.6 Change of Contract..............................................12 Computation of................................................17.2 Contract Times --definition of ...........................1.12 day........................................................1.7.2.2 Milestones..........................................................12 Requirements-- appeals,,..,,,,.,. ............................. .........9.10, 16 clarifications, claims and disputes..................9.11, 11.2, 12 Commencement of Contract Times,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 2.3 Preconstruction Conference 2.8 schedules.........................................2.6, 2.9, 6.6 Starting the Work............................6............2.4 Title, Warranty of 14.3 Uncovering Work ....................... I., ................. Underground Facilities, Physical Conditions— definition of....................................................1.41 Not Shown or Indicated.... I,,,,,,,,,,,,,„..,..,,,,,.,,,, 4.3.2 protection of ................................... .......... 4.3, 6.20 Shown or Indicated,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 6...... ,__.,.,..,,,,4.3.1 Unit Price Work-- claims.........................................................1,1.9.3 definition of....................................................1.42 generalll.9, 14.1, 14.5 Unit Prices-- general11.3.1 Determination for,,,,,9.10 Use of Premises ................. 6............... 6.16, 6.18, 6.30.2.4 Utility owners..................6 ,,..... 6.13, 6.20, 7.1-7.3, 13.2 Utilization, Partial...................1.28, 5.15, 6.30.2.4, 14.10 Value of the Work...................................................11.3 Values, Schedule of.............................7.6, 2.8-2.9, 14.1 xiv EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01 i02 G. Application instructions. H. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water -base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50°F (10°C) and 90°F (32°C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45°F (7°C) and 95°F (35°C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Do not paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp _ or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which maybe incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Devoe and Reynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Glidden Coatings and Resins, Division of SCM Corporation (Glidden). 3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh). 5. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 2.2 MATERIALS 09911 - 3 01 i02 A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be acceptable. B. Proprietary names used to designate color or materials are not intended to imply that products of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. C. Manufacturer's products which comply with coating qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use when acceptable to Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to Architect for any proposed substitutions. D. Color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correct in a manner acceptable to Applicator. B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. B. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with substrates primed by others. C. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish -painted, or provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items. 09911 - 4 01/02 D. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease priorto mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly -painted surfaces. E. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with —. scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots any apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood -filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. F. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job -painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling. G. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job. _ H. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop -coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. _ I. Touch-up shop -applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other sections of these specifications. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer. J. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non -petroleum based solvent. ^ 3.3 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.4 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are indicated in "schedules" of the contract documents. C. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. 09911 - 5 01/02 D. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. E. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently- fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. F. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint. G. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. H. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated. I. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. J. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop -primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated. K. Scheduling Painting: Apply first -coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. L. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firms, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. M. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer. N. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. O. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. P. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 09911 - 6 01 /02 Q. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. R. Completed Work: Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.5 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION A. Clean -Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day. B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using car not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. E. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 09911 - 7 01 /02 PAINT SCHEDULE General: Provide the following Paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. The materials of approved manufacturers may be utilized which meet the specifications of the listed Pittsburg Paint or other manufacturers' materials below. INTERIOR A. Gypsum Board: Acrylic Latex (Two Coats Speedhide Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel). Spray apply followed with long knapped roller. B. Ferrous Metal: Alkyd Resin Semi -Gloss (Primer by material supplier & Two coats Wallhide Semi -Gloss Enamel). C. Galvanized Metal: Aklyd Resin Lo-Lustre (One coat Speedhide White Galvanized Steel Primer & Two coats Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen Enamel). D. Concrete Floor Sealer: Acrylic Based Transparent Polymer (One Coat Sonneborn Kure-N- Seal). E. Wood (Stain): Urethane Satin (One Coat Rez Clear Sealer Primer and One Coat Rez Semi - Transparent Alkyd Oil Interior Stain and Two Coats Polyurethane Satin Clear Plastic Interior Coating). F. Wood (Paint): Vinyl Acrylic Latex and Acrylic Semi -Gloss (One Coat Speedhide Water base White Undercoater and Two Coats Speedhide Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel). G. Masonry Walls: Water repellent for masonry walls is work of Section 07190. 2. EXTERIOR A. Note: paint all roof top mechanical equipment and roof penetrations and exterior mounted electrical equipment. B. Ferrous Metal: Alkyd Resin Semi -Gloss (Primer by material supplier & Two coats Wallhide Semi -Gloss Enamel). C. Galvanized Metal: Aklyd Resin Lo-Lustre (One coat Speedhide White Galvanized Steel Primer & Two coats Speedhide Alkyd Lo-Sheen Enamel). D. Masonry Walls: Water repellent for masonry walls is work of Section 07190. END OF SECTION 09911 09911 - 8 No Text DIVISION 10 10155 — Toilet Compartments 10505 — Metal Lockers 10520 — Fire Protection Specialties 10801 — Toilet and Bath Accessories 01i02 SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of toilet partitions is indicated on drawings. B. Types of toilet partitions required include the following: 1. Metal, overhead -braced, baked enamel finish. C. Types of screens include: 1. Metal, wall -hung, baked enamel finish. D. Toilet accessories are specified in elsewhere in Division 10. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE D. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related work. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which maybe incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 10155 - 1 01 /02 1. Accurate Partition Corp., United States Gypsum Co. 2. All American Metal Corp. 3. American Sanitary Partition Corp. 4. Ampco Products, Inc. 5. Flush -Metal Partition Corp. 6. General Partitions Manufacturing Corp. 7. Global Steel Products Corp. 8. Knickerbocker Partition Corp. 9. Metpar Steel Products Corp. 10. Sa ymetal Products Co. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Steel Sheets for Baked Enamel Finish: ASTM A 591, Class C, galvanized-bonderized, of following minimum thicknesses: A. Pilasters (unbraced): 16 gage B. Panels and Screens: 20 gage C. Doors: 22 gage B. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 12-gage galvanized steel sheet. C. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 14-gage galvanized steel sheet. D. Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb of impregnated Kraft paper in thickness to provide finished dimension of 1 inch minimum for doors, panels and screens and 1-1/4 inches minimum for pilasters. E. Pilaster Shoes: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3 inches high and 20 gage, finished to match hardware. F. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, either chromium- plated nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac") or anodized aluminum. G. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium -plated, nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac"). H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium -plated steel, or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized, cadmium- plated, or other rust -resistant protective -coated steel. 10155 - 2 Variations in Work --Minor Authorized ....................................... 6.25, 6.27, 9.5 Article or Paragraph Number Visits to Site --by ENGINEER .................... I...............9.2 Waiver of Claims --on Final Payment ......................14.15 Waiver of Rights by insured partie$..................5.11, 6.11 Warranty and Guarantee, General --by CONTRACTOR................................................6.30 Warranty of Title, CONTRACTOR's....................... 14.3 Work -- Accessto..........................................................13.2 by others,',..... ................................. . ...................7 Changes in the.....................................................10 Continuing the..................................................6.29 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate...............................................15.5 Coordination of...................................................7.4 Cost of the.................................................11.4-.11.5 definition of......................................................1.43 neglected by CONTRACTOR...........................13.14 otherWork............................................................7 OWNER May Stop Work,,,,,,,„........................13.10 OWNER May Suspend Work...................13.10, 15.1 Related, Work at Site ............................... I .... 7.1-7.3 Starting the........................................................2A Stopping by CONTRACTOR.............................15.5 Stopping by OWNER.................................15.1-15.4 Variation and deviation authorized, minor ........... 3.6 Work Change Directive -- claims pursuant to.............................................10.2 definition of.....................................................1.44 principal references to,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 3.5.3, 10.1-10.2 Written Amendment -- definition of......................................................1.45 principal references to..............1.10, 3.5, 5.10,15.12, .........................0.6.2, 6.8.2, 6.19, 10.1, 10.4, ............................11.2, 12.1, 13.12.2, 14.7.2 Written Clarifications and Interpretations, .................................. 3.6.3, 9.4, 9.11 Written Notice Required-- by CONTRACTOR............................ 7.1, 9.10-9.11, ........................................... 10.4, 11.2, 12.1 by OWNER ....................9.10-9.11, 10.4, 11.2, 13.14 xv E)CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 4 01 /02 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition -mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Metal Toilet Partitions and Screens: C. General: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and seal edges with continuous interlocking strip or with lapped and formed edges. Weld edges and corners with exposed welds ground smooth. D. Overhead -Braced Partitions: Furnish overhead bracing for sturdy installation. E. Wall -Hung Screens: Furnish panel units in sizes indicated, of same construction and finish as partition system panels. F. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment in partition system as follows: 1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring -action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer's standards. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit, designed for emergency access, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper. 4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit. 2.4 FINISHES A. Baked Enamel Finish: B. Clean galvanized steel surfaces after fabrication and before application of enamel coating system to remove processing compounds, oils and other contaminants. C. Prime metal with baked -on rust inhibitive primer. D. Apply two coats of thermosetting enamel finish, applied by electrostatic process, and baked in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. E. Color: One of manufacturer's standard colors, as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 10155 - 3 01/02 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install compartment units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or the joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. B. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices as recommended by manufacturer to suit supporting structure. Set units to provide support and to resist lateral impact. C. Accessories: Mount accessories to partition units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 10155 10155 - 4 01/02 SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wardrobe lockers, including the following: a. Double Tier of 4 lockers for a total of 8 lockers. b. Lockers to be 12" wide x 18" deep, without sloped top. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, and shims required for installing metal lockers and concealed within other construction before metal locker installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Uncoated Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Indicated as the minimum thicknesses. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show base, sloping tops, filler panels, recess trim and other accessories. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory -applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the work. 10505 - 1 01 /02 Lockers. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of metal locker manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for metal locker installation. B. Protect lockers from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify the following by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings: 1. Concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support metal lockers before they are enclosed. 2. Recessed openings. 3. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish recessed opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal lockers without field measurements. Coordinate wall and floor construction to ensure that actual recessed opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 10505 - 2 01/02 a. Structural failures. _ b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware. 2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. 3. Warranty Period for Knocked -Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M, matte finish, suitable for exposed applications, and — stretcher leveled or roller leveled to stretcher -leveled flatness. B. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel -plated steel, slotless-type exposed bolt heads, and self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. 2.3 WARDROBE LOCKERS A. SPECIFICATION BASED UPON "STANDARD LOCKERS" BY REPUBLIC STORAGE _ SYSTEMS CO. B. Body: form backs, tops, bottoms, sides, and intermediate partitions from steel sheet; flanged for _ double thickness at back vertical corners. Comply with the following: C. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.0598-inch thick, cold -rolled steel sheet; lapped and _ factory welded at corners; with top and bottom mainframes factory welded into vertical mainframes. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames. Provide resilient bumpers to cushion door closing. — 1. Latch Hooks: form from minimum 0.1046-inch- (2.70-mm-) thick steel; welded or riveted to door frames. _ 2. Cross Frames: Channel formed and fabricated from same material as main frames; welded to vertical main frames. D. Doors: One-piece; fabricated from 0.0677-inch-(1.7-mm-) thick, cold -rolled steel sheet; formed into _ channel shape with double bend at vertical edges, and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges. 10505 - 3 O1/02 1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches (381 mm) wide; welded to inner face of doors. 2. Acoustical Treatment: Fabricate lockers for quiet operation with manufacturer's standard rattle -free latching mechanism and moving components isolated to prevent metal -to -metal contact. 3. Sound -Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard, designed to stiffen door surface and reduce sound levels when door is slammed, of die -formed metal with full perimeter flange and sound -dampening material. Spot weld panel to inside of door. 4. Door Style: Vented panel as follows: a. Louvered Vents: Stamped, louvered vents in door face. Not less than three louver openings at top and bottom for double -tier lockers. E. Hinges: Self -closing, welded to door and attached to door frame with not less than two factory -installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, 5 or 7 knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2 inches(51 mm) high. Provide not less than 3 hinges for each door more than 42 inches (1067 mm) high. 2. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel continuous hinge. 3. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel continuous or knuckle type. F. Projecting Handle and Latch: Manufacturer's standard, positive automatic, prelocking, pry -resistant latch and pull, chromium -plated, heavy-duty, vandal -resistant, life -up handle, as follows: l . Provide strike and eye for padlock. 2. Provide single -point gravity or spring -actuated latch with padlock lug. G. Locks: Padlocks to be the responsibility of the Owner. H. Locker Accessories: I. Interior Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise indicated: 2. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard zinc -plated, ball -pointed steel. Provide one double -prong ceiling hook and not fewer than two single -prong wall hooks for double -tier units. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 3. Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped, aluminum number plates with numerals at least 3/8 inch (9 mm) high. Number lockers in sequence indicated. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets. 4. Closed Front/End Bases: Minimum 0.0359-inch- (0.90-mm-) thick steel sheet, withoutoverlap or exposed fasteners, finished to match lockers. 5. Continuous Metal Base: Minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.50-mm-) thick steel sheet, channel or zee profiled for stiffness, fabricated in lengths as long as practicable to enclose base and base ends of lockers, and finished to match lockers. a. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). 10505 - 4 01 /02 6. Recess Trim: Manufacturer's standard; fabricated from minimum 0.0478-inch-(1.20-min-) thick, cold -rolled steel sheet. Minimum 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) face width, and finished to match lockers. Fabricate trim in lengths as long as practicable. 7. Finished End Panels: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from minimum 0.0239-inch- (0.60- mm-) thick steel sheet, finished to match lockers, and designed for concealing exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Knocked -Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers for nominal assembly at Project site using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets. Factory weld frame members together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly. B. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Well frame members together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly. 2.5 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except prefinished stainless -steel and chrome -plated surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Use manufacturer's standard methods. D. Baked -Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked -enamel finish. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. E. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. F. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable ifthey are within one-half ofthe range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 10505 - 5 01/02 A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches (910 min) o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion, using concealed fasteners. B. Knocked -Down Metal Lockers: Assemble knocked -down metal lockers with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames. C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. D. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. B. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces and polish stainless -steel and nonferrous- metal surfaces. C. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit metal locker use during construction. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory -finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by metal locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10505 10505 - 6 01/02 SECTION 10520 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division- I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories is indicated on drawings. B. Definition: "Fire extinguishers" as used in this section refers to units which can be — hand -carried as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels orto fixed fire extinguishing systems. C. Types of products required include: 1. Fire extinguishers. — 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain products in this section from one manufacturer. _ B. UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated. C. FM Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation for type, rating and classification of extinguisher indicated and carry appropriate FM marking. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product included in this section. For fire extinguisher cabinets include roughing -in dimensions and details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style and door construction, and panel style and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 10520 - 1 01 /02 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which maybe incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. J. L. Industries. 2. Larsen's Mfg. Co. 3. Johnson -Lee, Division of W.F. Lee Corp. 4. Muckle Manufacturing, Division of Technico, Inc. 5. Watrous, Inc. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard which comply with requirements of governing authorities. B. Abbreviations indicated below to identify extinguisher types relate to UL classification and rating system and not, necessarily, to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher. C. Multi -Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4A60BC, 10 lb. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container, for Class A, Class B and Class C fires. 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities indicated. B. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated, of the following types: Semi -Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) partially recessed in walls of shallow depth. D. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. E. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). F. Rolled -Edge Trim: Rounded edges with backbend depth as follows: 1. Depth: 2-1/2". 2. Trim Metal: Electrostatic white epoxy finish/steel. 10520 - 2 (This page left blank intentionally) xvi EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 EDITION) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 01/02 G. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. H. Electrostatic White Epoxy Finish/Steel: Manufacturer's standard flush, hollow steel door construction with tubular stiles and rails. I. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass, complying with FS DD-G-1403, grade B, style I, type I, quality q3, class as indicated below: 1. Clear glass, class I (transparent). J. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design as indicated below and on drawing. K. Full -Glass Panel: Tempered float glass, 1/8" thick. L. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door operating hardware of proper type for cabinettype, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam action latch, or door pull, exposed or concealed, and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous type hinge permitting door to open 180°. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application recommendations except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are assembled. Protect cabinets with plastic or paper covering, prior to shipment. B. Painted Finishes: Provide painted finish to comply with requirements indicated below for extent, preparation and type: _ C. Extent of Painted Finish: Apply painted finish to both concealed and exposed surfaces of cabinet components except where other than a painted finish is indicated. D. Color: Provide color or color matches indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. E. Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and loose rust or mill scale. F. Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply cabinet manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish system to the following surfaces: 1. Interior of cabinet. 2. Exterior of cabinet except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. PART 3-EXECUTION 10520 - 3 01 /02 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. B. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. C. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 10520 10520 - 4 01/02 SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings and schedules. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of accessory units. B. Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet accessory. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A&J Washroom Accessories. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. Franklin Brass Mfg. Co. 6. Hallmack-Nutone/Div. Scovill. 7. G.M. Ketcham Co., Inc. 8. McKinney/Subsidiary Kidde, Inc. 10801 - 1 01 /02 9. Parker-Scovill. 10. Watrous, Inc. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjusttoilet accessories for proper operation andverify thatmechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 10801 - 2 TOILET & BATH ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE Paper Towel Dispenser 01/02 with Disposal: Bobrick B-39603 (1 per Rest Room) Toilet Paper Dispenser: Bobrick B-2888 (1 per Toilet Stall) Soap Dispenser: Bobrick B-306 (1 per Lavatory) Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bobrick B-270 (1 per Women's Toilet Stall) Handicapped Grab Bars: Bobrick B-6206 x 36" with stainless steel screws (1 per Handicapped Toilet Stall) Bobrick B-6206 x 42" with stainless steel screws (1 per Handicapped Toilet Stall) Mirrors: 1 /4" thick mirror, no frame or backing. Adhere to wall with double - sided tape. (See plans for sizes.) Mop and Broom Holder: Bobrick B-223 x 24 (Mount in Room 109 location directed by Architect) NOTE: All Bobrick Model numbers above indicate standards for products which maybe substituted by other acceptable manufacturers, upon Architect's prior approval. END OF SECTION 10801 10801 - 3 DIVISION 12 12345 — Plastic Laminate Casework 12484 — Floor Mats and Frames 12494 — Roller Shades 01/02 SECTION 12345 - PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of Plastic laminate casework is shown on drawings. B. Work includes the fabrication and installation of standard components of base cabinet, wall — cabinets, storage cabinets, shelf units, and other units as indicated. Style of cabinets to be European box style without a face frame. Exterior of cabinets including backsplash and countertops to be plastic laminate while cabinet interiors to be melamine. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE — A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide plastic laminate casework for the project that is the product of a single manufacturer. Casework of recognized casework manufacturers may be considered for approval provided a written request is received ten (10) days prior to opening of bids. Casework must conform — to design, quality of materials, workmanship and function of casework specified and shown on plans. C. Manufacturers requesting approval shall submit evidence of at least 5 years experience and installation for similar type of project. Manufacturers shall also submit catalogs and specifications. Full-sized samples, catalogs and specifications, shall be submitted with written request for approval. Samples may be Impounded by owner and retained until completion of job for verification and compliance of specifications. D. Countertop Standard: ANSI A161.2. E. Architect/owners opinion and decision shall be final in evaluation of manufacturers products. _ 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for each type of casework unit. 12345 - 1 01 i02 B. Shop Drawings: Show materials, dimensions, sink locations, fittings and other accessories. Show relation of material furnished under this section with connecting or related work of other suppliers and trades. C. Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver casework only after wet operations in building are completed. B. Store completed casework in a ventilated place, protected from the weather, with relative humidity therein of 50% or less at 70°F (22°C). C. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General: Provide products specified incorporating manufacturers standard materials, as detailed on the drawings. Provide all hardware, accessories, etc., as necessary for complete casework installation. 2.2 BASIC MATERIALS A. Particleboard: ANSI A 208.1 mat -formed particleboard, Grade 1-M-2 with minimum density of 40 tbs. per cu. ft., internal bond of 60 psi; and minimum screwholding capacity of 225 lbs. on faces and 200 lbs. on edges. B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3, ofthickness, type and grade designation indicated; in colors or patterns and finishes indicated, or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selections. C. Hardboard: ANSI A 135.4, Class 1, tempered. 2.3 PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINETS A. Exposed Surfacing Material of Doors, Drawer Fronts, Fixed Panels, Toeboards and Ends: High pressure plastic laminate, 0.028" thick, General Purpose Type (GP-28). Utilize melamine for cabinet interiors. B. Concealed Materials: Any sound, dry solid lumber, plywood or particleboard or combination thereof; without defects affecting strength, utility or stability. On concealed surfaces of portions constructed of decorative boards, provide decorative or cabinet liner laminate backing (Light Duty Type). C. Core Material for Plastic Laminates: Particleboard. 12345 - 2 01 /02 D. Treatment of Exposed and Semi -Exposed Edges: Edge doors and drawer fronts with plastic laminate of same material as exposed faces. Edge remaining portions of cabinets with high pressure plastic laminate not less than 0.028" thick matching adjoining plastic laminate in colors or patterns and finish, unless otherwise indicated. E. Style of Face Construction: 1. Flush Overlay Style: Provide base, wall and full height units (if any), with drawer fronts, doors and fixed panels (if any) overlaying and concealing cabinet body, unless otherwise indicated. G. Cabinet Constructions: 1. Sides, Dividers, Tops, Bottoms, Shelves and Stretchers: Not less than 1/2" thick. Provide stretchers at top of base cabinet. 2. Backs: Not less than 1/8" thick. 3. Drawers: Sides, subfronts and backs: not less than 3/8" thick; bottoms: not less than 1/4" thick. Provide box type construction with front, bottom and back rabbeted in sides and secured with glue and mechanical fasteners. 4. Joinery: Rabbet backs flush into end panels and secure with concealed mechanical fasteners. Connect wall cabinet tops and bottoms and base cabinet bottoms and stretchers to ends and dividers by means of mechanical fasteners. Rabbet tops, bottoms and backs into end panels. — 5. Toe Board: Not less than 5/8" thick, attached to subbase with concealed fasteners. 2.4 COUNTERTOPS A. Exposed Surfacing Material: High pressure plastic laminate, 0.050" thick, General Purpose — Type (GP50). B. Substrate (Core) for Exposed Surfacing Material: Particleboard. C. Countertop Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front styles (nose) and backsplash style, unless otherwise indicated: I D. Front Style: Square. E. Backsplash Style: D (Square edge with scribe). F. Countertop Thickness: As indicated, or, if not indicated, not less than 1-1/2", unless otherwise ^ indicated, with substrate (core) not less than 3/4" thick. 2.5 HARDWARE A. Supply and install heavy-duty drawer glides, concealed hinges and 4" brushed chrome door and drawer pulls, of the quality for the public use of this facility. 12345 - 3 01io2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 General: A. Work ofthis section is classified, Custom Grade according to AWI Standards. These exacting standards shall apply to field installation and will be used as guide lines for acceptance or rejection of work. B. Employ only the highest quality craftsperson and methods to perform installation work. 3.2 CASEWORK INSTALLATION A. Scribe and closely fit to adjacent construction. Shim as necessary with concealed shims. Make cut-outs as required for mechanical and electrical items. B. Install in a precise manner in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Turn screws to a flat seat; do not drive. Adjust moving parts to operate freely without excessive bind. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation. B. Clean shop -finished surfaces, touch-up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas, as acceptable to Architect. C. Protection Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of materials and installed casework from damage by work of other trades. END OF SECTION 12345 12345 - 4 No Text o vo2 SECTION 12484 - FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Frames to be set in concrete floors to receive recessed floor mats. 2. Recessed floor mats of the following type: a. Rubber -tire mats. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section 1. Division 3 Sections for concrete work, including forming, placing, and finishing concrete floor slabs and grouting frames into recess. C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include frames for floor mats to be set in concrete floor slabs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of floor mat and frame specified, including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions, details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of floor mat and frames, full-scale sections of typical installations, details of patterns or designs, anchors, and accessories. D. Coordinate shop drawing submittal with concrete work shop drawings showing oversized recess for deferred installation of frames. E. Samples for verification purposes in form of 12-inch-square assembled section of floor mat and frame members with selected tread surface showing each type of metal finish and color of exposed floor mat, frames, and accessories required. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 12484 - 1 01 /02 F. Maintenance data in the form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and maintaining floor mats. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual framed openings formats by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid a delay of the Work. B. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field measurements. Coordinate floor construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mats and frames from one source of a single manufacturer. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Provide oversized recesses in concrete work to receive frames. Defer frame installation until building enclosure is complete and related interior finish work is in progress. B. Install frames integrally with principal placing of concrete floor system. Locate, align, and level frame members accurately. Recess in -fill concrete where required for placement of concrete topping. C. Install mat frames integrally with principal pour of concrete floor system. Locate, align, and level frame members accurately, but recess in -fill concrete by at least 1 inch for placement of concrete topping promptly after principal pour has hardened. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Rubber -Tire Mats: a. American Floor Products Company, Inc. b. Cactus Mat Mfg. Company. C. El -Do, Inc. d. Flexco Company. e. Mats, Inc. 12484 - 2 f. R.C. Musson Rubber Company. g. Tennessee Mat Company, Inc. h. U.S. Mat and Rubber Company, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS 01/02 A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials, including metals and metal _ finishes indicated or specified. Where not indicated, provide colors, patterns, and profiles selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. B. Recessed Mat Frames: Size and style to fit floor mat type matching approved sample, for permanent recessed installation in floor, complete with corner pins or reinforcing and installation anchorages. C. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5. Coat surface of frame that will contact cementitious material with zinc chromate paint or manufacturer's standard protective coating. D. Provide edge members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and with pieces spliced together by means of straight connecting pins. E. Rubber -Tire Mats: Units of edge -grain -laminated and chenille -buffed rubber -tire wall cuts, bonded to sheet rubber or other durable flexible backing sheet to form single -piece mats, 3/8 inch to 7/16 inch thick. F. Design: Continuous linear strip pattern for use perpendicular to flow of traffic. G. Tapered Flexible Frame: 2-inch-wide tapered flexible rubber edge -frame members, bonded to extended mat base sheet at all 4 edges with vulcanized mitered corners. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop -fabricate units of floor mat work to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where _ not indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. _ Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. Where possible, verify sizes by field measure-ment before shop fabrication. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 12484 - 3 o vo2 A. Install recessed frames and mats complying with manufacturer's instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and mat. B. Where frame is embedded in grout, install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure attachment. 3.2 PROTECTION A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses, and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near time of Substantial Completion. B. Defer installation of floor mats until time of Substantial Completion for Project. END OF SECTION 12484 12484 - 4 01/02 SECTION 12494 - ROLLER SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes manual roller shades. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Sections for windows, with roller shades mounted on window frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. ^! B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. C. Coordination Drawings: Show the following: 1. Shade mounting assembly and attachment. 2. Size and location of access to shade operator and adjustable components. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of roller shade indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 min) wide for each type of roller shade indicated. 2. For the following products: a. Shade Material: Not less than 3 inches (80 mm) square, with specified treatments applied. Mark face of material. b. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. - 12494 - 1 01 i02 F. Window Treatment Schedule: Include roller shades in schedule using same room designations indicated on Drawings. G. Product Certificates: For each type of roller shade product, signed by product manufacturer. H. Product Test Reports: For each type of roller shade product. I. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: I. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to fabrics, finishes, and performance. 3. Operating hardware. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of roller shades similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: Flame -Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 12494 - 2 01/02 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Am -Source International. 2. BTX Window Automation, Inc. 3. Custom Laminations, Inc. 4. Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. 5. Hunter Douglas Window Fashions. 6. Levolor Contract; a Newell Company; Joanna. 7. MechoShade Systems, Inc. 8. MHZ USA. 9. Nysan Shading Systems Ltd. 10. Shade Technologies, Inc. 11. Silent Gliss USA, Inc. 12. SM Automatic. 13. Sol-R-Veil. 14. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.; Graber. 15. VIMCO. 2.2 ROLLER SHADES A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Mecho Shade by Mecho Shade a. Mecho III Slim Line Bracket. b. Shade Cloth: Euro Viel 5300, Dense Basket Weave, 5-6% Openness Figure, 1004 Blk/Brown, Vinyl/Polyester B. Rollers: Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extruded -aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets; with manufacturers standard method for attaching shade material. Provide capacity for one roller shade bands per roller, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fascia: L-shaped, formed -steel sheet or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware and operators; length as indicated on Drawings, removable design for access. 12494 - 3 01/02 D. Top/Back Cover: L shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with fascia and end caps to form a six -sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and operating hardware inside. E. Corner Section: Factory formed and welded. F. Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous loop bead chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and bracket lift operator. 1. Clutch: Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide adaptor. 2. Lift Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard spring assist for balancing roller shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades. 3. Loop Length: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level. 4. Bead Chain: Plastic. 5. Cord Tensioner Mounting: Wall. 6. Operating Function: Stop and hold shade at any position in ascending or descending travel. G. Mounting: Wall extension brackets, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes. H. Hold -Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard for anchoring roller shade bottom in place and keeping shade band material taut. 2.3 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade. B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion -resistant -coated materials. Lifting Mechanism: With permanently lubricated moving parts. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg Q: Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between shades of end -to -end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use. 12494 - 4 0 vo2 F. Color -Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfact-ory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than [2 inches (50 mm)] to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. -. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 12494 - 5 WINDOW TREATMENT SCHEDULE WINDOW UNIT 1 (9 Required - Rooms 101, 102 and 103) 2'-8" x 2'-8" Window Opening. Surface Mount to Wall Above Window Opening. WINDOW UNIT 2 (1 Required - Rooms 103 and 104) See Window Elevation in Plans. Surface Mount to Wall Above Window Openings. END OF SECTION 12494 01/02 12494 - 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents the following terms have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: 1.1. Addenda --Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the Contract Documents. 1.2. Agreement —The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. 1.3. Application for Payment —The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 1.4. Asbestos --Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 1.5. Bid --The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 1.6. Bidding Documents --The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 1.7. Bidding Requirements --The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, and the Bid form. 1.8. Bonds --Performance and Payment bonds and other instruments of security. 1.9. Change Order --A document recommended by ENGINEER, which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 1.10. Contract Documents --The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Notice to Proceed, the Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders and ENGINEER's written interpretations and clarifications issued pursuant to paragraphs 3.5, 3.6.1 and 3.6.3 on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Shop Drawing submittals approved pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27 and the reports and drawings referred to in paragraphs 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 are not Contract Documents. 1.11. Contract Price --The moneys payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.9.1 in the case of Unit Price Work). 1.12. Contract Times --The numbers of days or the dates stated in the Agreement: (i) to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13. 1.13. CONTRACTOR --The person, firm or corporation with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement. 1.14. defective --An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient in that it does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordance with paragraph 14.8 or 14.10). 1.15. Drawings --The drawings which show the scope, extent and character of the Work to be furnished and performed by CONTRACTOR and which have been prepared or approved by ENGINEER and are referred to in the Contract Documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. 1.16. Effective Date of the Agreement --The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 1.17. ENGINEER --The person, firm or corporation named as such in the Agreement. 1.18. ENGINEER'S Consultant --A person, firm or corporation having a contract with ENGINEER to furnish services as ENGINEER's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. 1.19. Field Order --A written order issued by ENGINEER which orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with paragraph 9.5 but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) DIVISION 13 13134 — Glazed Structure Building Systems 01/02 SECTION 13134 - GLAZED STRUCTURE BUILDING SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following Building Components: 1. Greenhouse Structure (Vail Design by Nexus Corp. or approved equal). 2. Glazed Roof and Wall Panels (Triple Wall Polycarbonate glazing (Therma Glaze Plus by SPS International or approved equal). 3. Exhaust Fan Systems (Windmaster Fan by Acme or approved equal). Pad Evaporative Cooling System (Kool Cel Evaporative Cooling System by Acme or approved equal). 5. Air Mover Fan System (Valu-Master air Movers by Acme or approved equal). 6. Automated Computer Climate Control Systems (Standard Enviro Step Control System by Wadsworth Control Systems or approved equal). 7. Roof and Side Automatic Vent Motors (VC-100A/LST by Wadsworth Control Systems, Inc., or approved equal). 8. Rack and Pinion Vent Openers (Curved Power Rack Rack and Pinion Units by Wadsworth Control Systems, Inc., or approved equal). IMPORTANT NOTE: The work of this Section is a subcontracted "Design -Build" process for the design and construction of a complete greenhouse component which capitalizes on the critical experience, capabilities and knowledge of greenhouse manufacturers in producing a successful greenhouse for the Owner. This Section is "Performance Based" in that manufacturers are expected to design and construct the greenhouse component which meets the standards delineated in this Specification Section and the project scope as detailed in the Plans. The greenhouse manufacturer is encouraged to dadapt their proposal to meet these standards while utilizing their preferences in design and materials, etc. The desire of the Owner is to have a single greenhouse manufacturer, acting as a Subcontractor to the Prime Contractor, design and construct an integrated greenhouse which incorporates all required components, whether (or not) described in these specifications. It is expected that the greenhouse manufacturer shall, after receiving approval of the design by the Ownert, mobilize on -site after the General Contractor has satisfactorily prepared all foundation, masonry walls, and concrete slabs ready for the complete installation of all building components of the greenhouse. All final electrical, mechanical and plumbing connections shall be the responsibility of the Greenhouse Subcontractor. DRequired electrical circuits shall be run by the Greenhouse Subcontractor, to Electrical Panel LP12 in Room 105. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 13134 - 1 01/02 A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of glazed structure building system composed of the manufacturer's standard mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a complete building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into the building interior. Include primary and secondary framing, roof and wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements indicated, including those in this Article. 1.4 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of the following glazed structure system components: 1. Structural -framing system. 2. Glazing panels. 3. Trim and closures. 4. Equipment and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For the following building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. For installed components indicated to comply with design loads, include structural -- analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Anchor -Bolt Plans: Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach glazed structure to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location. 3. Structural -Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of.primary and secondary framing. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross -sections. C. Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1 /2 inches per 12 inches (1:10): 1. Gutters. 2. Downspouts. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glazed structure systems certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: 1. Name and location of Project. 2. Order number. 3. Name of manufacturer. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Building dimensions, including width, length, height, and roof slope. 13134 - 2 1.5 1.6 o vo2 6. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot -rolled steel and AISI standards for cold -rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. 7. Governing building code and year of edition. F. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic zone or effective peak velocity -related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes). G. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code. H. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. I. Erector Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erectors comply with requirements. J. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience. K. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. L. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing glazed structure systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of glazed structure system component through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, or in-service performance. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 13134 - 3 o 1/02 Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged M or deformed. Package roof and wall panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Handling: Unload, store, and erect roof and wall panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store roof and wall panels to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit roof and wall panel installation to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify glazed structure system foundations by field measurements before glazed structure fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish foundation dimensions and proceed with fabricating structural framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor -bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION _ A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor -bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are , specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." i I M01aLl \:1:7_6I11•1 A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of _ other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty period of glazed structure building components: 3 years. - PART 2-PRODUCTS 13134 - 4 01 /02 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Greenhouse Structure (Vail Design by Nexus Corp. or approved equal): 1. The Greenhouse Structure Design is based upon the Vail Design by Nexus Corporation or approved equal. 2. The greenhouse truss bays are 10' o.c. with a span of 30'. 3. The roof slope is 6/ 12 and includes double roof vents at the ridge. 4. A continuous side vent is located on the south elevation. 5. The structure shall be tied into a masonry structure as indicated on the drawings. 6. The greenhouse structure shall include the manufacturer's standard framing, gutters, downspouts, trim, etc., and shall make provisions for a future shade curtain. B. Glazed Roof and Wall Panels - Triple Wall Polycarbonate Glazing (Therma Glaze Plus by SPS International or approved equal): 1. The design of the Glazing System is based upon the ThermaGlaze Plus Triple Wall Polycarbonate Glazing by SPS International or approved equal. 2. The glazing system should include the required Snap Cap Glazing System. C. Exhaust Fan Systems (Windmaster Fan by Acme or approved equal): 1. The design of the Exhaust Fan System is based upon the Windmaster Fan by Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp. or approved equal. 2. The fan system should be designed to provide 2 air changes per minute. 3. The design should prohibit the use of exterior weatherhoods for aesthetic reasons. D. Evaporative Pad Cooling System (Kool Cel Evaporative Cooling System by Acme or approved equal): The design of the Evaporative Cooling Pad System is based upon the Kool Cel System by Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp. or approved equal. 2. The evaporative cooling system which incorporate rigid cellulose cooling cells should be designed to accommodate the application indicated (volume of space, orientation, heat gain and heat loss) and coordinated with the exhaust fan system. E. Air Mover Fan System (Valu-Master Air Mover by Acme or approved equal): 1. The design of the Air Mover System is based upon the Valu-Master Horizontal Air Mover by Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp. or approved equal. 2. The design oftheAirMover System should effectively provide air movement through the greenhouse environment. F. Automated Computer Climate Control Systems (Standard Enviro Step Control System by Wadsworth Control Systems or approved equal): 13134 - 5 01/02 1. The design of the Climate Control System is based upon the Standard Enviro Step Control System as manufactured by Wadsworth Control Systems, Inc. Other systems will require approval by the Architect. 2. System to include: A. Aspirated Temperature and Humidity Module. B. Solar Shielded Outdoor Temperature Sensor. C. Three set point periods per day. D. Large display for reports and graphics. E. Easy to use keypad. F. Alarm contacts for external dialer or security system. G. Four voltage outputs to drive heating valves and variable speed fans. H. Adjustable rate of change between day, night and settings "ramping". I. Works with up to five separate sensors. G. Roofand Side Automatic VentMotors (VC-100A/LST by Wadsworth Control Systems, Inc., or approved equal): 1. The design of the Vent Motors is based upon the VC- 100A/LST by Wadsworth Control Systems, Inc., or approved equal. 2. The vent motor opens and closes fully with no built-in increments but by tying into the Automatic Computer Climate Control System which will provide incrementing ability. 3. Provide coupling size to meet the applicable vent drive tube. H. Rack and Pinion Vent Openers (Curved Powerrack Rack and Pinion Units by Wadsworth Control Systems, Inc., or approved equal). I . The design of Vent Openers is based upon the Curved Powerrack Rack and Pinion by Wadsworth Control Systems, Inc., or approved equal. 2. Provide vent openers which meet applicable length and shaft sizes. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide accessories as standard with glazed structure system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of glazed structure system. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Erector, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ` 13134 - 6 01 i02 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances, including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and loose mill scale, that impair bond of erection materials. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 3.3 ERECTION A. Erect glazed structure system according to manufacturer's written instructions and erection drawings. B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from glazed structure system manufacturer's professional engineer. C. Set structural framing in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection. D. Baseplates and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen surfaces before setting baseplates and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of baseplates and bearing plates. 1. Set baseplates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of baseplate or bearing plate before packing with grout. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. a. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for proprietary grout materials. E. Align and adjust framing members before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact. Make adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. F. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings. i. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end bay bracing only where indicated. 13134 - 7 01/02 G. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to building structural frame. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean, prepare, and prime or reprime welds, bolted connections, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted primary and secondary framing, accessories, and bearing plates. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded surfaces of shop -painted primary and secondary framing, accessories, and bearing plates are included in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 13134 13134 - 8 DIVISION 15 15010 — Mechanical Special Conditions 15050 — Materials and Methods 15250 — Mechanical Systems Insulation 15300 — Fire Protection Specifications 15440 — Plumbing 15850 — Ventilating and Air Conditioning 15950 — Automatic Temperature Control 15990 — Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 1.20. General Requirement. --Sections of Division I of the Specifications. 1.21. Hazardous Waste --The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 1.22.a. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations --Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. 1.22.b. Legal Holidays --shall be those holidays observed by the City of Fort Collins. 1.23. Liens --Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. 1.24. Milestone —A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 1.25. Notice ofAward—A written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated therein, within the time specified, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement. 1.26. Notice to Proceed —A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR (with a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents. 1.27. OWNER --The public body or authority, corporation, association, firm or person with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided. 1.28. Partial Utilization --Use by OWNER of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 1.29. PCBs --Polychlorinated biphenyls. 1.30. Petroleum —Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene and oil mixed with other non -Hazardous Wastes and crude oils. 1.31. Project --The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.32.a. Radioactive Material --Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 1.32.b. Regular Working Hours --Regular working hours are defined as 7:00am to 6:00pm unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements. 1.33. Resident Project Representative —The authorized representative of ENGINEER who may be assigned to the site or any part thereof. 1.34. Samples --Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 1.35. Shop Drawings --All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for CONTRACTOR and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work. 1.36. Specifications —Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. 1.37. Subcontractor --An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. 1.38. Substantial Completion —The Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER as evidenced by ENGINEER's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.13. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 1.39. Supplementary Conditions --The part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 1.40. Supplier —A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor. 1.41. Underground Facilities --All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 42000) DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS — 1. SPECIAL NOTE A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the applicable provisions of General Requirements are hereby adopted and made part of - Division 15, Mechanical Work. B. The Mechanical Drawings and the Division 15 sections listed below constitute the Mechanical Construction portion of this project. 15010 Mechanical Special Conditions 15050 Materials and Methods 15250 Mechanical Systems Insulation 15440 Plumbing 15850 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 15950 Automatic Temperature Control 15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing C. Where "Project Manager" is used in this Specification, we mean that person so designated by the Owner. 2. DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS A. Contract drawings for mechanical work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, ducts, conduits, piping, and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and outlets. Mechanical trades shall follow these drawings in laying out their work, consult general construction drawings to familiarize themselves with all conditions affecting their work, and shall verify spaces in which their work will be installed. Coordinate work with other trades as job conditions reasonably require. B. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangement, make such changes without extra cost to Owner. C. The drawings are not intended to be scaled for roughing in measurements _ nor to serve as shop drawings. D. The installation details, instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer of the product used, modified, to obtain the best end result shall form the basis of installation of the products for usage on this project except where definite and specific instructions are set forth therein or details are shown on plans. 15010-1 3. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Shop Drawings must be submitted for the following equipment: Valves Insulation Plumbing Fixtures Hose Bibbs, Wall Hydrants, and Yard Hydrants Flexible Duct Connectors Balancing Dampers Grilles, Registers, Diffusers, & Accessories Radiant Heaters Unit Heaters Exhaust Fans Louvers Furnaces Temperature Controls All items followed by B. Shop Drawings must first be checked by the Contractor for space conformance and for performance characteristics established by Plans and/or Specifications, and so stamped. Contractor's stamp shall include name and address of Contractor, specification paragraph, item designation and the following statement: "Item(s) has (have) been checked for compliance with specification requirements and space limitations and will meet these conditions; checked by; Date." C. Shop Drawings not stamped as specified will be returned to the Contractor without action. D. Contractor must submit a minimum of 5 sets of complete drawings to Engineer. 4. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Materials or products specified by name of manufacturer, brand, trade name, or catalog reference, shall be furnished under the contract unless changed by an Addendum or a Contract Modification. Where two or more materials are named, the choice of these shall be optional with the Contractor. B. Prior to award of the Contract, interested parties may request approval of substitute materials. Such request shall be made in writing and be delivered to the Engineer no later than 6 days (excluding Sundays and holidays) prior to date and time of receipt of bids. All substitutions approved will be listed in an Addendum. One set of specific detailed technical data for each item shall be delivered to the Engineer. f 01111WA C. See Section 01030, Alternates and Basic Section 01600, Material and Equipment, for Alternates and Substitutions. D. After the award of the Contract, any request for a substitution must be made in writing by the Contractor (not material supplier or subcontractor). Such request shall state the name of the product specified, the name of the product proposed for substitution, the reason for requesting the substitution, and any change in Contract Amount resulting from the substitution. No such substitution shall be made until an appropriate Contract Modification has been issued and approved by the Engineer and the Owner. _ E. The cost of any changes of other trades as a result of use of the substitution materials or equipment must be borne by the Contractor submitting such materials or equipment. 5. ORDINANCES, PERMITS, AND CODES A. All work shall be executed in accordance with the latest revision of the Uniform Fire, Plumbing, and Mechanical Codes, and the Local, State, and — other attending rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected and be subject to the inspection of these departments. B. Obtain all permits and licenses required for work performed under Division 15 and pay all fees in connection with same. C. Where work required by the drawings and specifications is above the standard required by local regulations, it shall be done as shown and/or specified. 6. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials, apparatus and equipment for the work shall be new and shall ^ be of first class quality, presently being manufactured. Absolutely NO "close-out" type materials, apparatus or equipment shall be allowed. All _ materials, apparatus and equipment shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be selected and arranged to fit properly into the allotted space allowing proper room for maintenance. 7. TESTS A. Tests shall be performed on the systems specified herein. Any one or all of the systems listed herein may be provided. See Drawings and Specification Section to determine which systems are to be provided. Tests shall be repeated until each system is proven acceptable. All tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer and/or the Owners. A letter must be 15010 - 3 obtained by the Contractor and be filed with the Engineer's Office, if the tests were witnessed by the Owner. Where required, perform such tests in the presence of local or state building inspection officials. B. General 1. The pipe systems shall be tested to assure they are installed leak tight and structurally safe for the intended purpose. 2. Cleaning and flushing tests and approvals shall be completed before performing pipe system tests to eliminate retesting. 3. If the pipe tests fail, the pipe system shall be repaired and retested. 4. The installing supervisor shall confirm the safe test pressure for vessels, equipment and accessories in the pipe system from drawings, specifications, or name plate data. 5. Notify the Owner's Project Manager 24 hours in advance of each test. C. New System Test Instruments, vessels, equipment and accessories which cannot withstand the test pressure required of attached piping shall be isolated from the piping. Remove or block and vent direct operated or self-contained regulators. Each part of a pipe system shall be tested, divided as indicated, for the time specified for the given class of test. 2. Safety valves, relief valves, and rupture discs shall be removed during the pipe system test and reinstalled after the test. New gaskets shall be used when reinstalling all flanged items. Do not change spring settings or make inoperative any safety and relief valves, except valves designed to be pinned or yoked. Normally closed control valves shall be opened before test. 3. Piping and vessels shall be vented when draining them to prevent their collapse by vacuum. 4. The pipe system installer shall provide all necessary connections, vents and drains to test and drain the system completely. 5. Allowance shall be made by the Project Manager for variations of pressure and volume due to temperature changes in determining satisfactory maintained test pressure. 15010 - 4 6. The Project Manager shall check the test pressure at the beginning and end of each test before acceptance of the system. — 7. Pipe systems shall be tested and accepted before insulation, paint, or other covering or coating is applied. The only exceptions are for those parts, including vessels, which have been painted, covered or coated, and have had previous certification tests. 8. The test shall be a hydrostatic test, or as otherwise specified. D. Test Pressures E. The final test pressure shall be as follows: 1. 125 psig for domestic water systems 2. 12 ft. of water head or 5 psig air pressure held for 30 minutes for waste and vent systems. 3. Compressed air piping shall be tested with an air pressure of 150% of the normal operating pressure but not less than 50 psig. System shall hold test pressure for 24 hours without pressure drop except for pressure change due to temperature differential. Domestic Water Systems " 1. An initial test pressure of 24 psig shall be applied and a visual inspection of the piping system conducted for leaks. The pressure shall then be raised to .75 times the design pressure and rechecked for leaks, after which the final test pressure shall be applied and a final inspection of the piping system performed. 2. Clean domestic water shall be used as the test medium. 3. Trapped air shall be removed. _ 4. A test gauge with a minimum 4 1/2" diameter dial and a test pressure reading between 1/2 to 3/4 of full scale shall be used. Test gauges approved by the inspector shall be used. 5. The final test pressure shall be held for 4 hours, then visually inspected for leaks. Pressure loss during the 4 hour test period may be cause for rejection of the system. 6. Retesting Retest piping failing initial tests following correction of defective work. Requirements of initial tests shall apply. 15010 - 5 A. Refrigeration Systems Refrigeration piping systems shall be blown out with dry nitrogen to remove any free water or dirt present in system. Lines shall be charged with dry nitrogen and proven tight at a minimum of 300 psig on high side and 150 psig on low side. The system shall hold these pressures for 24 hours without pressure drop except for pressure change due to temperature differential. B. Natural Gas Line Testing General: Test gas supply lines with air under pressure before being covered. Use a static gauge graduated to one pound per square inch. 2. Testing shall be of the complete piping system, before concealing, or of individually separable larger portions of the system. 3. Test Procedures: Use either of the following methods at the Contractor's option: a. 30 psig air pressure for a period of 24 hours with no drop in gauge pressure, indicating the line to be airtight, 60 psig for welded pipe. b. 100 psig air pressure, with joints tested with standard soap and brush inspection. 4. Only the last connection to the appliance may be tested under operating conditions. This connection will be tested with soap and brush under line pressures. This connection must remain exposed. 5. Retesting: Retest piping failing initial tests following correction of defective work. Requirements of initial tests shall apply. F. Final Test 1. After final connections to the existing system are made and prior to application of insulation, a final test shall be made of the complete new system. 2. The test shall be visual inspection in normal service test. 3. Systems to be tested - ALL piping systems. 4. The test pressure shall be the working pressure as a minimum or as specified. 15010 - 6 5. The test medium shall be the system's working fluid, or as specified. 6. Trapped air shall be removed. 7. Piping shall be visually inspected for leaks. G. Report 1. The Report shall contain the following and be submitted within 24 hours of each test: - Date, time and place of test - Duration of test - Person responsible for testing - Results of test - Action taken to correct deficiency _ - Outside dry bulb temperature _ - Inside dry bulb temperature - Specific section of piping tested 2. The Report shall be required for final payment. H. Notify the Project Manager after successful testing. 8. WARRANTY A. All systems shall be warranted for one (1) year after Owner occupancy in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, etc. of the contract. B. In addition, the Contractor is hereby forewarned that expansive soils may exist in the construction area. Any slab heave and resulting damage during the above warranty period attributable to moisture from any leaking water, sewer, or storm drainage piping installed under this Contract shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Restore structure and repair all damage. C. All lubrication, filter changes, and normal maintenance shall be the responsibility of the Owner. 9. START-UP A. At a time set by the Contractor and agreed to by Owner, arrange to place equipment in operation and have available at that time, if required, representatives of the manufacturer of equipment to assist in starting equipment, to make necessary adjustments to equipment, and to prove satisfactory operation prior to turning facility over to Owner. 15010 - 7 B. Any irregularities, faulty equipment, etc., shall be repaired or replaced as required prior to acceptance. C. Run operating test for (3) 8 hour periods and submit test data for approval. D. All equipment shall be freshly oiled, cleaned, filters changed with clean media and installation completely finished prior to acceptance. 10. MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Prepare three (3) typed portfolios with complete sets of high quality copies of Shop Drawings used in the erection of mechanical system. Each piece of equipment shall have information on installation, testing, cleaning, and maintenance instructions, list of materials for maintenance, parts list, wiring diagrams, and name and address of authorized service organization, with 24 hour phone number. List shall be alphabetized, within each category. B. Complete manuals shall also include "As Built" temperature control drawings, final balance report. C. Include operating instructions for complete system, including emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment, normal starting, operating and shut down, and long term shut down. D. Include maintenance instructions, identified equipment lists, proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment, necessary cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule. E. Information shall be folded, if necessary, and included in 8-1/2" x I V hard cover, indexed, loose-leaf 3 ring binder. Multiple binders shall be used if required to contain materials. All material shall be properly identified with job name, date, name and address of Contractor, Architect, and Engineer. F. Portfolios shall be submitted to the Engineer for review of material and completeness, and when approved by Engineer, portfolios will be turned over to the Owner. G. Where indicated in the specification, provide the services of a factory trained representative to instruct the Owner's authorized personnel in the operation, control, and maintenance of equipment. Contractor shall instruct Owner's Project Manager and Maintenance Supervisor in the operation and maintenance of all other equipment and systems, using the O & M Manual as a guide, including paragraph C above. Final payment will not be made until this is done to the Owner's satisfaction. 15010 - 8 11. PROTECTIVE COVERING FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment (including open-ended _ piping and ductwork) provided under Division 15 and equipment furnished by Owner for installation under Division 15 to protect from mortar, paint, debris, etc., during construction. A polyethylene covering tied securely around the equipment will be acceptable for this purpose. 12. CLEANING AND PAINTING A. Clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from Mechanical Contractor's work or operations, leaving the job and equipment in a clean condition. All existing areas in which work is performed shall be cleaned and restored to their original condition upon completion of the project. B. Air surfaces of all coils, fans, air units, air filters, etc., shall be wiped clean or washed if required. All plumbing fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, including stickers. Clean all items furnished, such as motors, etc., leaving the entire installation in a first-class condition. C. Equipment and materials provided under Division 15 will be painted by — the General Contractor except where specified otherwise. However, any mechanical equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats of paint shall be restored to the original condition and appearance prior to application of finish paint. 13. FINAL INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing to make arrangements for a final inspection. B. After the final inspection is made, the Contractor will receive a list of items requiring adjustment, correction, replacement or completion. C. The Contractor shall comply completely with all the listed requirements within thirty (30) days of receipt of list. Should the Contractor fail to — perform within this time limit, the Engineer and/or Owner reserves the right to have the work completed by others and the cost deducted from the contract price. -' D. The Contractor shall initial and date each item as completed and return copy to Engineer prior to re -inspection. -- 14. EXISTING OUTSIDE UTILITIES 15010 - 9 A. Utility companies shall be contacted and advised of proposed work prior to the start of excavation. B. Active Utilities: When encountered in work, protect, brace, support existing active sewers, gas, electric, other services where required for proper execution of work. If existing active utilities are encountered that are not indicated and which required relocation, make request in writing for determination. Do not proceed with work until written directions are received. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. C. Inactive Utilities: When encountered in work, remove, cap, or plug inactive services. Notify utility companies or municipal agencies having jurisdiction; protect or remove these services as directed. D. Interruption of Utilities: Where work makes temporary shutdown of services unavoidable, shut down at night, or at such times as approved by Owner, which will cause least interference with established operating routine. Arrange to work continuously, including overtime, if required, to make necessary connections to existing work. 15. PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brady 2. Seton 3. Westline Products 4. Approved Equal B. Mark all pipe on both sides of partitions and slabs, at take -offs, valves, connections to equipment and at intervals not exceeding 25 feet, identifying markers, black on background color band; over 3" diameter pipe, 2" letters on 2 1/4" color band. Marker shall indicate "Gas", domestic "CW", etc. C. Show flow direction with arrows, immediately adjacent to all pipe identification markers. 1 1/8" x 4 2/3" arrows shall be black on background color scheduled for respective service. D. Attach identifying markers and arrows on lower quadrant of overhead pipes, and tape ends. E. Application on soft insulation or chalky surface; binding tape shall be spirally wrapped and overlapped around the circumference of the insulation for a sufficient distance to mount identification markers and arrows to taped surface. 15010 - 10 materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems or water. 1.42. Unit Price Work --Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 1.43. Work —The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. 1.44. Work Change Directive --A written directive to CONTRACTOR, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by ENGINEER, ordering an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed as provided in paragraph 4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under paragraph 6.23. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in paragraph 10.2. 1.45. Written Amendment --A written amendment of the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the nonengineering or nontechnical rather than strictly construction -related aspects of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS Delivery of Bonds. 2.1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish in accordance with paragraph 5.1. Copies of Documents. 2.2. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary Conditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. Commencement of Contract Times, Notice to Proceed: 2.3. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, or, EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within thirty days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. hi ne event will the Cent—Centfeet Times eemraenee to fun later than the sbEtieth day after the da of the A�♦ whiehever date is earlier-7 Starting the Work: 2.4. CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run, but no Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. Before Starting Construction: 2.5. Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity or . discrepancy in the Contract Documents, unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 2.6. Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review: 2.6.1. a preliminary progress schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2.6.2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals which will list each required submittal and the times for submitting, reviewing and processing such submittal; 2.6.2.1. In no case will a schedule be acceptable which allows less than 21 calendar days for each review by Engineer 2.6.3. A preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which will include quantities and prices of items aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.7. Before any Work at the site is started, CONTRACTOR and ^..gym � V E shall ea -eh deliver to the ether OWNER with copies to eaeh additional insure identified in -the Supplementafy Condition ENGINEER, 16. 17. 18. F. Pipe Identification List - Note: Any one or all of the following services may be provided. See Drawings and Specifications Sections to determine which services are to be provided. IDENTIFICATION Cold Water Sanitary, Vent, Drain Domestic Hot Water Compressed Air (less than 90 psig) Gas Refrigerant EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION BACKGROUND COLOR Green Green Yellow Blue Yellow Green A. Identify all key equipment, fans, thermostats, controls, relays, dampers, etc., using Dymo Embossing Tape punched with M-3 Dymomite hand embossing tool. Punch out 3/32" holes at each side of label and secure with Parker-Kalon self -tapping screws in addition to adhesive. B. Coordinate the location of all ceiling access panels for gypboard ceilings with the General Contractor, so that there is access to each valve, volume damper, fire damper or other equipment or temperature controls. C. Familiarize the Owner's maintenance personnel with the locations of equipment identified above. TEMPORARY HEATING OF BUILDING A. Provide temporary smokeless unit heaters as required. Installation, maintenance, and fuel cost for temporary heat shall be at the expense of this Contractor, •O B. As specified in the General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of this Specification. Permanent heating system shall not be used for temporary heat during construction until all walls are taped and textured, without specific approval by the Owner in writing. ASBESTOS A. Products, equipment or materials that contain asbestos shall not be allowed in the construction of the mechanical and plumbing systems on this proj ect. END OF SECTION 15010 - 11 SECTION 15050 - MATERML.S AND METHODS 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including references to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, is hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. B. Materials and methods specified herein apply to all sections under Division 15 of the specifications. Intent of this section is to set forth common requirements and to avoid repetition under each particular section. See drawings and/or Division 15 Specification sections to determine which systems are to be provided. 2. PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Provide pipe and fittings of type and materials scheduled herein, of quantities shown on the drawings and as required to connect fixtures and equipment. All fittings shall have ANSI tolerances and dimensions and have ASTM materials for conformance with piping below. B. Provide standard weight IPS brass nipples and adapters where required between copper tubing and factures. Steel or iron nipples are not permitted between copper lines and brass valves or trim. C. Joints: Joints in all copper domestic piping systems shall be made using 95/5 tin/antimony or equal tensile strength solder that contains no lead. Engelhard "Silvabrite 100", Oatey "Safeflo" or Canfield "Watersafe" are all acceptable. Use flux recommended by solder manufacturer. Absolutely no lead containing solders or fluxes will be allowed in any portion of the work. The Owner reserves the right to inspect solders, fluxes and joints. Any joint found containing lead solder shall be cause for resoldering all joints made in all systems in the building. Copper heating piping systems shall be brazed for 1-1/4" pipes and larger, except connections to valves and units that may be damaged by the heat. D. Pipe and Fitting Schedule 1. Building sanitary sewer below grade. a. Hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe, service weight, centrifugally spun, ASTM A-74. Fittings cast iron hub and spigot. Joints positive -seal elastomeric compression type. Tyler Ty -Seat or equal. OR 15050 - 1 b. Schedule 40 PVC DWV with solvent welded joints, as approved by the Administrative Authority. — 2. Soil, waste, and rainwater piping in building above ground. a. Hubless cast iron, service weight, centrifugally spun per — CISPI-301. Fittings hubless cast iron. Joints - neoprene sleeve and stainless steel retaining band with double screw — connectors, installed per manufacturer's recommendations. CISPI-310, 1985. OR b. Schedule 40 PVC DWV with solvent welded joints, as — approved by the Administrative Authority. Pipes in return air ceiling plenums must be fire and smoke rated for that purpose. — 3. Water service and water in building underground including service to fire riser. — a. Piping 3" and larger .shall be Ductile -iron, AWWA C-15076, with cement mortar lining. Fittings - cast iron, conforming to ASA 21.10, cement mortar limed. Join pipe and fitting with mechanical fittings. b. Piping 2 1/2" and smaller, Type "W' soft drawn copper water tube. Fittings, buried in ground, wrought copper, solder joint. There shall be no burial fittings under the — building. 4. Domestic water (hot and cold water) in building above ground. — a. 3" and smaller: Piping shall be Type "L" hard drawn copper water tube, per ASTM B88. Fittings wrought copper, -- solder joint. b. Except as otherwise specified elsewhere, Type "L" soft — drawn copper may be used adjacent to fixtures and equipment. 5. Standpipe and fire sprinkler piping. a. Exposed piping shall be black steel, Schedule 40, screwed. Fittings black cast iron, Underwriters approved, 175 pound working pressure. 15050 - 2 b. Exposed piping shall be black steel, Schedule 40, grooved. Fittings grooved. Mechanical joints. All Underwriter approved for minimum of 175 pound working pressure. C. Where pipe is not exposed, as above a ceiling, schedule 10 pipe and fittings as approved by UL and NFPA may be used. 6. Natural gas in building above ground. a. Piping shall be black steel, Schedule 40, plain ends for welding for 3" and above. Fittings welded, standard weight. Joints -welding rods as recommended by AWS or NCPWB. b. 2-1/2" and smaller, piping shall be black steel, Schedule 40, screw ends. Fittings black malleable iron screwed, standard weight 1501b. banded. Support pipe at 10 ft. intervals for 1-1/4" pipe and larger, and at 8 ft. intervals for 3/4" or 1" pipe. Pipe installed in a return air plenum must be welded. No screwed fittings. 7. Miscellaneous condensate and drain lines from furnaces, evaporative cooling units, reduced pressure back -flow preventers, etc. a. Piping shall be Type "DWV" or "L" copper, fittings wrought copper, solder joint. 3. VALVES* A. Provide valves in piping where indicated and provide shut-off valves in limes serving each ip ece of equipment, including mixing valves, wall hydrants, sill cocks, pumps, water heaters, plumbing fixtures, eyewash stations, etc. Also isolate each major zone, building wing, loop, etc. 1. Ball valves shall be manufactured by Apollo, Nibco or Red and White. 2. Globe and check valves shall be manufactured by Stockham, Crane, Nibco, Red and White, Jenkins, Lunkenheimer, Milwaukee, Powell or Walworth. 15050 - 3 3. Butterfly valves shall be manufactured by Stockham, Mueller, Centerline, DeZurik, Keystone, Milwaukee, Red and White, Nbco, or Crane. 4. Eccentric plug valves shall be manufactured by DeZurik or — MTilliken. 5. Wafer check valves shall be manufactured by Stockham, Centerline, — DuoCheck or Metraflex. 6. Valves by other manufacturers must have prior approval. B. Valve Schedule. 1. Shut-off valves for domestic water shall be full flow ball valves, rated at 600 prig WOG. a. Apollo 77........................... Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve b. Nibco 585.......................... Bronze Threaded or Soldered V Ball Valve C. Red & White 5044/5049.... Bronze Threaded or Soldered — Ball Valve 2. Where ball valves are used in insulated piping, handle extensions shall be provided. Extension shall be manufactured as an option for the valve fiunished and shall extend the handle a minimum of 1/4" beyond the insulation jacket. 3. Swing check valves shall be bronze with swing regrinding seat and _ renewable disc Class 125. a. Stockham Fig. Number: i B-309................... Bronze Soldered End ii B-310................... Bronze Threaded End In B-340................... Flanged End — iv Or approved equal 4. Wafer check valves shall be Stockham Fig. Number WG-970 or —. approved equal. 5. Drain valves shall have 1/2" garden hose threaded adapter with cap and may be globe type with composition disc or ball type. 15050 - 4 6. Shut-off valves for gas shall be eccentric plug valve ball, double seal seats, and seal, rated 175 pound WOG. a. DeZurik 400 series. b. Milliken 600 series. C. Approved equal. 4. UNIONS A. Make connections at each piece of equipment with unions or flanges located for quick/easy disconnect for maintenance. Provide unions or flanges on: 1. Control Valves 2. Equipment 3. Meters 4. Tanks B. Use the same materials and finish as the piping system C. Use dielectric unions or flanges where copper or brass piping is connected to ferrous piping or equipment. Epco Model M FB, EA. (All junctions of dissimilar metals). D. Unions and flanges are not required at equipment where flanged valves, strainers, control valves, etc., are used. E. Omit unions and flanges in straight pipe runs or in concealed locations, except for flanged valve applications. F. Union Schedule: 1. Copper Piping a. All pipe sizes: Copper, ground joint union. Chase 402, Mueller WC407. 2. Natural gas. a. Piping sizes 2" and smaller: 15050 - 5 i Malleable iron unions with ground joint brass to iron seat, 150 pound working steam pressure. Grinnell 463, Stockham 694, black or galvanized. n Flexible gas connectors shall not be used except in kitchens, to appliances that must be moved for cleaning. Connectors to be heavy duty, quick couple type as approved by PSD and the Engineer. 5. PIPE AND DUCT SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves for all pipes and ducts passing through floors, roofs, walls, and full height partitions. Ducts passing through gypboard walls do not require sleeves. B. For sleeves passing through fire rated walls/floors, fill void with fire stop material. C. At points where a duct passes through afire rated wall/floor and a fire damper is being installed, the duct sleeve can be eliminated. D. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Floor Sleeves in Exposed Areas --Schedule 40 PVC pipe, reamed, extending 2" above floor in equipment rooms and wet areas and 1/4" above the floor in all other locations. 2. Masonry Wall Sleeves --Schedule 40 PVC pipe reamed, and finished flush with wall. 3. Gyp Wall Sleeves and Sleeves Through Existing Construction -- Schedule 40 PVC, ends terminating flush with the wall. 4. Roof Sleeves and Floor Sleeves in Concealed Locations (as in chases) --Schedule 40 PVC. 5. Make pipe sleeves 1/2" larger inside diameter than the outside diameter of the pipe or pipe insulation, where insulated. Fabricate sleeves from new materials, with ends cut square. 6. Floor Sleeves, where water is to be kept out --fill with graphite packing and caulking compound. 15050 - 6 7. Exterior Wall Sleeves - Schedule 40 steel pipe reamed, welded flange in the middle of the wall, ends finished flush. Pack void annular space with oakum and lead to provide a water -tight joint or Schedule 40 PVC. 8. Where plastic pipe passes through fire rated shaft walls and fire rated partition walls having a fire rating of 2 hours or more, provide Schedule 40 steel or cast iron pipe sleeve extending 12" or more on each side of wall. E. Duct Sleeves for round ducts up to 12" in diameter: 1. Roof, floor and partitions sleeves --Schedule 40 PVC; terminate flush with wall, or 2" above floor in equipment rooms and wet areas; 1/4" above floor in all other areas. 2. Sleeves through bearing walls --Schedule 40 PVC pipe reamed and finished flush with wall. 3. Make sleeves 1/2" larger inside diameter than the outside diameter of duct. F. Provide prepared openings for rectangular ducts and round ducts over 12" diameter. Furnish exact locations and sizes of boxing forms for these openings in masonry, concrete, and other building construction. Openings shall be 1" larger than outside dimensions of ducts. G. Sealing of all other sleeves shall be as specified under Section for Mechanical Systems Insulation. R Sleeve Flashing, Caulking. For sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe, except as otherwise specified herein, provide 16 oz. soft sheet copper of 4 pound lead per square foot flashing extending 9" beyond sleeve in all directions; secure to waterproofing or lead safe; turn down flashing into space between pipe and sleeve, insert oakum gasket, pour lead, caulk water tight. Over air plenums caulk all sleeves with polysulfite base sealing compound conforming to ASA Al16.1 (Thiokol). 1. Where sleeves are indicated with flashing flanges provide Josam, or equal, 26420 series threaded riser sleeve with anchor lugs, flashing flange, steel pipe extensions. 6. FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES 15050 - 7 A. Plates shall be installed on all exposed pipe passing through walls, floors, or ceilings. Plates shall be as manufactured by Ritter Pattern and Casting — Company, 120 Walker Street, New York, New York 10013, or approved equal, chrome plated steel plates with set screw and concealed hinge. Cut plates to fit flush at close -spaced piping locations. 7. PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS* A. Provide pipe hangers, supports, anchors, and guides as specified herein — and/or indicated, conforming to manufacturer's standardization society specification SP-69. Locate at changes in direction and at concentrated loads. Hanger design shall permit vertical adjustment and lateral movement to allow pipe expansion. Double nut hangers where piping is subject to water hammer, i e. near flush valves and solenoid valves. B. Bear hot piping directly on hangers or on insulation shields and cold piping on insulation, shielded as described under article for insulation. Provide pipe hangers of ample diameter for cold piping insulation and vapor barrier jacket. C. Use carbon steel adjustable hangers as follows: 1. Steel and cast iron, 2 1/2" and larger. Grinnell Fig. 260, Fee and -- Mason Fig. 239, Elcen Fig. 12. 2. Steel, plastic and cast iron, 2" and smaller. Grinnell Fig. 69, Fee and Mason Fig. 400, Elcen Fig. 202. 3. Copper pipe 2" and smaller. Grinnell Fig. CT-69, Fee and Mason Fig. 389, Elcen Fig. 389. D. Three or more pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers using 2 clevis hangers and a capped pipe cross member. Isolate copper pipe from bearing on the cross member with an electrically insulating material 1. Where indicated trapeze hangers shall be "Unistrut" or equal, double channel with drop rods. Where pipes are indicated to be supported from the underside of trapeze hanger provide "Unistrut" or equal speed clamps. Isolate copper pipe from cross member same as specified above. E. Support horizontal steel piping per SP-69 or as follows, whichever is more stringent: 15050 - 8 1.. Pte Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing Up to 1 1/4" 3/8" 8 ft. 1 1/2" to 3 1/2" 1/2" 8 ft. 4" & 5" 5/8" 12 ft. 6" 3/4" 12 ft. F. Support horizontal copper piping per SP-69 or as follows, whichever is more stringent: Nom. Tubing Size Rod Diameter Maximum Snac n Up to 1 1/2" 3/8" 6 ft. 2" to 2 1/2" 3/8" 8 ft. 3" 1/2" 9 ft. G. Support horizontal hub and spigot pipe at every hub, 10 ft. max. spacing. H. Support horizontal hubless cast iron pipe at every joint and at each horizontal branch connection. Sway brace to prevent shear. I. Support plastic every 4 feet. J. Support vertical piping as follows: 1. Steel --Every other floor 2. Cast iron and Copper --Every floor, 10 ft. max intervals 3. Plastic --Every floor plus 5' spacing between floors K In steel framed structures, support pipe hangers from beam clamps, attachments and brackets bolted to steel joists or beams. Use steel washer plates for pipe supported from steel joists, Grinnell Fig. 60, Elcen Fig. 84, Fee and Mason Fig. 91. Hang near joist panel point, where possible. Bolting to steel deck is prohibited. Hang pipes over 5" diameter from more than 1 joist. Absolutely no piping shall be supported directly on the roof joists. L. Hanging from one pipe to another is prohibited. M. Anchor pipe with steel collars or saddles fitted with lugs and bolts, Keflex BA or Adsco. Install anchor braces and turnbuckles as required for stability. Attachment in a manner injurious to the structure is prohibited. PIPING INSTALLATION A. General 15050 - 9 conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provision of -. paragraph 4.3. of the General Conditions. 6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, _ examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between -- OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the definition of "Contract Documents" in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions, and such other items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. 7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are not limited to, the following: 7.2.1Certificate of Substantial Completion 7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance 7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases 7.2.4 Consent of Surety 7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate _ 7.2. 6 Application for Payment 7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as follows: AA1-Floor Plan Foundation Plan, AA2-Reflected Ceiling Plan, Roof Framing Plan, Roofing Plan, AA3-Exterior Elevations, Wall sections, AA4-Wall Section, Door - Elevations, Window Elevations, Interior Elevations, M7-Mechanical Plan and Schedules, El -Electrical Floor Plans. The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and dated. Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated. 7.4. Addenda Numbers NA to NA, inclusive. 7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 4 certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance reasonably request requested by OWNER) which CONTRACTOR ead 04144ER respeetimly ar is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with paragraphs 5.4, ` . . Preconstruction Conference: 2.8. Within twenty days after the Contract Times start to run, but before any Work at the site is started, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in paragraph 2.6, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals processing Applications for Payment and maintaining required records. Initially Acceptable Schedules: 2.9. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, at least ten days befbre submission ef the fir-s before any work at the site begins, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as appropriate designated by OWNER will be held to review for acceptability to ENGINEER as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.6. and Division 1 - General Requirements. CONTRACTOR shall have an additional ten days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until the schedules are submitted to and acceptable to ENGINEER as provided below. The progress schedule will be acceptable to ENGINEER as providing an orderly progression of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and the Contract Times, but such acceptance will neither impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the sequencing, scheduling or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTORS full responsibility therefor. CONTRACTORS schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submissions will be acceptable to ENGINEER as providing a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals CONTRACTORs schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE Intent: 3.1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with the law of the place of the Project. 3.2. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in paragraph 9.4. 3.3. Reference to Standards and Specifications of Technical Societies, Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies. 3.3.1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard, specification, manual, code or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 3.3.2. If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any -- instruction of any Supplier referred to in paragraph 6.5, CONTRACTOR shall report it to ENGINEER in - writing at once, and, CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as authorized by paragraph 6.23) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.5 or 3.6; provided, however, that CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should have — known thereof. 3.3.3. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents or as may be provided by amendment or supplement thereto issued by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.5 or 3.6, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: 3.3.3.1. the provisions of any such standard, _ specification, manual, code or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or _ EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 1. Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are nominal pipe sizes, not outside diameters. Use straight round pipe reamed to full size after cutting. Remove all chips from reaming. 2. Arrange pipe in group runs where feasible. Coordinate locations with all trades. Avoid traps in piping. 3. The right is reserved to authorize minor changes in pipe location to avoid conflicts with other trades at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Waste and Vent Piping 1. All waste and vent piping shall be properly pitched at 1/4 inch to the foot (or 2%) minimum for 4" and smaller pipe and 1/8 inch (or '- 1%) minimum for 5 inch and larger, unless otherwise indicated. Piping shall be properly supported so that it will not sag and form pockets. Exceptions must be approved in writing by the Engineer, _ Owner and by the Administrative Authority. 2. The manufacturer's recommendations shall be carefully followed when installing pipe using neoprene gasketed joints. 3. Locate vertical hubs of underground piping below partition walls for conceahnent. In locations where hubs will project beyond finish partition wall, set hubs V below finished floor. 4. All waste pipe underground outside of building shall be buried a minimum of 3'6" deep. C. Domestic Water Distribution Piping 1. All unnecessary traps in circulating limes shall be avoided. 2. All water pipe underground outside of building shall be buried a minimum of 5'-0" deep. Where waste and water piping is run in the same trench, installation shall conform to all governing codes. D. Gas Piping (Natural) 1. All gas piping shall be installed with plugged drip pockets at low points. Pipe shall be extended as shown on the plans to all gas -- equipment in building. The entire gas piping installation shall be in _ accordance with the latest requirements of the AGA and NBFU. 15050 - 10 2. Valves or cocks and unions shall be installed on inlet pipe to all equipment, including safety valves where required or noted to be installed. 9. EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A Excavation. Trenches for all underground pipe lines shall not be carried below the required depths except as necessary for special pipe bedding or to remove unstable soil or rock. Furnish and backfill with thoroughly compacted sand -gravel mixtures or excavated materials approved by the Engineer's representative, all excess excavation below required levels. Rock will be encountered and shall be excavated to allow for 6" granular bed between bottom ofpipe and rock. B. Trench Preparation. The bottom of the trench shall be accurately graded and shaped to fit the lower 1/4 circumference so as to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe except where necessary to excavate for pipe jointing. Where pipe elevations run below the granular fill in to natural soil, provide a minimum of six (6) inches of granular material below the pipe, granular material equal to material specified above. C. Shoring and sheeting required to protect the trench construction, adjacent buildings and property, as well as the safety of employees and the public, shall be constructed all in accordance with ' local, state, or federal safety regulations that apply or as specified herein. 1. The side of trenches in hard compact material five (5) feet or more in depth and eight (8) feet or more in length shall be securely held by shoring and bracing or sloped to the angle of repose of the material being excavated. 2. The sides of the trenches four (4) feet or more in depth in partly saturated, filled or unstable soil, or where running material is encountered, such as quicksand, loose gravel, loose shale, or completely saturated material, shall be secured by the use of continuous vertical sheet piping and suitable braces. Wooden sheet piling shall be not less than two (2) inches in thickness. 3. One horizontal cross brace, strut or trench jack, shall be fiunished for each four (4) feet in depth or major fraction thereof 4. All sheeting in areas that are unstable shall be left in place as directed by the Architect -Engineer, and shall be cut off 1-foot above the top of the pipe in these areas. Sheeting shall not be 15050 - 11 removed until the trench is substantially backfilled. Any sheeting left in place shalt be included in the hung sum price of this Contract. D. Grading and Stacking. All grading in the vicinity of trench excavations shall be controlled to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches. ~' Any water accumulated in the trenches shall be removed by pumping or by - other approved methods. During excavation, materials suitable for backfilling shall be stacked in an orderly manner a sufficient distance back from edges of trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins. E. Crossing Protection. Provide adequate temporary crossovers for -' pedestrian and vehicular traffic, including guard rails, lamps, flags, as directed; remove same when necessary for such protection ceases. F. Backfilling. After pipe limes have been tested, inspected and approved by the Architect -Engineer, and prior to backfilling, all forms shall be removed and the excavation shall be cleaned of all trash and debris. Material for backfilling shall consist of the excavated granular material, or borrow equal to that specified above, and shall be free of trash, lumber, or other debris. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers, not exceeding nine (9) inches in thickness. Moisten and hand or machine compact to 95% of standard proctor density. Bring fill to elevations indicated. If backfill fails the proctor density test, conducted by an independent testing laboratory retained by the Owner, Contractor shall recompact and retest until satisfactory density is reached. First backfill layer shall be coarse sand to 6" above top of pipe. G. Restoration of Area. All areas disturbed by the Mechanical Contractor — shall be restored to their original condition unless otherwise indicated. 1. Replace pavement, curbs, sidewalks, other appurtenances removed or damaged in connection with work and restore to original conditions, unless otherwise directed. 2. When work is in public highway or street, paving repairs shall be equal to and comply with municipal agency requirements. If repairs are done by municipal agency, make necessary arrangement with such agency to make the repairs. Contractor shall include cost for permits, inspection fees, work, etc., in Mechanical Bid. 10. DISINFECTINGAND SPECIAL CLEANING A. When a new system is indicated to be connected to an existing system, isolate the new system for cleaning and flushing if applicable. Reaming chips must be removed by flushing, cleaning strainers, etc. 15050. 12 B. Domestic Water Systems 1. General: All new potable water systems shall be cleaned as herein specified prior to testing or application of insulation. Testing must be witnessed by the State Department of Health personnel and report filed with the Owner to receive final payment. 2. Notification: Notify State Department of Health in writing, 48 hours in advance of the beginning of the cleaning process. 3. Witness: The cleaning process will not be deemed acceptable unless witnessed and approved by the State Department of Health's representative. 4. Procedure: Comply with City of Fort Collins standards or Colorado State Department of Health requirements, whichever is more stringent. 5. Report: The report shall contain the following and be submitted to the Owner's Project Manager within 24 hours of the cleaning: - Date, time and place of cleaning - Duration - Person responsible - Solutions concentration and temperature - Signature of State Department of Health representative - Results 6. The report and its timely submission shall be required for final payment. C. Ductwork Systems 1. As the system of ductwork, supplying air to the building is put into service in whole or in part, provide 1" or 2" pleated filters at fan intake to keep the mechanical system and the building clean. 11. ELECTRICAL A. Electric Motors. 1. Provide electric motors with all equipment furnished and installed under Division 15, unless specified otherwise. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers 15050 - 13 ru a. G.E. b. U.S. Motors C. MagneTek (Century) 3. Include the following features on all motors: a. Ball bearings with lube limes extended to accessible location. b. Cast iron or steel base with provision for slide adjustment unless directed otherwise. C. Conduit box with ample room for lead terminal connections. d. Numbered leads of ample length for connection, terminating in the conduit box. e. Permanently stamped nameplate. £ Single speed 1750 RPM, unless specified otherwise. g. Rated for continuous duty in ambient not exceeding 40 degrees C. 4. All motor wiring and windings shall be copper. 5. Power Factor a. Motors shall have a labeled power factor, at name plate rating and rated voltage, of not less than 85%. If a motor draws less than 1000 watts labeled rating, it is excluded from the 85% P.F. requirement. If, through motor or design (i.e. RPM less than 1200), an 95% power factor is not available, the supplier of that motor shall furnish power factor correction components capable of correcting that non -conforming motor to 90% or better. 6. Horsepower ratings -- in V-belt drive applications, size motor for 120 percent of brake horsepower requirement, or scheduled horsepower, whichever is greater. 7. Single phase motors— furnish for all applications 1/6 through 3/4 HP, single phase, capacitor start, capacitor run, dripproot thermally protected motors, unless indicated otherwise, for 120 volt 60 hertz current. V-Belt Drives 15050 - 14 1. Capacity of V-Belt Drives at rated RPM shall be not less than 150 percent of motor nameplate horsepower rating. C. Unit manufacturer shall provide belt guard. D. Motor starters will be provided under Division 15, Mechanical, as specified below. 1. Starters shall be across -the -line, with manual reset, trip -free thermal overload relay in each ungrounded conductor, necessary auxiliary contacts, proper NEMA Standard enclosure for location, and hand- off -automatic switches in cover. Provide manual motor starters for locally controlled single phase motors. For single phase motors which are interlocked with external devices provide H-O-A magnetic starters or relay and switch rated at locked rotor motor amps and manual starter. Starters, except those furnished mounted in or on equipment, shall be by the same one of the following manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley b. Cutler Hammer C. Square D E. Electrical wiring, except where otherwise specified in Division 15, will be provided under Division 16, Electrical Work. 1. Electrical wiring provided under Division 15 of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable requirements of Division 16, Electrical Work. 2. Control Witzn¢: Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contactors, starters, relays, etc., and wiring for valve and damper operators. 3. For single-phase devices where power current passes through controller and device, wiring shall be considered power wiring. F. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls for Division 15 equipment shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule: Set In Power Control Furnished Place Wiring Wiring Under Under Under Under ITEM Division Division Division Division Equipment Motors 15 15 16 = 15050 - 15 Starters/Contactors: Separate 15 16 16 15 Factory Mounted and Wired 15 15 16 15 Pushbutton Stations: Separate 15 16 - 15 In Starter Enclosure 15 16 - 15 Disconnect Switches 16 16 16 - Set In Power Control Furnished Place Wiring Wiring Under Under Under Under 1TEM Divion Division Division Division Thermal Overload Switches 16 16 16 - . Control Relays 15 15 - 15 Control Transformers 15 16 16 15 Operating Switches 16 16 16 - Line Voltage Thermostat 15 15 - 15 Low Voltage Thermostat 15 15 - 15 Sub -Base Low Voltage 15 15 - 15 Time Switches Not In Control Panel 15 15 16 15 Thermostat and Controls Integral with Equipment of Directly Attached to Ducts, Pipes, etc. 15 15 - 15 Equipment in Temperature Control Panels 15 15 - 15 Valve Motors, Damper Motors, Solenoid Valves, etc. 15 15 - 15 Control Circuit Outlets 16 16 16 - 15050 - 16 Smoke Detectors Including Relays for Fan Control 16 15 16 15 Equipment Interlocks 15 15 - 15 END OF SECTION 15050 - 17 No Text SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including references to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. 2. SCOPE OF THE WORK A. The work involved in this section of the specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, accessories and materials and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of all insulation for the plumbing and duct systems, and sealing of sleeves. B. All insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled workmen engaged in this type of work. 3. MATERIALS* A. All insulations shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings not exceeding the following unless otherwise specified: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 Insulation on all cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used shall be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal (hangers on outside of insulation jacket). 2. Support inserts for cold water piping shall be installed at all outside hanger points. Inserts between the pipe and pipe hangers shall consist of wood or rigid insulation sections of equal thickness of the pipe insulation. 3. Inserts shall be installed in a manner to completely support the pipe and not crush the insulation or damage the vapor barrier. 4. Hangers, supports, anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces must be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. B. Material Approval Code 15250 - 1 3.3.3.2. the provisions of any such Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). own risk. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, code or instruction shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to OWNER, ENGINEER or any of ENGINEER's Consultants, agents or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of paragraph 9.13 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. 3.4. Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as allowed", "as approved" or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "proper" or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe a requirement, direction, review or judgment of ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to evaluate, in general, the completed Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.13 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents. 3.5. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: 3.5.1. a formal Written Amendment, 3.5.2. a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.4), or EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 3.5.3. a Work Change Directive (pursuant to paragraph 10.1). 3.6. In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, in one or more of the following ways: 3.6.1. A Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5), 3.6.2. ENGINEER's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27), or 3.6.3. ENGINEER's written interpretation or clarification (pursuant to paragraph 9.4). Reuse of Documents. 3.7. CONTRACTOR, and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER (i) shall not have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant, and (ii) shall not reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents or copies on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written verification or adaptation by ENGINEER. ARTICLE 4—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS Availability of Lands: 4.1. OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR. OWNER shall furr�ish CONTRACTOR with a eeffee lands ::pc which the ofk to be er fe.....e.l ... ,1 it \7 of or filing a m__hanic's lien againsth lands u. OWNER shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which CONTRACTOR will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. I£ CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustments in the Contract Price or the Contract Times as a result of any delay in OWNER's furnishing these lands, rights -of - way or easements, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. 4. I . Code I Fiberglass Pipe Insulation a. Owens-Corning One or Two Piece Pipe Insulation i. Fiberglass 25 ASJ - All service jacket ii. Fiberglass 25 ASJ - SSL - All service jacket b. Schuller Flame Safe Pipe Insulation i. All purpose jacket - AP ii. All purpose jacket - AP self-sealing lap system C. Certain -Teed Manson Fiberglass Pipe Insulation i. All service jacket d. Or Equal by Knauf 2. Code II One Piece PVC Insulated Fitting Covers a. Zeston b. Perma-Jac C. Proto LoSmoke d. Or prior approved equal 3. Code VIII Plastic Pipe Insulation a. Insulation shall not exceed the following fire hazard ratings: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed (3/4") 225 b. For service - 40 degrees F. to 200 degrees F. C. Armstrong FR Armaflex d. Or Equal by IMCOA or Nomaco C. Vapor barrier to be kraft paper reinforced foil with integral self-sealing pressure sensitive adhesive longitudinal seam sealing strips. Insulation maximum thermal conductivity shall be .25 at 75 deg. F per inch. No staples shall be used. COLD PIPING A. Domestic Cold Water: All piping in concealed and exposed areas shall be insulated with fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jacket or grades mentioned in Code I. Thickness shall conform to the following schedule: Service & Size Insulation Thickness 15250 - 2 Domestic Cold Water: 1" and smaller 1/2" 1-1/4" and larger 1" B. Piping in cores of block wall may be insulated with Code VHI insulation, thickness as above. C. Jackets and end laps shall be sealed with Chicago mastic 17-465, or equal, applied to two surfaces or with self-sealing type lap system. 5. HOT PIPING A. All piping in concealed and exposed areas shall be insulated with fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jacket of grades mentioned in Code I. Thickness shall conform to the following schedule: Service and Size Insulation Thickness Domestic Hot Water & Recirc: 2" and less 1" B. Piping in cores of block wall may be insulated with Code VIII insulation, thickness as above. C. Jackets and end laps shall be sealed with Chicago mastic 17-465, or equal, applied to two surfaces or with self-sealing type lap system. 6. FITTINGS, VALVE BODIES AND FLANGES A. PVC insulated fitting covers as mentioned in Code II. The pre-cut insulation shall be applied to the fitting to make a snug fit of equal thickness against the adjoining pipe insulation. The fitting covers shall be secured by vapor barrier adhesive. 2. On cold services all seam edges shall be additionally sealed with vapor barrier adhesive. 7. SHIELDS A. Provide sheet metal insulation shields at all hanger locations for cold services. Form the shields to bear on the lower 1/3 periphery of the insulated pipe. Use 20 gauge sheet metal for pipes less than 4", 16 gauge for larger pipes. Comply with the following table for shield length: Pipe Size Len h 4" and smaller 9" 6" to 10" 12" 8. SEALING OF SLEEVES A. All sleeves for pipes, ductwork, etc., furnished under Division 15 of the specifications, penetrating floors, and walls and full height partitions shall be sealed in accordance with the following: _ 1. All insulated services shall have the specified insulation terminated on either side of sleeve. Services which require a vapor barrier jacket shall have segment through sleeve insulated with calcium - silicate having a minimum thickness same as specified for service. Entire void space between inside of sleeve and outside of duct, pipe, and/or calcium- silicate insulation shall be packed with fiber insulation, conforming to HHI-521E Type 3 or HHI-558B Form A and having an ASTM fire class E-84 with fiber melt point in excess of 2000 deg. F., to a point 1/8 inch from ends of pipe sleeve. After void is packed with fiber insulation, services which are specified to be insulated shall have a section of insulation installed on each side of sleeve, insulation to be fitted tight to sleeve insulation. Balance of space in sleeve to be filled with non - hardening silicone conforming to TTS-00230 and of type which -' will allow 50 percent movement in one direction. 9. DUCTWORK A. External wrap (thermal) (concealed round ducts): 1. Insulation: Fiberglass blanket, 1 lb. density, vapor barrier jacketed with 2" tab. Jacket - laminated aluminum foil, glass reinforced kraft paper. 2. Application: Secure to metal leaving no voids at the edges, with strips of insulation adhesive. Lap all joints 2", seal with lap adhesive and staple 6" on center. Seal over staple with matching tape patches. Further secure the bottom side insulation on ducts over 24" wide with welded pins and mechanical fasteners, not over 18" on center and seal over with tape matching patches. 3. Do not install insulation over access panels. B. Internal liner (sound) (rectangular ducts): 1. Insulation: All internal insulation shall have black fire resistant skin surface and edge coating. Liner shall have overall density of 15250 - 4 1.50 pounds per cubic foot. Installation shall meet NFPA 90A and 90B fire resistant requirements, and SMACNA standards. Liner shall have a noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of 0.65 for a type "A" mounting. 2. Application: Apply the insulation in fabricated pieces sized to the interior duct surfaces with the black coated or denser surface exposed to the air stream. Insulation shall be firmly held in place with B.F. 85-10 or 85-60, C.M.C. 17-477, I-C 225 fire resistant adhesive covering no less than 100 percent of the duct surface. Further secure insulation on the top and sides of horizontal ducts and all sides of vertical ducts with Omark or KSM capacitor discharge studs and caps on 15" centers. Coat exposed longitudinal edges of insulation with a heavy layer of B.F. 60-30, C.M.C. 17-477, or I-C 102 fire resistant mastic prior to installation in the ductwork. Secure transverse edges with capacitor discharge studs and caps on 6 inch centers and coat caps and entire joint with the same mastic as for longitudinal edges. 3. Duct sizes indicated on the drawings are the clear, inside dimensions. Where insulation is applied to the inside of the ducts, the metal size of the duct shall be increased by 2 inches to result in internal dimensions equal to that shown on the drawings. 4. Where sound insulation is specified for ducts which require thermal insulation, the thermal insulation may be omitted on the outside of the sound insulated ductwork. Exception is rectangular SA ducts in unconditioned attics shall be wrapped in addition to duct liner. C. Insulation shall be in accordance to the following schedule for new ducts: Ductwork Insulation Insulation Type Type Thickness Supply Internal/External III Return Internal III Exhaust None N/A 10. EXTERIOR PIPING 15250 - 5 A. Cover all insulation exposed to weather with Childers Crimped Aluminum .016 jacket with moisture barrier. Attach to insulation with aluminum banding and seals. Seal minimum V lapped joints along seam and at ends with bead of silicon caulking. END OF SECTION 15250 - 6 SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including references to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. 2. SCOPE OF WORK A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists of performing all calculations, piping design, sprinkler head layout, fiunishing of all material and equipment, and labor necessary to install all complete systems listed below, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and operating installation. This system starts at the point of connection to the water service 5 feet outside of the building or as otherwise indicated on the plans. 1. Automatic sprinkler system, including remodeling of existing system. B. Work involved with remodeling existing system shall be done in accordance with this specification, accompanying drawings, and NFPA-13. Provide new sprinkler heads in all locations where existing head layout is altered. Verify existing piping arrangement, conditions, and locations at site before beginning fabrication. Alert Engineer's office of any substantial differences between actual existing installation and that indicated on drawings before proceeding with work. 3. SIAMESE FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS* A. Siamese connections shall be Croker Fire Equipment No. 6010, or equal, with clapper valve, FM approval, brass finish. Threads shall be identical to those used in the city in which system is being installed and shall meet requirements of local fire department. 2-1/2" x 21/2" x 4" with cast brass plugs and chains. Siamese connection for sprinkler system shall have a 4" underwriter's swing check valve with ball drip; extend drain from ball drip to location indicated. Brand "Auto Sprinkler". 4. FLOW ALARMS AND SUPERVISORY VALVE SWITCH* A. now alarms shall be Autocall Type WF, Potter Model VSR, Grinnell E-1, or approved equal, DPST flow alarms with suitable adjustable retards. Flow alarms shall be suitable for 120 volt operation. Factory Mutual (FM) approved and UL listed. 15300 - 1 B. Provide a UL approved switch for main sprinkler valve(s) where indicated. Switch shall give alarm indication when main valve is closed. Switch shall be suitable for 120 volt operation. C. Alarm indication and wiring for the above will be provided under Division -� 16. 5. SPRINKLER SYSTEM* A. Automatic sprinkler system shall be designed by the Contractor for hazard indicated. Entire system shall be in accordance with NFPA and as specified -- herein and/or indicated. Contractor is herein given the option of sizing sprinkler system per pipe sizing tables in NFPA-13 or by the hydraulic method. 1. Contractor is responsible for obtaining all necessary flow tests at site required for hydraulic calculations. B. Hydraulic design methods shall conform to the methods outlined in NFPA No. 13 and shall provide for pipe sizes such that not more than a 10 percent variation will occur in sprinkler discharge. Hazen and Williams formula with C=120 shall be used in hydraulic calculations, and additional requirements specified herein. Design conditions shall be based on the most remote 1,500 square feet for each zone. Except where otherwise indicated, design shall be light hazard with a design density of 0.10 GPM per square foot, or as determined by the authority having jurisdiction. C. Prior to starting fabrication or installation of sprinkler system, Contractor shall submit detailed 1/8 inch scale (mininmrm) shop drawings, stamped reviewed by agency having jurisdiction, to Architect/Engineer for review and approval At time of completion of work, obtain certificate of inspection and approval from same agency. " D. Approved manufacturer: 1. Viking Sprinkler Corporation 2. Grinnell Company, Inc. 3. The Automatic Sprinkler Corporation of America 4. Grimes Company 5. Approved equal selected from "List of Inspected Fire Protection ^ Equipment and Materials" published annually by Factory Mutual Engineering and U.L., and shall bear U.L approved stamp or label - - E. In rooms and/or spaces where sprinkler head locations are not indicated, Contractor shall locate sprinkler heads to avoid conflicts with other pieces of equipment, such as lights, speakers, diffusers, etc. located in ceiling. Consult Architectural, Mechanical, or Electrical plans carefully to avoid conflicts. F. System shall be provided complete with water supply connection, sprinklers, all piping, fittings, valves, seals, test connections, hangers, supports, sleeves, escutcheons, drain valves, test connections, signs, diagrams, etc., all as required for a complete and operating system. Provide drain valves at all low points. G. Fire Sprinklers: 1. All sprinklers shall be automatic closed spray type sprinkler heads of ordinary degree temperature rating except where excess temperatures are anticipated, heads shall be of higher rating. 2. Sprinkler heads installed in areas which do not have suspended ceilings shall be of brass upright type. Sprinklers shall be installed with consideration being given to all ductwork, piping, etc., and heads shall be located above and/or below ductwork as required by NFPA Standards. 3. Sprinkler heads installed in areas which have suspended ceilings as indicated on the plans, except as otherwise specified herein, shall be of the concealed sprinkler type with flat white cover plate. 4. Side wall sprinkler heads indicated shall be sidewall chrome plated with chrome plated flat type escutcheon plate. 5. Provide stock of spare heads, of each type installed, packed in a suitable cabinet. Number of each type of spare heads to be provided shall be as indicated in NFPA 13. The cabinet shall contain at least two sprinkler head wrenches. 6. Upright sprinklers which are so located as to be subject to mechanical injury shall be protected with approved guards. 6. BACKFLOW PREVENTER* A. Shall be double check type. B. Two independent "Y" type spring loaded ductile check valves, two OS&Y shut-off valves and four test cocks. C. With stainless steel center -guided checks with soft elastomer discs for drip right closure against backflow. 15300 - 3 D. UL listed for fire line service. E. With bypass lime assembly with water meter in service with another double check valve, to detect flow between 1 and 20 GPM. F. Backflow preventer to be full line size. G. Febco Model 806 YD DCDA, or Ames Model 3000 SS. If. Or prior approved equal 7. REVIEW AND APPROVAL A. All drawings and sprinkler calculations are subject to Insurance Services Offices and/or Poudre Fire Authority review and approval as well as the Architect/Engineer's before installation. END OF SECTION _ 15300 - 4 SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including references to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. 2. SCOPE OF THE WORK A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and equipment necessary to install all complete systems listed below, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and operating installation. Sanitary Drainage System Domestic Water System Plumbing Fixtures Natural Gas System 3. CONNECTIONS TO MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Make all domestic water, waste, vent, drain, air, gas, etc., connections to all equipment in this building whether or not such equipment is furnished under this section or under other sections of this specification. This includes installation, furnishing piping and shut-off valves on branches to and from each piece of equipment from mains or branch mains. 4. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: At completion clean strainers, traps, aerators, and valves of debris, sand and dirt. Thoroughly clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. B. Adjusting: Adjust flush valves, faucets, and bubblers for proper flow, after cleaning and flushing operations are accomplished. 5. PROTECTION A. Protect fixtures and related components from damage before, during and after installation to date of Final Acceptance or Owner move -in. Provide protective coverings or other protection as required. 6. SANITARY SEWER SERVICE 15440 - 1 CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.2. Subsurface and Physical Conditions: 4.2.1. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: 4.2.1.1. Subsurface Conditions: Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents; and 4.2.1.2. Physical Conditions: Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except Underground Facilities) that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents. 4.2.2. Limited Reliance by CONTRACTOR Authorized, - Technical Data: CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data", CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any claim against OWNER, ENGINEER or any of ENGINEER's Consultants with respect to: 4.2.2.1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or 4.2.2.2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings, or 4.2.2.3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such data, interpretations, opinions or information. 4.2.3. Notice of Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions: If CONTRACTOR believes that any subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site that is uncovered or revealed either: 4.2.3.1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraphs 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 is materially inaccurate, or 4.2.3.2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents, or 4.2.3.3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or 4.2.3.4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then CONTRACTOR shall, promptly immediately after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as permitted by paragraph 6.23), notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing about such condition. CONTRACTOR shall not further disturb such conditions or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. 4.2.4. ENGINEER's Review: ENGINEER will promptly review the pertinent conditions, determine the necessity of OWNER's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto and advise OWNER in writing (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER's findings and conclusions. 4.2.5. Possible Contract Documents Change: If ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required as a result of a condition that meets one or more of the categories in paragraph 4.2.3, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document the consequences of such change. 4.2.6. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: An equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or in the Contract Times, or both, will be allowed to the extent that the existence of such uncovered or revealed condition causes an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time required for performance of, the Work; subject, however, to the following: 4.2.6.1. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in paragraphs 4.2.3.1 through 4.2.3.4,inclusive; 4.2.6.2. a change in the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraph 4.2.5 will not be an automatic authorization of nor a condition precedent to entitlement to any such adjustment; 4.2.6.3. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.10 and 11.9; and 4.2.6.4. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Times if; 4.2.6.4.1. CONTRACTOR knew of the existence of such conditions at the time CONTRACTOR made a final commitment to OWNER in respect of Contract Price and Contract Times by the EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) A. Provide new sewer service(s) as indicated on the plans. Provide minimum 3'6" cover over sewer line(s) outside of building. Provide main clean -out where sewer(s) leaves building as indicated on the plans. See Section 15050 paragraph labeled "Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling." B. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the service installation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc. C. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including street and sidewalk repair, permits, etc., in his bid. 7. NATURAL GAS SERVICE A. Make all arrangements with the local gas company for the installation of the gas service, including meter installation. If the gas service and/or _ meter is furnished and installed by the Gas Company, make all arrangements and include all costs for permits, street repair, utility company cost, etc., in bid form. Provide main gas shut-off just outside of building. B. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the service installation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc. - 8. WATER SERVICE A. Provide new water service as indicated on the plans. Provide minimum 5'- 0" cover over water line outside of building. Provide new water meter, size as indicated on the plan. If meter is furnished by City Water Department, make all arrangements with Water Department. Manufacturer, type, and installation of water meter shall be in accordance with Water Department requirements. B. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the service �- installation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc. C. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including street and sidewalk repair, permits, etc., in his bid. 9. CLEANOUTS* 15440 - 2 A. Provide cleanouts as manufactured by Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade, or Zum. Cleanouts shall be full line size through 4" pipe. B. Inside caulk or spigot connections, bronze cleanout plug, straight threaded with tapered shoulder and caulked lead seat. Plugs shall be removed, doped, and reinstalled just tight enough to prevent leakage. C. Screwed pipe cleanouts-bronze pipe threaded plug with four raised square lugs or counter sunk plug. D. Floor cleanouts (FCO)--frame and cover threaded for 1 1/2" vertical adjustment, threads protected with shield to be removed when concrete is set. Covers --nickel bronze round frame and cover, deep flange tractor type. Extra heavy type in heavy traffic areas, and with carpet retainer top for carpeted floors. E. Wall cleanouts (WCO)--square nickel bronze frame and cover with minimum opening of 6" x 6". F. Grade Cleanouts (GCO) --cast iron cleanout with round, heavy duty scoriated, non -tilt cast iron top, adjustable to finished grade level. Set GCO in 2'x2'x4" deep concrete pad, minimum. G. Cleanouts in floors shall be located as shown on plans and at changes in direction of pipe run and shall consist of 'Y' fittings and eighth bends. Cleanouts shall be provided at the base of all vertical stacks with the cleanout plug located approximately 12 inches above the floor and extended to wall access cover. Cleanouts in horizontal runs above ground shall consists of 'Y' fittings with cleanout plugs. CLEANOUTS MUST BE PROVIDED IN EVERY 100 FT. OF HORIZONTAL RUN, and as per the Uniform Plumbing Code. Cleanouts in carpeted floors should be avoided if at all possible. Use wall C.O.'s or C.O.'s in adjacent floors not carpeted. 10. TRENCH DRAINS (TD-1)* A. Provide trench drains of type specified herein. Sizes and locations shall be as indicated. Drain specified herein are Zurn. Josam, ACO meeting specifications will be acceptable. B. Trench drain shall be Zurn Z-886, 6" wide pre -sloped trench drainage system. High density polyethylene structural composite drain channel with 0.75% bottom slope. Combination tie down/Leveling devices at 20" intervals. Center, bottom outlet. Heavy duty Dura-Coated cast iron grate. 11. FLOOR SINK* 15440 - 3 A. Floor sink FS-1 shall be epoxy or porcelain coated cast iron, acid resisting, 12" X 12", acid resisting anti -splash dome strainer, loose set grate (acid _ resisting), 8" deep, 3" inside caulk bottom outlet, Zum Z-1901 or equivalent. 12. VENTS THROUGH ROOF A. Flash vents through roof with galvanized roof jack with neoprene gasket at neck. Oakey 11853, no -caulk roof flashing, size as required. Do not install vents within two feet of roof edge, parapet or wall line of an "on - the -roof structure." 13. SHOCK ABSORBERS* A. Shock absorbers shall be furnished and installed at all solenoids and other ^ quick closing valves and flush valves. Provide and install access doors for all shock absorbers. Each shock absorber shall have a shut-off ball valve for replacement. Shock absorbers shall be the gas filled stainless steel bellows type, sized and installed per requirements of PDI-WH-201. Josam, Smith, Wade or Zurn. 14. BACKFLOW PREVENTER* A. Shall be the reduced pressure type with atmospheric vent. B. Bronze body and accessory construction and replaceable seats. C. Bronze body ball valve test cocks and 1/4 turn ball valves on inlet and outlet. D. With bronze strainer, flanged adapter ends or unions, and air gap fitting. E. Manufacturer and model: 1. Watts Model 909, all sizes 2. Febco 825, 3/4" to 2" 3. Febco 860, larger than 2" 4. Or prior approved equal 15. SAND INTERCEPTOR* A. Unit shall be pre -cast concrete, as manufactured by Copeland Enterprises, _ Inc., 904 S. Lipan, Denver, CO 80223, Phone No. 936-4817, Front Range Precast Concrete or approved equal. Size as shown on plans. OR 15440 - 4 Cast in place, by GC. B. Unit shall be reinforced with 6x6, 10/10 mesh and 3- No. 4 horizontal re - bar in walls and floor. C. Lid 1. Checker plate, flush with finished floor, screw anchors at each corner. D. Backfill 1. Back fill within 2 feet of interceptor shall be free from rocks and lumps. Dispose of excavated material promptly. 16. GAS FIRED WATER HEATER* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith 2. Rudd 3. Rheem 4. State 5. Prior approved equal B. Provide where indicated, domestic water heaters with capacities and characteristics as scheduled on the plans. Shall meet ASHRAE Standard 90.1b-1992 for energy efficiency, and ASME construction and label, 150 psi maximum hydrostatic working pressure. 5 year limited warranty. C. Heater shall be natural gas fired, certified by the AGA. Tank shall be glass lined, certified for a maximum working pressure of 150 PSI. Assembly shall include P/T rated relief valve, anode rod, self contained control valve with safety gas shut-off, polyurethane insulation, sheet metal jacket with baked enamel finish and drain valve. 17. PLUMBING FIXTURE TYPES* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Vitreous china fixtures, water closets, urinals, and lays: a. American Standard b. Crane 15440 - 5 C. Kohler d. Prior approved equal 2. Electric Water Coolers or Drinking Fountains: a. Elkay b. Haws C. Prior approved equal 3. Emergency Eyewash/Showers:: a. Bradley b. Fisher Scientific C. Guardian d. Haws e. Prior approved equal 4. Faucets: a. American Standard b. Chicago C. Delta d. Elkay e. Kohler f. Moen g. Prior approved equal 5. Flush valves: a. Sloan b. Prior approved equal 6. Mop Sinks: a. Fiat b. Stern Williams C. Prior approved equal 7. Stainless steel sinks: a. Elkay b. Just C. Prior approved equal 15440 - 6 8. Toilet seats: a. Bemis b. Beneke C. Olsonite d. Prior approved equal 9. Wall Hydrants, Yard Hydrants, and Hose Bibbs: a. Josam b. Wade C. Woodford d. Zurn e. Prior approved equal B. Furnish faucets, stop valves and traps for all fixtures and equipment. C. The exposed flush, waste, and supply pipes at the fixtures shall be chromium plated brass pipe, iron pipe size. Fittings and traps for brass pipe shall be cast brass, chromium plated. D. Install chromium -plated brass wall or floor plates where piping passes through walls or floors. E. Where reference is made to chromium -plated brass, same shall mean polished brass, first nickel plated and finished with chromium plate. F. All lavatories and sinks shall be furnished with 3/8" S.P.S. flexible tube supply pipes, key stops and escutcheons, unless specified otherwise. G. All lavatories shall be furnished with 1 1/4" tailpiece, cast brass chrome plated 'P' trap, 20 gauge tubing waste to wall and wall escutcheons, unless otherwise specified. H. All sinks shall be furnished with 1 1/2" tailpiece, cast brass chrome plated 'P' trap, 17 gauge tubing waste to wall and wall escutcheons, unless otherwise specified. All fixtures fitted to the walls or floor shall be ground square and true and be sealed with mildew resistant non -hardening clear or white silicon bead, with Engineer's approval. J. Fixture Mounting Heights: Mount fixtures to the following heights above finish floor: Electric Water Cooler or Drinking Fountain: a. Standard 42 inches to top of spout b. Handicapped 36 inches to top of spout maximum 15440 - 7 2. Hose Bibbs: a. Standard 48 inches to outlet 3. Lavatory: a. Standard 31 inches to top of basin rim b. Handicapped 33 inches to top of basin rim 4. Urinal: a. Standard 22 inches to top of bowl rim b. Handicapped 17 inches to top of bowl rim 5. Water Closet: a. Standard 14 inches to top of bowl rim b. Handicapped 17 - 19 inches to top of seat 6. Wall Hydrants: a. Standard 24 inches to outlet K. Wall hung fixtures from concrete block shall be supported by wall hangers and fixtures hung from stud partition walls shall have internal wall carriers (submit shop drawings for review) as manufactured by Josam, Wade, Zurn or approved equal. Install per Architectural Specifications. L. Coordinate all fixture rough -ins with masonry contractor. M. The following schedule establishes the standards to which each type of fixture must conform and the plumbing fixture portfolios shall completely illustrate and describe each type. Refer to the drawings for exact quantities. EWC-1 Electric Water Cooler (Wall Hung, Handicapped)* Fixture: Haws HWBFABL handicapped accessible wall -mounted 12.7 gph water cooler with self -closing valve with front and side pushbutton, automatic stream regulation, 1-1/4" OD tailpiece. Color selected by Architect. With mounting plate. Provide P-trap and 1/2" IPS screwdriver stop, 120 V. HB-1 Wall Faucet (Interior)* Fixture: Woodford Model 24 wall faucet with vacuum breaker - backflow preventer. With loose key "T" handle. Brass body. LAV-1 Lavatory - Countertop (Oval, Handicapped)* 15440 - 8 Community Horticulture Center City of Fort Collins Fixture: Kohler Pennington K-2195 20"xl7' vitreous china, self -rimming, countertop lavatory, 4" centers. Faucet/Drain: Kohler K-7404-KE-4 Triton polished chrome faucet factory installed with Valvet valve units and perforated strainer. 1 1/2" tailpiece. Lever handles, Style 4. Spout outlet Style G, vandal resistant, 1.5 GPM. With 3/8" flexible supplies with stops. Insulation: Truebro Inc., Handi Lav Guard insulation kit for P-trap and supply and valves. LAV-2 Lavatory (Wall Hung)* Fixture: Kohler Greenwich K-2032. White vitreous china, and 5" high integral back. 20"xl8" O.D. 14" x 10" bowl, with 4" faucet centers. Faucet/Drain: Kohler K-7408-2H Triton polished chrome faucet factory installed with Valvet valve units and perforated strainer. 1 1/2" tailpiece. Standard handles, Style 2. Spout outlet Style G, vandal resistant, 1.5 GPM. With 3/8" flexible supplies with stops. Carrier: With concealed arm carrier Josam 17100-67. MSB-1 Mop Service Basin (Terrazzo, Corner)* Fixture: Fiat Products MSB-2424, 24" x 24" x 10". Stainless steel drain with stainless steel strainer. Provide with aluminum cap for exposed sides. Set in Durabond 90 or sand and cement. Faucet: Kohler K-8907. Sink fitting with integral stops, bucket hook on spout, 3/4" hose thread end, vacuum breaker, adjustable top brace, inlets on 8" centers, chrome finish. RB-I Refrigerator Wall Box* Fixture: Oatey refrigerator box with stop valve. S_1 Sink - 2-Compartment* Fixture: Elkay LCGR-3322-R, Type 302 stainless steel, 18 gauge, self - rimming and sound deadened. 33" x 22" O.D. with 21" x 18" x 8" deep bowl and 14" x 7" x 6" bowl with faucet ledge and two hole punch. Drain shall be Elkay LK-35 stainless crumb cup strainer with removable basket with rubber seat. Faucet: Elkay Faucet No. 4381-F-CR (with spray), 2.5 G.P.M. flow restrictor. 15440 - 9 tii.. . Disposer: Insinkerator PRO 333/SS, all stainless steel, 3/4 HP, 115V, with 5- year warranty. St2 Work Sink* Fixture: Elkay LR-2521, Type 302 stainless steel, 18 gauge, self -rimming and sound deadened. 25" x 21" O.D. and 21" x 15 3/4" x 7 1/2" deep bowl with faucet ledge (four hole punch). Drain shall be Elkay LK-35. Faucet: Elkay Faucet No. LK-2443. Two handle, deck mount, 10" high swing spout, aerator and wing handles (with retractable spray hose). UR-1 Urinal* Fixture: Kohler K-4985-T Freshman Water Guard, white vitreous china, wall hung with block wall type carrier, siphon jet type with 3/4" inlet spud, outlet -threaded 2" inside. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 186. WC-1 Water Closet (Floor Mounted, flush Tank, Handicapped)* Fixture: Kohler K-3544, Highline Pressure Lite, white vitreous china, 1.6 GPF, 17 '/z " high elongated bowl, with tank and trim. Seat: Olsonite #95, Solid Plastic. Closet Bolts: 5116" Solid Brass WC-2 Water Closet (Floor Mounted, flush Tank)* Fixture: Kohler K-3458, Wellworth Pressure Lite, white vitreous china, 1.6 GPF, 15 " high, elongated bowl, with tank and trim. Seat: Olsonite #95, Solid Plastic. Closet Bolts: 5116" Solid Brass WH-1 Wall Hydrant (Exterior Wall, Freeze -proof)* Fixture: Woodford Model 65 freezeless wall hydrant with vacuum breaker - backflow preventer. With loose key "T" handle. Chrome finish on brass body. END OF SECTION 15440 - 10 SECTION 15850 - VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including references to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. 2. SCOPE OF WORK A. The work in this section of the specification and the accompanying drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and equipment necessary to install air handling and air conditioning systems as indicated on drawings and specified herein, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and operating systems. 3. ACCESS PANELS* A. Provide access panels to permit inspection and maintenance of all automatic dampers, fire dampers, control equipment, coils and other equipment requiring maintenance. Panels shall be located in position dictated by the equipment such that maintenance may be performed. Panels shall not be located in top side of ducts. Ceiling panels to be compatible with type ceiling used. B. Panels shall be attached to duct with zinc plated cam latches. 18" x 18" and smaller panels shall have a minimum of two (2) latches. Larger panels shall have a minimum of four (4) latches. Panels shall set in rigid frame with sponge rubber gasketing to prevent air leakage. Panels may be of single wall uninsulated construction. C. Where duct size permits, access panels shall be minimum 18" x 16" or 2" smaller than duct size, whichever is smaller. 4. BALANCING DAMPERS* A. These dampers shall be the product of recognized manufacturers and shall be installed upstream of each supply register or diffuser. B. For rectangular ductwork requiring a blade width greater than 8" use an opposed blade damper with 3-1/2" x V x 16 gauge galvanized steel hat channel frame. Blades shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel, maximum width 8". Axles shall be 1 /2" diameter galvanized steel. Bearings shall be heavy- duty nylon or bronze sleeve type. Actuator shall be 1/2" diameter manual locking quadrant. 15850 - 1 submission of a bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or 4.2.6.4.2. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test or study of the site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for CONTRACTOR prior to CONTRACTOR's making such final commitment; or 4.2.6.4.3. CONTRACTOR failed to give the written notice within the time and as required by paragraph 4.2.3. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or as to the amount or length of any such equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, a claim may be made therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. However, OWNER, ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.3. Physical Conditions —Underground Facilities: 4.3.1. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 4.3.1.1. OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 4.3.1.2. The cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price and CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,(iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities as provided in paragraph 6.20 and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. 4.3.2. Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, prerriptly immediately after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by paragraph 6.23), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) give written notice to that owner and to OWNER and ENGINEER ENGINEER will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence of the Underground Facility. If ENGINEER concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document such consequences. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility as provided in paragraph 6.20. CONTRACTOR shall may be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and that CONTRACTOR did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree on entitlement to or the amount or length of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. However, OWNER, ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any claims, costs, losses or damages incurred or sustained by CONTRACTOR on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. Reference Points: 4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in ENGINEER's judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel 4.5. Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material: 4.5.1. OWNER shall be responsible for any Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work and which may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work at the site. OWNER shall not be responsible for any such materials brought to the site by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Suppliers or anyone else for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. C. For rectangular ductwork requiring a blade width 8" or less, use a single blade damper with 3-1/2" x 5/8" x 16 gauge galvanized steel hat channel frame. Blade shall be center pivoting and single thickness 20 gauge galvanized steel. Axles shall be 3/8" square plated steel with bearings and actuator as above. — D. For round ductwork greater than or equal to 18" diameter use an opposed blade damper. Frame shall be 2" x 1/2" x 14 gauge galvanized steel channel. Blades shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel. Axles shall be 1/2" diameter galvanized steel. With bearings and actuator as above. E. For round ductwork of less than 18" diameter use a single blade damper. Frame shall be 4-1/2" deep, 18 gauge galvanized steel. Blade shall be center pivoting and single thickness 22 gauge galvanized steel for diameters up to 12", 20 gauge galvanized steel for diameters up to 16". Axles shall be 3/8" square plated steel. With bearings and actuator as above. F. Except as otherwise specified in this section, motorized dampers will be furnished under Section 15950 for installation by this Contractor. G. American Warming and Ventilating Inc. VC-8, VC-9, VC-21, VC-23, Louvers and Dampers, Inc. VCD-400, RBD-2 or Greenheck MBD-15 or MBDR 50 for round ducts less than 18" diameter. Or prior approved equal. 5. SHEET METAL WORK - LOW VELOCITY SYSTEMS A. Low velocity sheet metal work includes all ducts serving supply, return, and exhaust air systems operating at a maximum of 2" W.G. of pressure. B. Construction. Construct ducts from zinc coated iron or steel sheets conforming accurately to the dimensions indicated on the drawings. All ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. Construct ducts in accordance with the recommendations in the current edition of the "SMACNA" duct construction standards, 2" W.G. pressure class. C. Exposed round ductwork shall be spiral seam construction per the current addition of the "SMACNA" duct construction standards, 2" W.G. positive _ pressure class. Seam type RL-2 and RL-3 is not acceptable. Concealed round ductwork may either be spiral or longitudinal seam, constructed to the same standards. D. All ductwork transverse joints shall be made airtight by using duct sealer in accordance with SMACNA standards. No open joints at the corners or �. elsewhere will be allowed. All seams in horizontal ducts will be standing 15850 - 2 seams with separate cleats mitering at the comers. All seams in vertical duct or risers shall be self-supporting. All ducts shall be complete in themselves. No single thickness partitions between ducts allowed. All ducts over 18" wide to be crossbroken. ' E. Round Flexible Ducts: Flexible round ducts from supply ducts to air outlets shall be factory formed vinyl or zinc coated spring steel helix bonded to and supporting a cover of woven fiberglass impregnated with vinyl. The duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 4,000 FPM and 2" positive static pressure. The duct shall be listed by UL under UL-181 standards as Class I and shall comply with NFPA 90A. Supports to be no less than 4' c.c. Connections to rectangular duct to be made with sheet metal accessories and/or according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Round flexible ducts shall be insulated, similar to Genflex GSL, Hercules IFM, or Omni No. 1000. 3. Maximum allowable length shall be 8'-0". 4. Sizes shown on plans are I.D. dimensions. F. All ductwork located where exposed to the weather shall be of double wall insulated construction. Interior sheet shall be of same material as connecting from inside of building. Exterior sheet exposed to weather shall be zinc -coated iron or steel sheet. Insulation shall be one -inch thick, 3-pound density fiberglass. All exterior seams shall be soldered watertight. All interior joints shall be coated with Minnesota Mining's Scotchweld adhesive No. 1838 B/A or equal. All ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with requirements for Low Velocity System, SMACNA. 6. DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Securely attach all ductwork to the building construction in a manner to be free from vibration and swaying under all conditions of operation. Hanger attachments shall be appropriate for the building structure and shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. Hang ducts from beams and joists whenever possible. B. Ducts shall be substantially supported with hangers located at a maximum of 8 feet on centers, or less as conditions dictate, for the length of the duct. All hangers shall be made of V wide galvanized iron straps, 18 gauge for hangers spaced at 8 feet centers, 22 gauge for 4 feet centers, both for ducts up to 96" semi -perimeter, or per latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Hanger straps to be secured to the bottom of 15850 - 3 the duct using sheet metal screws. Additional screws to be added to sides of ductwork as conditions dictate. Trapeze hangers per SMACNA standards may also be used. C. Where vertical duct risers pass through floors or roof, securely fasten — supporting angles on at least two sides of the ducts with rivets, screws, or bolts and support the assembly on the adjoining floor construction in an approved manner. Angles shall be black iron primed with zinc chromate. For multiple duct risers located in a common shaft, support ducts as indicated on drawings. Where vertical duct risers are enclosed in vertical mechanical chases, the ducts shall be self-supporting with hangers located a maximum of 12' on center. Hangers shall conform to SMACNA standards for size and construction. 7. DUCT INSTALLATION A. All ductwork will be run substantially as shown on the plans. Changes in size or cross section shall be made with long tapers. The Engineer *' reserves the right to slightly change the run of certain ducts without extra cost to the Owner, if necessary to avoid unforeseen structural or other _ interferences. B. Where ducts run through ceiling spaces and structural, mechanical, or electrical interference is encountered, maintain same cross sectional area as indicated on plans with a maximum of 4 1/2 to 1 aspect ratio. C. All openings in duct for grilles, registers, etc., shall be capped dust -tight with G.I. metal caps during the construction period. D. All rectangular branch takeoff ducts shall be the 45-deg. proportional type unless specifically shown otherwise. Round branch duct connections to rectangular mains shall be made with 45' take -offs with rectangular to round transitions. See paragraph 4 for balancing dampers. E. Where square turns are indicated, either round or rectangular duct, provide and install square turn elbows with turning vanes. Vanes may be either commercial type duct turns or approved equal, or shop fabricated to conform to SMACNA standards. Vanes shall be double thickness type pre -assembled on runners before. installing in each elbow. Brace adequately and avoid rough edges to prevent objectionable noise. Double thickness turning vanes to have 4 %2" radius @ 3 ''/4" spacing. F. Where round turns are indicated, either round or rectangular duct, provide duct sweep with the center line of duct curving at a radius equal to 1 1/2 -. 15850 - 4 times the duct diameter/width. Adjustable round elbows are not acceptable. G. Exhaust air, relief air, and air intake ducts shall be equipped with 2" deep pans soldered absolutely watertight to collect moisture and condensation. Where moisture may condense within the duct system, pitch ductwork to low points and provide drip pans and drain connections with plugs for removal of condensate. H. No obstructions will be allowed in ducts except places where absolutely necessary and prior approval has been received from the Engineer. In such cases they shall be installed so as to least interfere with the passage of air. 8. SOUND INSULATION A. Sound insulation shall be applied to the interior of ducts provided under the contract as listed below unless otherwise indicated on the plans: All exhaust, relief and return ducts and all rectangular supply ducts. B. All internal sound insulation shall be 1" duct liner with a black fire resistant skin surface and edge coating. Liner shall have overall density of 1.50 pounds per cubic foot. Installation shall meet NFPA 90A and 90B fire resistant requirements, and SMACNA standards. Liner shall have a noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of 0.65 for a type "A" mounting. C. Apply the insulation in fabricated pieces sized to the interior duct surfaces with the black coated or denser surface exposed to the air stream. Insulation shall be firmly held in place with B.F. 85-10 or 85-60, C.M.C. 17-477, 1-C 225 fire resistant adhesive covering no less than 100 percent of the duct surface. Further secure insulation on the top and sides of horizontal ducts and all sides of vertical ducts with Omark or KSM capacitor discharge studs and caps on 15" centers. Coat exposed longitudinal edges of insulation with a heavy layer of B.F. 60-30, C.M.C. 17-477, or I-C 102 fire resistant mastic prior to installation in the ductwork. Secure transverse edges with capacitor discharge studs and caps on 6-inch centers and coat caps and entire joint with the same mastic as for longitudinal edges. D. Duct sizes indicated on the drawings are the internal sizes. Where insulation is applied to the inside of the ducts, the metal size of the duct shall be increased by 2 inches to result in internal dimensions equal to that shown on the drawings. 15850 - 5 E. Where sound insulation is shown for ducts which require thermal insulation, the thermal insulation may be omitted on the outside of the — sound insulated ductwork. 9. REGISTERS. GRILLES, AND DIFFUSERS* A. Furnish and install registers, grilles, and diffusers, as manufactured by Titus, Anemostat, Carnes, Krueger, Metal-aire, Tuttle and Bailey, or -- approved equal, where indicated on the plans. 1. See Schedule on the plans for exact type, construction, and — accessories. 2. Adjust air pattern controllers so that drafts are not created. 3. Selection based on NC less than 30. 10. CURBS AND FLASHINGS A. Curbs for roof -mounted equipment shall be provided by this Contractor, _ unless otherwise specified and scheduled. This contractor shall also provide flashing and counterflashing. The counterflashing shall be galvanized sheet metal, and all joints shall be soldered watertight. Curb height shall be 12" minimum. B. Wash all flashings and counterflashing with acetic acid, and paint with one coat of oil paint, black in color. C. This Contractor shall take responsibility for the integrity of the roof, _ including making all new roof penetrations, installing curbs, and making entire installation watertight. Coordinate prefab curb installation with General Contractor. Provide sheet metal cap for new field built curbs, -- including flashing and counterflashing. D. Rooftop equipment shall be anchored to withstand wind loads of 30 -» pounds per square foot. 11. RELIEF HOODS fRH )* A. Furnish and install outdoor relief or intake hoods as manufactured by Penn, Greenheck, Jenn-Air, Loren Cook, Louvers & Dampers, Inc., Acme or approved equal. B. Units shall be of size as noted or scheduled on the plans. C. Units shall be furnished complete with bird screen and anti -condensate coating, color as selected by the Architect, and 12" roof curb. 15850 - 6 12. EXHAUST FANS* A. Provide where indicated and as scheduled on the plans, exhaust fans as manufactured by Penn, Pace; Acme, Cook, Jenn-Air, Greenheck, or approved equal. Arrangement shall be as shown on the plans. With 12" roof curb and neoprene gasket. B. All fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced at the factory. C. Fan ratings shall be based upon tests performed in strict accordance with the AMCA Standard 210-67 Test Code for Air Moving Devices. Each fan shall carry, near the manufacturer's nameplate, the seal authorized by AMCA indicating that ratings are certified. Fans not bearing this seal will 13. FURNACES* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Lennox 2. Carrier 3. Rheem 4. Trane 5. York 6. Prior approved equal B. Provide furnaces where indicated and as scheduled on the plans. C. Description AGA certified gas -fired, upflow furnace, rated and tested according to D.O.E. test procedures. Test operated prior to shipment to insure proper operation. Completely factory assembled with all controls installed. Heavy gauge aluminized steel tubular heat exchanger designed to prevent fatigue failure, ticking, resonance and cleanability problems. Aluminized steel inshot burner. 2. Automatic hot surface ignition on each operating burner cycle. 100% safety shut-off. 24 volt combination gas control valve with automatic safety pilot and bleed gas filtrations, automatic dual electric valve, and gas pressure regulator. Main gas valve opens only when pilot burner is proven to be lit. If flame loss occurs, main valve closes, and pilot ignition recurs. 3. With induced draft blower assembly electrically interlocked with the gas ignition system. AGA design certified. 15850 - 7 14 15 4. Heavy gauge cold rolled steel cabinet with electroplating paint finish, baked on. Metal interior liners and insulated front and back. 5. With 24 VA control transformer and blower cooling relay factory installed in wiring juction box. Fan and limit controls. 6. Multi -speed direct drive blowers statically and dynamically balanced. Resilient mounted motor. Removable blower assembly, with safety interlock switch. 7. 1" thick throwaway filters. 8. Rated for 90% A.F.U.E. minimum. ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS (CUH-1)* A. Commercial fan -forced, horizontal recessed, heater with 16 gauge front bar grille, recessed mounted with recessed mounting enclosure. B. With built-in tamper -proof thermostat, thermal cutout, fan delay, and disconnect switch. U.L. Listed. C. Berko, Markel, Q Mark or approved equal. LOUVERS* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Warming and Ventilating 2. Arrow 3. Dowco 4. Greenheck 5. Industrial Louvers 6. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 7. Prior approved equal. B. Provide outside air intake and exhaust louvers where indicated on the plans. C. See schedule on the plans for exact type, construction, and accessories. D. Install louvers, where indicated on the plans, according to manufacturer's recommendations. Provide anchor clips and caulk as required for a sound, watertight installation. Make airtight duct connections to installed louvers. 15850 - 8 E. Provide operators for operable louvers. Where louvers are banked, no more than (4) louvers are to be controlled by (1) operator 16. ROOFTOP INDIRECT/DIRECT, 2-STAGE - EVAP COOLING* A. Provide and install unit from only the manufacturers below. 1. Industrial Master Cool 2. Prior approved equal. B. Manufacturer and Model: Per Schedule on plans. C. General: 1. Each unit to include (3) indirect modules, (1) wet media section, (1) blower section, motor, motor sheave, pulley -belt kit & pump. 2. Indirect Modules: Factory assembled modules, internal pump, float, heat exchanger and fan, piped, internally wired. 3. Direct Evaporative Media Modules: High performance, 12" media, factory assembled, piped, internally wired. 4. Air Handling Modules: Factory assembled Air Handling Module, down discharge, internal blower, piped, internally wired. 5. Cooling Capacities: Per Schedule on plans. 6. Units: Designed for outdoor rooftop installation. 7. Exterior Surfaces: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied polyester -epoxy, powder -based coating. 8. MC to field assemble all modules and sections, including 1" stage air plenum, supply, drain and vent piping, electrical connections, etc. to ensure the full operation of each indirect/direct evaporative cooling roof top unit. D. Controls: Automatic Temperature Control, 3-Stage Cooling, low -ambient shut-off, daily drain cycle. E. Indoor Air Fan: Belt drive forward curved, centrifugal type. Provide motor with thermal overload protection. Permanently lubricated fan and motor bearings. F. Roof Curb: Provide manufacturer's roof curb to G.C. for installation by Roofer. Zinc -coated steel curb with wood nailer strip. Approved by 15850 - 9 National Roofing Contractor's Association. Flashing and counterflashing with galvanized sheet metal, soldered watertight, shall be provided and _ installed by roofer. Curb with solid bottom, acoustically lined. With openings through the curb and roof only large enough for duct penetrations. — G. Wash all flashings and counterflashings with acetic acid, and paint with one coat of oil paint, black in color. H. This Contractor shall take responsibility for the integrity of the roof, including making all new roof penetrations, and making installation watertight. I. Rooftop equipment shall be anchored to withstand wind loads of 30 — pounds per square foot. 17. FLUE VENT* A. Flue shall be double wall Type B vent with cap. Install per Uniform Mechanical Code and NFPA No. 54. B. Ampco, Metalbestos, Metal Fab Inc., Dura-Vent or approved equal. U.L. approved. — END OF SECTION 15850 - 10 SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Basic Mechanical Requirements, in its entirety, including applicable provisions of other Specification sections, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the Specifications. 2. SCOPE OF WORK A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all materials and equipment necessary to provide the Automatic Temperature Control System for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning systems as specified herein, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and operating installation. 3. AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Control system shall be electric and electronic as manufactured by Johnson Controls, Inc., Honeywell, Robert Shaw, Landis and Staefa or Kreuter. B. The system shall be installed under the full-time supervision of an authorized Installations Engineer employed by one of the above, or by Long and Assoc., Carrier Commercial Services, ECI, C.W. Industries, or prior approved equal. C. The Mechanical Contractor is given the option of installing the temperature control system in lieu of having it installed by a Temperature Control Contractor. Prior to start of work, the Contractor shall submit control shop drawings as stated in this Section. Shop drawings shall be prepared by an authorized temperature control contractor as listed above, or by a licensed Professional Engineer with experience in controls design. Work shall not begin until shop drawings are approved by the Engineer. 4. CONTROL INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT* A. In general, the control instruments and equipment furnished for this installation shall be the best product of its type produced by the manufacturer. B. Dampers and Damper Operators: Damper Operators: 120 V electric type and fully proportioning. Damper operators shall have metal bodies. Provide operators with ample power to overcome friction of damper linkage and air 15950-1 .LZ=_• , . Y ■ . .!RfE!!!!!L7fEETlfII�N�T!!!!fr ..1•., •�. •" •.• ri eLe ..�_. - • . • r . Y • .. •.. • . Y • • ..... •. .. . .. ..... • .. •I. • • • . Y . Y • 1 •_ ..�_.mm-,w .. _ . ... ._ . . . Y • . - - - - • • - - - • .. - ARTICLE 5—BONDS AND INSURANCE Performance, Payment and Other Bonds: 5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date when final payment becomes due, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agent's authority to act. 5.2. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of paragraph 5.1, CONTRACTOR shall within ten days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to OWNER. 5.3. Licensed Sureties and Insurers, Certificates of Insurance: 5.3.1. All Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by OWNER or CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue Bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.3.2. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by OWNER or any other additional insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with paragraph 5.4. ^"'*o Tell EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) pressure acting on the damper blades. Locate the damper operator mounting arrangement outside the airstream wherever possible. _ Provide the operators with external adjustable stops to limit the stroke. The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit normally open or normally closed positions of the damper as indicated. 2. Dampers: a. Damper Frames: 13 gauge galvanized steel channel on 1/8" extruded aluminum with reinforced corner bracing. b. Damper Blades: Not to exceed six (6) inches in width. Blades shall be suitable for high velocity performance. Opposed blades. C. Damper Bearings: Nylon or Teflon. Bushings that turn in the bearing shall be oil impregnated sintered metal. d. The damper linkage shall provide equal percentage characteristics as required. e. Low leakage type, with blade edge seals and side seals. C. Thermostats: 1. Furnaces: Programmable 7-day heating/cooling thermostat with night setback as specified in "Sequence of Operation." Honeywell T-7300 or approved equal. 2. Radiant Heaters: Heating thermostat. 40 to 90 degrees F. range. Honeywell T87F1849. 3. Unit Heaters: Heating thermostat with fan "ON -AUTO" switch and system "HEAT -OFF" switch. 40 to 90 degrees F. range. Honeywell T87F1849 with Q539GIO00 subbase. 4. Rooftop Indirect/Direct Evaporative Coolers: Programmable 7-day cooling thermostat with 3-stage cooling as specified in "Sequence of Operation." Honeywell T-7300 or approved equal. 5. Sidewall Direct Evaporative Cooling: Programmable 7-day cooling thermostat with 3-stage cooling as specified in "Sequence of Operation." Honeywell T-7300 or approved equal. 6. All room thermostats shall be mounted at a center line height of 60" above the finished floor unless specifically indicated otherwise. — 15950-2 Thermostats shall be located adjacent to doors except where otherwise indicated. 7. Coordinate electrical requirements with Electrical Contractor. 5. WIRING A. Except where otherwise specified under sequence of controls, wire all electrical controls furnished under this section of the specifications. B. This installation shall comply with all rules and regulations of the National Electrical Code and all state and local codes and regulations. C. Install all conduits in a neat and orderly manner with conduit grouped as much as possible following horizontal and vertical building lines and rigidly secure conduit to the building construction. D. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with associated work being done under Division 16. E. Except where otherwise specified, voltages for control of circuiting associated with motors and their starters, and all control devices shall be rated at 120 volts or 24 volts. 6. INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the installation of temperature control equipment furnished under this section but installed under other sections of this Division. B. Furnaces, Condensing Units, etc.: The manufacturer will provide all control devices, transformers, relays, and other appurtenances as required per manufacturer's system wiring and interlock submittals. 7. SERVICE AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS A. After completion of the installation, adjust all thermostats, motors, and other equipment provided under this Section. B. Following complete adjustment, have a qualified representative fully acquainted with the installation instruct the Owner's operators in the fundamentals and operations of the system. This instruction period shall not be less than four (4) hours. C. Submit typewritten and/or printed sets of operating and maintenance instructions, to be included in the O&M Manuals, including sheets describing fundamentals of each system and an explanation of the operation and function of each system device in the installation as part of the 15950-3 maintenance and operating instructions portfolio required under Section 15010. _ 8. CONTROL DRAWINGS* A. Before proceeding with the work required under this section, the Contractor shall submit for approval complete temperature control diagrams, including a written description of the systems and descriptive literature covering each item of control equipment. Diagrams shall indicate all control functions required. Submit to Engineer. 9. OPERATING TESTS A. A complete system -operating test shall be made for a period of two (2) weeks with controls set in their respective positions to ensure proper operation. All tests and final adjustments, including calibration of all controllers and thermostats, shall be made to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. B. At the completion of the test, Contractor shall prepare a list showing temperature settings of all thermostats together with actual thermostat readings. This list shall be submitted to the Engineer as part of the maintenance and operating instruction portfolios. 10. "AS -BUILT" DRAWINGS A. The Contractor will, at the same time, insure that the control diagrams for the project are brought up-to-date and that they reflect the control system "As -Built". These control diagrams will be included in the Maintenance Manuals, which shall be turned over to the Owner following the acceptance of the above procedure by the Consulting Engineer. B. The "As- Built" diagrams will have an indication on them as to what changes occurred to the control system between the system originally specified and the system as installed. If necessary, the description of — operation shall be changed to adequately describe the completed control system. C. Provide reproducible set of "As-Builts" which must be mylar sepias. D. Operating sequences and control diagrams modified "As -Built," shall be — framed under glass or Plexiglas, and suitably mounted in the mechanical room. 11. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 15950-4 A. General: The following description gives the intent of the sequence of operation, It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate controls furnished with the equipment with necessary supplementary controls under this section to provide a working system as described below. C. Exhaust Fans and Louvers: 1. Exhaust fans and louvers shall be controlled according to the control notes on the Schedule Sheet M7. Meeting Room Heating/Cooling: 1. Provide combination heating/cooling thermostat or individual heating and cooling thermostats (contractor's option). 2. Label each thermostat with its respective furnace and indirect/direct cooling unit number. 3. Occupied Cycle: a. Times and days for occupied cycle shall be coordinated with the Owner. b. Both furnace fans to run continuously in heating mode. C. Direct cooling blower to run continuously on low speed in cooling mode. d. Automatic changeover between heating and cooling. e. Thermostat shall cycle the heating and cooling as required to satisfy the set points. f. Minimum OA to be set at 150 cfm. COZ Sensor to modulate OA damper as required, to maximum of 1545 cfm. 1. Heating Stage One: (a) All indirect/direct cooling fans and pumps to off. (b) SA damper at cooling unit closes. (c) SA damper at furnaces opens. (d) Both furnace blowers on. Lead furnace burner on. (e) Heating set point at 72°F (adjustable). 2. Heating Stage Two: (a) Bring on second furnace burner (b) Second thermostat with set point at 69' F — (adjustable). 3. Cooling Stage One: _ (a) All furnace blowers and burners to off. OA damper closes. (b) SA damper at furnaces closes. (c) SA damper at cooling unit opens. (d) Direct cooling blower on low speed. (e) Cooling set point at 75' F (adjustable). 4. Cooling Stage Two: (a) Direct cooling blower to high speed. 5. Cooling Stage Three: (a) All (3) indirect cooling pumps and fans on. 4. Unoccupied Cycle: a. Heating: — 1. OA damper to 150 cfm minimum. 2. Cycle blowers and burners as needed to satisfy the heating set point of. 55' F. ` 3. Override button on thermostat shall set unit into occupied cycle for 3 hours. b. Cooling: 1. Direct cooling blower to cycle on as required to _ satisfy the cooling set point of 851 F. 2. Override button on thermostat shall set unit into _ occupied cycle for 3 hours. 5. Automatic Shutdown: _ a. This applies to all units scheduled for more than 2000 CFM. 15950-6 b. Duct mounted smoke detectors in the supply air duct shall shut down the fan of the furnace upon sensing smoke. C. The mechanical contractor shall provide and install the duct smoke detector; electrical contractor shall wiring and conduit to detector and fan as required. 6. Nightly Cooling System Drain and Shutdown: a. All indirect and direct cooling modules to be switched off and water systems drained between the hours of 11 P.M. and 6 A.M. D. Support Space Heatin /g Cooling: 1. Provide combination heating/cooling thermostat or individual heating and cooling thermostats (contractor's option). 2. Label each thermostat with its respective furnace and indirect/direct cooling unit number. 3. Occupied Cycle: a. Times and days for occupied cycle shall be coordinated with the Owner. b. Furnace fan to run continuously in heating mode. C. Direct cooling blower to run continuously on low speed in cooling mode. d. Automatic changeover between heating and cooling. e. Thermostat shall cycle the heating and cooling as required to satisfy the set points. 1. Heating: (a) All indirect/direct cooling fans and pumps to off. (b) SA damper at cooling unit closes. (c) SA damper at furnace opens. (d) Furnace blower and burner on. (e) Heating set point at 72°F (adjustable). 2. Cooling Stage One: 15950-7 (a) Furnace blower and burner to off. (b) SA damper at furnace closes. -- (c) SA damper at cooling unit opens. , (d) Direct cooling blower on low speed. — (e) Cooling set point at 75' F (adjustable). 3. Cooling Stage Two: (a) Direct cooling blower to high speed to meet cooling requirements. ^ 4. Cooling Stage Three: (a) All (3) indirect cooling pumps and fans on. 4. Unoccupied Cycle: a. Heating: 1. Cycle blowers and burners as needed to satisfy the heating set point of. 55° F — 2. Override button on thermostat shall set unit. into occupied cycle for 3 hours. b. Cooling: 1. Direct cooling blower to cycle on as required to satisfy the cooling set point of 85' F. 2. Override button on thermostat shall set unit into occupied cycle for 3 hours. 5. Automatic Shutdown: ^ a. This applies to all units scheduled for more than 2000 CFM. _ b. Duct mounted smoke detectors in the supply air duct shall shut down the fan of the furnace upon sensing smoke. C. The mechanical contractor shall provide and install the duct smoke detector; electrical contractor shall wiring and conduit _. to detector and fan as required. 6. Nightly Cooling System Drain and Shutdown: _ 15950-8 a. All indirect and direct cooling modules to be switched off and water systems drained between the hours of 11 P.M. and 6 A.M. E. Greenhouse Heating/Cooling: 1. Provide combination heating/cooling thermostat or individual heating and cooling thermostats (contractor's option). 2. Label each thermostat with its respective unit heaters and/or direct cooling unit number. 3. 24 Hour Occupied Mode: a. Unit heater fans to be "ON" or "AUTO" in heating mode. b. Automatic changeover between heating and cooling. C. Thermostat shall cycle the heating and cooling as required to satisfy the set points. 1. Heating: (a) Exhaust fan off and OA intake louvers close. (b) Direct evaporative cooling pump off. (c) Unit heater blowers and burners on. (d) Heating set point at 55°F (adjustable). 2. Cooling Stage One: (a) Unit heater blowers and burners to off. (b) OA dampers open. Exhaust fan on low. (c) Cooling set point at 85' F (adjustable). 3. Cooling Stage Two: (a) Exhaust fan to high speed. 4. Cooling Stage Three: (a) Direct evaporative cooling pump on. 4. Nightly Cooling System Drain and Shutdown: 15950-9 a. Direct evaporative cooling pump and water supply to be switched off and trough system drained between the hours of _ 11 P.M. and 6 A.M. F. Conservatory Heatin Cooling: 1. Provide combination heating/cooling thermostat or individual heating and cooling thermostats (contractor's option). 2. Label each thermostat with its respective unit heaters and/or direct cooling unit number. 3. 24 Hour Occupied Mode: a. Unit heater fans to be "ON" or "AUTO" in heating mode. ^ b. Automatic changeover between heating and cooling. _ C. Thermostat shall cycle the heating and cooling as required to satisfy the set points. _ 1. Heating: (a) Exhaust fans off and OA intake louvers close. (b) Direct evaporative cooling pumps off. (c) Unit heater blowers and burners on. (d) Heating set point at 55°F (adjustable). 2. Cooling Stage One: ^' (a) Unit heater blowers and burners to off. (b) OA dampers open. Exhaust fans on low. (c) Cooling set point at 85' F (adjustable). 3. Cooling Stage Two: (a) Exhaust fans to high speed. 4. Cooling Stage Three: (a) Direct evaporative cooling pumps on. 4. Nightly Cooling System Drain and Shutdown: a. Direct evaporative cooling pumps and water supply to be -- switched off and trough systems drained between the hours of 11 P.M. and 6 A.M. 15950-10 G. Radiant Heaters: 1. Heated areas: Thermostat shall cycle unit to maintain a heating setpoint of 68 degrees F. (adjustable). 2. Unheated areas: Thermostat shall cycle unit to maintain a heating setpoint of 49 degrees F. (adjustable). H. Unit Heaters: 1. Thermostat shall cycle unit burner and fan to maintain a heating setpoint of 68 degrees F. (adjustable). 2. Fan switch on thermostat shall energize unit fan; burner shall cycle as required to maintain set point. I. Rooftop Indirect/Direct Evaporative Cooling: 1. Provide one thermostat for each unit. 2. Label each thermostat with its respective unit number. 3. Occupied Cycle: a. Times and days for occupied cycle shall be coordinated with the Owner for each zone. b. Fan to run continuously on low speed. C. Thermostat shall cycle the cooling as required to satisfy the set points. 1. Main supply fan shall provide the first stage of cooling. 2. Main supply fan and indirect cooling modules shall provide second stage of cooling. 3. Main supply fan, indirect cooling modules, and wet section of direct cooling unit to provide third stage of cooling. 4. Cooling set point shall be 75°F (adjustable). 4. Unoccupied Cycle: 15950-11 CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance: 5.4. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's performance and furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 5.4.1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; 5.4.2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of CONTRACTOR's employees; 5.4.3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR's employees; 5.4.5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 5.4.6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph 5.4 to be purchased and maintained shall: 5.4.7. with respect to insurance required by paragraphs 5.4.3 through 5.4.6 inclusive and 5.4.9, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability), OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insureds; 5.4.8. include the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 5.4.9. include completed operations insurance; 5.4.10. include contractual liability insurance covering CONTRACTOR's indemnity obligations under paragraphs 6.12, 6.16 and 6.31 through 6.33; 5.4.11. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be cancelled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraph 5.3.2 will so provide); 5.4.12. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with paragraph 13.12; and 5.4.13. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment (and CONTRACTOR shall furnish OWNER and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to OWNER and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter). OWNER's Liability Insurance: 5.5. In addition to insurance required to be provided by CONTRACTOR under paragraph 5.4, OWNER, at OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain at OWNER's expense OWNER's own liability insurance as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. Property Insurance: LWM ■_ .. _ _. , • I ..�-. .. N. EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) a. Cycle blower and burner as needed to satisfy the heating setpoint. b. Override button on thermostat shall set unit into occupied cycle for 3 hours. _ 5. Automatic Shutdown: a. This applies to all units scheduled for more than 2000 CFM. -' b. Duct mounted smoke detectors in the supply air duct shall shut down the fan of the furnace upon sensing smoke. C. The mechanical contractor shall provide and install the duct smoke detector; electrical contractor shall wiring and conduit to detector and fan as required. ;91 END OF SECTION 15950-12 SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING GENERAL A. Balancing shall be done by a firm specializing in this work. Pre -qualified firms are: 1. Griffith Engineering Service, Denver, Co. 2. Fort Collins/Midwest 3. TAB Services of Denver, Colorado 4. Lawrence H. Finn & Assoc., Greeley, Colorado. 5. JPG Engineering, Sedalia 6. Air -Right, Denver B. Other firms desiring to furnish services for this project shall submit for written approval during bid time. A brochure shall be provided listing the qualifications of personnel in the organization, instruments available to be used and a list of projects successfully balanced within the last two years. Information regarding qualifications must be in the office of the Design Engineer at least six days, excluding Sundays and holidays, prior to the date set for receiving bids. C. The balancing work shall be performed by a firm having total professional responsibility for the final testing, adjusting and balancing of the entire system. Qualified technicians in the employ of the pre -qualified firm shall perform all balancing. D. This firm shall furnish all necessary tools, scaffolding and ladders that are required and shall provide all required instruments, take all readings and make all necessary adjustments. E. Instruments shall be used and applied which are best suited to the system function being tested. Instruments shall be in first-class state of repair and have been calibrated within a period of six months prior to starting the job. Instruments shall be recalibrated upon completion of the job if required by the Design Engineer to prove reliability. F. All air systems shall be balanced using an applicable proportionate procedure. G. After all adjustments are made, a detailed written report shall be prepared and submitted for approval. Final acceptance of this project will not be made until a satisfactory report is received and field verified. H. The Design Engineer will field verify the report in the following manner: 15990 - 1 Select quantities to be tested at random. (Quantity shall not exceed 10% of total.) 2. Require balancing firm to read the quantities in his presence. 3. Field tested values shall be within plus or minus 10% of those shown on plans. 2. AIR BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Before any adjustments are made, room is to be closed off with windows ^ & doors closed. The systems are to be checked for such items as dirty filters, duct leakage, damper leakage, equipment vibrations, correct damper operations, etc. All fan systems, major duct sections, registers, diffusers, etc., are to be adjusted to deliver design air quantities within plus or minus 5 %. Individual air outlets, when one of three or more serve a space, may have a tolerance of 10 % above average. Design CFM is based — on filters being approximately 50% loaded with dirt at 0.45" SPD. Pressure drop across filters during balancing shall be simulated to that condition. After balancing is completed, check motor amperage with the — filters clean. B. Exhaust and re -circulation air systems shall be adjusted for air quantities shown on drawings and the proper relationship between supply and exhaust established. C. Distribution system shall be adjusted to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise within the capabilities of the system. ^ D. Sheaves and/or belts shall be exchanged as required to adjust the RPM of all fans so they handle specified air quantity. — 3. MISCELLANEOUS A. All installed thermal overload protection shall be observed and noted in the data sheets. If thermal overload protection is incorrect, it shall be the responsibility of the balancing firm to see that proper overload protection is installed at the completion of the job. B. The adjusting crew shall measure and set any special conditions such as — minimum outside air quantities; check and adjust outside and return air intakes so that the system will deliver substantially the same volume on either; make tests and record data as required in 'REPORT' below. 15990 - 2 C. All balancing devices, i.e., dampers and valves shall be clearly marked as to the final balanced position. Plug all test holes; replace access doors and belt guards. D. When deemed necessary, 24-hour space temperature recording shall be taken and any required partial rebalance of the system shall be performed without additional cost. 4. REPORT A. A bound report shall be provided which shall contain a general information sheet listing instruments used, methods of balancing, altitude correction, and manufacturer's grille, register and diffuser data. B. Provide equipment data sheets listing make, size, serial number, rating, etc., of all mechanical equipment, including fans, pumps, motors, starters, and drives. Operating data shall include rotational speed, inlet and outlet pressures, pressure drop across filters, coils and other components, and measured motor current and voltage. The report shall also include entering and leaving air temperatures at coils, and outside air dry bulb temperatures. C. Balancing data sheets shall indicate the required and actual CFM of all supply, return and exhaust outlets or inlets, and shall be totaled and summarized by systems. D. Report shall list boiler efficiency and method of calculation. E. Reports shall contain a reduced set of contract drawings with outlets marked thereon for easy identification of the designation used in the data sheets. F. The report shall outline any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in the above. G. Final report shall be included in all the O&M Manuals & provide one bound copy of Final Report to Mechanical Engineer. END OF SECTION 15990 - 3 No Text DIVISION 16 16050 — Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16060 — Grounding and Bonding 16070 — Firestopping 16140 — Wiring Devices 16145 — Lighting Control Devices 16410 — Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16442 — Panelboards 16478 — Transient Voltage Suppression 16491 — Fuses 16511 — Interior Lighting 16521 — Exterior Lighting 16851 — Fire Alarm SECT. NO. SECTION TITLE DIVISION 02 — SITE CONSTRUCTION 02582 LIGHTING POLES AND STANDARDS DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16070 FIRESTOPPING 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16442 PANELOBOARDS 16478 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16491 FUSES 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16851 FIRE ALARM \\\\wIIIII I///, ��\ 0oo 0 0 0 0 0 % S T pp 0 0 ov o ol �NoO �po0� iA 0 o0� Lpps O�Q\� ppppo 000ppp \ NOT VALID UNLESS SIGNED & DATED SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 5. Electricity -metering components. 6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 7. Touchup painting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 1 1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured -in -place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed. B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground utilities and services, including provision for electricity -metering components. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services. ,r C. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field -finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface. D. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS A. EMT: ANSI C80.3, zinc -coated steel, with set -screw or compression fittings. — B. FMC: Zinc -coated steel. C. LFMC: Zinc -coated steel with sunlight -resistant and mineral -oil -resistant plastic jacket. D. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings. E. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used. 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper. B. Conductors, Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper. C. Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated at 75 deg C minimum. — D. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable for service indicated. _ 2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Material: Cold -formed steel, with corrosion -resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 2 B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations (Room 111 shall be considered damp locations): Hot -dip galvanized steel. C. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs. D. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports: Comply with Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for slotted channel framing. 1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports. E. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C- clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring -steel clamps or click - type hangers. F. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon -steel wedge or sleeve type. H. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. I. Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat -treated steel. 2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications. B. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick). C. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright -colored, continuous -printed, vinyl tape with the following features: 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick). 2. Compounded for permanent direct -burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line. D. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. E. Color -Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. F. Engraved -Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black background. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 3 eeeasiened by eafereemei# of Laws and Replefiea& limited to fees and ehafges of eagineem and afehiteets); MEMO 00mil 5.9. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or others to --- -- -- --- ----- - -- --- -- -- - r.. Iloilo. • ._ -_ -- - ... 1175 Oil MINOR 1. RFW - . -N 1. 1 _ _ 1. !►i��YI�M!iii+ii�Miitit'? . .. ll) EICDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 412000) G. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless - steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 2.5 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING A. Current -Transformers: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. B. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. 2.6 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations: 1. Exposed: EMT. 2. Concealed: EMT. 3. Underground, Single Run: RNC. 4. Underground, Grouped: RNC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4. B. Use the following raceways for indoor installations: 1. Exposed: EMT. 2. Concealed: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use LFMC. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: EMT. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 4 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. B. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Locate horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering. D. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. E. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and location. F. Where PVC conduit is used in underground applications, galvanized rigid steel conduit (GSRC) with PVC jacketing or tar coating shall be used for riser bends and extensions to above grade or through -slab locations. Where runs exceed 100 feet in length between openings, GSRC bends shall be used for change in direction of 45 degrees or more. G. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire. H. Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size (DN53) and smaller, in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements, in addition to requirements above. I. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a maximum of 72-inch (1830-mm) flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. 3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS A. All building wire and cable electrical power conductors shall be copper, insulated to 600 volts. B. Branch circuits whose length from panel to first outlet exceeds 75 feet for 120 volt circuits shall be # 10 or larger, as recommended by the NEC for limiting voltage drop. C. Minimum wire size for branch circuit conductors: #12. D. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway. E. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THWN insulated conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 5 G. Remote -Control Signaling and Power -Limited Circuits: Type THHN/THWN insulated conductors in raceway for Classes 1, 2, and 3, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each outlet. C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot -dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components. B. Dry Locations: Steel materials. C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click -type clamp system. D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load. 3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits. C. Support suspended grid 2x2 and 2x4 fixtures at all four corners of the fixture. Support directly to building structure with wire hangars. Provide an additional slack wire from the building structure to the fixture. This requirement is to meet UBC Standard earthquake requirements. D. Raceways shall not be supported from or attached to ceiling support wires. E. Raceways or equipment shall not be suspended from steam, water, or other piping, or ductwork, ^ but provide independent and secure support methods. F. Care shall be taken to avoid placing raceways where they will be subjected to excessive heat. Locate all raceways a minimum of 12 inches from flues, steam lines, hot water lines, etc. - G. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 6 H. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future. I. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable -iron pipe hangers or clamps. J. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated. K. Spring -steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable -iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. L. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. M. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet -metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box. N. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength. O. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core -drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire -rated gypsum walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. P. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: 1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw -type nails. 2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units. 3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. 5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete. 6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring -tension clamps on steel. a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or other items. 8. Light Steel: Sheet -metal screws. 9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof -test load. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 7 3.8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. C. Labels shall be etched lamacoid (black with white core) with minimum 1/8 inch high letters and shall indicate area served and equipment served. Labels shall be attached to equipment with sheet metal screws. Labels for emergency equipment shall be the same as above except tags shall be red with white core. D. Label all junction, splice and terminal boxes and device plates. Labeling shall include panel name and circuit number. Locate label on inside of all device plates and covers. Locate label on outside of junction boxes above ceilings or in unfinished areas. Labeling shall be by way of permanent marking pen. E. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying. F. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color -coding may be used for voltage and phase identification. G. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches (400 mm), overall, use a single line marker. H. Color -code 208/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch -circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows: 1. Phase A: Black. 2. Phase B: Red. 3. Phase C: Blue. ' 4. Neutral: White 5. Ground: Green I. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic -laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal -backed butyrate signs for outdoor items. 3.9 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY -METERING EQUIPMENT A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 8 3.10 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire -resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 16 Section "Firestopping." 3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved. B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following: 1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 5. Electricity -metering components. 6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 7. Touchup painting. 3.13 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location. 2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 9 END OF SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050 - 10 SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with UL 467. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Boggs, Inc. C. Chance/Hubbell. d. Copperweld Corp. e. Dossert Corp. f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. h. Galvan Industries, Inc. i. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. 1. Ideal Industries, Inc. M. ILSCO. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 1 n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. o. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. p. Lightning Master Corp. q. Lyncole XIT Grounding. r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. S. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. t. Robbins Lightning, Inc. U. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. V. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. W. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS i A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section 'Basic Materials and Methods". B. Material: Copper. C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green -colored insulation. D. Groundirg Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated. F. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. G. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted -pressure -type connectors, or compression type. 2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Sectional type; copper -clad steel. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 2 Size: 3/4 by 120 inches in diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials. B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. B. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in all lengths of branch circuit and feeder conduits. C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in addition to those required by NEC: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. D. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. E. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Ground Rods: Install at least two rods spaced at least one -rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 3 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds: 5.12. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will be adjusted with OWNER and made payable to OWNER as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.13. OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money so received, and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. 5.13. OWNER as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within fifteen days after the occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, OWNER as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, OWNER as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers a :t if required in -itin by bandYoft' retest O I7t E fidu,:..ty shall give f 1. «fa 4 sh duties. Y ,, r y�:...,..,,,...� .,. �,.... Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace: 5.14. If either i4y (OWNER o COl`�T ^>Cznn OWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded bor other provisions of the Bondsr insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other pa, y CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the OWNER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing within ten fifteen days after receipt delivery of the certificates '«� other-eA dde-fl-ee requeste to OWNER as required by paragraph 2.7. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall eaeh previde to the Yre 'led as the ether may reasonablTreguest. Neither y» .> ...,..., not t.::. ,...ase vr mum u a ter...-nvraao-and axv inse}ranee—required e€ sueh—party bythe n ==:m or remedy, the ether party fflay eleet to obtain equiva the expense of the ............l.e was «equi fed to provide such eeverage, and a Change Order shall be issued te aE�ust Partial Utilization —Property Insurance: 5.15. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be accomplished in accordance with paragraph 14.10; provided that no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be cancelled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6--CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Supervision and Superintendence: 6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR. Labor, Materials and Equipment. 6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the Work as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and CONTRACTOR will not permit overtime work or the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's written consent given after prior written notice to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit requests to the ENGINEER no less than 48 hours in advance of any Work to be performed on Saturday, Sunday Holidays or outside the Regular Working Hours. EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 11 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating. — B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to — strain, impact, or damage. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp _ connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors. F. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided -type bonding straps. G. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve. H. Ufer Ground (Concrete -Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, Paragraph 250-81(c), using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within the base of the foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to a grounding electrode external to concrete. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot -tin -coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum -to -steel connections with stainless -steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum -to -galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and — mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 4 1 B. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure -type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure -type connectors. C. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A [and UL 486B]. E. Compression -Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. F. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 5 SECTION 16070 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes firestopping for the following: 1. Penetrations through fire -resistance -rated floor and roof construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, conduits, and other penetrating items. 2. Penetrations through fire -resistance -rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, conduits, and other penetrating items. 3. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 4. Sealant joints in fire -resistance -rated construction. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases. B. F-Rated Through -Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through -penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire -resistance rating of the constructions penetrated. C. T-Rated Through -Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through -penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are required where the following conditions exist: " I. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities. 2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire -resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required _ to have a temperature -rise rating. 4. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4 inch (100 mm) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) in overall cross -sectional area. FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 1 1. D. Fire -Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire -resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 119, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire -resistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs. E. For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) or more in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame -spread values of less than 25 and smoke -developed values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants. C. Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for each through -penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through -penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating items. 2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular through -penetration firestop condition, submit illustration approved by firestopping manufacturer's fire protection engineer with modifications marked. D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. E. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements and those specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through -penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa) is maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch (20 mm) below the fill materials surrounding the penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: I a. Through -penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through -penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through -penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory," by Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency. 3. Fire -resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire -response characteristics per ASTM E 119 under conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least " 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa), as measured 0.78 inch (20 mm) from the face exposed to furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire -Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency. B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of through -penetration firestop systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected ". to exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect's prior approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to -4 authorities having jurisdiction. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed firestopping that is similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and that has performed successfully. D. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its _ firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. E. Single -Source Responsibility. Obtain through -penetration firestop systems for each kind of FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 3 penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer. F. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." G. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through -penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." I. Owner will employ and pay a qualified inspection agency to check installed firestopping systems for compliance with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Notify Owner's inspection agency at least 1 week in advance of firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. B. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have examined each installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 4 A. Compatibility. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for the designated fire -resistance -rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following items: 1. Permanent form ing/damming/backing materials including the following: a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation. b. Ceramic fiber. C. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. d. Fire -rated formboard. e. Joint fillers for joint sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. _ 5. Steel sleeves. C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply with system performance and other requirements. 2.2 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Ceramic -Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating, and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating. B. Ceramic -Fiber Sealant: Single -component formulation of ceramic fibers and inorganic binders. C. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single -component, endothermic, latex formulation. D. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single -component, intumescent, latex formulation. - E. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water-resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single -component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side. G. Job -Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl -based powder product for mixing with water at Project site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E 136, with flame -spread and smoke - developed ratings of zero per ASTM E 84. FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 5 H. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogenous mortar. I. Pillows/Bags: Re -usable, heat -expanding pillows/bags composed of glass -fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral -fiber, water -insoluble expansion agents and fire -retardant additives. J. Silicone Foam: Two -component, silicone -based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. K. Silicone Sealant: Moisture -curing, single -component, silicone -based, neutral -curing elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self -leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self -leveling) grade for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces. 3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces. L. Solvent -Release -Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent -release -curing, single -component, synthetic - polymer -based sealant of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self -leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/ gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self -leveling) grade for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces. 3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag grade for openings in vertical and other surfaces. M. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: N. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Ceramic -Fiber and Mastic Coating: a. FireMaster Bulk and FireMaster Mastic, Thermal Ceramics. 2. Ceramic -Fiber Sealant: a. Metacaulk 525, The RectorSeal Corporation. 3. Endothermic, Latex Sealant: a. Fyre-Shield, Tremco Inc. 4. Endothermic, Latex Compounds: FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 6 a. Flame -Safe FS500/600 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp. b. Flame -Safe FS900/FST900 Series, International Protective Coatings Corp. 5. Intumescent Latex Sealant: a. Metacaulk 950, The RectorSeal Corporation. b. Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. 6. Intumescent Putty: a. Pensil 500 Intumescent Putty, General Electric Co. b. Flame -Safe FSP1000 Putty, International Protective Coatings Corp. C. Fire Barrier Moldable Putty, 3M Fire Protection Products. 7. Intumescent Wrap Strips: a. Dow Corning Fire Stop Intumescent Wrap Strip 2002, Dow Corning Corp. b. CS2420 Intumescent Wrap, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. C. Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip, 3M Fire Protection Products. 8. Job -Mixed Vinyl Compound: a. USG Firecode Compound, United States Gypsum Co. 9. Mortar: a. K-2 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. Novasit K-10 Firestop Mortar, Bio Fireshield, Inc. C. KBS-Mortar Seal, International Protective Coatings Corp. 10. Pillows/Bags: a. Firestop Pillows, Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. KBS Sealbags, International Protective Coatings Corp. 11. Silicone Foams: a. Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam 2001, Dow Corning Corp. b. Pensil 200 Foam, General Electric Co. 12. Silicone Sealants: a. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant 2000, Dow Corning Corp. b. Dow Corning Firestop Sealant SL 2003, Dow Coming Corp. C. Pensil 100 Firestop Sealant, General Electric Co. d. CS240 Firestop Sealant, Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. Metacaulk 835, The RectorSeal Corporation. f. Metacaulk 880, The RectorSeal Corporation. g. Fyre-Sil, Tremco Inc. h. Fyre-Sil S/L, Tremco Inc. FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 7 13. Solvent -Release -Curing Intumescent Sealants: a. Biostop 500 Intumescent Firestop Caulk, Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. Fire Barrier CP 25N/S Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. C. Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Caulk, 3M Fire Protection Products. 2.3 FIRE -RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire -resistive joint sealants. B. Sealant Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. C. Single -Component, Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure -related Use NT, and joint -substrate -related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following percentage changes in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated: a. 100 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression for a total of 150 percent movement. D. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure -related Use NT, and joint -substrate -related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. Additional Movement Capability. Provide sealant with the capability to withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated: a. 40 percent movement in extension and 25 percent in compression for a total of 65 percent movement. b. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent movement. E. Single -Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O. F. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: FIRESTOPPING 16070 - S 6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. 6.4.1. Purchasing Restrictions: CONTRACTOR must comply with the City's purchasing restrictions. A cony of the resolutions are available for review in the offices of the Purchasing and Risk Management Division or the City Clerk's office. 6.4.2. Cement Restrictions: City of Fort Collins Resolution 91-121 requires that suppliers and producers of cement or products containing cement to certify that the cement was not made in cement kilns that burn hazardous waste as a fuel. 6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All warranties and guarantees specifically called for by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of OWNER. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. Progress Schedule: 6.6. CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the progress schedule established in accordance with paragraph 2.9 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below: 6.6.1. CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph 2.9) proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will not change the Contract Times (or Milestones). Such adjustments will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 6.6.2. Proposed adjustments in the progress schedule that will change the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 12.1. Such adjustments may only be made by a Change Order or Written Amendment in accordance with Article 12. 6.7. Substitutes and "Or -Equal" Items: 6.7.1. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or -equal" item or no substitution is — permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by ENGINEER under the following circumstances: 6.7.1.1. "Or -Equal": If in ENGINEER'S sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally —' equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an "or -equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for acceptance of proposed substitute items. 6.7.1.2. Substitute Items: If in ENGINEER's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an "or -equal" item under subparagraph 6.7.1.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. - CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow ENGINEER to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. The procedure for review by the ENGINEER will include the following as supplemented in the General Requirements and as ENGINEER may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. If CONTRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material or equipment, CONTRACTOR shall first make written application to ENGINEER for acceptance thereof, certifying that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar in substance to that specified and be suited to the same use as that specified. The application will state the extent, if any, to which the evaluation _. and acceptance of the proposed substitute will prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed — substitute and whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the Work is - subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute from that specified will be identified in the application and available maintenance, repair and replacement - service will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected 12 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Single -Component, Neutral -Curing, Silicone Sealant: a. Dow Corning 790, Dow Corning Corp. b. Dow Corning 795, Dow Corning Corp. c Silpruf, General Electric Co. d Ultraglaze, General Electric Co. e 864, Pecora Corp. 2 Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: a Vulkem 922, Mameco International Inc. b Dynflex, Pecora Corp. c Dynatred, Pecora Corp. — d Dynatrol II, Pecora Corp. e Sikaflex 2cn NS, Sika Corp. f Sonolastic NP 2, Sonnebom Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. g Dymeric, Tremco Inc. 3 Single -Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: a Isoflex 880 GB, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc. b Isoflex 881, Harry S. Peterson Co., Inc. c Vulkem 921, Mameco International Inc. d Sikaflex--I5LM, Sika Corp. - "V_10V► A For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A Examine Architectural drawings to locate all fire rated walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, etc. Provide firestopping for all electrical penetrations of these areas. B Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. - FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 9 3.2 PREPARATION A Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 4 Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 5 Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 6 Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. B Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by firestopping manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials. Remove tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLING THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1 and the through - penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through -penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C Install fill materials for through -penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 7 Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 8 Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 9 For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 INSTALLING FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS A General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated. B Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 10 produce the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability and develop fire -resistance rating required. C Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed. D Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire - resistance rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING A Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which opening and joints occur. B Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection; damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and - install new materials to produce firestopping complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 16070 FIRESTOPPING 16070 - 11 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART] -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product specified. B. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with NEMA WD 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner -Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wiring Devices: a. Bryant Electric, Inc. b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices. d. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. e. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. _ f. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. g. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. h. Pyle -National, Inc.; an Amphenol Co. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Straight -Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy -Duty grade. B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed -through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R —. duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. 2.3 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 1. Cord: Rubber -insulated, stranded -copper conductors, with type SOW -A jacket. Green - insulated grounding conductor, and equipment -rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable -clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.4 SWITCHES A. Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type. 2.5 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material: Smooth nylon. 2.6 FINISHES WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 A. Color: Manufacturers standard, as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. B. All electrical devices such as switches and outlets shall be specification grade suitable for high abuse areas. C. All electrical devices such as disconnects, receptacles, etc. for mechanical equipment shall be attached directly to that equipment. D. Duplex convenience outlets and lighting switches shall be rated 20 ampere, minimum. Raceways shall not be supported from or attached to ceiling support wires. E. Install wall plates when painting is complete. F. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. G. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. 3.2 OUTLETS: A. Any unusual electric outlets which are specified to be supplied by the electrical contractor shall be specified to be provided with cord caps to match plug. Outlets shall conform to NEMA configurations. B. Use specification grade devices with all brass grounding system. C. Outlet boxes shall be minimum 4 inch nominal square or octagonal, except that cut -in boxes will be allowed in masonry walls. Sectional or handy boxes not permitted. 3.3 LIGHT SWITCHES: A. Use specification grade devices suitable for high abuse areas. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 2. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use machine - printed, pressure -sensitive, abrasion -resistant label tape on face of plate and durable wire markers or tags within outlet boxes. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. B. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch -circuit equipment grounding conductor. C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque - tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six times. B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Replace damaged or defective components. 3.7 CLEANING A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices. END OF SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 4 SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for lighting control devices. B. Maintenance Data: For lighting control devices to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control devices from a single source with total responsibility for compatibility of lighting control system components. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, for their indicated use and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Comply with 47 CFR 15, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices. D. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Contactors and Relays: LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 - 1 2. 3. 4. a. Automatic Switch Co. b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. C. Cutler -Hammer Products; Eaton Corporation. d. Furnas Electric Co. e. GE Lighting Controls. f. Hubbell Lighting, Inc. g. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc. h. Square D Co.; Power Management Organization. i. Zenith Controls, Inc. Time Switches: a. Diversified Electronics, Inc. b. Grasslin Controls Corp. C. Intermatic, Inc. d. Leviton Manufacturing. e. Paragon Electric Co., Inc. f. Tork, Inc. g. Zenith Controls, Inc. Photoelectric Relays: a. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. b. Area Lighting Research, Inc. C. Fisher Pierce. d. Grasslin Controls, Corp. e. Intermatic, Inc. f. Paragon Electric Co., Inc. g. Rhodes: M H Rhodes, Inc. h. SSAC, Inc. i. Tork, Inc. Occupancy Sensors: a. Arrow Hart Wiring Devices. b. BRK Electronics. C. Bryant Electric. d. Honeywell, Inc.; Home and Building Controls. e. Hubbell Lighting, Inc. f. Lightolier. g. Lithonia Control Systems. h. MyTech Corporation. i. Novitas, Inc. j. RAB Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. k. SenTec, Inc. 1. Sterner Lighting Systems, Inc. in. Tork, Inc. n. Touchplate. o. Unenco Electronics (A Hubbell Co.). p. Watt Stopper, Inc. (The). LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 - 2 2.2 TIME SWITCHES A. Description: Solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display complying with UL 917. B. Description: Electromechanical -dial type complying with UL 917. 1. 24-hour clock. 2. Two contacts, rated 30 A at 208-V ac, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Two pilot -duty contacts, rated 2 A at 240-V ac, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Eight -day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays. 5. Skip -day mode. 2.3 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS A. Description: Solid state, with single -pole, double -throw dry contacts rated to operate connected relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A. B. Light -Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 3500 fc (0 to 37 673 Ix), with an adjustment for turn- on/turn-off levels. C. Time Delay: Prevents false operation. D. Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped with sun -glare shield and ice preventer. 2.4 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Switch -Box -Mounting and Ceiling -Mounted Units: Unit receives power directly from switch leg of the 120-V ac circuit it controls and operates integral power switching contacts. Contacts shall be rated 800 W at 120-V ac, minimum for wall switches and 1500 W at 120-V ac minimum for ceiling mounted devices. B. Operation: Turns lights on when room or covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Time Delay for Turning Lights Off: Adjustable over a range from 1 to 15 minutes, minimum. 2. Manual Override Switch for Switch Box Mounted: Turns lights off manually regardless of elapsed time delay. C. Auxiliary Power and Control Units: As follows: 1. Relays rated for a minimum of 20-A normal ballast load or 13-A tungsten filament or high -inrush ballast load. 2. Sensor Power Supply: Rated to supply the number of connected sensors. D. Dual -Technology Type: Uses a combination of passive -infrared and ultrasonic detection methods to distinguish between occupied and unoccupied conditions for area covered. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 - 3 by the resulting change, all of which will be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitute. ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute. 6.7.1.3. CONTRACTORS Expense: All data to be provided by CONTRACTOR in support of any proposed "or -equal" or substitute item will be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 6.7.2. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction acceptable to ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow ENGINEER, in ENGINEER's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in subparagraph 6.7.1.2. 6.7.3. Engineer's Evaluation: ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraphs 6.7.1.2 and 6.7.2. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or -equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized without ENGINEER's prior written acceptance which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or an approved Shop Drawing. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any "or -equal" or substitute. ENGINEER will record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants in evaluating substitutes proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.7.1.2 and 6.7.2 and in making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER accepts a substitute item so proposed or submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants for evaluating each such proposed substitute item. 6_8. Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others: 6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization (including those acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER as indicated in paragraph 6.8.2), whether initially or as a substitute, against whom OWNER or ENGINEER may have reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection. 6_9. CONTRACTOR shall perform not less than 20 percent of the Work with its own forces (that is, without subcontracting). The 20 percent requirement shall be understood to refer to the Work the value of which totals not less than 20 percent of the Contract Price. 6.8.2. if the c,,....lementai.,.C,.nditie Biddin Documents require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers or other persons or organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of materials or equipment) to be submitted to OWNER in aEK,. nee of the ee:Fed date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement for acceptance by OWNER and ENGINEER, —ad --if CONTRACTOR CTO has m.bfftitt,.a a list thereof in OWNER's or ENGINEER's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the bidding documents or the Contract Documents) of WIN - -RIN PIA - ---------- - Aijl be issued of Written A&nendfaei# signed. will constitute a condition of the Contract requiring the use of the named subcontractors, suppliers or other persons or organization on the Work unless prior written approval is obtained from OWNER and ENGINEER. No acceptance by OWNER or ENGINEER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work. 6.9.1. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization any contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to any subcontractor, supplier or other person or or¢anization evidence of amounts paid to CONTRACTOR in accordance with CONTRACTOR'S "Applications for Payment". EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 13 Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls each function (on or off) is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 2.5 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS _ A. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, and complying with UL 508 and NEMA ICS 2. 1. Current Rating for Switching: UL listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high -inrush ballast (ballasts with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION — A. Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of unit for wall -mounting devices. 3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic _ Electrical Materials and Methods." C. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. D. Ground equipment. E. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 - 4 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days' advance notice. B. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Check tightness of electrical connections with torque wrench calibrated within previous six months. Use manufacturer's recommended torque values. D. Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated within previous six months. E. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Continuity tests of circuits. 2. Operational Tests: Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions. a. Include testing of devices under conditions that simulate actual operational conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional observations. F. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified requirements are met. G. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representative. H. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and preventive maintenance. Provide a minimum of three hours' training. 2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of maintenance manuals as a training aid. 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. 3.7 ON -SITE ASSISTANCE LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 - 5 A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three Project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program changes, and adjust sensors and controls to suit actual conditions. 3.8 CONTROL SEQUENCE FOR EXTERIOR LIGHTING A. Each control zone shall be controlled by a 24 hour clock, photo cell and contactor combination. The photo control shall turn the lights on at dusk and off at dawn. The 24-hour time clock shall turn the lights off after dusk and on before dawn. The electrician as directed by the owner shall program these on/off time settings. The light zones shall be wired through the contactors and these photo cell(s) and time clocks shall control these contactors. One photocell may be used when provided with at least a 3-contactor relay. END OF SECTION 16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 - 6 SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches used for the following: 1. Service disconnecting means. 2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and toggle switches used for disconnecting means. 2. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fusible devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. B. RMS: Root mean square. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of switch, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and for components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for components. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 1 A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Spares: For the following: a. Fuses for Fused Switches: 1. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fusible Switches: a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler -Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co. 2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 2 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations (Greenhouse areas): NEMA 250, Type 4. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray paint applied to factory -assembled and -tested enclosures before shipping. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and control and indication devices. C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 3 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 4 SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types: 1. Lighting and appliance branch -circuit panelboards. 2. Distribution panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground -fault circuit interrupter. C. RFL• Radio -frequency interference. D. RMS: Root mean square. E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. F. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. C. Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PANELBOARDS 16442 - 1 A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Keys: Six spares of each type of panelboard cabinet lock. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories: ^ a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler -Hammer Products. _ b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co. 2.2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES A. Enclosures: Surface -mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, to meet environmental conditions at installed location. Surface -mounted cabinets as indicated. For panel LPPH use Type 4. NO EXCEPTIONS. Option is panelboard with Type 1 enclosure mounted within NEMA Type 4 cabinet enclosure with door. B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box _ dimensions. C. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. PANELBOARDS 16442 - 2 D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer coat. E. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panelboard door. F. Bus: Hard -drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. G. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. H. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. I. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. J. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch -circuit equipment ground conductors; insulated from box. 2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING A. UL label indicating series -connected rating with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series -connected short-circuit rating. B. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. B. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.5 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Doors: Front mounted, secured with vault -type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. B. Branch overcurrent protective devices shall be one of the following: 1. For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Plug-in circuit breakers. 2. For Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt -on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive -locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.6 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PANELBOARDS 16442 - 3 7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated by reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE B. MISCELLANEOUS 8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not without limitations, moneys that may become,due.'and moneys,, that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the. extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Document. 8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document. 9/12/01 Section 00520 Page 5 6.9.2. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with the ENGINEER through CONTRACTOR. 6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. 6.11. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of OWNER and ENGINEER. pamgrephs5.6 or 5.7, the agreement be#ween the syaiaes all—rig:ts agai-A 0WNE ; GON rn AGTO x cvx�-rxazcTvxr ENGPMER, L'TICA4hM-EIR'S !'..wult....ts and all a l.e.. , the We -k if the iasurm ,.1. ..Bois. Patent Fees and Royalties: 6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by OWNER in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents. Permits: 6.13. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. 6.14. Laws and Regulations: 6.14.1. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. 6.14.2. If CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting therefrom; however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraph 3.3.2. Taxes: 6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.15.1. OWNER is exempt from Colorado State and local sales and use taxes on materials to be permanently incorporated into the project. Said taxes shall not be included in the Contract Price. the project. Address: Colorado Department of Revenue State Capital Annex EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 14 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. I. Thermal -Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time -current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. B. Molded -Case Circuit -Breaker Features and Accessories. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories in pencil are acceptable. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. F. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as.specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated -plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. PANELBOARDS 16442 - 4 B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. B. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows: 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load -balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data-processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS 16442 - 5 SECTION 16478 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes transient voltage surge suppressors for low -voltage circuits and equipment. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Transient voltage suppression for low -voltage distribution systems, with suppressors located at service entrances equipment. B. System Exposure: IEEE C62.41, medium. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. B. Maintenance Data: For transient voltage surge suppressors to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that is listed and labeled. 0. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 1. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with UL 1449 Second Edition Testing. Manufacturer to comply with ISO 9000 Quality Control procedures. D. Comply with IEEE Std. 142-1991, Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems, TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16478 - 1 IEEE, NY, 1992. E. Comply with IEEE Std. 1100-1999, Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment, IEEE, NY, 1999. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Government of other rights the Government may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace components of transient voltage surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.8 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS A. Liebert, Interceptor Series Surge Suppressor B. Functional Description: Solid-state, 2-stage, transient voltage surge suppressors employing no series -connected suppression components. 1. Primary Suppression: Employs metal oxide varistor suppression modules. 2. Secondary Suppression: Employs metal oxide varistor suppression modules. 3. Fuses in each suppression -module circuit prevent damage to suppressor during failure of any module. C. Overall Ratings: As indicated and as required to comply with location categories according to NEMA LS 1. D. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: At least 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage. E. Connection Means: Permanently wired. F. Protection Modes: Include the following: 1. Line -to -neutral, where applied on grounded circuits. 2. Line -to -line. 3. Line -to -ground. 4. Neutral -to -ground, where applied on grounded circuits. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16478 - 2 COMMUNITY HORTICULTURE CENTER, CITY OF FORT COLLINS G. Service Conditions: Include the following: 1. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C). 2. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing. 3. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6000 m) above sea level. H. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1. I. Options: Status indicator with both audible and visual indication. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, power characteristics, and other conditions affecting performance of transient voltage surge suppressors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Connect transient voltage suppression circuit in line -to -neutral configuration. B. Ground each transient voltage surge suppressor enclosure. I. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Supervision of the field assembly of components and installation of transient voltage surge suppressors, including electrical connections, by a factory -authorized service representative. Report results in writing. END OF SECTION 16478 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 16478 - 3 "' SECTION 16491 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cartridge fuses, rated 600 V and less, for use in switches and controllers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NEMA FU 1. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate fuse ratings with HVAC and refrigeration equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged in original cartons or containers and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Quantity equal to 10 percent of each fuse type and size, but not fewer than 1 of each type and size. FUSES 16491 - 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div. 2. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 3. Ferraz Corp. 4. General Electric Co.; Wiring Devices Div. 5. Gould Shawmut. 6. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary. 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS A. Main Service: Class RK1, time delay. B. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay. C. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION FUSES 16491 - 2 A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch. END OF SECTION 16491 FUSES 16491 - 3 SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: _ 1. Division 16 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for programmable lighting control systems, time switches, additional photoelectric relays, power relays, and contactors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture indicated, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, and the following: 1. Dimensions of fixtures. 2. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 3. Fluorescent and high -intensity -discharge ballasts. _ 4. Types of lamps. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and sections drawn to scale and coordinating fixture installation with ceiling grid, ceiling -mounted items, and other components in the �. vicinity. Include work of all trades that is to be installed near lighting equipment. C. Maintenance Data: For lighting fixtures to include in maintenance manuals specified in — Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 'NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs. INTERIOR LIGHTING 1.5 COORDINATION A. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling system and other construction. 1w§�I.LT/7 77"V1 A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty for Batteries: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to replace rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Special Warranty Period for Batteries: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for last nine years. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule on the Contract Documents. 2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions, and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 2 1375 Sherman Street Denver, Colorado, 80261 Sales and Use Taxes for the State of Colorado Regional Transportation District (RTD) and certain Colorado counties are collected by the State of Colorado and are included in the Certification of Exemption. All applicable Sales and Use Taxes (including State collected taxes), on any items other than construction and building materials physically incorporated into the project are to be paid by CONTRACTOR and are to be included in appropriate bid items. Use of Premises: 6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of workers to the site and land and areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents and other land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, rights -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant and anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against OWNER, ENGINEER or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. 6.17. During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. CONTRACTOR shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER at Substantial Completion of the Work. CONTRACTOR shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. Record Documents: 6.19. CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders and written interpretations , and clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9.4) in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion of the Work, and prior to release of final payment these record documents, Samples and Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER. Safety and Protection: 6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 6.20.1. all persons on the Work site or who may be affected by the Work; 6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and 6.20.3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in paragraphs 6.20.2 or 6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultant or anyone employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them). CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 15 2.3 A. M C. 1V3 E. 2.4 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and ultraviolet radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch (3 mm) minimum, unless greater thickness is indicated. FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 3. Sound Rating: A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following, besides those in "General Requirements" Paragraph above: 1. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. 2. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound. 3. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. Ballasts for Compact Lamps in Recessed Fixtures: Unless otherwise indicated, additional features include the following: 1. Type: Electronic, fully encapsulated in potting compound. 2. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 3. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 4. Flicker: Less than 5 percent. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: Less than 1.7. 6. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A 1 locations. 7. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C for limitations on electromagnetic and radio -frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 8. End of life technology to remove the lamp from the circuit. Ballasts for Compact Lamps in Nonrecessed Fixtures: Unless otherwise indicated, additional features include the following: I . Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum. 3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category Al locations. 4. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C for limitations on electromagnetic and radio -frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 5. End of life technology to remove the lamp from the circuit. Ballasts for Low -Temperature Environments: As follows: 1. Temperatures 0 Deg F (Minus 17 Deg C) and Above: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F (minus 17 deg C) starting temperature. EXIT SIGNS INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 3 A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 924 and the following: Sign Colors and Lettering Size: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: As follows: Lamps for AC Operation: Light -emitting diodes, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. C. Self -Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): hrtegral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, nickel -cadmium type with special warranty. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. General Requirements: Self-contained units. Comply with UL 924. Units include the following features: 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance -free, lead -acid type with minimum 10-year nominal life and special warranty. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep -discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 2.6 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color -Rendering Index: 3500 K and 85 CRI, unless otherwise indicated. B. Noncompact Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on rapid -start circuits. 2.7 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for channel- and angle -iron supports. B. Single -Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Aircraft Cable Support: Use cable, anchorages, and intermediate supports recommended by fixture manufacturer. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 4 2.8 FINISHES A. Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion -resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittal materials. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid -Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support. 1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Arrange as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4- inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. C. Suspended Fixture Support: As follows: 1. Continuous Rows: Suspend from cable installed according to fixture manufacturer's written instructions and details on Drawings. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests. C. Tests: As follows: I. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. 2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 5 3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. D. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. E. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period. 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust aimable fixtures as required by the Architect and Engineer. 3.5 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. See schedule on Contract Documents END OF SECTION 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 6 SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts, but not mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Lighting Poles and Standards" for poles and other support structures and for requirements of resistance to wind and ice loads. 2. Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, arranged in the order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of fixture, including dimensions and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Luminaire dimensions, effective projected area, details of attaching luminaires, accessories, and installation and construction details. 3. Luminaire materials. 4. High -intensity -discharge ballasts. 5. High -intensity -discharge lamps. 6. Electrical and energy -efficiency data for ballasts. B. Shop Drawings: Anchor -bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. C. Coordination Drawings: Mounting and connection details, drawn to scale, for exterior luminaires with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Lighting Poles and Standards." D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate exterior luminaires with mounting and wind load requirements in Division 2 Section "Lighting Poles and Standards." 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace luminaires or components of luminaires and lamps that fail in materials or workmanship; corrode; or fade, stain, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. a. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL A. Complying with UL [1572] [1598] and listed for installation in wet locations. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 -2 B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion -resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light -tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under _ operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or ^ replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. I. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. J. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging -resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. 2.3 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES _„ A. Luminaires as specified on the plans. I 2.4 HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS A. General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Type: Constant -wattage autotransformer or regulating high -power -factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C) for single -lamp -- ballasts. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg Q. 4. Open -circuit operation will not reduce average life. 5. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 3 '- 2.5 HIGH -INTENSITY -DISCHARGE LAMPS A. Metal -Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage and burning position as scheduled, CRI 75 (minimum), and color temperature 3000. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHES A. Factory -Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard -coat wax. 3. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: Black. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for isofootcandle curves, zonal lumen, average and minimum ratios, and electrical and energy -efficiency data for ballasts. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque - tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 4 END OF SECTION 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 5 SECTION 16851 - FIRE ALARM PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire alarm systems with manual stations, detectors, signal equipment, controls, and devices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. FACT: Fire alarm control panel. B. LED: Light -emitting diode. C. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Noncoded, addressable -analog system with manual and automatic alarm initiation; automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors; and multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. , Shop Drawings: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. 2. Battery: Sizing calculations. 3. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations and routings of raceway connections. 4. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. 5. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable. FIRE ALARM 16851 - 1 notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 14.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.21. Safety Representative: CONTRACTOR shall designate a qualified. and experienced safety representative at the site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. Hazard Communication Programs. 6.22. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating, any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. Emergencies: 6.23. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from OWNER or ENGINEER, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.24. Shop Drawings and Samples: 6.24.1. CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the accepted schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals (see paragraph 2.9). All submittals will be identified as ENGINEER may require and in the number of copies specified in the General Requirements. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show ENGINEER the materials and equipment CONTRACTOR proposes to provide and to enable ENGINEER to review the information for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.26. 6.24.2. CONTRACTOR shall also submit Samples to ENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with said accepted schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. Each Sample will be identified clearly as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use for which intended and otherwise as ENGINEER may require to enable ENGINEER to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by paragraph 6.26. The numbers of each Sample to be submitted will be as specified in the Specifications. 6.25. Submittal Procedures: 6.25.1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, CONTRACTOR shall have determined and verified: 6.25.1.1. all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, 6.25.1.2. all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and 6.25.1.3. all information relative to CONTRACTOR's sole responsibilities in respect of means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. CONTRACTOR shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 6.25.2. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to CONTRACTOR's review and approval of that submittal. 6.25.3. At the time of each submission, CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to ENGINEER for review and approval of each such variation. 6.26. ENGINEER will review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals accepted by ENGINEER as required by paragraph 2.9. ENGINEER's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of r7 E]CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 16 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating installation of smoke detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each duct ^ smoke provision of detector installation: 1. Size and location of ducts, including lining. 2. Size and location of piping. "- 3. Size and arrangement of structural elements. 4. Size and location of duct smoke detector, including air -sampling elements. D. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the FACP. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. F. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with — requirements. G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. Comply with NFPA 72. _ H. Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Comply with NFPA 72. I. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for Submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submission to authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review. J. Certificate of Completion: Comply with NFPA 72. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the FACP manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through one source from a single — manufacturer. D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local ordinances and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Comply with NFPA 72. — 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS FIRE ALARM 16851 - 2 A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than one unit. 2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than one unit. 3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type. 4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type. S. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cerberus Pyrotronics. 2. Edwards Systems Technology; Unit of General Signal. 3. Faraday, Inc. 4. Federal Signal Corp.; Commercial Products Group. 5. Fire Control Instruments, Inc. 6. Fire Lite Alarms, Inc. 7. Gamewell Co. (The). 8. Grinnell Fire Protection Systems. 9. Harrington Signal, Inc; Fire Alarm. 10. Honeywell, Inc. 11. Notifier; Div. of Pittway Corp. 12. Protectowire Co., Inc. (The). 13. Silent Knight. 14. Simplex Time Recorder Co. 2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Control of System: By the FACP. B. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuits, shorts, and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification -appliance circuits. C. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An alarm signal is the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third - level priority. Higher -priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the lower -priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received. FIRE ALARM 16851 - 3 D. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other zones. E. System Reset: All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after initiating devices are restored to normal. F. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator transmitter and telephone lines. G. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or wire -to -wire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in an initiating device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification -appliance circuit. H. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP. The FACP indicates when the fire alarm system is operating on the secondary power supply. I. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP. An emergency power light is illuminated at the location when the system is operating on the secondary power supply. J. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual station, automatic alarm operation of a smoke or heat detector, device initiates the following: 1. Notification -appliance operation. 2. Identification at the FACP of the device originating the alarm. 3. Transmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. - 4. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 5. Shutdown of fans and other air -handling equipment serving zone when alarm was initiated. - 6. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was initiated. 7. Recording of the event in the system memory. K. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the FACP. a 1. Silencing -switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained. " 2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again. 3. When alarm -initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset. _ L. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity -adjustment schedule changes are recorded in system memory. M. Removal of an alarm -initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following: FIRE ALARM 16851 - 4 1. A "trouble" signal indication at the FACP for the device or zone involved. 2. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station. N. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain -English -language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm -initiating or supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory. 2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised -letter operating instructions of contrasting color 1. Double -action mechanism requires two actions, such as a push and a pull, to initiate an alarm. 2. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double pole, double throw; switch rated for the voltage and current at which it operates. 3. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory -fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. In rooms 119, 120, 121 and 122. 4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate manual -station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. 2.4 SMOKE DETECTORS A. General: Include the following features: 1. Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal 2. Self -Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in a module that connects in a tamper -resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist -locking plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring. 4. Integral Visual -Indicating Light: LED type. Indicates detector has operated. 5. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in -place after installation. 6. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. 7. Remote Controllability: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors are analog -addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features: 1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon -cell receiver. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011 percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A. 3. Integral Thermal Detector: Fixed -temperature type with 135 deg F (57 deg C) setting. C. Duct Smoke Detector: Photoelectric type. FIRE ALARM 16851 - 5 1. Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 2. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor -control circuit. 2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory -integrated audible and visible devices in a single - mounting assembly. B. Horns: Electric -vibrating -polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns produce a sound -pressure level of 90 dB, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn. C. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971 with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens. Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens. -- 1. Rated Light Output: 75 candela. 2. Rated Light Output: 110 candela. 3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 2.6 CENTRAL FACP A. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange interior components so operations required for - testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with matching modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter space for field wiring and interconnecting panels. 1. Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenolic -resin nameplate with lettering not less than 1 inch (25 mm) high. Identify individual components and modules within cabinets with permanent labels. 2. Mounting: Flush. - B. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the FACP. Alarm -initiating zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is unacceptable. C. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire alarm systems. D. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound. E. Indicating Lights and System Controls: Individual LED devices identify zones transmitting signals. Zone lights distinguish between alarm and trouble signals, and indicate the type of FIRE ALARM 16851 - 6 device originating the signal. Manual switches and push -to -test buttons do not require a key to operate. Controls include the following: 1. Alarm acknowledge switch. 2. Alarm silence switch. 3. System reset switch. 4. LED test switch. F. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the alarm or trouble condition still exists. G. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at the FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and control. 1. Display: A minimum of 80 characters; alarm, supervisory, and component status messages; and indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. H. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless -steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.7 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY A. General: Components include nickel -cadmium battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch. 1. Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 20 years, minimum. B. Battery Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72. 1. Magnetic door holders are not served by emergency power. Magnetic door holders are released when normal power fails. C. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable -charging -rate type. Provide capacity for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within four hours. Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision. D. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals or status indications when normal power fails. 2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system address for listed fire initiating devices with normally open contacts. FIRE ALARM 16851 - 7 2.9 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER A. Listed and labeled under UL 864 and NFPA 72. B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the FACP panel, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising two lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local trouble — signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated. C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity is adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements. D. Self Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. 2.10 WIRE .I A. Non -Power -Limited Circuits: Solid -copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color -coded insulation. 1. Low -Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line -Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. B. Power -Limited Circuits: NFPA 70, Types FPL, FPLR, or FPLP, as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Connect the FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover. B. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes. C. Ceiling -Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from a side wall to the near edge. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install not more than 30 feet (9 m) apart in any direction. D. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 60 inches (1520 mm). E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air -handling system is operating. 2. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct. FIRE ALARM 16851 - 8 F. Audible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install horns on flush -mounted back boxes with the device -operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location into a single unit. G. Visible Alarm -Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm horn and at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. H. Device Location -Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. I. FACP: Flush mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power -limited and non -power -limited conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp -on terminal spade lugs, pressure -type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. D. Color -Coding: Color -code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color -code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color -code for supervisory circuits. Color -code audible alarm -indicating circuits differently from alarm -initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm -indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red. E. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch (25-mm) conduit between the FACP and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP. C. Paint power -supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM." 3.4 GROUNDING FIRE ALARM 16851 - 9 A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common - mode returns, noise pickup„ and other impairments. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and connections and to supervise pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system. Report results in writing. B. Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete _ pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the compliance of the system with requirements of Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory performance and _ conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results. C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests. D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Minimum required tests are as follows: 1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. 2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation -testing device. 3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on record drawings. 4. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. 5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class of wiring used. 6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion. 7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. 8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified. F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets Specifications and complies with applicable standards. FIRE ALARM 16851 - 10 G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of tests. H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed. 3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment and schedules. Provide a minimum of 4 hours' training. 2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual as a training aid. 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. 3.8 ON -SITE ASSISTANCE A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on -site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three requested visits to Project site for this purpose. END OF SECTION 16851 FIRE ALARM 16851 - 11 construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by ENGINEER, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submittals. 6.27. ENGINEER's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER's attention to each such variation at the time of submission as required by paragraph 6.25.3 and ENGINEER has given written approval of each such variation by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph 6.25.1. 6.28. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submissions accepted by ENGINEER as required by paragraph 2.9, any related Work performed prior to ENGINEER's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Continuing the Work: 6.29. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as OWNER and CONTRACTOR may otherwise agree in writing. 6.30. CONTRACTOR's General Warranty and Guarantee: 6.30.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER, ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. CONTRACTOR's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 6.30.1.1. abuse, modification or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or Suppliers; or 6.30.1.2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. 6.30.2. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 6.30.2.1. observations by ENGINEER; 6.30.2.2. recommendation of any progress or final payment by ENGINEER; 6.30.2.3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents; 6.30.2.4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER; 6.30.2.5. any acceptance by OWNER or any failure to do so; 6.30.2.6. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 14.13; 6.30.2.7. any inspection, test or approval by others; or 6.30.2.8. any correction of defective Work by OWNER. Indemnification: 6.31. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including, but not limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person or entity. 6.32. In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGINEER or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by 17 No Text any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.31 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 6.33. The indemnification obligations of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.31 shall not extend to the liability of ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants, officers, directors, employees or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. Survival of Obligations. 6.34. All representations, indemnifications, warranties and guarantees made in, required by or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion and acceptance of the Work and termination or completion of the Agreement. ARTICLE 7—OTHER WORK Related Work at Site: 7.1. OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the site by OWNER's own forces, or let other direct contracts therefor which shall contain General Conditions similar to these, or have other work performed by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other work and (ii) CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12 if CONTRACTOR believes that such performance will involve additional expense to CONTRACTOR or requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof. 7.2. CONTRACTOR shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner (and OWNER, if OWNER is performing the additional work with OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of ENGINEER and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other contractors. 7.3. If the proper execution or results of any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, CONTRACTOR shall inspect such other work and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of CONTRACTOR'S Work. CONTRACTOR's failure so to report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in such other work. Coordination: 7.4. If OWNER contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 7.4.1. the person, firm or corporation who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; 7.4.2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 7.4.3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. ARTICLE 8—OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.1. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, OWNER shall issue all communications to CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER. 8.2. In case of termination of the employment of ENGINEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer against .hem CONTRACTOR CTO «...Les n feasenable objeetien whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former ENGINEER. 8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to CONTRACTOR promptly when they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13. 8.4. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4. Paragraph 4.2 refers to OWNER's identifying and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site and drawings of physical conditions in existing E1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 18 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) structures at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Contract Documents. taming liability a M �—�.zx��zavxi.z liability and insurance are vcz 8.6. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in paragraph 10.4. 8.7. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.4. 8.8. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work or suspend Work, see paragraphs 13.10 and 15.1. Paragraph 15.2 deals with OWNER's right to terminate services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances. 8.9. The OWNER shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. OWNER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. AM!" • • MHO . • •1.1 ------------ ARTICLE 9—ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION OWNER's Representative: 9.1. ENGINEER will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER. Visits to Site. 9.2. ENGINEER will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as ENGINEER deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of CONTRACTOR's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, ENGINEER will endeavor for the benefit of OWNER to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on - site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on - site observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defective Work. ENGINEER's visits and on -site observations are subject to all the limitations on ENGINEER's authority and responsibility set forth in paragraph 9.13, and particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of ENGINEER's on -site visits or observations of CONTRACTOR's Work ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Project Representative: 9.3. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist ENGINEER in providing more continuous observation of the Work. The responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in paragraphs 9.3 and 9.13 and ift the c......,,.., enta Conditions of these General Conditions. If OWNER designates another representative or agent to represent OWNER at the site who is not ENGINEER's Consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other person will be as provided in paragraph 9.3 the 9.3.2 Duties and Responsibilities Representative will: 9.3.2.1. Schedules - Review the progress EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 19 schedule and other schedules prepared by the CONTRACTOR and consult with the ENGINEER concerning acceptability. 9.3.2.2. Conferences and Meeting - Attend meeting with the CONTRACTOR such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings and other job conferences and prepare and circulate copies of minutes of meetings. 9.3.2.3. Liaison 9.3.2.3.1. Serve as ENGINEER'S liaison with CONTRACTOR, working principally through CONTRACTOR'S superintendent to assist the CONTRACTOR in understanding the Contract Documents. 9.3.2.3.2. Assist in obtaining from OWNER additional details or information, when required, for proper execution of the Work. 9.3.2.3.3. Advise the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR of the commencement of any Work requiring a Shop Drawing or sample submission if the submission has not been approved by the ENGINEER. 9.3.2.4.Review of Work, Rejection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests - 9.3.2.4.1. Conduct on -site observations of the Work in progress to assist the ENGINEER in determining that the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.3.2.4.2. Report to the ENGINEER whenever the Representative believes that' the Work is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective or does not conform to the Contract Documents or has been damaged, or does not meet the M uirements of any inspections, tests or approvals required to be made; and advise the ENGINEER when he believes work should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. 9.3.2.4.3. Accompany visiting_ inspectors representing public or other agencies having iurisdiction over the Project, record the results of these inspections and report to the ENGINEER. 9.3.2.5. Interpretation of Contract Documents. Report to ENGINEER when clarifications and jnter retations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to CONTRACTOR clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents as issued by the ENGINEER. 9.3.2.6. Modifications. Consider and evaluate CONTRACTOR'S suggestions for modification in Drawings or Specifications and report these recommendations to ENGINEER. Accurately transmit to CONTRACTOR_ decisions issued by the ENGINEER. 9.3.2.7. Records. 9.3.2.7.1. Maintain at the Representative's office orderly files concerning correspondence, roorts of iob conferences, Shop Drawings and samples, reproductions or original Contract Documents including all Work Directive Changes, Addenda, Change orders, Field Orders, additional drawings issued subsequent to the execution of the Agreement, ENGINEER'S clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents, progress reports and other project documents. 9.3.2.7.2. Keep a diary, daily report form, or log book, recording hours on the iob site; weather conditions, data relative to questions of work directive changes, Change Orders, or changed conditions, list of iob site visitors, daily activities, decisions, observations in general and specific observations in more detail as in the case of observing test procedures; send copies to the ENGINEER. 9.3.2.7.3. Record names addresses and telephone numbers of all CONTRACTORS, subcontractors and major suppliers of equipment and materials. 9.3.2.8. Reports. 9.3.2.8.1. Furnish ENGINEER periodic reports, as required, of the progress of Work and of the CONTRACTOR'S compliance with the progress schedule and _ schedule of shop Drawing and sample submittals. 9.3.2.8.2. Consult with ENGINEER in advance of scheduling major tests, inspections or start of important phases of the Work. 9.3.2.8.3. Draft proposed Change Orders and Work Directive Changes, obtaining - backup material from the CONTRACTOR and recommend to ENGINEER Change Orders, Work Directive Changes and field orders. 9.3.2.8.4 Report immediately to ENGINEER and OWNER the occurrence of any accident. 9.3.2.9. Payment Requests. Review applications for payment with CONTRACTOR for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendation to EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 20 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) ENGINEER. noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the schedule of values. work completed and materials and equipment delivered at the site but not incorporated in the Work. 9.3.2.10. Completion. 9.3.2.10.1. Before ENGINEER issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion submit to CONTRACTOR a list of observed items requiring correction or completion 9.3.2.10.2. Conduct final inspection in the company of the ENGINEER. OWNER and CONTRACTOR and prepare a final list of items to be corrected or completed. 9.3.2.10.3. Observe that all items on the final list have been corrected or completed and make recommendations to ENGINEER concerning acceptance. 9.3.3. Limitation of Authority: The Representative shall not: 9.3.3.1. Authorize any deviations from the Contract Documents or accept any substitute materials or equipment, unless authorized by the ENGINEER. 9.3.3.2. Exceed limitations of ENGINEER'S authority as set forth in the Contract Documents 9.3.3.3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, or CONTRACTOR'S superintendent. 9.3.3.4. Advise on, or issue directions relative to or assume control over any aspect of the means, methods, techniques sequences or procedures for construction unless such is specifically called for in the Contract Documents. 9.3.3.5. Advise on or issue directions regarding or assume control over safety precautions and programs in connections with the Work. 9.3.3.6 Accept Shop Drawings or sample submittals from anyone other than the CONTRACTOR. 9.3.3.7. Authorize OWNER to occupy the Work in whole or in part. 9.3.3.8. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted by thers except as specifically authorized by the ENGINEER. Clarifications and Interpretations: 9.4. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a written claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. Authorized Variations in Work: 9.5. ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If OWNER or CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a written claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or 12. Rejecting Defective Work. 9.6. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, or that ENGINEER believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.9, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments: 9.7. In connection with ENGINEER's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see paragraphs 6.24 through 6.28 inclusive. 9.8. In connection with ENGINEER' authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. 9.9. In connection with ENGINEERSs authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. Determinations far Unit Prices: 9.10. ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR the ENGINEER's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application 21 for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER's written decision thereon will be final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, unless, within ten days after the date of any such decision, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR delivers to the other and to ENGINEER written notice of intention to appeal from ENGINEER's decision and: (i) an appeal from ENGINEER's decision is taken within the time limits and in accordance with the procedures set forth in Exhibit GC -A, "Dispute Resolution Agreement", entered into between OWNER and CONTRACTOR pursuant to Article 16, or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to ENGINEER's decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Such appeal will not be subject to the procedures of paragraph 9.11. Decisions on Disputes.- 9.11. ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the Work and claims under Articles 11 and 12 in respect of changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to ENGINEER and the other party within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event unless ENGINEER allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to ENGINEER and the claimant within thirty days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless ENGINEER allows additional time). ENGINEER will render a formal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. ENGINEER's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR unless: (i) an appeal from ENGINEER's decision is taken within the time limits and in accordance with the procedures set forth in EXHIBIT GC -A, "Dispute Resolution Agreement", entered into between OWNER and CONTRACTOR pursuant to Article 16, or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from ENGINEER's written decision is delivered by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to the other and to ENGINEER within thirty days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 9.12. When functioning as interpreter and judge under paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11, ENGINEER will not show partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraphs 9.10 or 9.11 with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided in paragraph 14.15) will be a condition precedent to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter 9.13. Limitations on ENGINEER's Authority and Responsibilities. 9.13.1. Neither ENGINEER's authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. 9.13.2. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or famish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.13.3. ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work. 9.13.4. ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by paragraph 14.12 will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. 9.13.5. The limitations upon authority and EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 22 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) responsibility set forth in this paragraph 9.13 shall also apply to ENGINEER's Consultants, Resident Project Representative and assistants. ARTICLE 10—CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.1. Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). 10.2. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. 10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6, except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.23 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.9. 10.4. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by ENGINEER (or Written Amendments) covering: 10.4.1. changes in the Work which are (i) ordered by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.1, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under paragraph 13.13 or correcting defective Work under paragraph 13.14, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 10.4.2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties; and 10.4.3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 9.11; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in paragraph 6.29. 10.5. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. ARTICLE 11—CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE 11.1. The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense without change in the Contract Price. 11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless ENGINEER allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.2. 11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 11.3.1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 23 OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS By: fL I. L'C-au JOHN AVISCHBACH, JC�I_TY fMANAGER BY JAME 'B. O'NEILL II, CPPO, FNIGP D ECTOR OF PURCHASING AND i Ib M]SNAG EMENT Date: ` J Attest: gL '-' City Cle k Address for giving notices: P. 0. Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 Approved as to Form " 7)�d'14 Ass t nt ty Attorney 9/12/01 CONTRACTOR:Golden Triangle Construction, Inc. M EWR Title: Date: Q-/S-G3 (CORPORATE SEAL) Attest C 1— � CLP-k3(- , ASE-T SEc=Ae-1111" Address for giving notices: '?oC) tOeAyE-P- PNPJL Lo AZ L)Lyj,)-Ko,t,5(-,, Cc) LICENSE NO.: & zq 8 Section 00520 Page 6 paragraphs 11.9.1 through 11.9.3, inclusive); 11.3.2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed payment basis, including lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with paragraph 11.6.2); 11.3.3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under paragraph 11.3.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5) plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in paragraph 11.6). Cost of the Work: 11.4. The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.5: 11.4.1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR Such employees shall include without limitation superintendents, foremen and other personnel employed full-time at the site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full-time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include; but net be limited to-, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work after regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by OWNER. 11.4.2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the Subcontractors for Work performed or furnished by Subcontractors. If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER who will then determine, with the advice of ENGINEER, which bids, if any, will be accepted. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in paragraphs 11.4, 11.5, 11.6 and 11.7. All subcontracts shall be subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable. 11.4.4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 11.4.5. Supplemental costs including the following: 11.4.5.1. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. 11.4.5.2. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost less market value of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of CONTRACTOR. 11.4.5.3. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof whether rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of ENGINEER, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, installation, dismantling and removal thereof --all in accordance with terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 11.4.5.4. Sales, consumer, use or similar taxes related to the Work, and for which CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. 11.4.5.5. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. 11.4.5.6. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by CONTRACTOR in connection with the EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 24 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) performance and furnishing of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.9), provided they have resulted from causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRACTORS fee. If, however, any such loss or damage requires reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is placed in charge thereof, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for services a fee proportionate to that stated in paragraph 11.6.2. 11.4.5.7. The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities at the site. 11.4.5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the site, expressage and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. 11.4.5.9. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of changes in the Work. 11.5. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following: 11.5.1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives, principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, ,,architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in CONTRACTOR's principal or a branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph 11.4.1 or specifically covered by paragraph 11.4.4—all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the CONTRACTOR's fee. 11.5.2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal and branch offices other than CONTRACTOR' office at the site. 11.5.3. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR'S capital employed for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. 11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same (except for the cost of premiums covered by subparagraph 11.4.5.9 above). 11.5.5. Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly'or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied and making good any damage to property. 11.5.6. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in paragraph 11.4. 11.6. The CONTRACTOR's fee allowed to CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 11.6.1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 11.6.2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: 11.6.2.1. for costs incurred under paragraphs 11.4.1 and 11.4.2, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be fifteen percent; 11.6.2.2. for costs incurred under paragraph 11.4.3, the CONTRACTOR's fee shall be five percent; 11.6.2.3. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of paragraphs 11.4.1, 11.4.2, 11.4.3 and 11.6.2 is that the Subcontractor who actually performs or furnishes the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of fifteen percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under paragraphs 11.4.1 and 11.4.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and CONTRACTOR will each be paid a fee to be negotiated in good faith with the OWNER but not to exceed five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor. 11.6.2.4. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under paragraphs 11.4.4, 11.4.5 and 11.5; 11.6.2.5. the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in CONTRACTOR's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and 11.6.2.6. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in CONTRACTOR's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with paragraphs 11.6.2.1 through 11.6.2.5,inclusive. 11.7. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 25 determined pursuant to paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5, CONTRACTOR will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in form acceptable to ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. Cash Allowances. 11.8. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR agrees that: 11.8..1. the allowances include the cost to CONTRACTOR (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes; and 11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.9. Unit Price Work. 11.9.1. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit prices for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 9.10. 11.9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. 11.9.3.OWNER or CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 11 if 11.9.3.1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 11.9.3.2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and 11.9.3.3. if CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or OWNER believes that OWNER is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. 11.9 3.4 CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER has the right to add or delete items in the Bid or change quantities at OWNER'S sole discretion without affecting the Contract Price of any remaining item so long as the deletion or addition does not exceed twenty-five percent of the original total Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.1. The Contract Times (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless ENGINEER allows additional time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) shall be determined by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph 12.1. 12.2. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. 12.3. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of CONTRACTOR, the Contract Times (or Milestones) will be extended in an amount equal to time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefor as provided in paragraph 12.1. Delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by OWNER, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and 26 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of CONTRACTOR. 12.4. Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall OWNER be liable to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts or neglect by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7. ARTICLE 13—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1. Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which OWNER or ENGINEER have actual knowledge will be given to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in this Article 13. Access to Work: 13.2. OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultants, other representatives and personnel of OWNER, independent testing laboratories and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Work at for their observation, inspecting and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of CONTRACTOR's site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. Tests and Inspections: 13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. 13.4. OWNER shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 13.4.1. for inspections, tests or approvals covered by paragraph 13.5 below; 13.4.2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to paragraph 13.9 below shall be paid as provided in said paragraph 13.9; and 13.4.3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 13.5. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates of inspection, or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for OWNER's and ENGINEER's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. 13.6. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested or approved is covered by CONTRACTOR without written concurrence of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation. 13.7. Uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.6 shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. Uncovering Work: 13.8. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER be uncovered for ENGINEER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense. 13.9. If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction, (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 27 uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. OWNER May Stop the Work: 13.10. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any surety or other party. Correction or Removal of Defective Work: 13.11. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.12. Correction Period: 13.12.1. If within ene year two vears after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written instructions: (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective, and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. 13.12.2.In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. 13.12.3. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph 13.12, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of ene year two years after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. Acceptance of Defective Work: 13.13. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, also ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. OWNER May Correct Defective Work: 13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice from ENGINEER to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 13.11, or if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may, after seven days' written notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend CONTRACTOR's services related thereto, take possession of CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER's representatives, agents and employees, OWNER's other contractors and ENGINEER and ENGINEER's Consultants access to the site to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by OWNER in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against CONTRACTOR and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. Such claims, costs, losses and EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 28 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of CONTRACTOR's defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times (or Milestones) because of any delay in performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder. ARTICLE 14—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Schedule of Values: 14.1. The schedule of values established as provided in paragraph 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. Application for Progress Payment: 14.2. At least twenty days before the date established for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and ,suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation warranting that OWNER has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect OWNER's interest therein, all of which will be satisfactory to OWNER. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. Any funds that are withheld by the OWNER shall not be subject to substitution by the CONTRACTOR with securities or any arrangements involving an escrow or custodianship By executing the application for payment form the CONTRACTOR expressly waives his right to the benefits of Colorado Revised Statutes, Section 24-91-101 et sea. CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title: 14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. Review of Applicationsfor Progress Payment: 14.4. ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER, or return the Application to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to OWNER with ENGINEER's recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of the last sentence of paragraph 14.7) become due and when due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. 14.5. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on ENGINEER's on -site observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional and on ENGINEER's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of ENGINEER's knowledge, information and belief: 14.5.1. the Work has progressed to the point indicated, 14.5.2. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph 9.10, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation), and 14.5.3. the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled insofar as it is ENGINEER's responsibility to observe the Work. However, by recommending any such payment ENGINEER will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: (i) exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections have been made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents or (ii) that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or entitle OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACTOR. 14.6. ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment, including final payment, shall not mean that ENGINEER is responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of Work, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to perform or furnish Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 14.7. ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to 29 OWNER referred to in paragraph 14.5. ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in ENGINEER's opinion to protect OWNER from loss because: 14.7.1. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, 14.7.2. the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Order, 14.7.3. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with paragraph 13.14, or 14.7.4. ENGINEER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.4 inclusive. OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER because: 14.7.5. claims have been made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR's performance or furnishing of the Work, 14.7.6. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where CONTRACTOR has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to OWNER to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, 14.7.7. there are other items entitling OWNER to a set- off against the amount recommended, or 14.7.8. OWNER has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 14.7.1 through 14.7.3 or paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.4 inclusive; but OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice (with a copy to ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay CONTRACTOR the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by OWNER and CONTRACTOR, when CONTRACTOR corrects to OWNER's satisfaction the reasons for such action. Substantial Completion: 14.8. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, ENGINEER will within fourteen days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of OWNER's objections, ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will within said fourteen days execute and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties and guarantees. Unless OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform ENGINEER in writing prior to ENGINEER's issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, ENGINEER's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment. 14.9. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. Partial Utilization: 14.10. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of any substantially completed part of the Work, which: (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose without significant interference with CONTRACTOR's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the following: 14.10.1.OWNER at any time may request CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER and ENGINEER that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 30 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 412000) CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraphs 14.8 and 14.9 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.10.2. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.15 in respect of property insurance. Final Inspection: 14.11. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, ENGINEER will make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such work or remedy such deficiencies. Final Application for Payment: 14.12. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by paragraph 5.4, certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.19) and other documents, CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by subparagraph 5.4.13, (ii) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full and affidavit of CONTRACTOR that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER' property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien. Releases or waivers of liens and the consent of the surety to finalize payment are to be submitted on forms conforming to the format of the OWNER'S standard forms bound in the Project manual Final Payment and Acceptance: 14.13. If, on the basis of ENGINEER's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and ENGINEER's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER's recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER for payment. At the same time ENGINEER will also give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.15. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Thirty days after presentation to OWNER of the Application and accompanying documentation, in appropriate form and substance and with ENGINEER's recommendation and notice of acceptability, the amount recommended by ENGINEER will become due and will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR subiect to paragraph 17.6 2 of these General Conditions. 14.14. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR's final Application for Payment and recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. Waiver of Claims. 14.15. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 14.15.1. a waiver of all claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 31 final inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.11, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 14.15.2. A waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. ARTICLE 15—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION OWNER May Suspend Work: 15.1. At any time and without cause, OWNER may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if CONTRACTOR makes an approved claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. OWNER May Terminate: 15.2. Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: 15.2.1. if CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.9 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to paragraph 6.6); 15.2.2. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of ENGINEER; or 15.2.4. if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety, if any) seven days' written notice and to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such case CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by OWNER arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by OWNER will be reviewed by ENGINEER as to their reasonableness and when so approved by ENGINEER incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. 15.3. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not release CONTRACTOR from liability. 15.4. Upon seven days' written notice to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid (without duplication of any items): 15.4.1. for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 15.4.2. for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 15.4.3. for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and 15.4.4. for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate: 15.5. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted or OWNER fails for thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any E.1CDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 32 w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, and provided OWNER or ENGINEER do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from OWNER payment on the same terms as provided in paragraph 15.4. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or OWNER has failed for thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, CONTRACTOR may upon seven days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph 15.5 are not intended to preclude CONTRACTOR from making claim under Articles I and 12 for an increase in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's stopping Work as permitted by this paragraph. ARTICLE 16—DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that OWNER and CONTRACTOR have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure, if any, shall be as set forth in Exhibit GC -A, "Dispute Resolution Agreement", to be attached hereto and made a part hereof. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, and subject to the provisions of paragraphs 9.10, 9.11 and 9.12, OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. ARTICLE 17—MISCELLANEOUS Giving Notice: 17.1. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm, or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.2. Computation of Time: 17.2.1. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) 17.2.2. A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight will constitute a day. Notice of Claim: 17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 17.3 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. Cumulative Remedies. 17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto, and, in particular but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations imposed upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs 6.12, 6.16, 6.30, 6.31, 6.32, 13.1, 13.12, 13.14, 14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights and remedies available to OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder, are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations by special warranty or guarantee or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. Professional Fees and Court Costs Included: 17.5. Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages", it shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs. 17.6. The laws of the State of Colorado apply to this Agreement. Reference to two pertinent Colorado statutes are as follows 17.6.2. If a claim is filed OWNER is required by law (CRS 38-26-107) to withhold from all payments to CONTRACTOR sufficient funds to insure the payment of all claims for labor, materials team hire sustenance, provisions, provender, or other supplies used or consumed by CONTRACTOR or his 33 SECTION 00530 NOTICE TO PROCEED Description of Work: GARDENS ON SPRING CREEK; BID NO. 5748 To: This notice is to advise you: That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received by the OWNER. That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents. Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby authorized and directed to proceed within ( ) calendar days from receipt of this notice as required by the Agreement. Dated this day of , 20 The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be and 20, respectively. City of Fort Collins OWNER By: Title: ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of 20 CONTRACTOR By: Title: 7/96 Section 00530 Page 1 EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-5 (1990 Edition) 34 H,/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) (This page left blank intentionally.) EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 35 w1 CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) 36 wl CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 4/2000) EXHIBIT GC -A to General Conditions of the Construction Contract Between OWNER and CONTRACTOR DISPUTE RESOLUTION AGREEMENT OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereby agree that Article 16 of the General Conditions of the Construction Contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR is amended to include the following agreement of the parties: 16.1. All claims, disputes and other matters in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof (except for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by paragraph 14.15) will be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining, subject to the limitations of the Article 16. This agreement so to arbitrate and any other agreement or consent to arbitrate entered into in accordance herewith as provided in this Article 16 will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. 16.2. No demand for arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter that is required to be referred to ENGINEER initially for decision in accordance with paragraph 9.11 will be made until the earlier of (a) the date on which ENGINEER has rendered a written decision or (b) the thirty-first day after the parties have presented their evidence to ENGINEER if a written decision has not been rendered by ENGINEER before that date. No demand for arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter will be made later than thirty days after the date on which ENGINEER has rendered a written decision in respect thereof in accordance with paragraph 9.11; and the failure to demand arbitration within said thirty days' period will result in ENGINEER's decision being final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If ENGINEER renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but will not supersede the arbitration proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties concerned. No demand for arbitration of any written decision of ENGINEER rendered in accordance with paragraph 9.10 will be made later than ten days after the party making such demand has delivered written notice of intention to appeal as provided in paragraph 9.10. 16.3. Notice of the demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy will be sent to ENGINEER for information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the thirty -day or ten-day period specified in paragraph 16.2 as applicable, and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute or other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute or other matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) w/CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/99) 16.4. Except as provided in paragraph 16.5 below, no arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner any other person or entity (including ENGINEER, ENGINEER's Consultant and the officers, directors, agents, employees or consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this contract unless: 16.4.1. the inclusion of such other person or entity is necessary if complete relief is to be afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration, and 16.4.2. such other person or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings, and 16.4.3. the written consent of the other person or entity sought to be included and of OWNER and CONTRACTOR has been obtained for such inclusion, which consent shall make specific reference to this paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent to arbitration of any dispute not specifically described in such consent or to arbitration with any party not specifically identified in such consent. 16.5. Notwithstanding paragraph 16.4, if a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the Work of a Subcontractor, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such Subcontractor as a party to the arbitration between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts required by paragraph 6.11 a specific provision whereby the Subcontractor consents to being joined in an arbitration between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the Work of such Subcontractor. Nothing in this paragraph 16.5 nor in the provision of such subcontract consenting to joinder shall create any claim, right or cause of action in favor of Subcontractor and against OWNER, ENGINEER or ENGINEER's Consultants that does not otherwise exist. 16.6. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal. 16.7. OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that they shall first submit any and all unsettled claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between them arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof ("disputes"), to mediation by the American Arbitration Association under the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association prior to either of them initiating against the other a demand for arbitration pursuant to paragraphs 16.1 through 16.6, unless delay in initiating arbitration would irrevocably prejudice one of the parties. The respective thirty and ten day time limits within which to file a demand for arbitration as provided in paragraphs 16.2 and 16.3 above shall be suspended with respect to a dispute submitted to mediation within those same applicable time limits and shall remain suspended until ten days after the termination of the mediation. The mediator of any dispute submitted to mediation under this Agreement shall not serve as arbitrator of such dispute unless otherwise agreed. GC -A I EJCDC GENERAL CONDITIONS 1910-8 (1990 Edition) GC -Al ^ w/ CITY OF FORT COLLINS MODIFICATIONS (REV 9/94) SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS No Text SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Conditions of the Contract These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of Fort Collins modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. SC-4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions: A. Add the following language to paragraph 4.2.1 of the General Conditions. 4.2.1.1.1 The following report(s) of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions at the site of the Work: - Soils report provided by Civil Engineer (EDAW Inc.) Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in the geotechnical documents, but not upon nontechnical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or upon the completeness of any information in the report. SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8. The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the General Conditions listed below are as follows: 5.4.1 and 5.4.2 Coverage A - Statutory Limits Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000 5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy will include coverage for Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverage unless waived by the Owner. 5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). 5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations coverage/product liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). C-8.10 OWNER's Project Manager A. Add the following language to ARTICLE 8: 8.10. The OWNER will provide a Project Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall direct all questions concerning Contract interpretation, Change Orders, and other requests for clarification or instruction to the Project Manager. 8.10.1 Authority: The Project Manager will be the OWNER's representative during the construction of the project. The Project Manager shall have the authority set forth in the OWNER's Capital Project Procedures Manual. The Project Manager shall have the authority to reject work and materials whenever such rejection may be necessary to ensure the proper performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10.2 Duties and Responsibilities: The Project Manager will make periodic visits to the project site to observe the progress and quality of the Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall not be required to make -' comprehensive or continuous inspections to check the progress or quality of the Work. The Project Manager shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety — precautions or programs in connection with the Work, or for any failure of the Contractor to comply with laws and regulation applicable to the performance or furnishing of the Work. Visits and observations made by — the Project Manager shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligation to conduct comprehensive inspections of the Work, to furnish materials and perform acceptable Work, and to provide adequate safety precautions in _ conformance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall at all times have access to the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities for such access so the Project Manager may perform his or her functions under the Contract Documents. 8.10.3 One or more Resident Construction Inspector(s) (RCI) may be assigned to assist the Project Manager in providing observation of the Work, to determine whether or not the Work is proceeding according to the construction documents. CONTRACTOR will receive written notification from the OWNER of any RCI assignments. The RCI shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or -. for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The RCI will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work — in accordance with the Contract Documents. The RCI's dealings in matters pertaining to the on -site work will be to keep the Project Manager properly apprised about such matters. 8.10.4 Communications: All instructions, approvals, and decisions of the Project Manager shall be in writing. The CONTRACTOR may not rely on instructions, approvals, or decisions of the Project Manager until the same are reduced to writing. SC-13.12 Correction Period: 0HIT A. Revise paragraph 13.12.1 to read as follows: 13.12.1 If within one Year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Lqws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, etc...